Mi 


lO  f^'  C:  7>ip cauf    ; .? '^^  Co >npay?.i/^ 


"T'^  -D 


h.ft'Wri'i. 


7V^    z/iviii/i't 


I 


RxaJih     T4^z.7t^ 


j     '  XFi^fd  Music 


a.   S  Ca    .^llasec'  -SV.y  ^  lit 


zz'J.  .innirzTxxirT: 


nmnuini 


:~!  TJ^T  ^   IT 


XT-la: 


/  -^  /•/. 


Lt3  Fu".sc  Lzrivf 

L_J  SecfritZ  Xzevii . 

I_!  Thvt'd  L\£ut 

S  Severed  S'e^-ji- 

B  Tfu;r'd  Se*:y^ 

a  Fvzif^tJL  Sen  ^ 

77,  FzftJv  Serj.^ 


R  1  F  L  E 

AND 

LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS: 

THE  EXERCISE  AND  MANCETJVRES 


K(M)l>f^    \\  HKN    ACTING  AS   LIGHT   INFANTRY   OK 
RIFLEMEN. 

I'Kfcl'AKED    INDER    THE    DIKECTIOX    OK 
THE    WAR    DEi'ARTMEXT, 


BREVET   LIEUT.-COL.  W.  J.  HARDEE, 

r.   S.  AKMI. 


AOL.  I. 


^SCHOOLb    OF    THE    SOLDIER    AND    COMPANY; 
INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


RICHMOND.  VA. 

.1.    W.    TJANDOLPH.    121    .MAIN    STKEET. 

1861. 


STEAM-POWER  PRESSES  OF  KVAN8  &   COaSWELL. 

BROAD   STREKT.   CHARLESTON.   .«.   C. 


M'"ak  Department, 

March  29,  1855. 
TiiK  Systom  of  Tactics  for  Light  Infantry  and 
Riflemen,  prepared  under  tlie  direction  of  the  War 
l)t]»artment  by  Brevet  Lieutenant-Colonel  William 
J.  Hardee,  of  the  Cavalry,  having  been  approved  by 
the  President,  is  adopted  for  the  instruction  of  the 
troops  when  acting  as  Light  Infantry  or  Riflemen, 
and,  under  the  Act  of  May  12,  1820,  for  the  ob- 
>;crvance  of  the  Militia  when  so  employed. 

JEFFERSON  DAVIS, 

Secretary  of  War. 


^1 


^'CJfLL   -i 


RIFLE  AND  LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE      FIRST. 


Article   First. 

Information  of  a  Regiment  in  order   of  battle,  or  in 
line. 

1.  A  REGiMEyr  is  composed  of  ten  comi)anics,  which 
will  habitually  be  posted  from  right  to  left,  in  the  follow- 
ing order  :  first,  sixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third,  eighth,  fifth, 
tenth,  seventh,  second,  according  to  the  rank  of  captains. 

2.  With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same  principle 
will  be  observed,  viz. :  the  first  captain  will  command  the 
right  company,  the  second  captain  the  left  company,  the 
third  captain  the  right  centre  company,  and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  designated  from 
right  to  left,  first  company,  second  company,  etc.  This 
designation  will  be  observed  in  the  manoeuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever  their 


XL 


.% 


t>  I  OIJMATION    OF    THE    BATTALION. 

(lenominatiou,  will  form  the  first  division  ;  tho  next  two 
companies  the  second  dirision  ;  and  so  on,  to  the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  he  divided  into  two  equal  parts, 
which  will  be  designated  as  the  first  and  second  platoon, 
counting  from  the  right;  and  each  platoon,  in  like  man- 
ner, will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections. 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regiment,  or 
part  of  a  regiment,  composed  of  two  or  more  companies, 
will  be  designated  as  a  battalion. 

7.  Th«  color,  with  a  guard  to  be  horeinnftor  designated, 
will  be  postc  ":  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  battalion 
company.  That  company,  and  all  on  its  right,  will  be 
denominated  the  ri(jJit  wine/  of  the  battalion  ;  the  remain- 
ing companies  the  left  wing. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks;  and 
each  company  will  be  formed  into  two  ranks,  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner :  the  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front 
rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left  of  platoons,  according  to 
height;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the  tallest  man  will  form 
the  first  file,  the  next  two  tallest  men  will  form  the  second 
file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file,  which  will  be  composed  of 
the  shortest  corporal  and  the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two,  in  the 
company,  from  right  to  left,  will  form  groups  of  four  men, 
who  will  be  designated  comrades  in  battle. 

10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will  bo  thir- 
teen inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of  the  rear  rank 
men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  front  rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  tho  companies  of  a  battalion  will 
always  bo  eciualized,  by  transferring  mou  from  the  strong- 
est to  the  weakest  companies. 


FORMATION   OF    THE   BATTALION. 


Posts  of  Company  Officers^  Sergeants  and  Corporals. 

12.  The  company  ofl&cers  and  sergeants  are  nine  in  num- 
ber, and  will  be  posted  in  the  following  manner  : 

13.  The  cajitain  on  the  right  of  the  company,  touching 
with  the  left  elbow. 

14.  The  first  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  touching  with 
the  left  elbow,  and  covering  the  captain.  In  the  manoeu- 
vres he  will  be  denominated  covering  sergeant,  or  right  guide 
of  the  company. 

15.  The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  posted 
as  file  closers,  and  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

16.  The  first  Zieu/exaH/,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  fourth 
section. 

17.  The  second  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  first 
platoon. 

18.  The  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  sec- 
ond platoon. 

19.  The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
left  of  the  company.  In  the  manoeuvres  he  will  be  desig- 
nated left  guide  of  the  company. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
right  of  the  second  platoon. 

21.  The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

22.  Tha  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
right  of  the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  battalion,  the 
second  sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  and  on 
the  left  of  the  battalion. 


8  FORMATION    OF    THE    IJATTALIOX. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  tbe  front  rank,  as 
prescribed  No.  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — offi- 
cers by  sergeants,  and  sergeants  by  corporals.  The  colo- 
nel may  detach  a  first  lieutenant  from  one  company  to 
command  another,  of  which  both  the  captain  and  first 
lieutenant  are  absent;  but  this  authority  will  give  no  right 
to  a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  so  detached. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant -colonel  and 
major,  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on  active  service 
shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adjutant,  when  the  battalion 
is  manoeuvring,  will  be  on  foot. 

27.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
file  closers,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  battalion.  This 
distance  will  be  reduced  whenever  there  is  a  reduction  in 
the  front  of  the  battalion. 

28.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  major  will  be  opposite 
the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings  respectively,  and 
twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  bo  opposite 
tbe  right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respectively,  and  eight 
paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel and  major,  respectively,  in  the  manoeuvres. 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, and  the  latter  by  the  major.  If  all  the  field 
officers  be  absent,  the  senior  captain  will  command  the 
battalion;    but  if  either  be  present,   he  will  not  call  the 


FORMATION    OF    THE    BATTALION.  9 

senior  captain  to  act  as  field  officer,  except  in  case  of  evi- 
dent necessity. 

32.  Tlie  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  staff  officers, 
in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and  three  paces  in 
his  rear. 

33.  The  quarter-master  sergeant  on  a  line  with  the  front 
rank  of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces  on  the  right. 


Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 

34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks,  and 
posted  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers,  the  left  op- 
posite the  centre  of  the  left  centre  company.  The  senior 
principal  musician  will  be  two  paces  in  front  of  the  field 
music,  and  the  other  two  paces  in  the  rear. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be  drawn 
up  in  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  its  numbers,  and 
posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  music,  having  one  of 
the  principal  musicians  at  its  head. 


Color-guard. 

36.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be  composed 
'•f  eight  corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right 
centre  companj^,  of  which  compan}^,  for  the  time  being,  the 
guard  will  make  a  part. 

37.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  sergeant,  to  be 
selected  by  the  colonel,  who  will  be  called,  for  the  time, 
rolor-bearer,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals,  respectively, 
on  his  right  and  left ;  the  rear  rank  will  be  composed  of 
ihe  three  corporals  next  in  rank ;  and  the  three  remaining 


10  FORMATION    OF    THK    IJATTALION. 

corporals  will  be  posted  in  their  rear,  and  on  the  line  of 
file  closers.  The  left  guide  of  the  color-company,  when 
these  three  last  named  corporals  are  in  the  rank  of  file- 
closers,  will  be  immediately  on  their  left. 

38.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies  present, 
there  will  be  no  color-guard,  and  no  display  of  colors,  ex- 
cept it  may  be  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  be  selected 
from  those  most  distinguished  for  regularity  and  precision, 
as  well  in  their  positions  under  arms  as  in  their  inarching. 
The  latter  advantage,  and  a  just  carriage  of  the  person, 
are  to  be  more  particularly  sought  for  in  the  selection  of 
the  color-bearer. 

General  Guides. 

40.  There  will  be  two  general  guides  in  each  battalion, 
selected,  for  the  time,  by  the  colonel,  from  among  the  ser- 
geants (other  than  first  sergeants)  the  most  distinguished 
for  carriage  under  arms  and  accuracy  in  marching. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denominated,  in 
the  manoeuvres,  right  general  guide  and  left  general  guide, 
and  be  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers;  the  first  in  rear  of 
the  right  and  the  second  in, rear  of  the  left  flank  of  the 
battalion. 


INSTRUCTION    OF    THE    BATTALION.  11 


Article  Second. 

histruction  of  the  Battalion. 

42.  Every  commanding  officer  is  responsible  for  the  in- 
struction of  bis  command.  He  will  assemble  the  officers 
together  for  theoretical  and  practical  instruction  as  often 
as  ho  maj-  judge  necessary:  and  when  unable  to  attehd  lo 
this  duty  in  i)erson,  it  will  be  discharged  by  the  officer 
next  in  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  theoretical 
and  practical  instruction  of  their  non-commissioned  officers, 
and  the  adjutant  for  the  instruction  of  the  non-commis- 
sioned staff.  To  this  end  they  will  require  these  tactics  to 
be  studied  and  recited  lesson  by  lesson  ;  and  when  instruc- 
tion is  given  on  the  ground,  each  non-commissioned  officer, 
as  he  explains  a  movement,  should  be  required  to  put  it 
into  practical  operation. 

44.  The  non-commissioned  officers  should  also  be  prac- 
tised in  giving  commands.  Each  command,  in  a  lesson,  at 
the  theoretical  instruction,  Shovild  first  be  given  by  the  in- 
structor, and  then  repeated,  in  sviccession,  by  the  non-com- 
missioned officers,  so  that  while  thej'^  become  habituated  to 
the  commands,  uniformity  may  be  established  in  the  man- 
ner of  giving  them. 

45.  In  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company  officers 
will  be  the  instructors  of  the  squads ;  but  if  there  be  not  a 
sufficient  number  of  company  officers  present,  intelligent 
sergeants  may  be  substituted;  and  two  or  three  squads, 


12  INSTRUCTION    OF    THE    BATTALION. 

under  sergeant  instructors,  be  superintended  at  the  same 
time  by  an  officer. 

46.  In 'the  school  of  the  company,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
and  the  major,  under  the  colonel,  will  be  the  principal  in- 
structors, substituting  frequently  the  captain  of  the  com- 
pany, and  sometimes  one  of  the  lieutenants :  the  substitute, 
as  far  as  practicable,  being  superintended  by  one  of  the 
principals. 

47.  In  the  school  of  the  battalion,  the  brigadier-general 
may  constitute  himself  the  principal  instructor,  freiiucntly 
substituting  the  colonel  of  the  battalion,  sometimes  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel or  major,  and  twice  or  thrice,  in  the  same 
course  of  instruction,  each  of  the  three  senior  captains.  In 
this  school,  also,  the  substitute  will  always,  if  j)racticable, 
be  superintended  by  the  brigadier-general  or  tlie  colonel, 
or  (in  case  of  a  captain  being  the  instructor)  l)y  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel or  major. 

48.  Individual  instruction  being  the  basis  of  the  instruc- 
tion of  companies,  on  which  that  of  the  regiment  depends, 
and  the  first  principles  having  the  greatest  influence  upon 
this  individual  instruction,  classes  of  recruits  should  bo 
watched  with  the  greatest  care. 

49.  Instructors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and  precise 
words,  the  movement  to  be  executed ;  and  not  to  over- 
burden the  memory  of  the  men,  they  will  always  use  the 
same  terms  to  explain  the  same  principles. 

5U.  They  should  often  join  example  to  precept,  should 
keep  up  the  attention  of  the  men  by  an  animated  tone,  and 
pass  rapidly  from  one  movement  to  another,  as  soon  as 
that  which  they  command  has  been  executed  in  a  satisfac- 
tory manner. 


INSTRUCTION    OF    THE    BATTALION.  13 

51.  The  sabre  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed  when 
required  to  be  used,  either  for  attack  or  defence;  the 
exercises  and  manoeuvres  will  be  executed  without  the 
bayonet. 

52.  In  the  movements  which  require  the  bayonet  to  be 
fixed,  the  chief  of  the  battalion  will  cause  the  signal  to  fix 
bayonet,  to  be  sounded;  at  this  signal  the  men  will  fix 
bayonets  without  command,  and  immediately  replace  their 
pieces  in  the  position  they  were  before  the  signal. 

Instruction  of  Officers. 

53.  The  instruction  of  oflSeers  can  be  perfected  only  by 
joining  theory  to  practice.  The  colonel  will  often  practise 
them  in  marching,  and  in  estimating  distances,  and  he 
will  carefullj'  endeavor  to  cause  them  to  take  steps  equal 
in  length  and  swiftness.  They  will  also  be  exercised  in 
the  double  quick  step. 

54.  The  instruction  of  officers  will  include  all  the  Titles 
in  this  system  of  drill,  and  such  regulations  as  prescribe 
their  duties  in  peace  and  war. 

55.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly  acquainted 
with  the  bugle  signals:  and  should,  by  practice,  be  enabled, 
if  necessary,  to  sound  them.  This  knowledge,  so  neces- 
sary in  general  instruction,  becomes  of  vital  importance 
on  actual  service  in  the  field. 


Instruction  of  Sergeants. 

56.  As  the  discipline  and  efficiencj'  of  a  company  mate- 
rially depend   on   the   conduct    and   character  of  its   ser- 


14  INSTUUCTION    OF    THE    BATTALION. 

gcants,  they   should   be   selected  with  care,  and  properly 
instructed  in  all  the  duties  appertaining  to  their  rank. 

57.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Company,  and  the 
Drill  for  Skirmishers.  They  should  likewise  know  all  the 
details  of  service,  and  the  regulations  prescribing  their 
duties  in  garrison  and  campaign. 

58.  The  captain  selects  from  the  corporals  in  his  com- 
pany those  whom  he  judges  fit  to  be  admitted  to  the  theo- 
retical instruction  of  the  sergeants. 

Instruction  of  Corporals. 

59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  and  such  regulations  as  prescribe 
their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

60.  The  captain  selects  from  his  company  a  few  privates, 
who  may  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  instruction  of  the 
corporals. 

61.  As  the  instruction  of  sergeants  and  corporals  is 
intended  principally  to  qualify  them  for  the  instruction  of 
the  privates,  they  should  be  taught  not  only  to  execute, 
but  to  explain  intelligibly  everything  they  may  be  re- 
quired to  teach. 

Commands. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

62.  The  command  of  caittioii,  which  is  attention. 

63.  The  prrpdvntonj  command,  which  indicates  the  move- 
ment which  is  to  be  executed. 

64.  The  command  of  execntlon,  such  as  march  or  halt,  or, 


INSTRUCTION    OF    THE    BATTALION.  15 

in  the  manual  of  arms,  tlie  part  of  command  which  causes 
an  execution. 

65.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  distinct, 
and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  of  men 
under  instruction. 

66.  The  command  attention,  is  pronounced  at  the  top  of 
the  voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 

67.  The  command  of  execution  will  be  pronounced  in  a 
tone  firm  and  brief. 

68.  The  commands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory  com- 
mands are  herein  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of  execu- 
tion by  CAPITALS. 

69.  Those  preparatory  commands  which,  from  their 
length,  are  diflBcult  to  be  pronounced  at  once,  must  be 
divided  into  two  or  three  parts,  with  an  ascending  progres- 
sion in  the  tone  of  command,  but  always  in  such  a  manner 
that  the  tone  of  execution  may  be  more  energetic  and  ele- 
vated; the  divisions  are  indicated  by  a  hyphen.  The  parts 
of  commands  which  are  placed  in  a  parenthesis,  are  not 
pronounced. 


TITLE    SECOND 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER. 

General   Rules   and   division   of  the    School   of  the 
Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  indivitlual  and 
progressive  instruction  of  the  recruits,  the  instructor  never 
requires  a  movement  to  be  executed  until  he  has  given  an 
exact  explanation  of  it ;  and  he  executes,  himself,  the 
movement  which  he  commands,  so  as  to  join  example  to 
precept,  lie  accustoms  the  recruit  to  take,  by  himself,  the 
position  which  is  explained — teaches  him  to  rectify  it  only 
when  required  by  his  want  of  intelligence — and  sees  that 
all  the  movements  are  performed  without  precij^itation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before  passing 
to  another.  After  they  have  been  properly  executed  in  the 
order  laid  down  in  each  lesson,  the  instructor  no  longer 
confines  himself  to  that  order  j  on  the  contrary,  he  should 
change  it,  that  ho  may  judge  of  the  intelligence  of  the 
men. 

72.  The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the  end  of 
each  part  of  the  lessons,  and  oftener,  if  he  thinks  proper, 
especially  at  the  commencement;  for  this  purpose  he  com- 
mands Rkst. 

73.  At  the  command  Rkst,  the  soldier  is  no  longer  re- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.      17 

quired  to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  his  place. 
If  the  instructor  wishes  merely  to  relieve  the  attention  of 
the  recruit,  he  commands,  in  place — Rest;  the  soldier  is 
then  not  required  to  preserve  his  immobility,  but  he 
always  keeps  one  of  his  feet  in  its  place. 

74.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the  instruc- 
tion, he  commands — Attention  ;  at  this  command  the 
soldier  takes  his  position,  remains  motionless,  and  fixes 
his  attention. 

75.  The  School  of  (he  Soldier  will  be  divided  into  three 
parts :  the  first,  comprehending  what  ought  to  be  taught 
to  recruits  without  arms ;  the  second,  the  manual  of  arms, 
the  loadings  and  firings;  the  third,  the  principles  of  align- 
ment, the  march  by  the  front,  the  different  steps,  the  march 
by  the  flank,  the  principles  of  wheeling,  and  those  of 
change  of  direction  ,•  also,  long  marches  in  double  quick 
time  and  the  run. 

76.  Each  part  will  be  divided  into  lessons,  as  follows  : 

PART    FIRST. 

Lesson  1.  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms  :  Eyes 
right,  left  and  front. 

Lesson  2.  Facings. 

Lesson  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common  and 
quick  time. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  double  quick 
time  and  the  run. 

PART     SECOND. 

Lesson  1.  Principles  of  shouldei'cd  arms. 
Lesson  2.  Manual  of  arms. 


18  SCHOOL    OF    THE   SOLDIER — PART    I. 

Lesson  3.  To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will. 
Lesson  4.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file,  and  by  rank. 
Lesson  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 
Lesson  6.  Bayonet  exercise. 

PART    THIRD. 

Lesson  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for  instruction 
in  the  principles  of  alignment. 

Lesson  2.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  march  and  the 
different  steps. 

Lesson  3.  The  march  by  the  flank. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  wheeling  and  change  of  direc- 
tion. 

Lesson  5.  Long  marches  in  double  quick  time,  and  the 
run,  with  arms  and  knapsacks. 


PART  FIRST. 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one  recruit  at 
a  time;  but  three  or  four  may  be  united,  when  the  number 
be  great,  compared  with  that  of  the  instructors.  In  this 
case,  the  recruits  will  be  placed  in  a  single  rank,  at  one 
pace  froTU  each  other.  In  this  part,  the  recruits  will  be 
without  arms. 

Lesson  I. 

Position  of  the  Soldier. 

78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  will  permit; 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.      19 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  each  other 
something  less  than  a  right  angle  ; 

The  knees  sti-aight  without  stiffness; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hijDs,  inclining  a  little  forward ; 

The  shoulders  square,  and  falling  equally ; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally ; 

The  elbows  near  the  body: 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front,  the 
little  finger  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons  : 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without  con- 
straint; 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it ; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  and  striking  the 
ground  about  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 


Remarks  on  the  position  of  the  Soldier'. 

Herts  on  the.  same  line  ; 

79.  Because,  if  one  were  in  rear  of  the  other,  the  shoul- 
der on  that  side  would  be  thrown  back,  or  the  position  of 
the  soldier  would  be  constrained. 

Heelu  more  or  less  closed  ; 

t 
Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  have  legs 

with  large  calves,  cannot,  without  constraint,  make  their 

heels  touch  while  standing. 


20      SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PAUT  I. 

The  feet  equfdli/  tUDicd  out,  (otd  not  formiiuj  too  large  an 
aufjle  ; 

Because,  if  oue  foot  were  turned  out  move  than  the 
other,  a  shoulder  would  be  derangeil,  and  if  both  feet  be 
too  much  turned  out,  it  would  not  be  practicable  to  incline 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  without  rendering  the 
whole  position  unsteady. 

Knees  extoidcd  ultJiout  atijf'tiesH  ; 

Because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue  would  be 
unavoidable. 

The  body  trert  on  the  hipn  ; 

Because,  it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The  in- 
structor will  observe  that  many  recruits  have  the  bad 
habit  oF  dropping  a  shoulder,  of  drawing  in  a  side,  or  of 
advancing  a  hip,  particularly  the  right  when  under  arms. 
These  are  defects  he  will  lal)or  to  correct. 

The  upper  part  of  the   bodij  inclinintj  forward  ; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposed  to  do  the 
reverse,  to  project  the  belly  and  to  throw  back  the  shoul- 
ders, when  they  wish  to  hold  themselves  erect,  from  which 
result  great  inconveniences  in  marching.  The  habit  of 
inclining  forward  the  upper  part  of  the  body  is  so  impor- 
tant to  contract,  that  the  instructor  must  enforce  it  at  the 
beginning,  particularly^  with  recruits  who  have  naturally 
the  opposite  habit. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    I.  21 

Shoulders  square ; 

Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the  line 
of  the  breast,  and  the  back  arched  (the  defect  called 
round-shouldered,  not  uncommon  among  recruits)  the  man 
cannot  align  himself,  nor  use  his  piece  with  address.  It  is 
important,  then,  to  correct  this  defect,  and  necessary  to ' 
that  end  that  the  coat  should  set  easy  about  the  shoulders 
and  arm-pits;  but  in  correcting  this  defect,  the  instructor 
will  take  care  that  the  shoulders  be  not  thrown  too  much 
to  the  rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to  project,  and 
the  small  of  the  back  to  be  curved. 

The  arms  hanging  naturally,  elhou-s  near  the  hody,  the  ]ialm 
of  the  hand  a  little  turned  to  the  front,  the  little  finger 
behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons  ; 

Because,  these  positions  are  equally  important  to  the 
■shoulder-arms,  and  to  prevent  the  man  from  occupying 
more  space  in  a  rank  than  is  necessary  to  a  free  use  of  the 
piece;  they  have,  moreover,  the  advantage  of  keeping  in 
the  shoulders. 

The  face  straight  to  the  front,  and  without  constraint  ; 

Because,  if  there  be  stiffness  in  the  latter  position,  it 
would  communicate  itself  to  the  whole  of  the  upper  part 
of  the  bodj',  embarrass  its  movements,  and  give  pain  and 
fatigue. 

Eyes  direct  to  the  front ; 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  means  of  maintaining  the 
shoulders  in  line — an  essential  object,  to  be  insisted  on 
and  attained. 


22  .SCHOOL    OK    THE    SOLDIER — PART    I. 

80.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  tiic  position 
of  the  soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach  him  the  turn- 
ing of  the  head  and  eyes.     He  will  command  : 

1.  Eyes — Right.     2.  Front. 

81.  At  the  word  right,  the  recruit  will  turn  the  bead 
gently,  so  as  to  bring  the  inner  corner  of  the  left  eye  in 
a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the 
line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be  in.  the 
same  rank. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  resume  the 
direct  or  habitual  position. 

83.  The  movement  of  Ei/es — Lktt  will  be  executed  by 
inverse  means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that  the 
movement  of  the  head  does  not  derange  the  sq.uareness  of 
the  shoulders,  which  will  happen  if  the  movement  of  the 
former  be  too  sudden. 

85.  When  the  instructor  shall  Avish  the  recruit  to  pass 
from  the  state  of  attention  to  that  of  earic,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Rest. 

86.  To  cause  a  resumption  of  the  habitual  position,  the 
instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

87.  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  will  iix  his  attention  ; 
at  the  second,  he  will  resume  the  prescribed  position  and 
steadiness. 


f^OHOOr.    OF    THE    SOLDIER PAUT    I.  23 


Lks8o.\  ir. 

yuciilf/fi. 

SS.  Faciug  tu  the  right  and  leit  will  Ijc  executed  in  one 
i''>iu\  or  pause.     The  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Squad.     2.  Right  (ov  left)— Face. 

89.  At  the  second  coniniaud.  raise  the  right  foot  slightly,, 
turn  on  the  left  heel,  raising  the  toes  a  little,  and  then  re- 
place the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  on  the 
f<ame  line. 

00.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front)  will  be  executed 
in  two  tivies,  or  pauses.     The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  About — Face. 

91.  (First  time.)  At  the  word  about,  the  recruit  will 
turn  on  the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front,  carry 
the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  opposite  to,  and  full 
three  inches*  from,  the  left  heel,  the  feet  square  to  each 
other. 

92.  [Second  time.)  At  the  word  fact,  the  recruit  will 
turn  on  both  heels,  raise  the  toes  a  little,  extend  the  ham^. 
face  to  the  rear,  bringing,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  heel 
by  the  side  of  the  left. 

93.  The  insti'uctor  will  take  care  that  these  motions  do 
not  derange  the  position  of  the  body. 


'24  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIKR PART  I. 

Lesson  III. 
Principles  of  ike  Direct  Step. 

94.  The  length  of  the  direct  step,  or  pace,  in  common 
time,  will  be  twenty  eight  inches,  reckoning  from  heel  to 
heel,  and  in  swiftness,  at  the  rate  of  ninety  in  a  minute. 

95.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed  in  his 
position,  will  explain  to  him  the  principle  and  mechanism 
of  this  step — placing  himself  six  or  seven  paces  from,  and 
facing  to,  the  recruit.  He  will  himself  execute  slowly  the 
step  in  the  -nay  of  illustration,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forvmrd.      2.   Common  time.     .').  March. 

96.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the 
weight  of  the  body  on  the  rio-ht  leg,  without  bending  the 
left  knee, 

97.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but  without 
a  jerk,  carry  straight  forward  the  left  foot  twenty-eight 
inches  from  the  right,  the  sole  near  the  ground,  the  ham 
extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed,  and,  also  the  knee, 
slightly  turned  out;  he  will,  at  the  same  time,  throw  the 
body  forward,  and  plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock, 
precisely  at  the  distance  where  it  finds  itself  from  the 
right  when  the  weight  of  the  body  is  brought  forward, 
the  whole  of  which  will  now  rest  on  the  advanced  foot. 
The  recruit  will  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right 
foot  and  plant  it  as  above,  the  heel  twenty-eight  inches 
from  the  lieel  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to  march 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — TAUT    I.  25 

without  crossing  the  legs,  or  striking  the  one  against  the 
other,  without  turning  the  shoulders,  and  preserving  al- 
ways the  face  direct  to  the  front. 

98.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  march, 
he  will  command: 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

99.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  when  either  foot  la  coming  to  the  ground,  the  foot 
in  the  rear  will  be  brought  up,  and  planted  by  the  side  of 
the  other,  without  shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  indicate,  from  time  to  time,  to 
the  recruit,  the  cadence  of  the  step  by  giving  the  com- 
mand one  at  the  instant  of  raising  a  foot,  and  two  at  the 
instant  it  ought  to  be  planted,  observing  the  cadence  of 
ninety  steps  in  a  minute.  This  method  will  contribute 
greatly  to  impress  upon  the  mind  the  two  motions  into 
which  the  step  is  naturally  divided. 

101.  Common  time  will  be  employed  only  in  the  first 
and  second  parts  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier.  As  soon  as 
the  recruit  has  acquired  steadiness,  has  become  established 
in  the  principles  of  shouldered  arms,  and  in  the  mechan- 
ism, length  and  swiftness  of  the  step  in  common  time,  he 
will  be  practised  only  in  quick  time,  the  double  quick 
time,  and  the  run. 

102.  The  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are  the 
same  as  for  common  time,  but  its  swiftness  is  at  the  rate  of 
one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per  minute. 

2 


2G  SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIKR — PAHT    I. 

103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in  quick 
time,  will  command : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  March. 


Lesson  IV. 

Principles  of  the  Double  Quick  Step. 

104.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  steji  is  thirty-three, 
inches  and  its  swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and 
sixty-five  steps  per  minute. 

105.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  recruits  the 
principles  and  mechanism  of  the  double  quick  step,  will 
command : 

1.  Double  quick  step.     2.  March. 

106.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  raise  his 
hands  to  a  level  with  his  hips,  the  hands  closed,  the  nails 
toward  the  body,  the  elbows  to  the  rear. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the  front, 
his  left  leg  bent,  in  order  to  give  to  the  knee  the  greatest 
elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  between  the  knee  and  the 
instep  vertical,  the  toe  depressed;  ho  will  then  replace  his 
foot  in  his  former  position;  with  the  right  leg  he  will 
execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left,  and  the 
alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  bo  continued  until  the 
command : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    I.  27 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will  bring  the 
foot  which  is  raised  by  the  side  of  the  other,  and  dropping 
at  the  same  time  his  hands  by  his  side,  will  resume  the 
l)Osition  of  the  soldier  without  arms. 

109.  The  instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight  paces 
from,  and  facing  the  recruit,  will  indicate  the  cadence  by 
the  commands,  one  and  two,  given  alternately  at  the  instant 
each  foot  should  be  brought  to  the  ground,  which  at  first 
will  be  in  common  time,  but  its  rapidity  will  be  gradually 
augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  in  the 
principles  of  this  step,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Squad,  forward.      2.  Double  quick.      3.  March. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the 
weight  of  his  body  on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  place  his  arms  as 
indicated  No.  106. 

113.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  carry  forward  the 
left  foot,  the  leg  slightly  bent,  the  knee  somewhat  raised — 
will  plant  his  left  foot,  the  toe  first,  thirty-three  inches 
from  the  right,  and  with  the  right  foot  will  then  execute 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left.  This  alternate 
movement  of  the  legs  will  take  place  by  throwing  the 
weight  of  the  body  on  the  foot  that  is  planted,  and  by 
allowing  a  natural,  oscillatory  motion  to  the  arms. 

114.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with  differ- 


28         SCHOOL  OF  the  soldikr — part  ir. 

ent  degrees  of  swiftness.  Under  urgent  circumstances  the 
cadence  of  this  step  may  be  increased  to  one  hundred  and 
eighty  per  minute.  At  this  rate  a  distance  of  four  thou- 
sand yards  would  be  passed  over  in  about  twcnty-tivc 
minutes. 

115.  The  recruits  will  be  exercised  also  in  running. 

116.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double  quick 
step,  the  only  difiference  consisting  in  a  greater  degree  of 
swiftness. 

117.  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double  quick 
time,  or  the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe  as  much  as 
possible  through  the  nose,  keeping  the  mouth  closed. 
Experience  has  proved  that,  by  conforming  to  this  princi- 
ple, a  man  can  pass  over  a  much  longer  di!<tance,  and  with 
less  fatigue. 


PART    SECOND. 


GENEUAL    HULES. 


118.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this  second 
part  until  they  shall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of 
the  body,  and  in  the  manner  of  marching  at  the  diflforent 
steps. 

119.  lie  will  thou  unite  four  men,  whom  he  avI'.  place  in 
the  same  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  instruct  them  in  the 
position  of  shouldei'ed  arms,  as  follows : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — rART  II.     29 

Lesson  I. 

Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

120.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  in  the  first 
lesson  of  the  first  part,  the  instructor  will  cause  him  to 
bend  the  right  arm  slightly,  and  to  place  the  piece  in  it  in 
the  following  manner: 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand — the  barrel  nearly 
vertical  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder — the 
guard  to  the  front,  the  arm  hanging  nearly  at  its  full 
length  near  the  body ;  the  thumb  and  forefinger  embrac- 
ing the  guard,  the  remaining  fingers  closed  together,  and 
grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock  just  under  the  cock,  which 
rests  on  the  little  finger. 

122.  Recruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural  defects  in 
the  conformation  of  the  shoulders,  breast  and  hips.  These 
the  instructor  will  labor  to  correct  in  the  lessons  without 
arms,  and  afterwards  by  steady  endeavors,  so  that  the 
appearance  of  the  pieces  in  the  same  line  may  be  uniform, 
and  this  without  constraint  to  the  men  in  their  positions. 

123.  The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  remark  that 
recruits,  on  first  bearing  arms,  are  liable  to  derange  their 
position  by  lowering  the  right  shoulder  and  the  right  hand, 
or  by  sinking  the  hip  and  spreading  out  the  elbows. 

124.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults  by 
continually  rectifying  the  position;  he  will  sometimes  take 
away  the  piece  to  replace  it  the  better:  he  will  avoid 
fatiguing  the  recruits  too  much  in  the  beginning,  but  labor 


30  SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIKU — PART    11. 

by  degrees  to  render  this  position  so  natural  and  easy  that 
they  may  remain  in  it  a  long  time  without  fatigue. 

125.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  great  care  that  the 
piece,  at  a  shoulder,  be  not  carried  too  high  nor  too  low: 
if  too  high,  the  right  elbow  would  spread  out,  the  soldier 
would  occupy  too  much  space  in  his  rank,  and  the  piece 
be  made  to  waver  j  if  too  low,  the  files  would  bo  too  much 
closed,  the  soldier  would  not  have  the  necessary  space  to 
handle  his  piece  with  facility,  the  right  arm  would  become 
too  much  fatigued,  and  would  draw  down  the  shoulder. 

126.  The  instructor,  before  passing  to  the  second  lesson, 
will  cause  to  be  repeated  the  movements  of  '■_*/*■«  right,  left 
and  front,  and  the  facinfjs. 


Lesson  II. 

Manual  of  Arms. 

127.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  four  men, 
placed,  at  first,  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  afterwards 
in  two  ranks. 

128.  Each  command  will  bo  executed  in  one  time  (or 
pause),  but  this  time  will  be  divided  into  motions,  the  bet- 
ter to  make  known  the  mechanism. 

129.  The  rate  or  (swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in  the 
manual  of  arms,  with  the  exceptions  herein  indicated,  is 
fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute;  but,  in  order  not 
to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  instructor  will,  at  first,  look 
more  particularly  to  the  execution  of  the  motions,  without 
requiring  a  nice  observance  of  the  cadence,  to  which  he 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.      31 

will  bring  the  recruits  progressively,  and  after  they  shall 
have  become  a  little  familiarized  with  the  handling  of  the 
piece. 

loO.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to  the 
rammer,  and  to  the  fixing  and  unfixing  of  the  bayonet, 
cannot  be  executed  at  the  rate  prescribed,  nor  even  with  a 
uniform  swiftness,  they  will  not  be  subjected  to  that  ca- 
dence. The  instructor  will,  however,  labor  to  cause  these 
motions  to  be  executed  with  promptness  :  and,  above  all, 
with  regularity. 

131.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  Tvill  decide  the 
brisk  execution  of  the  first  motion  of  each  time  (or  pause). 
The  commands  tico,  three  and  four,  will  decide  the  brisk 
execution  of  the  other  motions.  As  soon  as  the  recruits 
shall  well  comprehend  the  positions  of  the  several  motions 
of  a  time,  they  will  be  taught  to  execute  the  time  without 
resting  on  its  different  motions  :  the  mechanism  of  the 
time  will,  nevertheless,  be  observed,  as  well  to  give  a  per- 
fect use  of  the  piece,  as  to  avoid  tiie  sinking  of,  or  slurring 
over,  either  of  the  motions. 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  following 
progression;  The  instructor  will  command: 

Support — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

133.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece,  with  the  right 
hand,  perpendicularly  to  the  front  and  between  the  eyes, 
the  barrel  to  the  rear;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at 


32    SCHOOL  OF  the  soldier — pakt  ii. 

the  lower  band,  raise  this  hand  as  high  as  the  chin,  and 
seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  four 
inches  below  the  cock. 

134.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front  j  carr}'  the  piece  to  the  left 
shoulder,  and  pass  the  forearm  extended  on  the  breast 
between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock;  support  the  cock 
against  the  left  forearm,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the  right 
breast. 

135.  {Third  motion.)     Drop  the  right  hand  bjMhe  side. 

136.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in 
this  position,  he  will  command : 

Rest. 

137.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring  up  smartly 
the  right  hand  to  the  handle  of  the  piece  (small  of  the 
stock),  when  they  will  not  be  required  to  preserve  silence 
or  steadiness  of  position. 

138.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to  pass 
from  this  ])osition  to  that  of  silence  and  steailiness,  be  will 
command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

139.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the 
position  of  the  third  motion  of  support  arms. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    II.  33 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

140.  {First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  under  and  against  the  left  forearm  ;  seize  it  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  extended;  de- 
tach the  piece  slightly  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  forearm 
along  the  stock. 

141.  {Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  vertically  to  the 
right  shoulder  with  both  hands,  the  rammer  to  the  front, 
change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the 
guard  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  slip  the  left  hand  to 
the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  join- 
ed, the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

142.  {Third  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the 
side. 

Present — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

143.  {First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring  the 
piece  erect  before  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  rammer  to 
the  front ;  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  half-way  between  the  guide  sight  and  lower  band, 
the  thumb  extended  along  the  barrel  and  against  the 
stock,  the  forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the 
body,  the  hand  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

144.  {Second  motion.)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with 
the  right  hand  below  and  against  the  guard. 


34     SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

145.  {First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  should- 
er, at  the  same  time  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand 
so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger, 
slip  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

146.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the 
side. 

Order — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

147.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left 
hand  near  the  upper  band,  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the 
shoulder  with  the  right  hand:  loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right 
hand,  lower  the  piece  with  the  left,  reseize  the  piece  with 
the  right  hand  above  the  lower  band,  the  little  finger  in 
rear  of  the  barrel,  the  butt  about  four  inches  from  the 
ground,  the  right  hand  supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the 
left  hand  by  the  side. 

148.  {Second  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the 
right  hand  to  the  ground  by  opening  slightly  the  fingers, 
and  take  the  position  about  to  be  described. 

Position  of  order  arms. 

149.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  extended  along  the   stock  j    the   other   fingers 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    II.  35 

extended  and  jftined;  the  muzzle  about  two  inches  from 
the  right  shoulder;  the  rammer  in  front ;  the  toe  (or  beak) 
of  the  butt,  against,  and  in  a  line  with,  the  toe  of  the  right 
foot,  the  barrel  perpendicular. 

150.  "When  tlie  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in 
this  position,  he  will  command  : 

Kest. 

151.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be  required 
to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness. 

152.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to  jjass 
from  this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

153.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the 
position  of  order  arms. 

SJioulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

154.  {First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  vertically  with  the 
right  hand  to  the  height  of  the  right  breast,  and  opposite 
the  shoulder,  the  elbow  close  to  the  body;  seize  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  below  the  right,  and  drop  quickly  the 
right  hand  to  grasp  the  piece  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  embracing  the  guard;  press  the 
piece  against  the  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  right 
arm  nearly  straight. 


36  SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PAUT    IL 

155.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  tlit- 
Pi<le. 

Load  in  nine  times. 

1.  Load.* 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

156.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  loft  hand  as  high  as  the 
right  elbow,  and  bring  it  vertically  opposite  the  middle  of 
the  body,  shift  the  right  hand  to  the  upper  band,  place  the 
butt  between  the  feet,  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  seize  it  with 
the  left  hand  near  the  muzzle,  which  should  be  three 
inches  from  the  body;  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  car- 
tridge box. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

157.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  n»xt  two 
fingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

158.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cartridge 
upright  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers,  near  the 
top  J  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of  and  near  the  muz- 
zle— the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 


*  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  executed,  the  in- 
etructor  will  cause  the  cartridge  boxes  to  be  brought  to  the  front. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER PART    IL  37 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

159.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel :  disengage  the 
ball  from  the  paper  with  the  right  hand  and  the  thumb 
and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left;  insert  it  into  the  bore, 
the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press  it  down  with  the 
right  thumb ;  seize  the  head  of  the  rammer  Avith  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  the  other  finger.*^ 
closed,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

5.  Draio — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

160.  {First  motion.)  Half  draw  the  rammer  by  extend- 
ing the  right  arm  ;  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left 
thumb ;  grasp  the  rammer  near  the  muzzle  with  the  right 
hand,  the  little  finger  uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front, 
the  thumb  extended  along  the  rammer. 

161.  {Second  motion.)  Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipe? 
by  again  extending  the  arm ;  the  rammer  in  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  pipes. 

162.  {Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  little  end  of 
the  rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder;  place  the  head 
of  the  rammer  on  the  ball,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
front. 

6.  Ram — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and  steady 
3 


,'i8  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    SOLDIER — PART    II. 

it  in  this  position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand ;  seizo 
the  rammer  at  the  small  end  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
front;  press  the  ball  homo,  the  elbows  near  the  bod}-. 

7.  Return — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

164.  (First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  half  way  out. 
and  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb;  grasp 
it  near  the  muzzle  with  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger 
uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  thumb  along  the 
rammer ;  clear  the  rammer  from  the  bore  by  extending 
the  arm,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  rauiiuor  in  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  bore. 

165.  (Second  inotion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  head  of  the 
rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  and  insert  it  in  the 
pipes  until  the  right  hand  reaches  the  muzzle,  the  nails  to 
the  front. 

166.  (Third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer  home  by  plac- 
ing the  little  finger  of  the  right  baud  on  the  head  of  the 
rammer;  pass  the  loft  hand  down  the  barrel  to  the  extent 
(tf  the  arm,  without  dcprcs-siiig  the  shoulder. 

8.  Prime.* 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

167.  (Firnt  motion.)  "With  the  left  hand  raise  the  piece 

*lf  Maynard's  primer  be  used,  the  command  will  be,  load  in 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  11.     ;!1» 

r 

till  the  hand  is  as  high  as  the  eye,  grasp  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand;  half  face  to  the  right;  place, 
at  the  same  time,  the  right  foot  behind  and  at  right  angles 
with  the  left;  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  against  the  left 
heel.  Slip  the  left  hand  down  to  the  lower  band,  the 
thumb  along  the  stock,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body  ; 
bring  the  piece  to  the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the^igbt 
forearm — the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two 
inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  upward,  the  muz- 
zle on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

168.  {Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb  of  the 
right  hand,  the  fingers  supported  against  the  guard  and 
the  small  of  the  stock — remove  the  old  cap  with  one  of  the 
fingers  pf  the  right  hand,  and  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch,  place 
it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it  down  with  the  thumb ;  seize 
the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 


9.  Shoidder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

169.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoul- 
der and  support  it  there  with   the  left  hand,  face  to  the 


eight  times,  and  the  eighth  command  will  be,  shoulder  arms,  and 
executed  from  return  rammer,  in  one  time  and  two  motions,  as  fol- 
lows : 

(First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms,  as  indicated  No.  145. 

(Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 


4U  SCHOOL    or    Tin:    soLDfEU — PART    II. 

% 
front :  bring  the  right  heel  to   the   side  of  and  on  a  line 
with  the  left;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  as  indi- 
cated in  the  position  of  nhonldcr  arms. 

170.  {Second  iHotioii.)  Drop  the  left  hand  (juickly  by  the 
side. 

•  Ready. 

One  time  and  three  ynotions. 

171.  [First  mot  ton.)  Riiisc  the  piece  slightly  with  the 
right  hand,  making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left 
heel ;  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  and  place  it  at  right 
angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite  to,  and  against 
the  left  heel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
lower  band  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder. 

172.  {Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  upward,  the  left  thumb  extended  along 
the  stock,  the  butt  below  the  right  forearm,  the  small  of 
tlie  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches  below  the  right 
breast,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eye,  the  left  elbow  against 
the  side;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  thumb  on  the 
head  of  the  cock,  the  other  fingers  under  and  against  the 
guard. 

173.  {Third  motion.)  Cock,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the 
FiiKill  of  the  stock  without  deranging  the  position  of  the 
butt. 


' 


school  of  the  soldier part  ii.    41 

Aim. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

174.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support  the 
butt  against  the  right  shoulder;  the  left  elbow  down,  the 
right  as  hiiib  as  the  shoulder ;  incline  the  head  upon  the 
butt,  so  that  the  right  eye  may  perceive  quickly  the  notch 
of  the  hausse,  the  front  sight  and  the  object  aimed  at;  the 
left  eye  closed,  the  right  thumb  extended  along  the  stock, 
the  forefinger  on  the  trigger, 

175.  When  recruits  are  formed  in  two  ranks  to  execute 
the  firings,  the  front,  rank  men  will  raise  a  little  less  the 
right  elbow,  in  order  to  facilitate  the  aim  of  the  rear  rank 
men. 

176.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry  the 
right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  right,  and  toward  the 
left  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right,  inclining  the  upper 
part  of  the  body  forward. 

Fire. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

177.  Press  the  forefinger  against  the  trigger,  fire,  with- 
out lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in  this  po- 
sition. 

178.  Instructors  will  be  careful  to  observe  when  the  men 
fire,  that  they  aim  at  some  distinct  object,  and  that  the 
barrel  be  so  directed  that  the  line  of  fire  and  the  line  of 
sight  be  in  the  same,  vertical  plane.     They  will  often  cause 


42  SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIKR — PART    II. 

the  firing  to  be  executed  ou  ground  of  dilTcrcnt  inclinations, 
in  order  to  a(*'custom  the  men  to  fire  at  objects  either  above 
or  below  them. 


Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

179.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the  same 
time  face  to  the  front  and  take  the  position  of  load  as  indi- 
cated No.  15fi.  Each  rear  rank  man  will  bring  his  right 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor  will 
cause  the  loading  to  be  continued  by  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed  No.  156  and  following. 

181.  If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish  the 
recruits  to  reload,  he  will  eommand  : 


Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

182.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  and 
resume  the  position  of  vhuidder  arms,  at  the  same  time  face 
to  the  front,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  and  bring  the  right 
heel  on  a  lino  with  the  left. 

183.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  cGmmand 
Jire,  the  instructor,  when  they  are  in  the  position  of  aim. 
will  command  : 


SCHOOL    OF    THK    SOLDIER PART    IT.  411 

Recover — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw  the 
finger  from  the  trigger :  at  the  command  arms,  retake  the 
position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready. 

185.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third  mo- 
tion of  readi/.  if  the  instructor  shouhl  wish  to  bring  them 
to  a  shoulder,  he  will  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

186.  At  the  command  xhoiilder,  place  the  thumb  upon 
the  cock,  the  forefinger  on  the  trigger,  half-cock,  and 
seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand.  At  the 
command  arms,  bring  up  the  piece  briskly  to  the  right 
shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will  command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

188.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  band 
*at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  and  detach  it  slightly  from 
'-the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand. 

y     189.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  right  hand, 


44     SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 

lower  it  with  the  left  hand,  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body, 
and  place  the  butt  between  the  feet  without  shock;  the 
rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle  three 
inches  from  the  body  ;  seize  it  with  the  rii^ht  hand  at  the 
upper  band,  and  carry  the  left  hand  reversed  to  the  handle 
of  the  sabre-bayonet, 

190.  (Third  motion.)  Draw  the  sabre-bayonet  from  the 
scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  extremity  of  the  barrel;  seize 
the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm  extended,  the  right 
hand  at  the  upi)er  band. 


Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  ttvo  jnotions. 

191.  (Firtit  ))in(i<»i.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
and  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the 
front ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand 
at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  embrac- 
ing the  guard,  the  right  arm  nearly  extended. 

192.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  briskly  the  left  hand  by  the 
side. 

Charge — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

193.  {FivHt  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the 
right  hand  and  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left 
heel;  place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  opposite  to,  and 
three  inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet  square;  seize  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDLER — PART  II.     45 

piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  left  hand  a  little  above  the 
lower  band. 

194.  {Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against  the 
body ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the  same  time,  with 
the  right  hand,  which  will  be  supported  against  the  hip : 
the  point  of  the  sabre-bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye. 


Shoulder— Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

195.  (First  motion.)  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the 
left  hand  in  facing  to  the  front,  place  it  against  the  right 
shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front ;  turn  the  right  hand  so 
as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide  the  left  hand  to  the  height 
of  the  shoulder,  the  right  hand  nearly  extended. 

.196.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the 
side. 

Ti-ail — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

197.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of 
order  arms. 

198.  (Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to  the 
front,  the  butt  -to  the  rear  and  about  four  inches  from  the 
ground.  The  right  hand  supported  at  the  hip,  will  so  hold 
the  piece  that  the  rear  rank  man  may  not  touch  with  their 
bayonets  the  men  in  the  front  rank. 


4(i  SCHOOL    OF    THK    80LD1KU — I'AUT    II. 


Shoulder — Arms. 

199.  At  the  conimand  nhoulder,  raise  the  piece  perpen 
(licularly  in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  tht 
barrel;  at  the  command  ariuH,  execute  what  has  been  pre 
scribed  for  the  vhonlder  from  the  position  of  order  amis. 


Unfix —  Bay  o  net. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

200.  {First  and  ncci>nd  motioim.)  The  same  as  the  first 
and  second  motions  of  fix  bayonet,  except  that,  at  the  end 
of  the  second  command,  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  will 
be  placed  on  the  spring  of  the  sabre-bayonct,  and  the  left 
hand  will  embrace  the  handle  of  the  sabre-bayonet  and  the 
barrel,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  blade. 

201.  {7%ird  motion.)  Press  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand 
on  the  spring,  wrest  off"  the  sabre-bayonet,  turn  it  to  the 
right,  the  edge  to  the  front,  lower  the  guard  until  it 
touches  the  right  hand,  which  will  seize  the  back  and  the 
edge  of  the  blade  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers, 
the  other  fingers  holding  the  piece;  change  the  position  of 
the  hand  without  nuitting  the  handle,  return  the  sabre- 
bayonet  to  the  scabbard,  and  seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  the  arm  extcn<led. 


^ 


SCHOOL  OF  TUB  SOLDIER — PART  11.      4  7 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

202.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  from 
Ji.v  bayonet,  No.  191. 

203.  {Second  motion.)  Tbe  same  as  the  second  motion 
from  fix  bayonet,  No.  192. 

Secure — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

204.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  o^  sup- 
port arms,  No.  133,  except  with  the  right  hand  seize  the 
piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

205.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands, 
the  barrel  to  the  front;  bring  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder, 
the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band, 
the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and  extended  on  the  ram- 
mer ;  the  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the 
left  forearm  against  the  piece. 

206.  (  Third  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it  under  the 
left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the  lower  band,  the 
thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent  it  from  sliding  out,  the 
little  finger  resting  against  the  hip,  the  right  hand  falling 
at  the  same  time  by  the  side. 


48 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  IL 


Shoulde 


Arms. 


One  lime  and  three  jnolions. 

207.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  han'l, 
and  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 
The  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  butt 
against  the  hip,  the  left  forearm  along  the  piece. 

208.  {Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motion  of 
dhoitlder  arma  from  a  support, 

209.  [Third  motiov.)  The  same  as  the  third  motion  of 
Khonldcr  anus  from  «  aujijiart. 


Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 


210.  {First  viotioii.)  Detach  tbc  jjiecc  perpendicularly 
from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  seize  it  with 
the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight,  raise  th» 
piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder  and  four 
inches  from  it;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  hand  on 
the  butt,  the  beak  between  the  first  two  fingers,  the  other 
two  fingers  under  the  butt  plate. 

211.  {Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  tho  left  hail<)f 
raise  and  place  the  piece  on  tho  right  shoulder  with  the 
right  hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards;  let  fall,  at  tho  same 
time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.     49 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  tioo  motions. 

212.  {First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  perpeudicularly  by 
extending  the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the  rammer  to 
the  front,  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight. 

213.  {Secoud  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right  hand, 
which  will  immediately  embrace  the  guard,  lower  the  piece 
to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  slide  up  the  left  hand  to 
the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  closed. 
Drop  the  left  hand  by  th^  side. 

214.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor  will 
sometimes  cause  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder. 
To  this  effect,  he  will  command: 


Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

215.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand, 
below  and  near  the  left  forearm,  place  the  left  hand  un- 
der the  butt,  the  heel  of  the  butt  between  the  first  two 
fingers. 

216.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
the  lock  plate  upward,  carr}"^  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the 
left  hand  still  holding  the  butt,  the  muzzle  elevated  ;  bold 
the  piece  in  this  position  and  place  the  right  band  upon 


.jO  SCHOOL    OK    THE    SOJ.DIKK PART    II. 

the  butt  lis  is  prescri])ed  Xo.  210,  aud  let  fall  the  left  baud 
by  tbe  side. 

Support — Arms. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

217.  {First  motion.)  The  pame  as  the  first  motion  of 
xhouldcr  arms,  No.  212. 

218.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  tbe  piece  with  both  bands, 
the  barrel  to  the  front,  carry  it  opposite  tbe  left  shoulder, 
slip  the  right  band  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  place  tbe  left 
forearm  extended  on  tbe  breast  as  is  presci'ibed  No.  134, 
and  let  fall  the  right  band  by  the  side. 


Arms — At  will. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

219.  At  this  comuiuiul.  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on 
either  shoulder,  with  one  ur  both  hands,  tbe  muzzle  ele- 
vated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

220.  At  this  eomiuaud,  retake  (juickly  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms. 

221.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  when  tbe  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  the  pieces  to  be  placed  on  the 
ground,  he  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.     51 

Ground —  Arm  s  . 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

222.  {Firat  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand, 
the  barrel  to  the  left,  at  the  same  time  seize  the  cartridge 
box  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  body,  advance  the  left 
foot,  the  heel  opposite  the  lower  band;  lay  the  piece  on  the 
ground  with  the  right  hand,  the  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line 
with  the  right  toe,  the  knees  slightly  bent,  the  right  heol 
raised. 

223.  {Second  motion.)  Rise  up,  bring  the  left  foot  by  the 
side  of  the  right,  quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand, 
and  drop  the  hands  by  the  side. 

Raise — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

22-4.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left 
hand,  bend  the  body,  advance  the  left. foot  opposite  the 
lower  band,  and  seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand. 

225.  (Second  tnotion.)  Raise  the  piece,  bringing  the  left 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  right;  turn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  at  the  same  time  quit  the 
cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  and  drop  this  hand  by 
the  side. 

Inspection  of  arms. 

226.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  and  having  the 


52  SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    IL 

saljrc-bayonct  in   the  scahbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes  to 
cause  an  inspection  of  arms,  he  will  command: 


Inspection — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

227.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  j.iece  with  the  left  hand 
V/olow  and  near  the  upper  band,  carry  it  with  both  hands 
opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  the  butt  between  the  feet, 
the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle 
about  three  inches  from  the  body ;  carry  the  left  hand  re- 
versed to  the  sabre-bayonet,  draw  it  from  the  scabbard  and 
fix  it  on  the  barrel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  be- 
low and  near  the  upper  band,  seize  the  rammer  with  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand  bent,  the  other 
tingers  closed. 

228.  (Second  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  as  has  been 
explained  in  loading,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of  the 
bore,  replace  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  opposite  the  right 
shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

229.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession  the 
piece  of  each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the  front  of  the 
rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches  him,  will  raise 
smartly  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seize  it  with  the  left 
between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight,  the  lock  to  the 
front,  the  loft  hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  piece  op- 
posite to  the  left  eye;  the  instructor  will  take  it  with  the 
right  hand  at  the  handle,  and,  after  inspecting  it,  will  re- 
turn it  to  the  recruit  who  will  receive  it  back  with  the  right 
hand,  and  replace  it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.      O.) 

2^0.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him,  each 
recruit  will  retake  the  position  prescribed 'it  the  command 
■Insiiecfion  of  arms,  return  the  rammer  and  resume  the  posi- 
tion of  nrdrred  nrms. 

231.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  instructor 
should  merely  wish  to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he  will 
command : 


Fix — Bayonet. 


232.  Take  the  position  indicated  in  No.  227,  fix  bayonets 
as  has  been  explained,  and  immediately  resume  the  posi- 
tion of  ordered  arms. 

233.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing,  to 
ascertain  whether  the  pieces  have  been  discharged,  he  will 
command: 


Spring — Ram  m  e  r  « 


234.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  as  has  been  explained 
above,  and  immediately  retake  the  position  of  ordered 
arms. 

235.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take  thq 
rammer  by  the  small  end  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel,  or 
cause  each  recruit  to  make  it  ring  in  the  barrel. 

236.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him,  will 
i*eturn  rammer  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 


54  SCHOOL  or  thk  soldieu — vxnr  ii. 


Remarks  on  the  Manual  of  Arms. 

2'M.  The  manual  of  arms  frc((aently  distorts  the  persous 
of  recruits  before  they  acquire  ease  and  contiilcnce  in  the 
several  positions.  The  instructoi-s  will,  therefore,  fre- 
quently recur  to  elementar}'  principles  in  the  course  of  the 
lessons. 

238.  Recruits  are  also  extremely  liable  to  curve  the 
sides  and  back,  and  to  derange  tlie  shouldors.  especially  in 
loading.  Consequently,  the  instructor  will  not  cause  them 
to  dwell  too  long  at  a  time  in  one  position. 

239.  When,  after  some  days  of  exercise  in  the  manual 
of  arms,  the  four  men  shall  be  well  established  in  their 
use,  the  instructor  will  always  terminate  the  lesson  by 
marching  the  men  for  some  time  in  one  rank,  and  at  one 
pace  apart,  in  common  and  quick  time,  in  order  to  confirm 
them  more  and  more  in  the  mechanism  of  the  step  ;  he 
will  also  teach  them  to  mark  time  and  to  change  step, 
which  will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner: 

To  mark  time. 

240.  The  four  men  marcdiing  in  the  direct  step,  the 
instructor  will  command: 

1.  Mark  lime.     2.  Makcii. 

241.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  a  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  recruits  will 
make  a  semblance  of  marcliin.Lr.  by  bringing  the  heels  by 


SCHOOL    OF    TllK    SOLDIER PART    II.  55 

the  side  of  each   other,  and  observing  the  cadence  of  the 
step,  by  raising  each  foot  alternately  without  advancing. 

2-t2.  The  instructor  witching  the  direct  step  to  be  resumed, 
will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 


2-13.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  as 
prescribed  above,  the  recruits  will  retake  the  step  of  twenty- 
eight  inches. 

To  change  step. 

244.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Change  step.     2.  March. 

245.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  bring  the  foot 
which  is  in  rear  by  the  side  of  that  which  is  in  front,  and 
step  off  again  with  the  foot  which  Avas  in  front. 

To  march  hackwards. 

246.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  back- 
wards, will  command  : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.  March. 


2i7.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot  fourteen  inches  to  the  rear,  reck- 
onino-  from  heel  to- heel,  and  so  on  with  the  feet  in  succes- 


."^n  SCHOOL    OF    TirE    SOLDIKK — PART    II. 

sion  till  the  command  h<tlf,  which  will  always  bo  preceded 
by  the  caution  Hquad.  Tho  men  will  halt  at  this  command, 
and  bring  back  tho  foot  in  front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

248.  This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

249.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  recruits 
march  straight  to  the  rear,  and  that  the  erect  position  of 
the  body  and  the  piece  be  not  deranged. 


Lesson  III. 
To  load  in  four  times. 

250.  The  object  of  this  lesspu  is  to  prepare  tho  recruits 
to  load  at  will,  and  to  cause  them  to  distinguish  the  times 
which  require  the  greatest  regularity  and  attention,  such 
as  chari/e  cartridye,  ram  cartridcje  and  prime.  It  will  be 
divided  as  follows: 

251.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of  the 
command;  the  three  others  at  the  commands  two,  thrte 
and  four. 

The  infrtructor  will  command: 

1.  Load  in  four  times.     2.  Load. 

252.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  cartridge. 

Two. 

25.3.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge. 


I 


school  of  the  soldier — part  ii.         57 
Three. 

254.  Exeqjate  the  times  to  include  prime. 

Four. 

255.  Execute  the  time  of  shovldcr  arms. 

To  load  at  will. 

256.  The  instructor  will  next  teach  loading  at  will, 
which  will  be  executed  as  loading  in  four  times,  but  con- 
tinued, and  without  resting  on  either  of  the  times.  He 
will  command  : 

1.  Load  at  loill.     2.  Load. 

257.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by  de- 
grees, to  load  with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude,  each 
without  regulating  himself  by  his  neighbor,  and  above  all 
without  waiting  for  him. 

258.  The  cadence  prescribed  No.  129,  is  not  applicable 
to  loading  in  four  times,  or  at  will. 


Lesson  IV. 

Firings. 

259.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,  and   will   be  exe- 
cuted as  follows : 


58  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    SOLDIKU — PAUT    II. 

The  direct  fire. 

» 

260.  The  instructor  will  give  the  follnwing  coiunninds  : 

1 .  Fire  h)j  stpiarL     2.  Squad.     3.  Ready.     4.  Aim. 
0.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

261.  These  several  coiniuands  will  be  executed  as  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arms.  At  the  third 
command,  the  men  will  come  to  the  position  of  ready^  as 
horetofure  explained.  At  the  fourth  they  will  aim  accord- 
ing to  the  rank  in  which  each  may  find  himself  placed,  the 
rear  rank  men  inclining  forward  a  little  the  upper  part  of 
the  body,  in  order  that  their  pieces  may  reach  as  much 
beyond  the  front  rank  as  possible. 

262.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their  pieces 
and  return  immediately  to  the  position  of  ready. 

263.  The  instructor  will  recominoncc  the  firing  by  the 
commands  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fiuk.     4.  Load. 

264.  When  the  instructor  wishes  tlui  tiling  to  cease,  he 
will  conmiauJ  : 

Cease  firinrj. 

•265.  At  this  command,  the  men  wiH  cease  firing,  but 
will  load  their  pieces  if  unloaded,  and,  afterward,  bring 
them  to  a  shoulder. 


«CIIOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER PART    II.  59 


Oblique  Jirings. 

266.  The  o'blique  firings  will  be  executed  to  the  right 
and  left,  and  by  the  same  commands  as  the  direct  fire, 
with  this  single  difference — the  common  aim  will  always 
be  preceded  by  the  caution,  right  or  left  oblique. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks   in   the  Oblique  Fire  to  the 
right. 

267.  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will  execute 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

268.  At  the  cautionary  command,  riijht  oblique,  the  two 
ranks  will  throw  back  the  right  shoulder  and  look  steadily 
at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

269.  At  the  command  aim,  each  front  rank  man  will  aim 
to  the  right  without  deranging  the  feet;  each  rear  rank 
man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about  eight  inches  toward 

.the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  of  his  file 
'leader  and  aim  to  the  right,  inclining  the  upper  part  of 
,  ^the  body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  left  knee. 

i'     ..  ■  .  '.        . 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the 
left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command,  left  oblique,  the  two 
ranks  will  throw  back  the  loft  shoulder  and  look  steadily 
at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

271.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take  aim 
to  the  left  without  deranging  the  feet ;  each  man  in  the 


(•"  SCIIOOI.    OF    THE    SOLDIEK — PART    II. 

rear  rank  will  advance  the  right  foot  about  ciglit  incbcs 
toward  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  of  his 
file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  iueliniug  the  upper  part  of 
the  body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  right  knee. 

272.  In  both  cases,  at  the  command  load,  the  men  of 
each  rank  will  come  to  the  position  of  load  as  prescribed 
in  the  direct  lire;  the  rear  rank  men  bringing  back  the 
fout  which  is  to  the  right  and  front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 
Each  man  will  continue  to  load  as  if  isolated. 

To  Jire  hy  fie. 

273.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  by  the  two  ranks, 
the  files  of  which  will  fire  successively,  and  without  regu- 
lating on  each  other,  except  for  the  first  fire. 

274.  The  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Fire  hij  file.      2.  Squad.     3.  Ready.     4.  Com- 
mence FIRING. 

275.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the 
position  prescribed  in  the  direct  tire. 

276.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right  will  I 
aim  and  fire ;  the  rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will  take  the 
position  indicated  No.  176. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces  briskly 
and  fire  a  second  time ;  reload  and  fire  again,  and  80  on 
in  continuation. 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim,  at  the  instant  the  first 
brings  down  pieces  to  reload,  and  will  conform  in  all  re- 
spects to  that  which  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  first 
file. 


JkL 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    IL  61 

279.  After  tlie  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank  men  will 
not  be  required  to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

280.  Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to  the  position 
of  ready,  and  continue  the  fire. 

281.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to  cease,  he  will 
command  : 

Cease — Firing. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing.  If 
they  have  fired  they  will  load  their  pieces  and  bring  them 
to  a  shoulder ;  if  at  the  position  of  ready,  they  will  half- 
cock  and  shoulder  arms.  If  in  the  position  of  aim,  they 
will  bring  down  their  pieces,  half-cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 


To  fre  hy  rank. 

2S3.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  entire 
rank,  alternately. 

284.  The  instructor  will  command: 


1.  Fire  hy  rank.     2.  Squad.     3.  Ready.     4.  Rear 
rank.     5.  Aim.      6.  Fire.     7.  Load. 

285.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the 
position  of  ready^  as  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire, 

286.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank  will  exe- 
cute that  which  has  been  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire,  and 

\  afterward  take  the  position  of  ready. 
4 


G2         SCHOOL  OI-"  the  soi.diek — i'akt  ii. 

287.  As  soon  as  the  insti-uctor  sees  several  men  of  liic 
rear  rank  in  the  position  of  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  rank.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fiuk.     4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  rank  will 
execute  what  has  been  prcscrilieil  for  the  rear  rank,  hut 
they  will  not  step  off  with  the  right  foot. 

289.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the 
rear  rank,  and  will  thus  continue  to  alternate  from  rank  lu 
rank,  until  he  shall  wish  the  firing  to  cease,  when  he  will 
command,  cense  firing,  which  will  be  executed  as  hereto- 
fore prescribed. 

Lesson  V. 

To  fire  and  load  kneeling. 

290.  In  this  exercise  the  .sijiiad  will  be  suiiposcd  loadeil 
and  drawn  up  in  one  rank.  Tlic  instruction  will  bo  given 
to  each  man  individually,  without  times  or  motions,  and  in 
the  following  manner. 

291.  The  instructor  will  comuiand  : 

Fire  and  load  kneelixg. 

292.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad 
will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt;  then  carry  the 
right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to  the  right  of  the  left  heel,  and 
in  a  position   convenient  for  placing  the  right  knee  upon 


^2 


7V^, 


■fi^ 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    II.  63 

the  ground  in  bending  the  left  leg:  place  the  right  knee 
upon  the  ground;  lower  the  piece,  the  left  forearm  sup- 
ported upon  the  thigh  on  the  same  side,  the  right  hand  on 
the  small  of  the  stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right  thigh, 
the  left  hand  supporting  the  piece  near  the  lower  band. 

293.  He  will  next  move  the  right  leg  to  the  left  around 
the  knee  supported  on  the  ground,  until  this  leg  is  nearly 
perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  seat 
himself  comfortably  on  the  right  heel. 

29i.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  support  it 
with  the  left,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the  left  elbow 
resting  on  the  left  thigh  near  the  knee;  seize  the  hammer 
with  the  thumb,  the  forefinger  under  the  guard,  cock  and 
?eize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock;  bring  the  piece 
to  the  shoulder,  aim  audi  fire. 

295.  Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is  fired,  and  sup- 
port it  with  the  left  hand,  the  butt  resting  against  the  right 
thigh  ;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear  rising  on  the  knee,  the 
barrel  downward,  the  butt  resting  on  the  ground;  in  this 
position  support  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  upper 
band,  draw  cartridge  with  the  right  and  load  the  piece, 
ramming  the  ball,  if  necessary,  with  both  hands. 

296.  When  loaded  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with  the 
left  hand,  which  holds  it  at  the  upper  band ;  seize  it  at  the 
same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock; 
turn  the  piece,  the  barrel  uppermost  and  nearly  horizontal, 
the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh  ;  half-cock,  remove 
the  old  cap  and  prime,  rise  and  return  to  the  ranks. 

297.  The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  through  the  remain- 
der of  the  squad. 


CI    SCHOOL  or  the  soldikr — part  ii. 


To  fire  and  load  lying. 

29S.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank  anil 
loaded;  the  instruction  will  be  given  individually  and  with- 
out times  or  motions. 

299.  The  instructor  will  command: 


Fire  and  load  lying. 

/ 

300.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad 
will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt;  he  will  then  bring 
his  piece  to  an  order,  drop  on  both  knees,  and  place  him- 
self on  the  ground  flat  on  his  belly.  In  this  position  be 
will  support  the  piece  nearly  horizontal  with  the  left  hand, 
holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the  butt  end  of  the  piece 
and  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  ground,  the  barrel  upper- 
most; cock  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  and  carry  this 
hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock ;  raise  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  firess  the  butt  against  the  shoulder,  and  resting  on 
both  elbows,  aim  ami  fire. 

30).  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down  and 
turn  upon  his  left  side,  still  resting  on  his  left  elbow;  bring 
back  the  piece  until  the  cock  is  opposite  his  breast,  the  butt 
end  resting  on  the  ground;  take  out  a  cartridge  with  the 
right  lian<l ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  this  hand, 
holding  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  two  first  fingers; 
he  will  then  throw  himself  on  his  back,  still  holding  the 
piece  with  both  hands;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  place 
the  butt  between  the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muzzle  ele- 


.dSms.iL.^Mm.M 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    II.  65 

vated.     In  this  position,  charge   cartritlge,  draw  rammer, 
ram  cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

302.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn  again 
upon  his  left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  then  raise 
the  piece  vertically,  rise,  turn  about,  and  resume  his  posi- 
tion in  the  ranks. 

303.  The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  On  throughout  the  squad. 


Lesson  VI. 
Bayonet  Exercise. 

304.  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be  confined 
to  two  movements,  the  (jiiard  against  infautit/,  and  the 
guard  against  cavalry.  The  men  will  be  placed  in  one 
rank,  with  two  paces  interval,  and  being  at  shoulder  arms, 
the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Guard  against  Infantry.     2.  Guard. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 


305.  {First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  turn- 
ing on  both  heels,  the  feet  square  to  each  other;  at  the 
same  time  raise  the  piece  slightly,  and  seize  it  with  the 
left  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band. 


G6     SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 

oOG.  {Second  ?noti<)U.)  Carry  the  riglit  foot  twenty  inches 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  on  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  left,  the  knees  glightly  bent,  the  weight  of  the 
body  resting  equally  on  both  legs ;  lower  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against 
the  body;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right 
hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  arms  falling  naturally, 
the  point  of  the  bayonet  slightly  elevated. 


Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

307.  Throw  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  place  it 
against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the 
right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  face  to  the  front. 

1.   Guard  against  Camlry.     2.  Guard. 
One  time  and  two  motijns. 

308.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for  (/iiard  arjaiimt  in/  n- 
try,  e.vcept  that  the  right  hand  will  be  supported  against 
the  hip,  and  the  bayonet  held  at  the  height  of  the  eye,  as 

in  chanjc  bai/unet. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.     67 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

309.  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  haud  and  place  it 
against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the 
right  heel  hy  the  side  of  the  left,  and  face  to  the  front. 


PART  THIRD. 

310.  AVhcn  the  recruits  arc  well  established  in  the  j^rZ/i- 
eiple8  and  lueclutnism  of  the  ntep,  the  position  of  the  body, 
and  the  hkidiuiI  <f  arms,  the  instructor  will  unite  eight 
men,  at  least,  and  twelve  men,  at  most,  in  order  to  teach, 
them  the  principles  of  alignment,  the  principles  of  the 
touch  of  elbows  in  marching  to  the  front,  the  principles  of 
the  march  by  the  flank,  wheeling  from  a  halt,  wheeling  in 
marching,  and  the  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide.  He  will  place  the  squad  in  one  rank,  elbow  to 
elbow,  and  number  the  men  from  right  to  left. 


Lesson  I. 

Alignments. 

311.   The  irstructor  will  at  first  teach  the   recruits  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  in  order  the  better  to  make 


,Jk. 


G8  SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    HI. 

them  comprehend  the  principles  of  alignment;  to  this  end 
he  will  command  the  two  men  on  the  right  flank  to  march 
two  paces  to  the  front,  and  having  aligned  them,  he  will 
caution  the  remainder  of  the  squad  to  move  up,  as  they 
may  be  successively  called,  each  by  his  number,  and  align 
themselves  successively  on  the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

iU2.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number,  will 
turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  right  as  prescribed  in  the 
first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  and  will  march  in  quicic  time 
two  paces  foricard,  shortening  the  last,  so  as  to  find  him- 
self about  six  inches  behind  the  new  alignment,  which  he 
ought  never  to  pass,  he  will  next  move  up  steadily  by  steps 
of  two  or  three  inches,  the  hams  extended,  to  the  side  of 
the  man  next  to  him  on  the  alignment,  so  that,  without 
deranging  the  head,  the  line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the 
shoulders,  he  may  find  himself  in  the  exact  lino  of  his 
neiglibor,  whose  elbow  he  will  lightly  touch  without  open- 
ing his  own. 

313.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well  ali;^ned,  will 
command  : 

Froxt. 

314.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front,  and 
remain  firm. 

315.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the  same 
principles. 

310.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to  align 
themselves  man  by  man,  correctly,  and  Avithout  groping  or 
jostling,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  entire  rank  to  align 
itself  at  once  by  the  command : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER— ^PAKT    III.  69 


Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

317.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  placed  in 
advance  as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will  move  up  in  quick 
time,  and  place  themselves  on  the  new  line,  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  No.  312. 

318.  The  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front, 
and  facing  the  rank,  will  carefully  observe  that  the  prin- 
ciples are  followed,  and  then  pass  to  the  flank  that  has 
served  as  the  basis,  to  verify  the  alignment. 

319.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  greater  number  of  the 
rank  aligned,  will  command  : 


Froxt. 


320.  The  instructor  may  afterwards  order  this  or  that 
^\q  foricnrd  or  back,  designating  each  by  its  number.  The 
file  or  files  designated,  only,  will  slightly  turn  the  head 
toward  the  basis,  to  judge  how  much  they  ought  to  move 
up  or  back,  steadily  place  themselves  on  the  line,  and  then 
turn  eyes  to  the  front,  without  a  particular  command  to 
that  eflFect. 

321.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the 
same  principles,  the  recruits  stepping  back  a  little  beyond 
the  line,  and  then  dressing  up  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  No.  312,  the  instructor  commanding: 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOr.DIKU — I'AIJT    III. 


lihjht  (or  lefi)  backward — Drkss. 

322.  After  each  alignment,  the  iustructDi-  will  exaiuim' 
the  po«ition  of  the  men,  and  cause  tlio  rank  to  como  to 
ordered  arms,  to  prevent  too  mucli  f 'tiguc,  anil  also  tbe 
'langer  of  ncglijirence  at  vlioitlih-rcd  arms. 


Lesson  II. 

.32.").  The  men  having  learued,  in  the  fir.-;t  and  second 
parts,  to  march  with  steadiuess  iu  common  time,  and  to 
take  steps  ejjual  in  length  and  swiftness,  will  be  exercised 
in  the  third  part  onl}'  iu  quick  time,  double  quick  time,  and 
the  run  ;  the  instructor  will  cause  them  to  execute  succes- 
sively, at  these  different  gaits,  the  march  to  the  front,  the 
facing  about  in  marching,  the  march  by  the  flank,  the 
wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and  tlio  changes  of 
direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

32-1.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits  tliat  at  the 
command  m<uch,  they  will  always  niovo  off  in  quick  time, 
unless  this  cdmniand  should  bo  preceded  by  that  of  double 
7  "'■'■''•• 

7'o  march  to  the  front. 

325.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  wlien  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  front,  he 
will  place  a  well-instructed  man  on  the  right  or  the  left, 
according  to  the  side  on  which  he  may  wish  the  guide  to 
be,  and  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIKR — PAKT  III.     71 


1.  Squad.,  forioard.     2.   Guide  right  (ov  left.') 
3.  Maucii. 

326.  At  the  comrnand  march,  the  rank  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot;  the  guide  will  take  care  to 
march  straight  to  the  front,  keeping  his  shoulders  always 
in  a  square  with  that  line. 

327.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marching  to  the 
front,  that  the  men  touch  lightly  the  elbow  toward  the 
side  of  the  guide ;  that  they  do  not  open  out  the  left 
elbow,  nor  the  right  arm  ;  that  they  yield  to  pressure  com- 
ing from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  coming 
from  the  opposite  side;  that  they  recover  by  insensible 
degrees  the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if  lost ;  that  they 
maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no  matter  on  which 
side  the  guide  may  be;  and  if  found  before  or  behind  the 
alignment,  that  the  man  in  fault  corrects  himself  by 
shortening  or  lengthening  the  step,  by  degrees,  almost 
insensible. 

328.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  cause  recruits  to  com- 
prehend that  the  alignment  can  only  be  preserved,  in 
marching,  by  the  regularity  of  the  step,  the  touch  of  the 
elbow,  and  the  maintenance  of  the  shoulders  in  a  square 
witlj  the  line  of  direction ;  that  if,  for  example,  the  step 
of  some  be  longer  than  that  of  others,  or  if  some  march 
faster  than  others,  a  separation  of  elbows,  and  a  loss  of 
the  alignment,  would  be  inevitable;  that  if  (it  being  re- 
quired that  the  head  should  be  direct  to  the  front)  they  do 
not  strictly  observe  the  touch  of  elbows,  it  would  be  im- 


72     SCHOOL  OF  THE  soldier — PART  III. 

possible  for  an  individual  to  judge  whetlier  be  marches 
abreast  with  his  neighbor,  or  not,  and  whether  there  bo 
not  an  interval  between  them. 

329.  The  impulsion  of  the  quick  step  having  a  tendeniy 
to  make  men  too  easy  and  free  in  their  movements,  the 
instructor  will  be  careful  to  regulate  the  cadence  of  this 
step,  and  to  habituate  them  to  preserve  always  the  erectness 
of  the  body,  and  the  due  length  of  the  pace. 

330.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  principles  of 
the  direct  march,  the  instructor  will  exorcise  them  in 
marching  obliquely'.  The  rank  being  in  march,  the  in- 
structor will  command : 

1.  llujlit  (or  l(>ft)  oblique.     2.  INIarch.  ' 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a 
half  face  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  will  then  march  straight 
forward  in  the  now  direction.  As  the  men  no  longer  touch 
elbows,  they  will  glance  along  the  shoulders  of  the  nearest 
files,  toward  the  side  to  which  they  are  obliquing,  and  will 
regulate  their  steps  so  that  the  shoulders  shall  always  be 
behind  that  of  their  next  neighbor  on  that  side,  and  that 
his  head  shall  conceal  the  heads  of  the  other  men  in  the 
rank.  Besides  this,  the  men  should  preserve  the  same 
length  of  pace,  and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity. 

332.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  resume  the  primitive 
direction,  will  command  : 

1.  Forimrd.     2.  March. 

333.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a 
half  face  to  the  left  (or  right),  and  all  will  then  march 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    IIL  73 

straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  principles  of  the 
direct  march. 

To  march  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time. 

334.  When  the  several  principles,  heretofore  explained, 
have  become  familiar  to  the  recruits,  and  they  shall  be  well 
established  in  the  position  of  the  body,  the  bearing  of 
arms,  and  the  mechanism,  length,  and  swiftness  of  the 
step,  the  instructor  will  pass  them  from  quick  to  double 
quick  time,  and  the  reverse,  observing  not  to  make  them 
march  obliquely  in  double  quick  time,  till  they  are  well 
established  in  tbe  cadence  of  this  step. 

335.  The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  the  in- 
structor will  command  : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  March. 

33G.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  when 
cither  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  step  oflf 
in  double  quick  time.  The  men  will  endeavor  to  follow 
the  principles  laid  down  in  the  first  part  of  this  book,  and 
to  preserve  the  alignment. 

337.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to  resume 
the  step  in  quick  time,  he  will  command : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

338.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  when 
either  foot  ia*  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  retake 
the  step  in  quick  time. 

339.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  halt 
5 


74         SCHOOL  or  T^^:  soldikr — part  hi. 

it  hy  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  Nos.  98  and  99. 
The  command  halt,  will  be  given  an  instant  before  the  foot 
is  ready  to  be  placed  on  the  ground. 

340.  The  squad  being  in  march  in  double  quick  time, 
the  instructor  will  occasionally  cause  it  to  mark  time  by 
the  commands  prescribed  No.  240.  The  men  will  then 
mark  double  (juick  time,  without  altering  the  cadence  of 
the  step.  Ue  will  also  cause  them  to  pass  from  the  direct 
to  the  oblique  step,  and  reciprocally,  confurming  to  what 
has  been  prcscril)ed  No.  330,  and  following. 

341.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  cause 
it  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  by  preceding  the  com- 
mand march,  by  double  quick. 

342.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate  well  the 
cadence  of  this  step. 

To  face  about  in  marching. 

343.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick,  or  double  quick 
time,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Squad  right  about.     2.  March. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  recruit 
will  bring  this  foot  to  the  ground,  and  turning  on  it,  will 
face  to  the  rear;  he  will  then  place  the  right  foot  in  the 
new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the  left  foot.  i 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    IIL 


To  march  backwards. 

345.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor  should 
wish  to  march  it  in  the  back  step,  he  will  command : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right). 
3.  March. 


346.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  by  the  means  pre- 
scribed No.  247. 

347.  The  instructor,  in  this  step,  will  be  watchful  that 
the  men  do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

348.  As  the  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should  only- 
he  executed  at  shouldered  arms,  the  instructor,  in  order 
not  to  fatigue  the  men  too  much,  and  also  to  prevent  neg- 
ligence in  gait  and  position,  will  halt  the  squad  from  time 
to  time,  and  cause  arms  to  be  ordered. 

349.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will  al- 
ways carry  their  pieces  on  the  rifjht  shoulder,  or  at  a  trail. 
This  ride  is  tjeneral. 

350.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried  at  a 
trail,  he  will  give  the  command  trail  arms,  before  the  com- 
mand double  quick.  If,  on  the  contrary,  this  command  be 
not  given,  the  men  will  shift  their  pieces  to  the  right 
shoulder  at  the  command  double  quick.  In  either  case,  at 
the  command  halt,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms.      This  ride  is  general. 


76  SCHOOL    or    THE    SOLDIKJl — I'ART    III. 

Lesson  III. 

The  march  by  the  jlank. 

351.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned, 
the  instructor  will  comniantl : 

1.  Squad,  right — Face.      2.  Forward.     3.  March. 

362.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the  rank  will 
face  to  the  right;  the  even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to 
the  right,  will  stop  quickly  to  the  right  side  of  the  odd 
numbered  men,  the  latter  standing  fast,  so  that  when  the 
movement  is  executed,  the  men  will  be  formed  into  files  of 
two  men  abreast. 

353.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step  oil' 
smartly  with  the  left  foot;  the  files  keeping  aligned,  and 
preserving  tlieir  intervals. 

354.  The  march  by  the  left  flank  will  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  substituting  the  word  left  for  right,  and 
by  inverse  means;  in  this  case,  the  even  numbered  men, 
after  facing  to  the  left,  will  stand  fast,  and  the  odd  num- 
bered will  place  themselves  on  their  left. 

355.  The  instructor  will  place  a  well-instructed  soldier 
by  the  side  of  the  recruit  who  is  at  the  head  of  the  rank, 
to  regulate  the  step,  and  to  conduct  him ;  and  it  will  be 
enjoined  on  this  recruit  to  march  always  elbow  to  elbow 
with  the  soldier. 

356.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  observed  in  the 
march,  by  the  flank,  the  following  rules : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.     77 


That  the  stej)   he  executed  according  to   the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  direct  step  ; 

Because  these  principles,  without  which  men  placed 
elbow  to  elbow,  in  the  same  rank,  cannot  preserve  unity 
and  harmony  of  movement,  are  of  a  more  necessary  ob- 
servance in  marching  in  file. 


That  the  head  of  the  man  who  immediately  precedes,  covers 
the  heads  of  all  who  are  in  front; 

Because  it  is  the  most  certain  rule  by  which  each  man 
may  maintain  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  the  file. 

367.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  habitually  five  or 
six  paces  on  the  flank  of  the  rank  marching  in  file,  to 
watch  over  the  execution  of  the  principles  prescribed 
above.  He  will  also  place  himself  sometimes  in  its  rear, 
halt,  and  suflfcr  it  to  pass  fifteen  or  twenty  paces,  the  better 
to  see  whether  the  men  cover  each  other  accurately. 

358.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank,  marching  by 
the  flank,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

o59.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and 
afterward  no  man  will  stir,  although  he  may  have  lost 
his  distance.  This  prohibition  is  necessary,  to  habituate 
the  men  to  a  constant  preservation  of  their  distances. 

360.  At  the   third  command,  each    man  will  front  by 


/8     SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 

facing  to  the  left,  if  murchinf;  by  tbc  right  Hank,  and  by  a 
face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by  the  loft  flank.  The  rear 
rank  men  will  at  the  same  time  move  quickly  into  their 
places,  so  as  to  form  the  squad  again  into  one  rank. 

361.  When  the  men  have  become  accustomed  to  march- 
ing by  the  flank,  the  instructor  will  cause  them  to  change 
direction  by  file  j  for  this  purpose,  he  will  connnand: 

1.  By  fie  left  (or  right.)     2.  ISIarch. 

362.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  change 
direction  to  the  left  (or  right)  in  describing  a  small  arc  of 
a  circle,  and  will  then  march  straight  forward ;  the  two 
men  of  this  file,  in  wheeling,  will  keep  up  the  touch  of  the 
elbows,  and  the  man  on  the  side  to  which  the  wheel  is 
made,  will  shorten  the  first  three  or  four  steps.  Each  file 
will  come  successively  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  where 
that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

363.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to  face  by 
the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  and  for  this  purpose 
will  command  : 

1.  Squad  by  the  left  {or  right)  flank.     2.  March. 

364.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  bo  given  a  lit- 
tle before  either  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  recruits  will 
turn  the  body,  plant  the  foot  that  is  raised  in  the  new  di- 
rection, and  step  ofi"  with  the  other  foot  without  altering 
the  cadence  of  the  step;  the  men  will  double  or  undouble 
rapidly.  ^^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.     79 

365.  If,  in  facing  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank,  the  squad 
should  face  to  the  rear,  the  men  will  come  into  one  rank, 
agreeably  to  the  principles  indicated  No.  360.  It  is  to  be 
remarked  that  it  is  the  men  who  are  in  rear  who  always 
move  up  to  form  into  single  rank,  and  in  such  manner  as 
never  to  invert  the  order  of  the  numbers  in  the  rank. 

366.  If,  when  the  squad  has  been  faced  to  the  rear,  the 
instructor  should  cause  it  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  it  is 
the  even  numbers  who  will  double  by  moving  to  the  left  of 
the  odd  numbers  ;  but  if  by  the  right  flank,  it  is  the  odd 
numbers  who  will  double  to  the  right  of  the  even  numbers. 

367.  This  lesson,  like  the  preceding  one,  will  be  prac- 
ticed with  pieces  at  a  shoulder;  but  the  instructor  may,  to 
give  relief  by  change,  occasionally  order  support  armx, 
and  he  will  require  of  the  recruits  marching  in  this  posi- 
tion, as  much  regularity  as  in  the  former. 

The  march  hy  the  Jlank  in  double  quick  time. 

368.  The  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  in  double 
quick  time,  are  the  same  as  in  quick  time.  The  instructor 
will  give  the  commands  prescribed  No.  351,  taking  care 
always  to  give  the  command  double  quick  before  that  of 
VI  arch. 

369.  He  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the  cadence 
of  the  step. 

370.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  change  of  direction, 
and  the  march  by  the  flank,  to  be  executed  in  double  quick 
time,  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same 
principles,  as  in  quick  time. 


«U  SCIIQOL    or    TIIK    SOLDIER— PART    III. 

371.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  pieces  to  be  carried 
cither  on  the  right  shoulder  or  at  a  trail. 

372.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the  squad  by 
the  flank,  without  doubling  the  files. 

373.  The  principles  of  this  march  are  the  same  as  in 
two  ranks,  and  it  will  always  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

374.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  prescribed 
No.  351,  but  he  will  be  careful  to  caution  the  squad  not  to 
double  files. 

37o.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  men  do 
not  bend  their  knees  unequally,  which  would  cause  them 
to  tread  on  the  heels  of  the  men  in  front,  and  also  to  lose 
the  cadence  of  the  step  and  their  distances. 

376.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  single  rank.  In  the  changes  of  direction,  the 
leading  man  will  change  direction  without  altering  the 
length  or  the  cadence  of  the  step.  The  instructor  will 
recall  to  the  attention  of  the  men,  that  in  facing  by  the 
right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  they  will  not  double,  but 
march  in  one  rank. 


Lesson  IV. 

WHEELINGS. 

General  principles  of  Wheeling. 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds:    from  halts,   or  on 
fixed  pivots,  and  in  march,  or  on  moveable  pivots. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER PART    III.  81 

378.  Wheeliog  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in  passing  a 
corps  from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in  column,  or 
from  the  latter  to  the  former. 

379.  Wheels  in  marching  take  place  in  changes  of  direc- 
tion in  column,  as  often  as  this  movement  is  executed  to 
the  side  opposite  to  the  guide. 

380.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only  turns  in 
his  place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

381.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot  takes  steps  of 
nine  or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad  is  marching 
in  quick  or  double  quick  time,  so  as  to  clear  the  wheeling 
point,  which  is  necessary,  in  order  that  the  subdivisions  of 
a  column  may  change  direction  without  losing  their  dis- 
tances, as  will  be  explained  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

382.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  the  full 
step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  or  thirty-three  inches,  accord- 
ing to  the  gait. 

Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  a  fixed  point. 

383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  place 
a  well-instructed  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to  conduct  it, 
and  then  command  : 

1.  By  squad,  right  ivheel.     2  March. 

384.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  step  off"  with 
the  left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  time  the  head  a  little  to 
the  left,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men 
to  their  leftj  the  pivot-man  will  merely  mark  time  in 
gradually  turning  his  body,  in  order  to  conform  himself  to 


82     SCHOOL  OF  TUE   SOLDIEU — PAUT  III. 

the  movement  of  the  marching  flank;  the  man  who  con- 
ducts this  flank  will  take  steps  of  twenty-eif^ht  inches,  and 
from  the  first  step  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder,  cast 
his  eyes  from  time  to  time  along  the  rank  and  feel  con- 
stantly the  elbow  of  the  next  man  lightly,  but  never  push 
him. 

385.  The  other  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the 
next  man,  towards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure  coming  from 
the  opposite  side,  and  each  will  conform  himself  to  the 
marching  flank — shortening  his  step  according  to  his  ap- 
proximation to  the  pivot. 

3SC.  The  instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel  round  the 
circle  once  or  twice  before  halting,  in  order  to  cause  the 
principles  to  be  the  better  understood,  and  he  will  be  watch- 
ful that  the  centre  does  not  break. 

387.  Ho  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

388.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  wheel, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

389.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt  and  no 
man  stir.  The  instructor,  going  to  the  flank  opposite  the 
pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  men  of  that  flank  in  the 
direction  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  rank,  without,  how- 
ever, displacing  the  pivot,  who  will  conform  the  line  of  his 
shoulders  to  this  direction.  The  instructor  will  take  care 
to  have  between  these  two  men  and  the  pivot,  only  the 
space  necessary  to  contain  the  other  men.  Ho  will  then 
command: 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    S0LDIP:R — PART    III.  83 


Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

390.  At  this  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment 
of  the  two  men  established  as  the  basis,  in  conformity  with 
the  principles  prescribed. 

391.  The  instructor  will  next  command  Front,  which 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  314. 


Remarks  on  tlie  principles  of  the  wheel  from  a  halt. 

392.  Turn  a  little  the  head  toivard  the  marching  flank,  and 
Jijc  the  eyes  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  who  are  on 
that  side; 

Because,  otherwise,  it  would  be  impossible  for  each  man 
to  regulate  the  length  of  his  step  so  as  to  conform  his  own 
movement  to  that  of  the  marching  flank. 

Touch  lightly  the  elbotc  of  the  next  man  toward  the  jjivot ; 
In  order  that  the  files  may  not  open  out  in  the  wheel. 

Resist  pressure  that  comes  from,  the  side  of  the  marching 
flank  ; 

Because,  if  this  principle  be  neglected,  the  pivot,  which 
ought  to  be  a  fixed  point,  in  wheels  from  a  halt,  might  be 
pushed  out  of  its  place  by  pressure. 


84  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    SOLDIEU — PAKT    III. 


Wheeling  in  marching,  or  on  a  moveable  pivot. 

393.  When    tlie  recruits    have  been  brought  to  execute 
well  the  wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be  tau^'ht  to  wheel 
marching. 

394.  To  this  end,  the  rank  being  in  march,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the 
reverse  flank,  (to^he  side  opposite  to  tlie  guide  or  pivot 
flank,)  ho  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March. 

395.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  ia 
yet  /our  paces  from  the  wheeling  point. 

396.  At  the  second  command,  the  wheel  will  be  executed 
in  the  same  manner  as  from  a  halt,  except  that  the  touch 
of  the  elbow  will  remain  toward  the  marching  flank  (or 
side  of  the  guide)  instead  of  the  side  of  the  actual  pivot: 
that  the  pivot-man,  instead  of  merely  turning  in  his  place, 
will  conform  himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching 
flank,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man,  take  steps  of 
full  nine  inches,  and  thus  gain  ground  forward  in  describ- 
ing a  small  curve  so  as  to  clear  the  i)oint  of  the  wheel. 
The  middle  of  the  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As 
soon  as  the  movement  shall  commence,  the  man  who  con- 
ducts the  marching  flank  will  cast  his  eyes  on  the  ground 
over  which  ho  will  have  to  pass. 

397.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand: 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER— PART    III.  85 


1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

.'598.  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced  when  four 
paces  are  yet  required  to  complete  the  change  of  direc- 
tion. 

399.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  of  completing  the  wheel,  the  man  who  conducts 
the  marching  flank  will  direct  himself  straight  forward ; 

■  the  pivot-man  and  all  the  rank  will  retake  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring  the  head  direct  to  the 
front. 

{Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side   of  the 
guide. 

400.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide, 
in  marching,  will  be  executed  as  follows:  The  instructor 
will  command : 

1.  Left  (or  light)  turn.     2.  March. 


i  |i  401.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is 
' 'iyet  four  paces  from  the  turning  point. 
' '  402.  At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at  the 
•ii instant  the  rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face  to  the 
'  left  (or  right)  in  marching,  and  move  forward  in  the  new 
■  direction  without  slackening  or  quickening  the  cadence, 
'   and  without  shortening  or  lengthening   the   step.      The 

.whole  rank  will  promptly  conform  itself  to  the  new  direc- 
'jition  :  to  effect  which,  each  man  will  advance  the  shoulder 

"  6 


86  SCHOOL    OK    Tlir.    SOLDIKU — PAUT    HI. 

opposite  to  the  frnide.  take  the  doul.lc  quick  step,  to  ciirrj 
himself  in  the  new  direction,  turn  the  head  and  ej-es  to 
the  side  of  the  guide,  and  retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow 
on  that  side,  in  pliicin;^  himself  on  the  alignment  of  thei 
guide,  from  whom  ho  will  take  the  step,  and  then  resume 
the  direct  position  of  the  head.  Each  man  will  thus  arri\  i- 
successively  on  the  iilijrnment. 


Wheeling  and  changinc/  direction  to  the  side  of  the\ 
guide,  in  double  quick  time. 

iO'.i.  When  tht.'  riiruits  comprehend  and  execute  well,  in 
quick  time,  the  wheels,  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and  the 
change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  the  instructor 
will  cause  the  same  movements  to  be  repeated  in  double 
quick  time. 

iOi.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  by  tb 
same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  principles  as 
in  quick  time,  except  that  the  command  doiibte  quiclc  will 
precede  that  of  march.  In  wheeling  while  marching,  the 
pivot-man  will  take  steps  of  eleven  inches,  and  in  the 
changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  the  men  on 
the  side  opposite  the  guide  must  increase  the  gait  in  order 
to  bring  themselves  into  line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  recruits, 
and  not  to  divide  their  attention,  will  cause  them  to  exe- 
cute the  several  movements  of  which  this  lesson  is  coai- 
posed,  first  without  arms,  and  next,  after  the  mochanism 
be  well  comprehended,  with  arms. 


.SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOI.DIKK I'AHT    III. 


Lessox  V. 

Lony  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

400.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  resumed  the  exer- 
cises in  douWe  quick  time  and  the  run,  with  arms  and 
knapsacks. 

407.  He  will  cause  long  marches  to  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  both  by  the  front  and  by  the  flank. 
and  by  constant  practice  will  lead  the  men  to  pass  over 
a  distance  of  five  miles  in  sixty  minutes.  The  pieces  will 
be  carried  on  either  shoulder,  and  sometimes  at  a  trail. 

408.  He  will  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches  at  a 
run,  the  pieces  carried  at  will ;  the  men  will  be  instructed 
to  keep  as  united  as  possible,  without,  however,  exacting 
much  regularity,  which  is  impracticable. 

409.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  resorted  to 
when  it  may  be  highly  important  to  reach  a  given  point 
with  great  promptitude. 

To  stack  arms. 

The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

Stack — Arms. 

m  410.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  man  of  every 
even  numbered  file  will  pass  his  piece  before  him,  seizing 
it  with  the  left  hand  near  the  upper  band  ;   will  place  the 


S8  SCTIOOT.    or    THE    SOLniKR — PART    III. 

butt  a  little  in  advance  of  his  left  toe,  the  barrel  turmd 
toward  the  body,  and  draw  the  rammer  sliirhtjy  from  itf 
place;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  odd  numbered  file 
will  alRO  draw  the  rammer  slightly,  and  pass  his  piece  to 
the  man  next  on  his  left,  who  will  seize  it  with  the  right 
hand  near  the  upper  band,  and  place  the  butt  a  little  in 
advance  of  the  right  toe  of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  the 
barrel  turned  to  the  front;  he  will  then  cross  the  rammers 
of  the  two  pieces,  the  rammer  of  the  piece  of  the  odd  num- 
bered man  being  inside;  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  even 
file  will  also  draw  his  rammer,  lean  his  piece  forward,  the 
lock-plate  downwards,  advance  the  right  foot  about  Hx 
inches,  and  insert  the  rammer  between  the  rammer  and 
barrel  of  the  }iiece  of  his  front  rank  man  ;  with  his  left 
hand  he  will  place  the  butt  of  his  piece  on  the  ground, 
thirty-two  inches  in  rear  of,  and  perpendicular  to,  the 
front  rank,  bringing  b.ack  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the 
left;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  at  the 
same  time  lean  the  stack  to  the  rear,  quit  it  with  his  right 
hand,  and  force  all  the  rammers  down.  The  stack  being 
thus  formed,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd  file  will  pass 
his  piece  into  his  left  hand,  the  barrel  to  tho  front,  and 
inclining  it  forward,  will  rest  it  on  the  stack. 

411.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  position 
of  the  soldier  without  arras,  the  instructor  will  command  ; 

1.   Break  ranks.     2.  Maucii. 

To  resume  arms. 

412.  Both  ranks  being  rc-forincd  in  rear  of  their  stack?, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.     89 


Take — Arms. 

413.  At  this  command,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd 
numbered  piece  Avill  withdraw  his  piece  from  the  stack  ; 
the  front  ranlc  man  of  every  even  file  will  seize  his  own 
piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  that  of  the  man  on  his  right 
with  his  right  hand,  both  above  the  lower  band  ;  the  rear 
rank  man  of  the  even  file  will  seize  his  piece  with  the 
right  hand  below  the  lower  band  ;  these  two  men  will 
raise  up  the  stack  to  loosen  the  rammers ;  the  front  rank 
man  of  every  odd  file  will  facilitate  the  disengagement  of 
the  rammers,  if  necessary,  by  drawing  them  out  slightly 
with  the  left  hand,  and  will  receive  his  piece  from  the 
hand  of  the  man  next  on  his  left;  the  four  men  will  re- 
take the  position  of  the  soldier  at  order  arms. 


TITLE     TniRD, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY. 

General  Utiles  and  division  of  (he  School  of  the 
Company. 

1.  Instruction  by  company  will  always  precede  that  hy 
battalion,  and  the  oVjcct  being  to  prepare  the  soldiers  for 
the  hij^her  sc-hool,  the  exercises  of  detail  by  company  will 
be  strictly  adhered  to,  as  well  in  respect  to  principles  as 
the  order  of  progression  herein  prescribed. 

2.  There  will  be  attached  to  a  company  undergoing  ele- 
mentary instruction,  a  captain,  a  covering  sergeant,  and  a 
certain  number  of  file  closers,  the  whole  posted  in  tht- 
manner  indicated.  Title  First,  and,  according  to  the  same 
Title,  the  officer  charged  with  the  exercise  of  such  com- 
pan}'  will  herein  be  denominated  the  itintnutor. 

3.  The  School  of  the  Company  will  be  divided  into  six 
Icsf^ons,  and  each  lesson  will  comprehend  five  article?,  as 
follows : 

Lesson  L 

1.  To  open  ranks. 

2.  Alignments  in  open  ranks. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  91 

3.  Manual  of  arms. 

4.  To  close  ranks. 

5.  Alignments,  and  manual  of  arras  in  closed  ranks. 

Lesson  II. 

1.  To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

2.  To  fire  by  company. 

3.  To  fire  by  file. 

4.  To  fire  by  rank. 

5.  To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

Lesson  III. 

1.  To  march  in  line  of  battle. 

2.  To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and 
to  align  it. 

.3.  Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

4.  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double   quick  time,  and 
the  back  step. 

5.  To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 


Lesson  IY. 

1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

2.  To  change  direction  by  file. 

.3.  To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank,  and  to 
face  it  to  the  front. 

4.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it 
on  the  right  or  left  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 


1 


92  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY. 

5.  The  company  marching  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  .by 
company  or  platoon  into  line,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the 
right  and  left  in  marching. 


Lesson  V. 

1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a  halt  or 
while  marching. 

2.  To  march  in  column. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  halt  the  column, 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or 
left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 


Lesson  VL 

1.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  company. 

2.  To  break  iiles  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to  re- 
enter into  line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the 
movements  incident  thereto. 

4.  Countermarch. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  or 
left  into  lino  of  battle. 

4.  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two  ranks. 
The  instructor  will  then  cause  the  files  to  bo  numbered, 
and  for  this  purpose  will  command  : 


SCHOOL    OF    TllK    C;OMPAXY — LPZSSON    I.  ;>3 


In  each  rank — Count  Twos. 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from 
right  to  left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in 
the  same  tone,  without  hurry  and  without  turning  the  head, 
one,  two,  according  to  the  place  which  each  one  occupies. 
He  will  also  cause  the  company  to  be  divided  into  platoon? 
and  sections,  taking  care  that  the  first  platoon  is  always 
composed  of  an  even  number  of  files. 

6.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  concise  as  possible 
in  his  explanations;  he  will  cause  faults  of  detail  to  be 
rectified  by  the  captain,  to  whom  he  will  indicate  them,  if 
the  captain  should  not  have  himself  observed  them :  an<l 
the  instructor  will  not  otherwise  interfere,  unless  the  cap- 
tain should  not  well  comprehend,  or  should  badly  execute 
his  intentions. 

7.  Composure,  or  presence  of  mind,  in  him  who  com- 
mands, and  in  those  who  obey,  being  the  first  means  of 
order  in  a  body  of  troops,  the  instructor  will  labor  to 
habituate  the  company  to  this  essential  quality,  and  will 
himself  give  the  example. 


LESSON  FIRST. 

Article  First. 

To  open  ranks. 

8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranks  and 
file  closers  well  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 


!)4  SCHOOL    OK    TIIK    COMl'AXY — LKSSON    I. 

cause  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  ho  will  direct  the  left  guide 
to  place  hiuKself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  which  being 
executed,  be  will  command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Compani/.     3.  Shoulder — Arms. 
4.   7o  the  rear  open  order. 

9.  At  the  fourth  comuiaiid,  the  covering  sergeant  and 
the  left  guide  will  step  off  smartly  to  the  rear,  four  paces 
from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark  the  alignment  of  the 
rear  rank.  They  will  Jud^^e  this  distance  by  the  eye, 
without  counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same  time 
on  the  right  flank,  in  order  to  observe  if  these  two  non- 
commissioned oflScers  are  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  front 
rank,  and  if  necessary,  to  correct  their  position,  which 
being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

5.  March. 


11.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear,  without  counting 
the  steps,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment 
marked  for  this  rank,  conforming  to  wliat  is  i)r<.!scribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  321. 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank  on 
the  left  guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of  this  rank. 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the  same 
time  with  the  rear  rank,  and  will  place  themselves  two 
paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is  aligned. 


SCHOOL    OF    THK    COMPANY — LESSON    L  95 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned,  will 
command : 

6.  Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the 
rear  rank  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor  will 
direct  the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant  to  observe 
the  men  in  their  respective  ranks,  and  to  correct,  if  neces- 
sary, the  positions  of  persons  and  pieces. 


Article  Second. 
Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in  the 
first  exercises,  align  the  ranks,  man  by  man,  the  better  to 
inculcate  the  principles. 

19.  T^  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on  the 
right  or  left  of  each  rank  to  march  two  or  three  paces  for- 
ward, and  after  having  aligned  them,  command  : 

By  Jile  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

20.  At  this,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up  succes- 
sively on  the  alignment,  each  man  being  preceded  by  hie 
neighbor  in  the  same  rank,  toward  the  basis,  by  two 
paces,  and  having  correctly  aligned  himself,  will  cast  his 
eyes  to  the  front. 


:>»j  SCHOOL    of    the    company — I.KSriON    I. 

21.  Successive  alignments  having  habituated  the  soldier.* 
to  dress  correctly,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  ranks  tn 
align  themselves  at  once,  forward  and  backward,  some- 
times in  a  direction  parallel,  and  sometimes  in  one  oblique, 
to  the  original  direction,  giving,  in  each  case,  two  or  four 
men  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment  to  each  rank.  To 
effect  which,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (ov  left) — Drkss.     2.  FuoNT. 

or 

1.  Right  (ov  left)  backward — Dress.     2.  Front. 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  oj^cncd  ranks,  the  men  nt 
the  rear  rank  will  not  seek  to  cover  their  lilo  leaders,  a.s 
the  sole  object  of  the  exercise  is  to  teach  them  to  align 
themselves  correctly  in  their  respective  ranks,  in  the  dif- 
ferent directions. 

23.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will  sir^ier- 
intend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the  rear 
rank.  For  this  purpose,  they  will  place  themselves  on  the 
side  by  which  the  ranks  are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform  the  line 
of  their  shoulders  to  the  new  direction  of  their  rank,  and 
will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment,  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  317  or  No.  321, 
according  as  the  new  direction  .shall  be  in  front  or  rear  of 
the  original  one. 

25.  At  the  end  of  each  alignment,  the  captain  and  the 
covering  sergeant  will  pass  along  the  front  of  the  ranks  to 
correct  the  positions  of  persons  and  arms. 


school  of  the  company — lesson  i.       97 

Article    Third. 
Manual  of  arms. 

26.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will  place  him- 
jielf  in  a  position  to  see  the  rank?,  and  will  command  the 
manual  of  arms  in  the  following  order  : 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 
Order  arms. 
Ground  arms. 

Raise  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Trail  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Unfix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Secure  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 
Load  in  nine  times. 

27.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  position  of  the 
body,  of  the  feet,  and  of  the  piece,  be  always  exact,  and 
that  the  times  be  briskly  executed  and  close  to  the  person. 


s'^       school  oi    thk  company lkssox  1. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  close  ranks. 

28.  The  maiinal  of  arms  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  Close  order.     2.  March. 

29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will  close  uji 
in  quick  time,  each  man  directing  himself  on  his  file 
leader. 

Article  Fifth. 
Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 

oO.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  cause  to 
be  executed  parallel  and  oblique  alignments  by  the  right 
and  left,  forward  and  backward,  observing  to  place  always 
two  or  four  files  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment.  He  will 
give  the  commands  prescribed.  No.  21. 

31.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will 
superintend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the 
rear  rank.  They  will  habituate  themselves  to  judge  the 
alignment  by  the  lines  of  the  eyes  and  shoulders,  in  cast- 
ing a  glance  of  the  eye  along  the  front  and  rear  of  the 
ranks. 

.32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greater  num- 
ber of  the  front  rank  aligned,  he  will  command  Fuont, 
and  rectify,  afterward,  if  necessary,  the  alignment  of  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THK    COMPANY — LESSON    I.  99 

other  men  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  320.  The  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the  align- 
ment of  the  front  rank,  superintended  by  the  covering 
sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will  place 
himself  on  the  flank  to  verify  their  alignment.  He  will 
also  see  that  each  rear  rank  man  covers  accurately  his  file 
leader. 

31.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructor  Avill  observe 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  24. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file  closers  will  preserve  the 
distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
cause  to  be  executed  the  manual  of  arms. 

37.  The  i.istruotor,  wishing  to  rest  the  men,  without 
deranging  the  alignment,  will  first  cause  arms  to  be  sup- 
l)()rted,  or  ordered,  and  then  command: 

In  place — Rest. 

38.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  be  con- 
.<trained  to  presei've  silence  or  steadiness  of  position ;  but 
they  will  always  keep  one  or  other  heel  on  the  alignment. 

39.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should  wish  to 
rest  the  men  without  constraining  them  to  preserve  the 
alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Rest. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be  required  to 
preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  their  places. 


100    SCHOOL  OF   rni-:  comtany — lksson  ii. 

41.  The  instructor  may,  also,  when  ho  shall  judf^e  pro- 
per, causo  arms  to  bo  stacked,  M'hich  will  be  executed  n^ 
})rescribed,  school  of  the  soldier. 


LESSON     SECOND. 

42.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second  lesson, 
will  cause  the  company  to  take  arms,  if  stacks  have  been 
formed,  and  command : 

1.  Attention.     2.   Company.     3.  Shoulder — Arms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and  firings 
to  be  executed  in  the  followiu";  order:    ♦ 


Article  First. 
7o  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

44.  Loading  in  four  timcn  will  be  commanded  and  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  261. 
and  following.  The  instructor  will  causo  this  exercise  U> 
be  often  repeated,  in  succession,  before  passing  to  loading 
at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will  will  be  commanded  and  executed  asi 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  256.  In  prim- 
ing, when  loading  in  four  times,  and  also  at  will,  the  cap- 
tain and  covering  sergeant  will  half  face  to  the  right  with 
the  men,  and  face  to  the  front  when  the  man  next  to  thorn, 
respectively,  brings  his  piece  to  the  shoulder. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    II.      101 

46.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to  cause  the 
men,  in  the  difiFerent  loadings,  to  execute  what  has  been 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  257  and  258. 

47.  Loading  at  will  being  that  of  battle,  and,  conse- 
quently, the  one  with  which  it  is  most  important  to  render 
the  men  familiar,  it  will  claim  preference  in  the  exercises 
the  moment  the  men  be  well  established  in  the  principles. 
To  these  they  will  be  brought  by  degrees,  so  that  every 
man  may  be  able  to  load  with  cartridges,  and  to  fire  at 
least  three  rounds  in  a  minute  with  ease  and  regularity. 


Article   Second. 
To  fire  hy  company. 

48.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  company 
to  be  executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  company.     2.  Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly 
place  himself  opposite  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  four 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file  closers :  the  covering  ser- 
geant will  retire  to  that  line,  and  place  himself  opposite 
to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  general,  for  both  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant,  in  all  the  different  firings, 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add:  1. 
Oovipany  ;  2.  Ready;  3.  Anr;  4.  Fire;  5.  Load. 

51.  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load  their  pieces, 


102      SCHOOL   OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    II. 

and  then  take  the  position  of  rendu,  '^^  prescribed  in   the 
school  of  the  soldier. 

62.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the  firing, 
by  the  commands : 

1.  Company.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

53.  The  firinf^  will  be  thun  continued  until  the  signal  to 
cease  firing  is  sounded. 

54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  t.o 
the  right  and  left,  simply  observing  to  pronounce  right  (or 
left)  oblique,  before  the  command  aim. 


Article  Third. 

The  /ire  hy  file. 

bb.  The  instnictor  wishing  lo  cause  the  fire  by  file  to  be 
executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  file.    2.  Company.    3.  Ready.    4.   Com- 
mence firing. 

50.  The  third  and  fourth  tumniands  will  be  executed  a^ 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  275  and  fol- 
lowing. 

57.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of  the 
company  ;  the  next  file  will  take  aim  at  the  instant  the 
first  brings  down  pieces  to  reload,  and  so  on  to  the  left: 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   COMPANY LESSON    II.      103 

but  this  progression  will  only  be  observed  in  the  first  dis- 
charge, after  which  each  man  will  reload  and  fire  without 
regulating  himself  by  others,  conforming  himself  to  what 
is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  280. 


Article  Fourth. 
The  fire  hy  rank. 

58.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  bo  exe- 
cuted, will  command: 

1.  Fire  hy  rank.     2.  Company.     3.  Ready.    4.  Hear 
rank — Aim.     5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

69.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  executed  as  is 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  285  and  fol- 
lowing. 

60.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in  the 
rear  rank  at  a  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  rank.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alternate  ranks, 
until  the  signal  is  given  to  cease  firing. 

62.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken 
to  the  right  and  left,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No. 
54. 


104      SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    IL 

63.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  whether 
by  company,  by  file,  or  by  rank,  l>y  sounding  the  signal  to 
cease  fin'nf/,  and  at  the  instant  this  sound  commences,  the 
men  will  cease  to  fire,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  iu 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  282. 

64.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  always  followed  bv 
a  bugle  note;  at  which  sound  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in  line,  and 
will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  alignment  of  the  ranks. 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  powder  is  used,  the  sig- 
nal to  cease  firing  will  be  indicated  by  the  command  cean> 
jiriufj,  which  will  be  pronounced  by  the  instructor  when  he 
wishes  the  souil)lance  of  firing  to  cease. 

66.  The  command  posts  will  be  likewise  substituted, 
under  similar  circumstances,  for  the  bu^le  note  employed 
as  the  signal  for  the  return  of  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  to  their  places  iu  line,  which  command  will  be 
given  when  the  instructor  sees  the  men  have  brought  their 
pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

67.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  frequently 
u.Mcd  against  an  enemy,  it  is  highly  important  that  it  be 
rendered  perfectly  familiar  to  the  troops.  The  instructor 
will,  therefore,  give  it  almost  exclusive  preference,  and 
labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim  with  care,  and  always, 
if  possible,  at  some  particular  object.  As  it  is  of  the 
utmost  importance  that  the  men  should  aim  with  precision 
in  battle,  this  principle  will  bo  rigidly  enforced  in  the 
exercises  for  purposes  of  instruction. 


school  of  the  company — i.ksson  ii.    10'; 

Article  Fifth. 

To  fire  hy  the  rear  rank. 

68.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be  exe- 
cuted to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.  To  efFect  thip, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Face  hij  the  rear  rank.    2.  Company.    3.  Abovt — 
Face. 

()9.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out  an<I 
place  himself  near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of  his  com- 
pany ;  the  covering  sergeant  and  file  closers  will  pass 
quickly  through  the  captain's  interval,  and  place  them- 
selves faced  to  the  rear,  the  covering  sergeant  a  pace 
behind  the  captain,  and  the  file  closers  two  paces  from  the 
front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line,  each  passing 
behind  the  covering  sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed  through  the 
interval,  the  company  will  face  about ;  the  captain  will 
place  himself  in  his  interval  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become 
the  front,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him  in  the 
front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the 
instructor  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by  company, 
both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire  bj'  file,  and  the  fire  by 
xank,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the  three 


106      SCHOOL    OF    THK    COMPANY — LESSON    FT. 

preceding  articles;  tlie  captain,  covering  sergeant,  and  tin 
men  will  conform  themselves,  in  like  manner,  to  what  i> 
therein  prescribed. 

72.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  the 
company,  now  become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by  rank,  the 
firing  will  commence  with  the  front  rank,  now  become  the 
rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Face  by  the  fronl  rank.    2.  Couipany.    3.  About — 
Face. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering  sergeant 
nnd  file  closers  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  09 
and  70. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having  faced 
about,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  resume  their 
places  in  line. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the   instructor   will   impress  on   the 
men  the   importance  of  aiming  always  at  some  particular 
object,  and  of  holding  the  piece  as  prescribed  in  the  school    I 
of  the  soldier,  No.  178. 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain  to 
make  a  short  pause  between  the  commands  aim  and  fire, 
to  give  the  men  time  to  aim  with  accuracy. 

78.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  position  to  see 
the  two  ranks,  in  order  to  detect  faults ;  he  will  charge  the 
captain  and  file  closers  to  be  equally  watchful,  and  to  re- 
port to  him  when  the  ranks  aro  at  rest.  He  will  remand, 
for  individual  instruction,  the  men  who  may  be  observed 
to  load  badly. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON   IL      107 

79.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  soldiers,  in 
the  firings,  the  highest  degree  of  composure  or  presence  of 
mind  ;  he  will  neglect  nothing  that  may  contribute  to  thir. 
end. 

80.  He  will  give  to  the  men,  as  a  (/eiieral principle,  to 
maintain,  in  the  direct  fire,  the  left  heel  in  its  place,  in 
order  that  the  alignment  of  the  ranks  and  files  may  not  be 
deranged ;  and  he  will  verify,  by  examination,  after  each 
exercise  in  firing,  the  observance  of  this  principle. 

81.  The  instructor  will  ol)serve,  in  addition  to  these  re- 
marks, all  those  which  follow. 

82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges,  it  is  par- 
ticularly recommended  that  the  men  observe,  in  uncock- 
ing, whether  smoke  escapes  from  the  tube,  which  is  a 
certain  indication  that  the  piece  has  been  discharged  ;  but 
if,  on  the  contrary,  no  smoke  escapes,  the  soldier,  in  such 
case,  instead  of  reloading,  will  pick  and  prime  again.  If, 
believing  the  load  to  be  discharged,  the  soldier  should  put 
a  second  cartridge  in  his  piece,  he  ought,  at  least,  to  per- 
ceive it  in  ramming  by  the  height  of  the  load ;  and  he 
would  be  very  culpable,  should  he  put  in  a  third.     The  in- 

I  structor  will  always  cause  arms  to  be  inspected  after  firing 
with  cartridges,  in  order  to  observe  if  the  fault  has  been 
committed,  of  putting  three  cartridges,  without  a  dis- 
charge, in  the  same  piece,  in  which  case  the  ball  screw  will 
be  applied. 

83.  It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  cap  has  missed  fire, 
that  the  tube  is  found  stopped  up  with  a  hard,  white,  and 
compact  powder;  in  this  case,  picking  will  be  dispensed 
with,  and  a  new  cap  substituted  for  the  old  one. 


108     8CHOOL    OF    THK    COMPANY — LESSON    III. 

LESSON    T  n  I  11  D  . 
AiiTicLK  First. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

M.  The  company  being  in  line  ol"  battle,  and  correctly 
aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  exercise  it  in 
marching  by  the  front,  he  will  assure  himself  that  the 
shoulders  of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  are  per- 
fectly in  the  direction  of  their  respective  ranks,  and  that 
the  sergeant  accurately  covers  the  captain ;  the  instructor 
will  then  place  himself  twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in  front 
of  them,  face  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  exactly  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  line  passing  between  their  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  directing  file, 
will  command  : 

1 .   Company,  forward. 

86.  At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated,  will  move 
»ix  paces  in  advance  of  the  captain ;  the  instructor,  from 
the  position  prescribed,  will  correctly  align  this  sergeant 
on  the  prolongation  of  the  directing  file. 

87.  This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be  charged  with 
the  direction,  will,  the  moment  his  position  is  assured, 
take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line  which 
would  pass  between  his  own  and  the  heels  of  the.  instructor. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LKSSOX    III.     109 

88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will 
step  aside,  and  command  : 

2.  March. 

SO.  At  this,  the  company  will  step  oflf  with  life.  The 
directing  sergeant  will  observe,  with  the  greatest  precision, 
the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  marching  on  the  two 
points  he  has  chosen;  he  will  take  in  succession,  and 
always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the  point  nearest  to  him, 
new  points  in  advance,  exactly  in  the  same  line  with  the 
first  two,  and  at  the  distance  of  some  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces  from  each  oth^r.  The  captain  will  march  steadily  in 
the  trace  of  the  directing  sergeant,  keeping  always  six 
paces  from  him ;  the  men  will  each  maintain  the  head 
direct  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor 
on  the  side  of  direction,  and  conform  himself  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier,  for  the  march  by 
the  front. 

90.  The  man  next  to  the  captain  will  take  special  care 
not  to  pass  him;  to  this  end  he  will  keep  the  line  of  his 
shoulders  a  little  in  the  rear,  but  in  the  same  direction 
with  those  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  distance 
of  two  paces  behind  the  rear  r.ank. 

92.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

To  the— Step. 

93.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  toward  the 
directing  sergeant,  retake  the  step  from  him,  and  again 
direct  their  eyes  to  the  front. 


110     SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    IIL 

9i.  Tlio  instnu'tor  will  cause  the  captain  iind  oovorin.;^ 
s.^rgcaut  to  be  posted  sometimes  on  tlic  right  rtml  some- 
times on  the  left  of  the  company. 

95.  The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having  tho  great- 
est influence  on  the  march  of  the  company,  he  will' be 
selected  for  the  precision  of  his  step,  his  habit  of  maintain- 
ing his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given  line  of  direc- 
tion, and  of  prolonging  tliat  line  without  variation. 

96.  If  this  sergeant  should  fail  to  observe  thesu  princi- 
ples, undulations  in  the  front  of  the  company  must  neces- 
sarily follow ;  tho  men  will  be  unable  to  contract  the 
habit  of  taking  steps  eijual  in  length  and  swiftness,  and  of 
maintaining  their  shoulders  in  a  sijuare  with  the  line  of 
direction — the  only  means  of  attaining  perfection  in  the 
march  in  line. 

97.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  better  to  establish 
the  men  in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  in  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  line,  will  cause  the  company  to 
advance  three  or  four  hundred  paces,  at  once,  without 
halting,  if  the  ground  will  permit.  In  the  first  exercises, 
he  will  march  tho  company  with  open  ranks,  the  better  to 
observe  the  two  ranks. 

9S.  The  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  that  all  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  march  in  line  are  strictly  observed  j  he  will 
generally  be  on  the  directing  flank,  in  a  position  to  ob- 
serve the  two  ranks,  and  the  faults  they  may  commit;  he 
will  sometimes  halt  behind  tho  directing  file  during  some 
thirty  successive  steps,  in  order  to  judge  whether  the 
directing  sergeant,  or  the  <lirccting  file,  deviate  from  the 
perpendicular. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    III.     Ill 


Article  Second. 

To  halt  the  company^  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and 
to  align  it. 

99.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company,  Avill 
command: 

1.  Comjmny.     2.  Halt. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  hak  : 
the  directing  sergeant  will  remain  in  advance,  unless 
ordered  to  return  to  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  company 
being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may  advance  the  first  three 
or  four  files  on  the  side  of  direction,  and  align  the  company 
on  that  basis,  or  he  may  confine  himself  to  causing  the 
alignment  to  be  rectified.  In  this  last  case,  he  will  com- 
mand: Captain,  rcctifij  the  alignment.  The  captain  will 
direct  the  covering  sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear  rank, 
when  each,  glancing  his  eyes  along  his  rank,  will  promptly 
rectify  it,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier.  No.  320. 

Article  Third. 

Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when  ihf 
instructor  shall  Avish  to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely,  be 
will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

102.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the 


W'i     S(  lIOC>L    .)K     rilK    COMPANY — LKSSON    III. 

oblique  step.  The  men  will  accurately  observe  the  priuei- 
ples  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  331.  The 
rear  rank  men  will  preserve  their  distances,  and  march  in 
roar  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  (or  left)  of  their  habitnal 
file  leaders. 

103.  "When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  march  to  be 
resumed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

104.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  company  will  resume 
the  direct  march.  The  instructor  will  move  briskly  twenty 
paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  and  facing  the  company, 
will  place  himself  exactly  in  the  prolongation  of  the  cap- 
tain and  covering  sergeant ;  and  then,  by  a  sign,  will  move 
the  directing  sergeant  on  the  same  line,  if  he  be  not 
already  on  it;  the  latter  will  immediately  take  two  points 
on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the  instructor,  and  as 
ho  advances,  will  take  new  points  of  direction,  as  is  ex- 
plained No.  SO. 

106.  In  the  oblique  march  the  men  not  having  the  touch 
of  elbows,  the  guide  will  always  be  on  the  side  toward 
which  the  oblique  is  made,  without  any  indication  to  that 
effect  being  given;  and  when  the  direct  march  is  resumed, 
the  guide  will  be,  equally  without  indication,  on  the  side 
where  it  was  previous  to  the  oblique. 

106.  The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the  oblique  to  be 
made  toward  the  side  of  the  guide.  lie  will  also  direct 
the  captain  to  have  an  eye  on  the  directing  sergeant,  in 
order  to  keep  on  the  same  perpendicular  line  to  the  front 
with  him,  while  following  a  parallel  directiuii. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    III.     113 

107.  During  the  continuance  of  the  march,  the  instructor 
will  be  watchful  that  the  men  follow  parallel  directions,  in 
conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier,  for  preserving  the  general  alignment  j  when- 
ever the  men  lose  the  alignment,  he  will  be  careful  that 
they  regain  it  by  lengthening  or  shortening  the  step,  with- 
out altering  the  cadence  or  changing  the  direction. 

108.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the 
company  and  face  to  it,  in  order  to  regulate  the  march  of 
the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  man  who  is  on  the  flank 
toward  which  the  oblique  is  made,  and  to  see  that  the 
principles  of  the  march  are  properly  observed,  and  that 
the  files  do  not  crowd. 


Article  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  the 
hack  step. 

109.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march  and  in 
quick  time,  the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  mark  time,  will 
command: 

1.  Mark  time.     2.  March. 

110.  To  resume  the  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

111.  To  cause  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the 
instructor  will  command : 


114     SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — I.r.SSON    III. 


1.  Double  quicl:.     2.  ^Makcii. 

112.  The  coramaiiil  march  will  be  pronounced  at  tht 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

llo.  To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  Makcii. 


114.  The  command  luarvh  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

115.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may 
cause  it  to  march  in  the  back  step ;  to  this  effect,  he  witf 
command: 


1.  Company^  backward.     2.  March. 


110.  The  back  stop  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  247, 
but  the  use  of  it  being  rare,  the  instructor  will  not  cause 
more  than  fifteen  or  twenty  steps  to  be  taken  in  succession, 
and  to  that  extent  but  seldom. 

117.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  company 
iti  marching  in  double  quick  time  till  the  men  are  well 
established  in  the  length  and  swiftness  of  the  pace  in  quick 
time:  ho  will  then  endeavor  to  render  the  march  of  one 
hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in  the  minute  cquallj'  easy 
and  familiar,  and  also  cause  them  to  observe  the  same 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    III.     115 

ereetness  of  body  and  composure  of  mind,  as  if  marching 
in  quick  time. 

118.  When  marching  in  double  quick  time,  if  a  subdi- 
vision (in  a  column)  has  to  change  direction  by  turnhig,  or 
has  to  form  into  line,  the  men  will  quicken  the  pace  to  one 
hundred  and  eighty  steps  in  a  minute.  The  same  swift- 
ness of  step  will  be  observed  under  all  circumstances 
where  great  rapidity  of  movement  is  required.  But,  as 
ranks  of  men  cannot  march  any  length  of  time  at  so  swift 
a  rate,  without  breaking  or  confusion,  this  acceleration 
will  not  be  considered  a  prescribed  exercise,  and  accord- 
ingly companies  or  battalions  will  only  be  habitually  exer- 
cised in  the  double  quick  time  of  one  hundred  and  sixty- 
f  ve  steps  in  the  minute. 


Article  Fifth. 
To  march  in  retreat. 

119.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in 
retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.   Company.     2.  About — Face. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the  in- 
structor will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  directing  file, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  84. 


110     SCHOOL    OF    THK    COMPANY — LESSON    III. 

121.  The  instructor,  being  correctlj'  established  on  the 
prcilongation  of  the  directing  file,  will  oommand: 

3.   Company  forward. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform  himself 
to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  S6  and  87,  with  this  dilference — 
he  will  place  himself  six  pates  in  front  of  the  line  of  file 
closers,  notv  leading. 

12.3.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of  file 
closers,  opposite  to  his  interval,  and  the  captain  will  place 
himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the  in- 
structor will  command: 

4.    i\lAKCII. 

125.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain  and  the 
men,  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
89  and  following. 

126.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  bo  executed,  marching 
in  retreat,  all  that  is  prescribed  for  marching  in  advance: 
the  commands  and  the  means  of  execution  will  be  the 
same. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company,  will, 
when  he  may  wish,  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front  by  the 
commands  prescribed  No.  119.  The  captain,  the  covering 
sergeant  and  the  directing  sergeant,  will  resume  their  ha- 
bitual places  in  line  the  moment  they  shall  have  faced 
about. 

128.  The  compan}^  being  in  march   liy  tlu'  fr<nit  rank,  if 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPAXY LKSSOX    III.      117 

the  instructor  should  wish  it  to  inarch  in  retreat,  he  'nill 
cause  the  right  about  to  be  executed  while  marching,  and 
to  this  effect  will  command: 

1.   Company.     2.  Right  about.     3.  March. 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will  promptly 
face  about,  and  recommence  the  march  by  the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with  the 
company,  and  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  front  of  the 
file  closers,  and  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  guide.  The 
instructor  will  place  him  in  the  proper  direction  by  the 
means  prescribed,  No.  104.  The  captain,  the  covering 
sergeant,  and  the  men,  will  conform  to  the  principles  pre- 
3cri')i'.l  for  the  march  in  retreat. 

131.  "When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company  to  march 
by  the  front  rank,  he  will  give  the  same  commands,  and 
will  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march  by  the  same 
means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  in  double 
quick  time,  all  the  movements  prescribed  in  the  3d,  4th, 
5th,  and  6th  lessons  of  this  school,  with  the  exception  of 
the  march  backwards,  which  will  be  executed  only  in 
quick  time.  He  will  give  the  same  commands,  observing 
to  add  donhle  quick  before  the  command  march. 

133.  "When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right  shoulder, 
in  quick  time,  the  distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  six- 
teen inches.  "Whenever,  therefore,  the  instructor  brings 
the  company  from  a  shoulder  to  this  position,  the  rear  rank 
must  shorten  a  little  the  first  steps  in  order  to  gain  the 
prescribed  distance,  and  will  lengthen  the   steps,  on  the 


118 


TUE    COMPANY — LESSON    IV. 


cuutrary,  iu  order  to  cluee  ui'  when  the  pieces  are  again 
brought  to  a  shoulder.  In  marching  in  double  quick  time, 
the  distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  twenty-six  inches, 
and  the  pieces  will  bo  carried  habitually  on  the  right 
shoulder. 

134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  mc;i  will  bring 
their  pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  command  half. 
The  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  distance.  Thene 
rales  are  (jciteial. 


LESSON    FOURTH. 
Article  First. 

To  march  hy  ilie  jlanh. 

135.  The  com[)any  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  a  halt, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the 
right  flank,  ho  will  command  : 

1.   Company^  right — Face.     2.  Forward. 
3.  March. 


136.  At  the  first  command,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  Avill  place  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  front  rank,  the  captain  having  stepped  out  for 
the  purpose,  eo  far  as  to  find  himself  by  the  side  of  the 
sergeant,  and  on  his  left;  the  front  rank  will  double  as  is 


L      ^ 


4 


I E 


l^l^S^      !!v! 


r — ;     f — ; 


y  0 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    IV.     119 

prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  362  ;  the  rear 
rank  will,  at  the  same  time,  side  step  to  the  right  one  pace, 
and  double  in  the  same  manner ;  so  that  when  the  move- 
ment is  completed,  the  files  will  be  formed  of  four  men 
aligned,  and  elbow  to  elbow.  The  intervals  will  be  pre- 
served, 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side  step  to  the 
right,  so  that  when  the  ranks  are  formed,  they  will  be  two 
paces  from  the  rearmost  rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  move  off 
briskly  in  quick  time;  the  covering  sergeant  at  the  head 
of  the  front  rank,  and  the  captain  on  his  left,  will  march 
straight  forward.  The  men  of  each  file  will  march  abreast 
of  their  respective  front  rank  men,  heads  direct  to  the 
front;  tlie  file  closers  will  march  opposite  their  places  in 
line  of  battle. 

139.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  principles  of  the 
march  by  the  flank  to  be  observed,  in  placing  himself, 
pending  the  march,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier, Ko.  357. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  left 
flank  to  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  substituting 
left  for  ri(jht;  the  ranks  will  double  as  has  been  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  354;  the  rear  rank  will 
side  step  to  the  left  one  pace  before  doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left,  the 
left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank; 
the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  left,  and  place  himself 
by  the  right  side  of  this  guide  ;  the  covering  sergeant 
will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front  rank,  the  moment  the 
latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the  left. 


]-ji)    s(MiooT.  or  Tin-:  coMrANY — lksson  iv. 

AlJTICLK    SkCOND. 

To  chatHfc  direr/ion  hy  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and  either 
in  march,  or  at  a  bait,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  wheel  by  file,  he  will  command  ; 

1.  By  file,  Icf I  (or  ri(/ht).     2.  March. 

143.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  wheel;  if 
to  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  the  latter  will  take  care 
not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to  describe  a  short  arc  of  a  circle, 
shortening  a  little  the  first  five  or  six  steps  in  order  to  give 
time  to  the  fourth  man  of  this  file  to  conform  himself  to 
the  movement.  If  the  wheel  be  to  the  side  of  the  rear 
rank,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of  twenty- 
eight  inches,  and  the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself  to 
the  movement  by  describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle  as  has 
been  explained.  Each  lile  will  come  to  wheel  on  the  same 
ground  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

114.  The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  executed 
according  to  these  principles,  in  order  that  the  distance 
between  the  files  muj'  always  be  preserved,  and  that  there 
be  no  check  or  hindrance  at  the  wheeling  point. 


fXO 

.  i*^^ 

i 

1 

I^ 

^ 
y 

r7rr,ri-i 

1  -1  1   T  1 

n  r.i  1 

rr- 1   ?  .1 

1 

E21 

rrrTH 

e 

rrrxD 

9 

tX-LU 

1 

□ 

M    !T  i 

r|,  1  m 
;       :  C2P 

LJ 

V 

1^      : 

»g 

m  tv\ 

E2) 

Bb^^ 

1^ 

>-1 

B 

j 

\m 

u 

LJ 

^    ' 

i  ■ 

3 

i 

1 

t 

w 

a 

1^ 

4 

%.:: 

■; 

u 

1 

s 

e 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    IV.     121 


Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  coynpamj  inarching  bf/  the  Jlank,  and  to 
face  it  to  the  front. 

145.  To  effect  these  objects,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Compamj.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

146.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  executed 
as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  359  and 
360.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  undoubled,  the  rear  rank 
will  close  to  its  proper  distance.  The  captain  and  cover- 
ing sergeant,  as  well  as  the  left  guide,  if  the  march  be  by 
the  left  flank,  will  return  to  their  habitual  places  in  line  at 
the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front. 

147.  The  instructor  may  then  align  the  company  by  one 
of  the  means  prescribed,  No.  100. 


Article  Fourth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it 
on  the  right  (or  lef)  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 

148.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  right,  by  file  into  line.     2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  men  doubled 


r22     SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    COMPANY — LKSSON    IV. 

will  mark  time  ;  (he  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant 
will  turn  to  the  right,  march  straigljt  forward,  and  be 
halted  by  the  instructor  when  they  shall  have  passed  at 
least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers;  the  cap- 
tain will  place  himself  cojrectly  on  the  line  of  battle,  and 
will  direct  the  alignment  as  the  men  of  the  front  rank  suc- 
cessively arrive ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself 
behind  the  captain  at  the  distance  of  the  rear  rank;  the 
two  men  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  con- 
tinue to  march,  and  passing  beyond  the  covering  sergeant 
and  the  captain,  will  turn  to  the  right ;  after  turning,  they 
will  continue  to  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct  them- 
selves toward  the  line  of  battle,  but  when  they  shall  arrive 
at  two  paces  from  this  line,  the  even  number  will  short^^n 
the  step  so  that  the  odd  number  may  precede  him  on  the 
lino,  the  odd  number  placing  himself  by  the  side  and  on 
the  loft  of  the  captain  ;  the  even  number  will  afterwards 
oblique  to  the  left,  and  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  odd 
number ;  the  next  two  men  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will 
pass  in  the  same  manner  behind  the  two  first,  turn  then 
to  the  right,  and  place  themselves,  according  to  the  moans' 
just  explained,  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of  the  two  men 
already  established  on  the  line;  the  remaining  tiles  of  this 
rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and  be  formed  to  the  loft  in 
the  same  manner.  The  rear  rank  doubled  will  exeouto  the 
movement  in  the  manner  already  explained  for  the  front 
rank,  taking  care  not  tu  commence  the  movement  until 
four  men  of  the  front  hink  are  establislied  on  the  line  of 
battle ;  the  rear  rank  men,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will 
cover  accurately  their  file  leaders. 

150.  If  the  company  be  marchiug  by  the  left  flank,  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    IV.     123 

instmctor  will  cause  it  to  furm  by  file  on  the  left  into  line 
of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the 
same  commands,  substitutins  the  indication  left  for  right. 
In  this  case,,  the  odd  numbera  will  shorten  the  step,  so  that 
the  even  numbers  may  precede  them  on  the  line.  The 
captain,  placed  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  left 
guide,  will  return  to  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  by  order 
of  the  instructor,  after* the  company  shall  be  formed  and 
aligned. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  bettor  to  comprehend  the 
mechanism  of  this  movement,  the  instructor  will  at  first 
cause  it  to  be  executed  separately  by  each  rank  doubled, 
and  afterwards  by  the  two  ranks  united  and  doubled. 

152.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
battle,  and  without  the  point  where  the  right  or  left  is  to 
rest,  in  order  to  establish  the  b«ge  of  the  alignment,  and 
afterwards  he  will  follow  up  the  movement  to  assure  him- 
self that  each  file  conforms  itself  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  149. 


Article  Fifth. 

The  compani/  being  in  inarch  by  the  jiank,  to  form  it 
by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  line,  and  to  cause  it 
to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching. 

153.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  right  flank, 
the  instructor  will  order  the  captain  to  form  it  into  line; 
the  captain  will  immediately  command  :  1.  Dy  compau>/, 
into  line.    2.   March. 


124    sciiooi.  ov    THK  comi-any—lesson  iv. 

154.  At  the  coimnuuil  march,  the  covering  sergeant  will 
continue  to  march  straight  forward;  the  men  will  advance 
the  right  shoulder,  take  the  double  quick  step,  and  move 
into  line  by  the  shortest  route,  taking  care  to  undouble  the 
files,  and  to  come  on  the  line  one  after  the  other. 

155.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in  line 
with  the  covering  sergeant,  they  will  take  from  him  th«- 
step,  and  then  turn  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

15G.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the 
movements  of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but  without  en- 
deavoring to  arrive  in  lino  at  the  same  time  with  the 
lattijr. 

157.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  captain 
will  face  to  his  company  in  order  to  follow  up  the  execu- 
tion ;  and,  as  soon  as  the  company  is  formed,  he  will 
command,  yuide  left,  place  himself  two  paces  before  the 
centre,  face  to  the  front,  and  take  the  step  of  the  company. 

158.  At  the  command,  ijnide  left,  the  second  sergeant 
will  promptly  place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  left, 
to  .«erve  as  guide,  and  the  covering  sergeant,  who  is  on 
the  opposite  (lank,  will  remain  there. 

159.  When  the  company  marches  by  the  loft  flank,  this 
movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and 
according  to  the  same  principles  ',  the  company  being 
formed,  the  captain  will  command,  guide  ri<jht,  and  place 
himself  in  front  of  his  company,  as  above;  the  covering 
sergeant,  who  is  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  will  serve 
an  guide,  and  the  .second  sergeant  placed  on  the  left  flank 
will  remain  there. 

100.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left  in 
front,  the   covering  .sergeant  and  the  second  sergeant  of 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    IV.     125 

each  company  will  always  be  placed  oq  the  right  and  left, 
respectively,  of  the  front  rank ;  they  will  be  denominated 
right  i/uide  and  left  guide,  and  the  one  or  the  other  charged 
with  the  direction. 

161.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if  it  be 
the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  cause  it  to  form  platoons,  he 
will  give  an  order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command : 

1.  By  platoon,  into  line.     2.  March. 

162.  The  movement  will  be  executed  by  each  platoon 
according  to  the  above  principles.  The  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  first 
lieutenant  before  the  centre  of  the  second,  passing  through 
tlie  opening  made  in  the  centre  of  the  company,  if  the 
march  be  by  the  right  flank,  and  around  the  left  of  his 
platoon,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left ;  in  this  last  case,  the 
captain  will  also  pass  around  the  left  of  the  second  platoon 
in  order  to  place  himself  in  front  of  the  first.  Both  the 
captain  and  lieutenant,  without  waiting  for  each  other,  will 
command  f/uidc  /eft  (or  right)  at  the  instant  their  respective 
platoons  are  formed. 

16o.  At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right),  the  guide  of 
each  platoon  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  indicated  flank  of  the 
platoon,  if  not  already  there. 

164.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  always  serve 
as  the  guide  of  the  right  or  loft  of  the  first  platoon,  and 
the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  serve,  in  like  manner, 
as  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon. 

165.  Thus  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will  be  but  one 


126     SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY — LESSON   IV. 

guide  to  each  platoon  ;  he  will  always  be  placed  on  its  left 
flank,  if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  on  the  right  flank,  if 
the  left  be  in  front. 

Ifi6.  In  these  movements,  the  file  closers  will  follow  the 
platoons  to  which  they  are  attached. 

107.  The  instructor  may  cause  the  company,  marching 
by  the  flank,  to  form  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  line, 
by  his  own  direct  commands,  using  those  prescribed  for 
the  captain,  No.  153  or  1(51. 

168,  The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  iu  pass- 
ing, without  a  halt,  from  the  march  by  the  front,  to  the 
march  by  the  flank,  and  reciprocally.  In  either  case,  he 
will  employ  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No,  363,  substituting  cumpany  for  squad.  The 
company  will  face  to  the  right  or  left,  iu  marching,  and 
the  captain,  the  guides,  and  file  closers  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed  for  each  in  the  march  by  the 
front  of  a  company  supposed  to  be  a  subdivit^ion  of  a 
column. 

109,  If,  after  facing  to  the  right  or  left,  in  marching,  the 
company  lind  itself  faced  b}'  the  rear  rank,  the  captain  will 
place  himself  two  paces  behind  the  centre  of  the  front 
rank,  now  in  the  rear,  the  guides  will  pass  to  the  rear 
rank,  now  leading,  and  the  file  closers  will  march  iu  front 
of  this  rank. 

170.  The  instructor,  iu  order  to  avoid  fatiguing  the  men, 
and  to  prevent  them  from  being  negligent  in  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms,  will  sometimes  order  support  arms  in 
marching  by  the  flank,  and  arms  on  the  right  shoulder, 
when  marching  in  lino. 


12^. 

.'^'i^.- 

h 

B      6   n 

G   ■ 

h   ^'{^.•'ff:'^^^'!^^:^^^^^ 

1 

%.  M^.f  ^^tr*?^^';k>*-# 

<h            ra 

^"'^J.r^cr:^^ 

1 

-J 

D 

t'TT^-^ — 

-i 

''^^  *^^^ 

~i 

hD 

J 

[C 

n,^--^-_^:^::ett 

;'< 

tf^^^^S^^^^ 

T^ 

R 

^\    t::^             - 

-I 

€ 

V.._^; 

-0 

1 
1 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.       12^ 


LESSON     FIFTH. 

Article  First. 

To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either  at  a  halt  or  in 
inarch. 

171.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle,  the 
instructor,  wishing  to  break  it  into  column,  by  platoon  to 
the  right,  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon^  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
rapidly  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  centres  of 
their  respective  platoons,  the  lieutenant  passing  around  the 
left  of  the  company.  They  need  not  occupy  themselves 
with  dressing,  one  upon  the  other.  The  covering  sergeant 
will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front  rank. 

173.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank  man 
of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right,  the  covering  ser- 
geant standing  fast;  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  move 
quickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a  little  beyond  the  point  at 
which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when  the  wheel  shall 
be  completed,  face  to  the  late  rear,  and  place  himself  so 
that  the  line  which  he  forms  with  the  man  on  the  right 
(who  had  faced)  shall  be  perpendicular  to  that  occupied 
by  the  company  in  line  of  battle ;  each  platoon  will  wheel 


128       SCHOOL    OK    THE    COMPANY — LKSSON    V 


1 


according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a 
fixed  pivot,  and  when  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching 
flank  ghall  approach  near  to  the  perpendicular,  its  chief 
will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

174.  At  the  comman<l  httit,  which  will  ha  given  at  the 
instant  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  shall 
liave  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  perpendicular,  the 
phitoon  will  halt;  the  covering  sergeant  will  move  to  the 
point  where  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  is  to  rest,  passing 
by  the  front  rank;  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself, 
in  like  manner,  in  respect  to  the  second  platoon.  Each 
will  take  «arc  to  Icavo  between  himself  and  the  man  on  the 
right  of  his  platoon,  a  space  equal  to  its  front;  the  captain 
and  lirst  lieutenant  will  look  to  this,  and  each  take  caro  to 
align  the  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of  the 
platoon  who  had  faced  to  the  right. 

175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  established 
on  the  perpendicular,  each  chief  will  place  himself  two 
])aceR  outside  of  his  guide,  and  facing  toward  him,  will 
command  : 

3.  Left — Dkess. 

176.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  platoon 
will  command,  Front,  and  place  himself  two  paces  before 
its  centre. 

177.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the 
juovcment  of  their  respective  platoons,  pn>serving  always 
the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    CO:\IPANY- -LKSSON    V.       129 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  phitoon  to  the  left, 
according  to  the  same  principles.  The  instructor  v.ill 
command  : 

1.  Bi/  jjlaloon,  lefl  ivJieel.     2.  March. 

179.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the  same 
manner  as  if  breaking  by  platoon  to  the  right. 

ISO.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank  man  of 
each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  platoons  will 
wheel  to  the  left,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  con- 
form to  the  principles  indicated,  Nos.  173  and  171. 

181.  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of  each 
platoon,  the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  front 
rank  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  second  sergeant  near  the 
left  of  the  second  platoon,  will  each  move  to  the  points 
where  the  right  of  his  platoon  is  to  rest.  The  chief  of 
each  platoon  should  be  careful  to  align  the  sergeant  be- 
tween himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon  who  had  faced 
to  the  left,  and  will  then  command : 


Riglit — Dress. 

182.  The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of  platoon 
will  command.  Front,  and  place  himself  opposite  its 
centre. 

183.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  company  by 
platoon    to    the   right   and  to    move  the    column    forward 


130      SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    COMPANY — LKSSOX    V. 

after  the  wheel  is  completed,  will  caution  tlie  company  to 
that  effect,  and  command  : 

1..  By  phiioon^  rigid  wheel.     2.  March. 

184.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
move  rapidly  in  front  of  their  respective  platoons,  con- 
forming to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  172,  and  will 
remnin  in  this  position  during  the  continuance  of  the 
wheel.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  command  march,  the  i)latoons  will  wheel  to 
the  right,  conforrtiing  to  the  principles  herein  prescribed  ] 
the  man  on  the  pivot  will  not  face  to  the  right,  but  will 
mark  time,  conforming  himself  to  the  movement  of  the 
inarching  flank  ;  and  when  the  man  who  is  on  the  left  of 
this  flank  shall  arrive  near  the  perpendicular,  the  instructor 
will  command: 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.  Gxdde  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  wheel  is  comploled,  the  platoons  will  move 
straight  to  the  front,  all  the  men  taking  the  step  of  twenty- 
eight  inches.  The  covering  sergeant  and  the  second  ser- 
geant will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  respective 
platoons,  the  former  passing  before  the  front  rank.  The 
leading  guide  will  immediately  take  points  on  the  ground 
in  the  direction  which  may  be  indicated  to  him  by  the 
instructor. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.       131 

187.  At  tbe  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take  the  touch 
of  elbows  lightly  to  the  left. 

188.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose  his 
distance,  or  the  line  of  direction,  he  will  conform  to  the 
principles  heroin  prescribed  Nos.  202  and  203. 

189.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the  front, 
the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  break  by  platoon  to  the  right 
by  the  same  commands.  At  the  command  march,  the  pla- 
toons will  wheel  in  the  manner  already  explained;  the 
man  on  tbe  pivot  will  take  care  to  mark  time  in  his  place, 
without  advancing  or  receding  ;  the  instructor,  the  chiefs 
of  platoon  and  the  guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  been 
prescribed  Nos.  184  and  following. 

190.  The  company  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to  the 
left,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means,  the  instructor  giving  the  commands  prescribed 
Nos.  183  and  185,  substituting  left  for  rifjht,  and  recipro- 
cally. 

191.  The  movements  explained  in  Nos.  183  and  189,  will 
only  be  executed  after  the  company  has  become  well  estab- 
lished in  the  principles  of  the  march  in  column,  Articles 
Second  and  Third. 


Remarks. 

192.  The  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  company, 
will  observe  whether  the  movement  be  executed  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  above;  whether  the  platoons, 
after  breaking  into  column,  are  perpendicular  to  the  line 
of  battle  just  occupied;  and  whether  the  guide,  who  placed 


132       SCHOOL    OF    THK    (XIMI'ANY— LESSON    V. 

himself  where  tlic  luarchirifj  flauk  of  his  platoon  had  to 
rest,  has  left,  between  himself  and  the  front  rank  man  on 
tlie  rij^lit  (or  left)  the  space  necessary  to  contain  the  front 
of  the  platoon. 

li).'{.  After  the  platoons  have  broken,  if  the  rearmost 
guide  should  not  accurately  cover  the  leadinaj  one,  ho  will 
not  seek  to  correct  his  position  till  the  column  be  put  in 
march,  unless  the  instructor,  wishing  to  wheel  immediately 
into  line,  should  think  it  necessary  to  rectify  the  direction 
of  the  guides,  which  would  be  executed  as  will  be  herein- 
after explained  in  Article  Fifth  of  this  Lesson. 

194.  The  instructor  will  observe,  that  the  man  on  the 
right  (or  left)  of  each  platoon,  who,  at  the  command 
man-h,  faces  to  the  right  (or  left)  being  the  true  pivot  of 
the  wheel,  the  front  rank  man  next  to  him  ought  to  gain  a 
little  ground  to  the  frt)nt  in  wheeling,  so  as  to  clear  the 
l)ivot  man. 


Article  Second. 

To    jnarcJi  in   column. 

19/>.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right  (or 
left)  in  front,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  column 
to  march,  will  throw  himself  twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in 
front,  face  to  the  guides,  place  himself  correctly,  on  their 
direction,  and  caution  the  leading  guide  to  take  points  on 
the  ground. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.       133 

196.  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide  of  the 
leading  platoon  will  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the 
straight  line  passing  between  his  own  and  the  heels  of  the 
instructor. 

197.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will 
step  aside,  and  command  : 

1.   Column^  forward.     2.   Guide  left  (or  right). 
3.  March. 


198.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  lead  off, 
by  a  decided  step,  their  respective  platoons,  in  order  that 
the  whole  may  move  smartly,  and  at  the  same  moment. 

199.  The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his 
neighbor  toward  the  guide,  and  conform  himself,  in 
marching,  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier.  No.  .327.  The  man  next  to  the  guide,  in  each 
platoon,  will  take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and  also  to 
march  always  about  six  inches  to  the  right  (or  left)  from 
him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out  of  the  direction. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  greatest 
precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  main- 
tain the  direction  of  his  march  by  the  means  prescribed 
No.  89. 

201.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace 
of  the  leading  one,  preserving  between  the  latter  and  him- 
self a  distance  precisely  equal  to  the  front  of  his  platoon, 
and  marching  in  the  same  step  with  the  leading  guide. 

202.  If  the  following  guide  lose  his  distance  from  the 
10 


I 


134      SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V. 

one  leading  (which  can  only  happen  by  his  own  fault),  ho 
will  correct  himself  by  slightly  lengthening-  or  shortening 
a  few  steps,  in  order  that  there  may  not  be  sudden  quic];- 
enings  or  slackenings  in  the  march  of  his  platoon. 

203.  If  the  same  guide,  having  neglected  to  march  ex- 
actly in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  find  himself  sen- 
sibly out  of  the  direction,  he  will  remedy  this  fault  by 
advancing  more  or  less  the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  true 
direction,  and  thus,  in  a  few  steps,  insensibly  regain  it, 
without  the  inconvenience  of  the  oblique  step,  which  would 
cause  a  loss  of  distance.  In  all  cases,  each  chief  of  pla- 
toon will  cause  it  to  conform  to  the  movements  of  its 
guide. 

Remarks  on  the  march  in  column. 

204.  If  the  chiefs  and  guides  of  subdivisions  neglect  to 
lead  off  and  to  decide  the  march  from  the  first  step,  the 
march  will  be  begun  in  uncertainty,  which  will  cause 
waverings,  a  loss  of  step,  and  a  loss  of  distance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  unequal  steps,  the  march 
of  his  subdivision,  and  that  which  follows,  will  be  uncer- 
tain:  there  will  be  undulations,  quickenings  and  slacken- 
ings in  the  march. 

206.  If  the  same  guide  be  not  habituated  to  prolong  a 
given  direction,  without  deviation,  he  will  describe  a  crook- 
ed line,  and  the  column  must  wind  to  conformi  itself  to 
such  line. 

207.  If  the  following  guide  be  not  habituated  to  march 
ia  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  he  will  lose  his  distance 


?s~iL.'..j L  r  I  Ln 


_i     D 

|h 

-^    [E 
j 

^^] 

1  ■"+ 

"* 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSOX    V.       135 

at  every  moment  in  endeavors  to  regain  the  trace,  the 
preservation  of  which  is  the  most  important  principle  in 
the  march  in  column. 

208.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  in  column  will  he 
responsible  for  the  direction,  distance,  and  step ;  the  chief 
of  the  suljdivision,  for  the  order  and  conformity  of  his 
subdivision  with  the  movements  of  the  guide.  Accord- 
ingly, the  chief  will  frequently  turn,  in  the  march,  to  ob- 
serve his  subdivision. 

209.  The  instructor,  placed  on  the  flank  of  the  guides, 
will  watch  over  the  execution  of  all  the  principles  pre- 
scribed;  he  will,  also,  sometimes  place  himself  in  the 
rear,  align  himself  on  the  guides,  and  halt,  pending  some 
thirty  paces  together,  to  verify  the  accuracy  of  the  guides. 

210.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  always  re- 
peat, with  the  greatest  promptitude,  the  commands  march 
and  hdlt,  no  chief  waiting  for  another,  but  each  fepcating 
the  command  the  moment  he  catches  it  from  the  instructor. 
They  will  re]>eat  no  other  command  given  by  him  ;  but 
will  explain,  if  necessary,  to  their  subdivisions,  in  an  un- 
der tone  of  voice,  what  they  will  have  to  execute,  as  indi- 
cated by  the  commands  of  caution. 


Article  Third. 

To  change  direction. 

211.  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while  march- 
ing, will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 


i;]G       SCHOOL    OK    Tlir.    COMPANY — LKSSON    V. 

for  wheeling  on  tlie  march.  Whenever,  therefore,  a  column 
is  to  change  direction,  the  instructor  will  change  the  guide, 
if  not  already  there,  to  the  flank  opposite  the  side  to  Vhich 
the  change  is  to  be  made. 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  it  be 
the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  change  direction  to  the  right, 
he  will  give  the  order  to  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  and 
immediately  go  himself,  or  send  a  marker  to  the  point  at 
which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made;  the  instruc- 
tor, or  marker,  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast  to  that  flank  of  the 
column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  march  on  that 
person,  so  that,  in  passing,  his  left  arm  may  just  graze  his 
breast.  When  the  leading  guide  shall  have  approached 
near  to  the  marker,  the  chief  of  his  platoon  will  command  : 

1.  Rigid  wheel.     2.  March. 

214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  platoon 
is  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  the  marker. 

215.  At  the  command  m<irch,  which  will  be  pronounced 
at  the  instant  the  guide  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the 
marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  396. 

210.  The  wlieel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
will  command : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  executed 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.       137 

as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  sohlier,  Nos.  398  and 
.'}99.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  take  points  on  the 
ground  in  the  new  direction,  in  order  the  better  to  regu- 
late the  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight 
forward  till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will  wheel  to  Ihe 
right,  and  retake  the  direct  march  by  the  same  commands 
and  the  same  means  which  governed  the  first  platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  the 
instructor  should  Avish  to  change  direction  to  the  left,  he 
will  command,  yuide  right.  At  this  command,  the  two 
guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  their  respective 
platoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his  subdivision  ;  the 
men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right ;  the  in- 
structor will  afterward  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
212. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the  change  of 
direction  to  the  right,  but  by  inverse  means. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the 
instructor  will  command,  guide  left. 

222.  The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in  front, 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time,  the 
platoons  will  wheel  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  404. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  formations  in 
line,  which  can  be  executed  only  by  turning  to  the  right 
or  the  left,  the  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  the  column 
to  change  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide.     In  this  case, 


138     SCHOOL  OF  tup:  comtaxy — lesson  v. 

the  chief  of  the  lejiilinj^  platoon  will  command:  Left  (or 
r\<jhi)  (urn  insteail  of  left  (or  ritjht)  wheel.  Tho  subdi- 
visions will  each  turn,  in  succession,  conforming  to  what 
is  prescribed  in  tho  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402.  The 
leading  guide,  as  soon  as  ho  has  turned,  will  take  points 
on  the  ground,  the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the 
march. 

225.  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve  dis- 
tances and  the  direction,  that  all  the  subdivisions  of  the 
column  should  change  direction  precisely  at  the  point 
where  the  leading  subdivision  changed ;  it  is  for  this  rea- 
son that  that  point  ought  fo  be  marked  in  advance,  and 
that  it  is  prescribed  that  the  guides  direct  their  march  on 
the  marker,  also  that  each  chief  of  subdivision  shall  not 
cause  the  change  to  commence  till  the  guide  of  his  subdi- 
vision has  grazed  the  breast  of  this  marker. 

22G.  Each  chief  will  take  care  that  his  subdivision  ar- 
rives at  the  point  of  change  in  a  square  with  the  line  of 
direction  :  with  this  view,  he  will  face  to  his  subdivision 
when  the  one  which  precedes  has  commenced  to  turn  or  to 
wheel,  and  he  will  be  watchful  that  it  continues  to  march 
squarely  until  it  arrives  at  the  point  where  the  change  of 
direction  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of  the  subdi- 
vision which  wheels  should  not  clear  the  wheeling  point, 
the  next  subdivision  would  bo  arrested  and  distances  lostj 
for  the  guide  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  having  to 
describe  an  arc,  in  length  abouk  a  half  greater  than  the 
front  of  the  subdivision,  the  second  subdivision  would  be 
already  up  with  tho  wheeling  point,  whilst  tho  first  which 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY. — LESSON    V.      139 

^wheels  has  yet  the  half  of  its  front  to  execute,  and  hence 
would  be  obliged  to  mark  time. until  that  half  be  executed. 
It  is,  therefore,  prescribed  that  the  pivot  of  each  subdi- 
vision should  take  steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches  in  length, 
according  to  the  swiftness  of  the  gait,  in  order  not  to 
arrest  the  march  of  the  next  subdivision.  The  chiefs  of 
subdivision  will  look  well  to  the  step  of  the  pivot,  and 
cause  his  step  to  be  lengthened  or  shortened  as  may  be 
judged  necessary.  By  the  nature  of  this  movement,  the 
centre  of  each  subdivision  will  bend  a  little  to  the  rear. 

228.  The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or  the  ca- 
dence of  the  step,  whether  the  change  of  direction  be  to 
the  side  of  the  guide  or  to  the  opposite  side. 

229.  The  marker,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point,  will 
always  present  his  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column.  The 
instructor  will  take  the  greatest  pains  in  causing  the  pre- 
scribed principles,  to  be  observed;  he  will  see  that  each 
subdivision  only  commences  the  change  of  direction  when 
the  guide,  grazing  the  breast  of  the  marker,  has  nearly 
passed  him,  and  that  the  marching  flank  does  not  describe 
the  arc  of  too  large  a  circle,  in  order  Ihat  it  may  not  be 
thrown  beyond  the  new  direction. 

230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel,  the  guide  of  the 
wheeling  flank  will  cast  his  eyes  over  the  ground  at  the 
moment  of  commencing  the  wheel,  and  will  describe  an 
arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  equal  to  the  front  of  the 
subdivision. 


140    school  of  the  company — lksson  v. 

Article  Fourth. 

To   halt  the   column. 

231.  The  column  beinfr  in  march,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command : 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

232.  At  the  second  command,  i^romptly  relocated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  column  will  halt;  the  guides  also 
will  stand  fast,  although  they  may  have  lost  both  distance 
and  direction. 

233.  If  the  command  lialt  be  not  repeated  with  the 
greatest  vivacity,  and  executed  at  the  same  instant,  dis- 
tances will  be  lost. 

234.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to  recover 
it  after  that  command,  he  will  only  throw  his  fault  on  the 
following  guide,  who,  if  ho  have  marched  well,  will  no 
longer  be«at  his  proper  distance:  and  if  the  latter  regain 
what  he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement  will  be  propagated  to 
tlic  rear  of  the  column. 


Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or 
left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  on  the 
march. 

•235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  column,  right  in 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.       141 

front,  and  wishing  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  will  place 
himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  leading  guide, 
face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position  of  the 
guide  beyond ;  which  being  executed,  he  will  command : 

Left — Dress. 

23G.  At  this  command,  wliich  Avill  not  be  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  each  of  them  will  place  himself 
briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct  the 
alignment  of  the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the  direction 
of  the  column. 

lo7.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will  com- 
mand Froxt,  and  return  quickly  to  his  place  in  column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March. 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of  each 
platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast; 
the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of 
wheels  from  a  halt,  and  in  conformity  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  194.  Each  chief  will  turn  to  his  platoon  to 
observe  its  movement,  and  when  the  marching  flank  has 
[approached  near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

240.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the  march- 


142       SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSOX    V. 

ing   flank  of  the   platDon    is    thrco   paces  from   the  line  of 
battle.  I 

241.  The  chief  of  tho  second  i)latoou,  having  halted  it, 
Avill  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around  the 
left  of  his  subdivision. 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  tho  first  jilatoon.  will 
move  rapidly  to  tho  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  com- 
pany will  rest  in  line  of  battle,  and  command: 

Right — DiiESS. 

243.  At  this  coiiiiiiand,  the  two  ]ilatoons  will  dress  up  on 
the  alignment;  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the 
leading  platoon,  who  finds  himself  opposite  the  instructor 
established  on  the  direction  of  the  guides,  will  place  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  this  officer.  The 
captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from  the  right  on  the 
man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  tho  company. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

FUONT. 

245.  The  instructor  seeing  tho  company  in  lino  of  battle, 
will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

246.  At  this  command,  tlie  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
the  cMptain,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  a 
file  closer. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instructor 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.       143 

should  wish  to  form  it  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  he 
will  place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  lead- 
ing guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  posi- 
tion of  the  guide  beyond;  which  being  executed,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Plight  into  line  taheel.     2.  March. 

248.  At  the  command  viarch,  tlie  front  rank  man  on  the 
right  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right  and  place  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side, 
who  stands  fast;  each  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and 
will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  when  the  marching  flank  has 
approached  near  the  line  of  battle;  for  this  purpose,  the 
chief  of  each  platoon  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

219.  The  command  halt,  will  l>e  given  when  the  march- 
ing flank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of 
battle.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having  halted  his 
platoon,  will  resume  his  place  in  the  rank  of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will 
move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  company 
[Will  rest,  and  command  : 

Left — Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on 
the  alignment ;  the  man  on  tbe  left  of  the  second  platoon, 
[Opposite  the  instructor,  will  place  his  breast  lightly  against 


144     SCHOOL  or  tiik  comtany — lksson  v. 

the  rijrht  arm  of  this  (ifficcr,  and  the  captain  will  direct  the 
alignment  from  the  left  on  the  man  on  tlie  oi>i>osite  flank 
of  the  company. 

252.  The  company  hc'uti;  alij^ned,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

FUOXT. 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterward  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

254.  At  this  command,  the  captain  -will  move  to  the 
rij;ht  of  his  company,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
him,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  phice  as  a  file 
clo.^er. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command  left  or  n'ljlit 
dresH,  previous  to  commanding  left  or  r/r//t«  into  line,  ichecl. 
unless,  after  rectifying  the  position  of  the  guides,  it  should 
become  necessary  to  dress  the  platoons,  or  one  of  them, 
laterally  to  the  right  or  left. 

25G.  The  instructor,  before  the  commaiul  /<;/V  (or  rujht) 
into  line,  uheel,  will  assure  himself  that  the  rearmost  pla- 
to(»n  is  at  its  e.\act  wheeling  distance  from  the  one  in  front. 
This  attention  is  important,  in  order  to  detect  negligence 
on  the  part  of  guides  in  this  essential  point. 

257.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the 
instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halting 
the  column,  he  will  give  the  commands  prescribed  No. 
238.  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the 
leading  guide. 

258.  At  the  command   march,  briskly  repeated   by  the 


8CIIOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.      145 

chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt  short,  the  instruct- 
or, the  chiefs  of  platoon^  and  the  platoons,  will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  239  and  following. 

259.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  this  forma- 
tion will  be  made  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
by  inverse  means. 

260.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the 
instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halting 
the  column,  and  to  march  the  company  in  line  to  the  front, 
he  will  command : 

1.  By  platoons  left  wheel.     2.  Makch. 

261.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt:  the  man  next 
to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon  will  mark  time  :  the  pla- 
toons will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the  principles 
of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  When  the  right  of  the 
platoons  shall  arrive  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  instructor 
will  command: 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  right  (or  left). 

262.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant  the 
wheel  is  completed,  all  the  men  of  the  company  will 
move  off  together  with  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches; 
the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  the  covering 
sergeant  and  the  left  guide,  will  take  their  positions  as  in 
line  of  battle. 

263.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given  immedi- 
11 


146     SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VL 

atoly  after  the  fourth,  the  captain  ami  covering  sergeant, 
if  not  already  there,  will  move  briskly  to  the  siilc  on 
which  the  guide  is  designated.  The  non-commissioned 
officer  charged  with  the  direction  will  move  rapidly  in 
front  of  the  guide,  and  will  be  assured  in  his  line  of  march 
by  the  instructor,  as  is  prescribed,  No.  104.  That  non- 
commissioned officer  will  immediately  take  points  on  the 
ground  as  indicated  in  the  same  number.  The  men  will 
take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  conform- 
ing themselves  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line. 

2G4.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column  left 
in  front. 


LESSON    SIXTH. 
AUTICLE    FlUST. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form 
the  company. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons. 

265.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  step,  and 
supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  break  by  platoon, 
he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command: 
1.  Break  into  ])latoo7i8,  and  immediately  place  himself 
before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 


>.,j 

?n 

1 

1 

1 

i 

A 

"    1  F^      5    n 

!            A 

r^l,  ^-  [■  V...\:.±'M^^M^ 

l^j'rf  !  ■s.rU'^M^ 

1     n        ra 

'.j,,j  i  1  •  1  1  i  1  '  1 

LJ.-I_.LJ_J.1,lJ__l 

1Z3  a      i±;    a 

%          "^ 

j 

1 

n 

J 

! 

j 

t?!".; 

-l-L 

Li  J.L  J'_LLJ_LJ.L  J    L  J.!^ 

1  _L 

Li  JJ..L.I_M_IJ..LLJ_.    1 

1 

^ 

A 

CT       B     ^          ~ 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI.     147 

266.  At  the  command  break  into  platoons,  the  first  lieu- 
tenant will  pass  quickly  around  the  left  to  the  centre  of 
his  platoon,  and  give  the  caution  :  Mark  time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command :    2.  March. 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight 
forward;  the  covering  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
left  flank  of  this  platoon  (passing  by  the  front  rank),  as 
^^oon  as  the  flank  shall  be  disengaged. 

269.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the 
second  platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time :  its  chief  will 
immediately  add:  1.  Jiifjht  oblique ;  2.  Mauch.  The  last 
command  will  be  given  so  that  this  platoon  may  com- 
mence obliquing  the  instant  the  rear  rank  of  the  first 
platoon  shall  have  passed.  The  men  will  shorten  the  step 
in  obliquing,  so  that  when  the  command  forward  march  ig 
given,  the  platoon  may  have  its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near  the 
direction  of  the  guide  of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the  second 
will  command  Forward,  and  add  March,  the  instant  that 
the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover  the  guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will  break 
into  platoons  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the  first  pla- 
toon all  that  has  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  and 
reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will 
shift  to  the  right  flank  of  the  second  platoon,  and  the 
covering  sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right  of  the  first. 

To  re-form  the  company. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right  in 


148     SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI. 

front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  form 
Company,  ho  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command  :  Form  conipnin/, 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will  im- 
mediately add:  1.   Fi'mt  platoon  ;  2.  Ri(jht  ohlhpic. 

275.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it  to 
continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

276.  The  captain  will  then  command:  3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  tho 
second,  the  first  platoon  will  oblique  to  the  right,  in  order 
to  unmask  the  second;  the  covering  sergeant,  on  tho  left 
of  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to  the  right  of  tho  com- 
pany, passing  by  the  front  rank. 

27S.  When  the  first  platoon;  shall  have  nearly  unmasked 
tho  second,  the  captain  will  command:  1.  Mark  time,  and 
at  the  instant  the  unmasking  shall  be  complete,  he  will 
add:  2.  March.  The  first  platoon  will  then  ceaso  to 
oblique,  and  mark  time. 

279.  In  the  mean  time  the  second  platoon  will  have  con- 
tinued to  march  straight  forward,  and  when  it  shall  be 
nearly  up  with  the  first,  the  captain  will  command  For- 
ward, and  at  the  instant  the  two  platoons  shall  unite,  add 
March;  the  first  platoon  will  then  ceaso  to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  movement  will 
be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  giving  the  command  Forward,  and  the  captain 
adding  the  command  March,  when  the  platoons  are  united. 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right,  will 
pass  to  its  left  flank  the  moment  the  platoon  begins  to 
oblique;  the  guide  of  tho  first,  on  its  right,  remaining  on 
that  flank  of  the  platoon. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMrANY — LESSON    VI.      141) 

282.  The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause  the  com- 
pany to  break  and  re-form,  by  platoon,  by  his  own  direct 
commands.  In  this  case,  he  will  give  the  general  com- 
mands prescribed  for  the  captain  above:  1.  Break  into 
■pJatoonn ;   2.  MarCH  ;   and   1.   Form  Covipanj/ ;   2.   Maroh. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons,  the  sub- 
division that  breaks  oflf  should  mark  time  too  long,  it 
might,  in  a  column  of  many  subdivisions,  arrest  the  march 
of  the  following  one,  which  would  cause  a  lengthening  of 
the  column,  and  a  loss  of  distances. 

284.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  necessary  that  the 
platoons  which  oblique  should  not  shorten  the  step  too 
much,  in  order  not  to  lose  distance  in  the  column,  and  not 
to  arrest  the  march  of  the  following  subdivision. 

285.  If  a  platoon  obliques  too  far  to  a  flank,  it  would  be 
obliged  to  oblique  again  to  the  opposite  flank  to  regain  the 
direction,  and  by  the  double  movement  arrest,  probably, 
the  march  of  the  following  subdivision. 

286.  The  chiefs  of  those  platoons  which  oblique  will 
face  to  their  platoons,  in  order  to  enforce  the  observance 
of  the  foregoing  principles. 

287.  When,  in  a  column  of  several  companies,  they 
break  in  succession,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance  that 
each  company  should  continue  to  march  in  the  same  step, 
without  shortening  or  slackening,  whilst  that  which  pre- 
cedes breaks,  although  the  following  company  should  close 
up  on  the  preceding  one.  This  attention  is  essential  to 
guard  against  an  elongation  of  the  column. 

288.  Faults  of  but  little  moment,  in  a  column  of  a  few 
companies,  would  be  serious  inconveniences  in  a  general 
column    of  many  battalions.     Hence   the   instructor  will 


150     SCHOOL    OF    THE    company — LESSON    VI. 

give  the  greatest  care  in  causing  all  the  pres.cribed  prin- 
ciples to  be  strictly  observed.  To  this  end,  he  will  hold 
himself  on  the  directing  flank,  the  better  to  observe  all 
the  muvcmcnts. 


Article  Second. 

Be i Jig  in  column^  to   break  Jiles  to  the   rear,  and  to 
cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

289.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  right  (or  left)  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  files  to  break 
off  ho  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  immedi- 
ately turn  to  liis  company,  and  command: 

1.   Two  Jiles  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear.     2.  March. 

290.  At  the  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the  left 
(or  right)  of  the  company  will  mark  time,  the  others  will 
continue  to  march  straight  fotward;  the  two  rear  rank 
men  of  these  files  will,  as  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the 
company  shall  clear  them,  move  to  the  right  by  advancing 
the  outer  shoulder;  the  odd  number  will  place  himself 
behind  the  third  file  from  that  flank,  the  even  number 
behind  the  fourth,  passing  for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd 
number  ;  the   two  front  rank  men  will,   in   like  manner. 


& 


rrr-T-r-TT-T-rTrfrj 


rK 


!■  I'  r;  '■  n^FE" 


Li.L-j.  J   I  J.La.L  :   L 


i 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI.     151 

move  to  the  rigbt  when  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  shall 
clear  them,  the  odd  number  will  place  himself  behind  the 
first  file,  the  even  number  behind  the  second  file,  passing 
for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd  number.  If  the  files  are 
broken  from  the  right,  the  men  will  move  to  the  left,  ad- 
vancing the  outer  shoulder,  the  even  number  of  the  rear 
rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the  odd  num- 
ber of  the  same  rank  behind  the  fourth;  the  even  number 
of  the  front  rank  behind  the  first  file,  the  odd  number  of 
the  same  rank  behind  the  second,  the  odd  numbers  for  this 
purpose  passing  behind  the  even  numbers.  The  men  will 
be  careful  not  to  lose  their  distances  and  to  keep  aligned. 

291.  If  the  instructor  should  still  wish  to  break  two  files 
from  the  same  side,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain, 
who  will  proceed  as  above  directed. 

292.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the 
files  already  broken,  advancing  a  little  the  outer  shoulder, 
will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  to  the  right,  if  the  files  are 
broken  from  the  left,  and  to  the  left,  if  the  files  are  broken 
from  the  right,  shortening,  at  the  same  time,  the  step,  in 
order  to  make  room  between  themselves  and  the  rear  rank 
of  the  company  for  the  files  last  ordered  to  the  rear;  the 
latter  will  break  by  the  same  commands  and  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  first.  The  men  who  double  should  increase 
the  length  of  the  step  in  order  to  prevent  distances  from 
being  lost. 

293.  The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the  front  of  a 
company  by  breaking  off  successive  groups  of  two  files, 
but  the  new  files  must  always  be  broken  from  the  same 
aide. 

294.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  files  broken  ofi"  to 


152     SCHOOL    OK    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI. 

return   into   line,  will   give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who 
will  immediately  command : 

1.   Two  files  into  line.     2.  March. 

295.  At  the  commund  march,  the  first  two  files  of  those 
marching  by  the  flank  will  return  briskly  into  line,  and 
the  others  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  b^'  advancing 
the  inner  shoulder  toward  the  flank  to  which  they  belong. 

296.  The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  watch  the 
observance  of  the  principles  which  have  just  been  pre- 
scribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two  files 
to  break  one  after  another,  and  to  return  again  into  line, 
will  afterwards  cause  two  or  three  groups  to  break  to- 
gether, and  for  this  purpose,  will  command:  Four  or  six 
files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear;  MAnCH.  The  files  desig- 
nated will  mark  time;  each  rank  will  advance  a  little  the 
outer  shoulder  as  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the  company 
shall  clear  it,  will  oblique  at  once,  and  each  group  will 
place  itself  behind  the  four  neighboring  files,  and  in  the 
game  manner,  as  if  the  movement  had  been  executed 
group  by  group,  taking  care  that  the  distances  are  pre- 
served. 

298.  The  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain  to  cause 
two  or  three  groups  to  bo  brought  into  line  at  once,  who, 
turning  to  the  company,  will  command: 

Four  or  six  Jil.es  into  line — March. 

209.  At  the   command   march,  the  files  designated  will 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    COMPANY LESSOX    VI.      153 

advance  tbe   inner  shoulder,  move    up    and    form  on  the 
flank  of  the  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 

300.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  the 
guide  on  that  flank  will  gradually  close  on  the  nearest 
front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  and  he  will  also  open 
out  to  make  room  for  files  ordered  into  line. 

301.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed  in 
the  following  order:  the  left  files  as  if  the  company  was 
marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  right  files  as  if  the 
company  was  marching  by  tlie  left  flank.  Consequently, 
whenever  th,ere  is  on  the  right  or  left  of  a  subdivision  a 
file  which  does  not  belong  to  a  group,  it  will  be  broken 
singly. 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances  in 
column  that  the  men  should  be  habituated  in  the  schools 
of  detail  to  execute  the  movements  of  this  article  with 
precision. 

303.  If  new  files  broken  off  do  not  step  well  to  the  left 
or  right  in  obliquing;  if,  when  files  are  ordered  into  line, 
they  do  not  move  up  with  promptitude  and  precision,  in 
either  case  the  following  files  will-  be  arrested  in  their 
march,  and  thereby  cause  the  column  to  be  lengthened 
out. 

304.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank  from 
which  the  files  are  broken,  to  assure  himself  of  the  exact 
observance  of  the  principles. 

305.  Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of  di- 
rection, in  order  that  the  whole  company  may  easily  pass 
from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 


154      SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI. 


Article  Tiiikd. 

To   march   the   column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the 
movements  incident  thereto. 

SOfi.  The  swiftness  of  the  route  step  will  be  one  hundred 
and  ten  steps  in  a  minute ;  this  swiftness  will  be  habitually 
maintained  in  columns  in  route,  when  the  roads  and  ground 
may  permit.  » 

307.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  con- 
stitute a  subdivision  of  a  column,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  the  route  step,  he  will 
command  : 

1.   Column,   forward.     2.   Guide,   left   (or  I'ight).     3. 
Route- step.     4.  March. 

308,  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captain, 
the  two  ranks  will  step  off  together ;  the  ret^r  rank  will 
take,  in  marching,  by  shortening  a  few  stops,  a  distance  of 
one  pace  (twenty-eight  inches)  from  the  rank  preceding, 
which  distance  will  be  computed  from  the  breasts  of  the 
men  in  the  rear  rank  to  the  knapsacks  of  the  men  in  the 
front  rank.  The  men  without  further  command,  will  im- 
mediately carry  their  arms  at  will,  as  indicated  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No,  219.  They  will  no  longer  be 
required  to  march  in  the  cadence  pace,  or  with  the  same 
foot,  or  to  remain  silent.  The  files  will  march  at  ease;  but 
care  wil^  be  taken  to  prevent  the  ranks  from  intermixing. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON   YI.      15o 

the  front  rank  from  getting  in  advance  of  the  guide,  and 
the  rear  rank  from  opening  to  too  great  a  distance. 

309.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  the  in- 
structor will  cause  it  to  change  direction,  which  will  be 
executed  without  formal  commands,  on  a  simple  caution 
from  the  captain;  the  rear  rank  will  come  up  to  change 
direction  in  the  same  manner  as  the  front  rank.  Each 
rank  lyill  conform  itself,  although  in  the  route  step,  to  the 
principles  which  have  been  prescribed  for  the  change  in 
closed  ranks,  with  this  diiference  only — that  the  pivot- 
man,  instead  of  taking  steps  of  nine,  will  take  steps  of 
fourteen  inches,  in  order  to  clear  the  wheeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to  cause 
it  to  pass  to  the  cadenced  step,  the  instructor  will  first 
order  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  then 
command : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

311.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume  the 
cadenced  step,  and  will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  distance  of 
sixteen  inches  between  each  rank. 

312.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  pace,  the 
instructor  to  cause  it  to  take  the  route  st€p,  will  command: 

1.  Route  step.     2.  March. 

313.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  will  con- 
tinue the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  the  rear  rank  will 
take,   by  gradually  shortening   the  step,  the  distance  of 


loG      SCHOOL   OF    TIIK   rOMPAXY — ^LESSON    VI. 

twentj'-eight   inches   from    the  fmnt  rank :    the  men  will 
carry  their  arms  at  will. 

.314.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route  step,  and 
the  instructor  should  suppose  the  necessity  of  marching 
by  the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  he  will  command  : 


1.   Company  hy  the  riylit  (or  Jefl^  flank.     2.  By  Jile 
left  (or  right).     3.  March. 


."15.  At  the  command  march,  the  corapanj'  will  face  to 
the  right  (or  left)  in  marching,  the  captain  will  place  him- 
pelf  by  the  side  of  the  guide  who  conducts  the  leading 
flank;  this  guide  will  wheel  immediately  to  the  left  or 
right;  all  the  files  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  the 
same  spot  as  the  guide ;  if  there  be  files  broken  off  to  the 
rear,  they  will,  by  wheeling,  regain  their  respective  places, 
and  follow  the  movement  of  the  company. 

816.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  company  to  bo 
again  formed  into  line,  will  exercise  it  in  increasing  and 
diminishing  front,  by  platoon,  which  will  bo  executed  by 
the  same  commands,  and  the  same  means,  as  if  the  com- 
pany were  marching  in  the  cadenced  step.  When  the 
company  breaks  into  platoons,  the  chief  of  each  will 
move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will  take  the  place 
of  the  guide,  who  will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

?A7.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and 
supposed  to  march  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor  can 
cause  the  front  to  be  diminished  and  increased,  by  section, 
if  the  platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  files  or  more. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI.      157 

318.  The  movements  of  diminishing  and  increasing 
front,  by  section,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples indicated  for  the  same  movements  by  platoon.  The 
right  sections  of  platoons  will  be  commanded  by  the  cap- 
tain and  first  lieutenant,  respectively ;  the  left  sections,  by 
the  two  next  subalterns  in  rank,  or,  in  their  absence,  by 
sergeants. 

319.  The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  section,  will 
give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command : 

1.  Break  into  sections.     2.  March. 

320.  As  soon  as  the  platoons  shall  be  broken,  each  chief 
of  section  will  place  himself  on  its  directing  flank  in  the 
front  rank,  the  guides  who  will  be  thus  displaced  will  fall 
back  into  the  rear  rank ;  the  file  closers  will  close  up  to 
within  one  pace  of  this  rank. 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  in  the 
column  in  route,  the  movement  will  never  be  executed  in 
the  manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be  the  front  of  the  com- 
pany. 

322.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  re-form  platoons, 
he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command : 

1.  Form  platoons.     2.  March. 

323.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  section  will 
place  himself  before  its  centre,  and  the  guides  will  pass 
into  the   front  rank.     At  the  command  march,  the  move- 

12 


158     SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI. 

ment  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed  for  forming 
company.  The  moment  the  platoons  are  formed,  the  chiefs 
of  the  left  sections  will  return  to  their  places  as  tile  closers. 

324.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  to  be  executed  the 
diminishing  and  increasing  front  by  liles,  as  prescribed  in 
the  preceding  article,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if 
marching  in  the  cadonced  step.  When  the  company  is 
broken  into  sections,  the  subdivisions  must  not  be  reduced 
to  a  front  of  less  than  six  files,  not  counting  the  chief  of 
the  section, 

325.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or  by  sec- 
tion, the  instructor  will  cause  it,  marching  in  the  route 
step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  by  the 
commands  and  the  means  indicateel,  Nos.  314  and  315. 
The  moment  the  subdivisions  shall  face  to  the  right  (or 
left),  the  first  file  of  each  will  wheel  to  the  left  (or  right), 
in  marching,  to  prolong  the  direction,  and  to  unite  with 
the  rear  file  of  the  subdivision  immediately  preceding. 
The  file  closers  will  take  their  habitual  places  in  the  march 
l)y  the  flank,  before  the  union  of  the  subdivisions. 

320.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  undouble  the  files,  which 
might  sometimes  bo  found  necessary,  he  will  inform  the 
captain,  who,  after  causing  the  cadenced  step  to  be  re- 
sumed, and  arms  to  be  shouldered  or  supported,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  In  two  rauls,  undouble  files.     2.  Marcil 

327.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will  con- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LKSSOX    VI.      159 

tinue  to  march  straight  forward,  the  even  numbers  will 
shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the  left  will  place  them- 
selves promptly  behind  the  odd  numbers  ;  the  rear  rank 
will  gain  a  step  to  the  left  so  as  to  retake  the  touch  of 
elbows  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

328.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  it 
will  be  the  even  numbers  who  will  continue  to  march  for- 
ward, and  the  odd  numbers  who  will  undouble. 

329.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double  the  files,  he 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command : 


1.  In  four  ranks,  double  files.     2.  March. 


330.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  will  double  in  the 
manner  as  explained,  when  the  company  faces  by  the 
right  or  the  left  flank.  The  instructor  will  afterwards 
cause  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

331.  The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this  lesson 
may  be  executed  in  double  quick  time.  The  men  will  be 
brought,  by  degrees,  to  pass  over  at  this  gait  about  eleven 
hundred  yards  in  seven  minutes. 

332.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step 
shall  halt,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the  command 
halt,  and  the  whole  will  shoulder  arms. 

333.  Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  be  per- 
mitted to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  the}^  shall  find 
most  convenient,  paying  attention  only  to  holding  the 
muzzle  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accidents. 


igo    school  of  the  company — lksson  vi. 

Article  Fourth. 

Countermarch. 

.334.  The  compauy  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  con- 
stitute part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  countermarch,  he  will 
command: 

1,  Counterinarch.    2.  Company^  right — Face.    3.  By 
file  left.     4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right,  the  two  guides  to  the  right  about;  the  captain 
will  go  to  the  right  of  his  company  and  cause  two  files  to 
break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  himself  by  the  side  of 
the  front  rank  man,  to  conduct  him. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  both  guides  will  stand 
fast;  the  company  will  step  off  smartly;  the  first  file  con- 
ducted by  the  captain,  will  wheel  around  the  right  guide, 
and  direct  its  march  along  the  front  rank  so  as  to  arrive 
behind,  and  two  paces  from  the  left  guide;  each  file  will 
come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  around 
the  right  guide  ;  the  loading  file  having  arrived  at  a  point 
opposite  to  the  left  guide,  the  captain  will  command  ; 

1.   Company.      2.    Halt.      3.  Front.     4.  Right — 
Dress. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    YI.      161 

337-  The  first  command  will  be  given  at  four  paces 
from  the  point  where  the  leading  file  is  to  rest. 

338.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 

340.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the  right; 
the  captain  will  step  two  paces  outside  of  the  left  guide, 
now  on  the  right,  and  direct  the  alignment,  so  that  the 
front  rank  may  be  enclosed  between  the  two  guides  ;  the 
company  being  aligned,  he  will  command  Front,  and 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  company  as  if  in 
column  ;  the  guides,  passing  along  the  front  rank,  will 
shift  to  their  proper  places,  on  the  right  and  left  of  that 
rank. 

341.  In  a  column,  by  platoon,  the  countermarch  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to  the 
same  principles;  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will  face  about, 
and  its  chief  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  file  on 
the  right,  to  conduct  it. 

342.  In  a  column,  left  in  ft-ont,  the  countermarch  will  be 
executed  by  inverse  commands  and  means,  but  according 
to  the  same  principles.  Thus,  the  movement  will  be  made 
by  the  right  flank  of  subdivisions,  if  the  right  be  in  front, 
and  by  the  left  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front;  in  both  cases 
the  subdivisions  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  side  of  the  front 
rank. 


1G2     SCHOOL    OF    THE    company — LESSON    VI. 


Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  hj  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right 
(or  left)  into  line  of  battle. 

343.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being  in 
march,  the  instructoi-,  wishing  to  form  it  on  the  right  into 
line  of  battle,  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  right  into  line.     2.   Guide  right. 

314.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of  each  platoon 
will  shift  quickly  to  its  right  flank,  and  the  men  will  touch 
elbows  to  the  right;  the  column  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward. 

345.  The  instructor  having  given  the  second  command, 
will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the 
company  ought  to  rest  in  line,  and  place  himself  facing 
the  point  of  direction  to  the  left  which  he  will  choose. 

346.  The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  so  chosen  that  the 
guide  of  each  platoon,  after  having  turned  to  the  right, 
may  have,  at  least,  ten  paces  to  take  before  arriving  upon 
that  line. 

.347.  The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly  opposite  to 
the  instructor,  the  chief  the  first  platoon  will  command: 
1.  I{i<iht  turn;  and  when  exactly  opposite  to  that  point,  he 
will  add : 

2.  March. 

348.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon  will  turn 


^ 


XJ  1  !  I  I  I  rn" 

J-,J-i    MINI    I 


niT 


SCHOOL    OF    THK    COMPANY — LESSON    VI.      163 

to  the  right,  in  conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402.  Its  guide  will  so 
direct  his  march  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  man,  next  on 
his  left,  opposite  to  the  instructor;  the  chief  of  the  platoon 
will  march  before  its  centre  ;  and  when  its  guide  shall  be 
near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

o49.  At  the  command  haJt,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  right  of  the  platoon  shall  arrive  at  the  distance 
of  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  the  platoon  will 
halt;  the  files,  not  yet  in  line,  will  come  up  promptly. 
The  guide  will  throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  oppo- 
site to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon ;  he  will 
face  to  the  instructor,  who  will  align  him  on  the  point  of 
direction  to  the  left.  The  chief  of  platoon  having,  at  the 
same  time,  gone  to  the  point  where  the  right  of  the  com- 
pany is  to  rest,  will,  as  soon  as  he  sees  all  the  files  of  the 
platoon  in  line,  command  : 

Flight — Dkess. 

350.  At  this,  the  first  platoon  will  align  itself;  the  fx*ont 
rank  man,  who  finds  himself  opposite  to  the  guide,  will 
rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide, 
and  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  from  the  right,  will  direct 
the  alignment  on  this  man. 

351.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight 
forward,  until  its  guide  shall  arrive  opposite  to  the  left  file 
of  the  first;  it  will  then  turn  to  the  right  at  the  command 


164     SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI. 

of  its  chief,  and  march  toward  the  line  of  battle,  its  guide 
directing  himself  on  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon. 

352.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of  three 
paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will  be  halted, 
as  prescribed  for  the  first;  at  the  instant  it  halts,  its  guide 
will  spring  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the 
three  left  files  of  his  platoon,  and  will  be  assured  in  hi? 
position  by  the  instructor. 

353.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its  files 
in  line,  and  its  guide  established  on  the  direction,  will 
command : 

Right — Dress. 

354.  Having  given  this  command,  he  will  return  to  his 
place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around  the  left;  the  second 
platoon  will  dress  up  on  the  alignment  of  the  first,  and. 
when  established,  the  captain  will  command  : 

Front. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

35G.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  return  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

357.  A  column,  by  platoon,  left  in  front,  will  form  on  the 
left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and,  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the  second  platoon 
what  is  jprescribed  for  the  first,  and   reciprocally.     The 


SCIIOOI-    OP^    THE    COMPAXY — LESSON    VI.      1G5 

chief  of  the  second  platoon  having  aligned  it,  from  the 
point  of  appui  (the  leftj,  will  retire  to  his  place  as  a  file 
closer.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon  three 
paces  behind  the  line  of  battle,  will  go  to  the  same  point 
to  align  this  platoon,  and  then  command  :  Front.  At  the 
command,  rjuides — posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the  cap- 
tain will  shift  to  his  proper  flank,  and  the  guides  take 
their  places  in  the  line  of  battle. 

358.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are  to  be  exer- 
cised, at  the  same  time,  in  the  school  of  the  company,  the 
colonel  will  indicate  the  lesson  or  lessons  they  arc  sever- 
ally to  execute.  The  whole  will  commence  by  a  bugle 
signal,  and  terminate  in  like  manner. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  single 
rank,  and  reciprocally. 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks  in  the 
manner  indicated  No.  8,  school  of  the  soldier,  and  sup- 
posed to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  or  left  in  front, 
when  .the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  single  rank, 
he  will  command : 

1.  In  one  rank,  form  company.     2.  March. 

360.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  will  face  to 
the  right. 

361.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  step 
off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank. 

362.  The  first  file  will  step  off  at  the  same  time  with  the 


1G6      SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LKSSON    VI. 

guide;  the  front  rank  mim  will  turn  to  the  ri-rlit  ut  the 
first  step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  himself  followed  by  the 
rear  rank  man  of  his  file,  who  will  come  to  turn  on  the 
same  spot  where  he  had  turned.  The  second  file,  and  suc- 
cessively all  the  other  files,  will  step  off  as  has  been  pro- 
scribed for  the  first,  the  front  rank  man  of  each  file  follow- 
ing immediately  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  file  next  on 
his  right.  The  captain  will  superintend  (he  movement, 
and  when  the  last  man  shall  have  stepped  off,  he  will  halt 
the  company,  and  face.it  to  the  front. 

363.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  places  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank. 

364.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks^  form  company.    2.  Company^  right — 
Face.     3.  March. 

365.  At  the  second  command,  the  comjiany  will  face  to 
the  right:  the  right  guide  and  the  man  on  the  right  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front. 

306.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who  have  faced 
to  the  right  will  step  oflF,  and  form  files  in  the  following 
mannor:  the  second  man  in  the  rank  will  place  himself 
])chind  the  first  to  form  the  first  file ;  the  third  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  first  in  the  front  rank;  the 
fourth  behind  the  third  in  the  rear  rank.  All  the  others 
will,  in  like  manner,  place  themselves,  alternately,  in  the 
front  and  rear  rank,  and  will  thus  form  files  of  two  men, 
on  the  left  of  those  already  formed. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPAXY — LESSON    VI.      16  7 

367.  The  formations  above  described  will  be  habitually 
executed  by  the  right  of  companies  ;  but  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  have  them  executed  by  the  left,  hQ 
will  face  the  company  about,  and  post  the  guides  in  the 
rear  rank. 

368.  The  formation  will  then  be  ex,ecuted  by  the  same 
commandgi,  and  according  to  the  same  principles  as  by  the 
front  rank ;  the  movement  commencing  with  the  left  file. 
now  become  the  right,  and  in  each  file  by  the  rear  rank 
man,  now  become  the  front;  the  left  guide  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  right. 

369.  The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will  face  the 
company  to  its  proper  front. 

370.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute  either  of 
the  formations  above  described,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to 
break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  and 
will  then  give  the  commands  just  prescribed  for  the  in- 
structor. Each  company  will  execute  the  movement  as  if 
acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  compan?/  fi'om  hco  ranks  into  four^ 
and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt  and  in  march. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a  halt, 
j  and  supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column  right  in  front, 
1  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks, 
1  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.    2.  Company,  left — 
Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick— March). 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will  remain 


1G8      SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    COMPANY — LKSSOX    VI. 

faced  to  the  front,  the  company  will  face  to  the  left :  thv 
rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  of  one  pace  from  the  front 
rank  by  a  side  step  to  the  left  and  rear,  and  the  men  will 
form  into  four  ranks  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier. 

373.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four  men 
will  re-faco  to  the  front  without  undoubling.  All  the  other 
files  of  four  will  step  off,  and  closing  successively  to  about 
five  inches  of  the  preceding  file,  will  halt,  and  immedi- 
ately face  to  the  front,  the  men  remaining  doubled. 

374.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places  in  line  of 
battle,  at  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

375.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wi.'-h  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  ho  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  In  two  ranl:<<,fonn  company.    2.  Company^  rigid — 
Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

377.  At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will  stand 
fast,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right. 

378.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  step 
off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank.  The 
leading  file  of  four  men  will  step  otf  at  the  same  time,  the 
other  files  standing  fast;  the  second  file  will  step  off  when 
there  shall  bo  between  it  and  the  first  space  suflScient  to 
form  into  two  ranks.  The  following  files  will  execute  suc- 
cessively what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  As 
soon  as  tlie  last  file  shall  have  its  distance,  the  instructor 
will  command: 


SCHOOL    OF    TUF    COMPANY — LFSSON    VI.      169 


1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

379.  At  the  command  front,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  front,  antl  the  files  will  undouble. 

380.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and 
marching  to  the  front,  when  the  instrnctor  shall  wish  to 
form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  command  : 


1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.  2.  By  the 
left,  double  files.  3.  March  (or  double  quick 
— March). 

381.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  left 
file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the 
front;  the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  left,  the 
odd  numbers  placing  themselves  behind  the  even  numbers. 
The  even  numbers  of  the  rear  rank  will  shorten  their  steps 
a  little,  to  permit  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  to  get 
between  them  and  the  even  numbers  of  that  rank.  The 
files  thus  formed  of  fours,  except  the  left  file,  will  continue 
to  march  obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps  slightly,  so  as 
to  keep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guide  ;  each  file  will 
close  successively  on  the  file  next  on  its  left,  and  when  at 
the  proper  distance  from  that  file,  will  face  to  the  front  by 
a  half  face  to  the  right,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  left. 

382.  The  company  being  in  march  to  the  front  in  four 
ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two 
ranks,  he  will  command  : 

13 


170     SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    COMPANY — LKSSON    VI. 

1.  In  tivo  ranks^  form  companTj.  2.  Bjf  the  right, 
uridouhle  files,  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

383.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  left 
file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the 
front;  the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  and 
march  obliquely,  lengthening  the  step  a  little,  in  order  to 
keep,  as  near  as  possible,  abreast  of  the  guide.  As  soon 
as  the  second  file  from  the  left  shall  have  gained  to  the 
right  the  interval  necessary  for  the  left  file  to  form  into 
two  ranks,  the  second  file  will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half 
face  to  the  left  and  march  straight  forward ;  the  left  file 
will  immediately  form  into  two  ranks,  and  take  "the  touch 
of  elbows  to  the  left.  Each  file  will  execute  successively, 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  file  next  to  the  left, 
and  each  file  will  form  into  two  ranks  when  the  file  next 
on  its  right  has  obliqued  the  required  distance  and  faced 
to  the  front. 

38i.  If  the  company  bo  supposed  to  make  part  of  a 
column,  left  in  front,  these  diflcrent  movements  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse 
means,  substituting  the  indication  hj't  for  riyht. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

General  j)rinciples  and  division  of  the  instruction. 

1.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  subjected 
to  such  rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander  the  means  of 
moving  them  in  any  direction  with  the  greatest  prompti- 
tude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should  be 
executed  with  the  same  precision  as  in  closed  ranks,  nor  is 
it  desirable,  as  such  exactness  would  materially  interfere 
with  their  prompt  execution. 

3.  When  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the  way 
for,  and  to  protect  the  advance  of,  the  main  corps,  their 
movements  should  be  so  regulated  by  this  corps  as  to  keep 
it  constantly  covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  reserve, 
the  strength  and  composition  of  which  will  vary  according 
to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  distance 
of  the  main  corps,  a  very  small  reserve  will  be  sufficient 
for  each  company,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  fill  vacant 
places,  furnish  the  line  with  cartridges,  relieve  the  fa- 
tigued, and  serve  as  a  rallying  point  for  the  skirmishers. 

6.  If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance,  be- 
sides the   company  reserves,  another  reserve  will  be  re- 


172  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

quired,  composed  of  entire  companios,  whieb  will  be  em- 
ployed to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts  of  the  line  as 
may  be  warmly  attacked;  this  reserve  should  h%  strong 
enough  to  relieve  at  least  half  the  companies  deployed  as 
skirmishers. 

7.  The  reserve  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre  of  the 
line  of  skirmishers,  the  company  reserves  at  one  hundred 
and  fifty,  and  the  principal  reserve  at  four  hundred  paces. 
This  rule,  however,  is  not  invariable.  The  reserves,  while 
holding  themselves  within  sustaining  distance  of  the  line, 
should  be,  as  much  as  possible,  in  position  to  afford  each 
other  mutual  protection,  and  must  carefully  profit  by  any 
accidents  of  the  ground  to  conceal  themselves  from  the 
view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  shelter  themselves  from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  e.vecuted  in 
quick,  or  double  quick  time.  The  run  will  be  resorted  to 
only  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in 
the  manner  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated  by  the 
sounds  of  the  bugle. 

11.  The  ofiicers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-commissioned 
officers,  will  repeat,  and  cause  the  commands  to  be  execu- 
ted, as  soon  as  they  are  given ;  but  to  avoid  mistakes, 
when  the  signals  arc  employed,  they  will  wait  until  the 
last  bugle  note  is  sounded  before  commencing  the  move- 

•ment. 

12.  When  skirmishers  are  ordered  to  move  rapidly,  the 
ofiicers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  see  that  the 
men  economize  their  strength,  keep  cool,  and  profit  by  all 
the  advantages  which  the  ground  may  ofi"er  for  cover.     It 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  173 

is  only  by  this   continual   watchfulness  on  the  part  of  all 
grades,  that  a  line  of  skirmishers  can  attain  success. 

13.  This  instruction  will  be  divided  into  five  articles, 
and  subdivided  as  follows  : 


Article  First. 

1.  To  deploy  forward. 

2.  To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

3.  To  extend  intervals. 

4.  To  close  intervals. 

5.  To  relieve  skirmishers. 


Article  Second. 

1.  To  advance  in  line. 

2.  To  retreat  in  line. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  march  bv  the  flank. 


Article    Third. 

1.  To  fire  at  a  halt. 

2.  To  fire  marching. 

Article  Fourth. 

1.  The  rally. 

2.  To  form  column  to  march  in  any  direction. 

3.  The  assembly. 


174  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


Article  Fifth. 

1.  To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

2.  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

14.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that  the 
movements  are  executed  by  a  company  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, on  a  front  equal  to  that  of  the  battalion  in  order 
of  battle.  In  the  fifth  article,  it  is  supposed  that  each  com- 
pany of  the  battalion,  being  deployed  as  skirmishers,  oc- 
cupies a  front  of  one  hundred  paces.  From  these  two 
examples,  rules  may  be  deduced  for  all  cases,  whatever 
may  be  the  numerical  strength  of  the  skirmishers,  and  the 
extent  of  ground  they  ought  to  occupy. 


Article  First. 

Deploymenia. 

15.  A  company  may  be  <lcploycd  as  skirmishers  in  tw<^ 
ways :  forward,  and  by  the  flank. 

16.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  when  the 
company  is  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be  established 
as  skirmishers :  it  will  be  deployed  by  the  flank,  when  it 
finds  itself  already  on  that  line. 

17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  bo  deployed  as  skirmish- 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  1  7/j 

ers,  it  will  be  divided  into  two  platoons,  and  each  platoon 
will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections ;  the  comrades  in  bat- 
tle, forming  groups  of  four  men,  will  be  careful  to  know 
and  to  sustain  each  other.  The  captain  will  assure  him- 
self that  the  files  in  the  centre  of  each  platoon  and  section 
are  designated. 

18.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  on  its 
right,  left,  or  centre  file,  or  on  any  other  named  file  what- 
soever. In  this  manner,  skirmishers  may  be  thrown  for- 
ward with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  on  any  ground 
they  may  be  required  to  occupy. 

19.  A  chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to  preserve 
their  alignment,  but  no  advantages  which  the  ground  may 
present  should  be  sacrificed  to  attain  this  regularity. 

20.  The  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on  the 
extent  of  ground  to  be  covered ;  but  in  general,  it  is  not 
proper  that  the  groups  of  four  men  should  be  removed 
more  than  forty  paces  from  each  other.  The  habitual 
distance  between  men  of  the  same  group  in  open  grounds 
will  be  five  paces ;  in  no  case  will  they  lose  sight  of  each 
other. 

21.  The  front  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  battalion  com- 
prehends its  front  and  the  half  of  each  interval  which 
separates  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right  and  left.  If  a 
line,  whose  wings  are  not  supported,  should  be  covered  by 
skirmishers,  it  will  be  necessary  either  to  protect  the  flanks 
with  skirmishers,  or  to  extend  them  in  front  of  the  line  so 
far  beyond  the  wings  as  eff"ectually  to  oppose  any  attempt 
which  might  be  made  by  the  enemy's  skirmishers  to  dis- 
turb the  flanks. 


176  1N8TUUCTION    FOR    SKIUMISHKRS. 


To  deploy  forward. 

22.  A  company  being  at  a  bait  or  in  march,  when  the 
captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  forward  on  the  left  file  of 
the  first  platoon,  holding  the  second  platoon  in  reserve, 
he  will  command  : 


1.  First  platoon — as  skirmisliers. 

2.  On  the  left  file — take  intervals. 

3.  MARcn  (or  double  quick — March). 

23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third  lieuten- 
ants will  place  themselves  rapidly  two  paces  behind  the 
centres  of  the  right  and  left  sections  of  the  first  platoon: 
the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one  pace  in  front  of  the  cen- 
tre of  the  first  platoon,  and  will  place  himself  between  the 
two  sections  in  the  front  rank  as  soon  as  the  movement 
begins;  the  fourth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left 
of  the  front  rank  of  the  same  platoon,  as  soon  as  he  can 
puss.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  this  sergeant  the  point 
oil  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct  his  march.  The  first 
lieutenant,  placing  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon,  will  command  : 

Second  platoon  backward — March. 

24.  At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  step  three 


"~1 


liViniiiGi  iiiifiirnJB.e  a  bm  b  e^fraa  i  cir  i 


M 

IS  D  iri 


'M^^'M* 


i«M         '<ik  a« 


__  BKII  Bin  IB  ■■■ 

■  ■         v«         »■        «»  oa         e|i        ■■  SJ" 


,    I !  i ; ;       ;  ;    < 

I    I     s  I  I   I  'I 


/  >     ^  /  J 


■■         ■■         ■■  kml'0     ///y'  //. 

■■         ■■         ■■  -F^ ////,', V 


I  ^ 


i 

1  -y^^"^.- 

L . 

INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  177 

paces  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  unmask  the  flank  of  the  first 
platoon.  It  will  then  be  halted  by  its  chief,  and  the 
second  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left,  and  the 
third  sergeant  on  the  right  flank  of  this  platoon. 

25.  At  the  command  morcli,  the  left  group  of  four  men, 
conducted  by  the  fourth  sergeant,  will  direct  itself  on  the 
point  indicated  ;  all  the  other  groups  of  fours  throwing 
forward  briskly  the  left  shoulder,  will  move  diagonally  to 
the  front  in  double  quick  time,  so  as  to  gain  to  the  right 
the  space  of  twenty  paces,  which  shall  be  the  distance 
between  each  group  and  that  immediately  on  its  left. 
When  the  second  group  from  the  left  shall  arrive  on  a  line 
with,  and  twenty  paces  from  the  first,  it  will  march 
straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  gait  and  direction 
of  the  first,  keeping  constantly  on  the  same  alignment  and 
at  twenty  paces  from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all  the 
others,  will  conform  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  second  ;  they  will  arrive  successively  on  the  line.  The 
right  guide  will  arrive  with  the  last  group. 

26.  The  left  guide  haviixg  reached  the  point  where  the 
left  of  the  line  should  rest,  the  captain  will  command  »he 
skirmishers  to  halt;  the  men  composing  each  group  of 
fours  will  then  immediatly  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each 
other,  and  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  front  rank  man  of 
the  even  file  in  each  group,  the  rear  rank  men  placing 
themselves  on  the  left  of  their  file  leaders.  If  any  groups 
be  not  in  line  at  the  command  halt,  they  will  move  up 
rapidly,  conforming  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed. 

27.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be  fired 
upon  by  the  enemy,  the  captain  may  cause  the  groups  of 
fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gain  their  proper  distances. 


178  INSTRUCTION    FOK    SKIRMISHERS. 

28.  The  line  bcin;;  formed,  the  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers on  the  right,  left  and  centre  of  the  platoon  will  place 
themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  the 
positions  they  respectively  occupied.  The  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities,  and  then 
place  themselves  twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  their  sections,  each  having  with  him  four  men 
taken  from  the  reserve,  and  also  a  bugler,  who  will  repeat, 
if  necessary,  the  signals  sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skirmishers  should  bo  particularly  instructed  to 
take  advantage  of  any  cover  which  the  ground  may  offer, 
and  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground  whenever  such  a  move- 
ment is  necessary  to  protect  them  from  the  fire  of  the 
enemy.  Regularity  in  the  alignment  should  yield  to  this 
important  advantage. 

30.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieutenant  will 
face  the  second  platoon  about,  and  march  it  promptly,  and 
by  the  shortest  line,  to  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  will  hold  it  always 
at  this  distance,  unless  ordered  to  the  contrary. 

31.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the  movements 
of  the  line.      Thin  rule  in  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habitually  in 
the  scabbard,  and  this  rule  applies  equally  to  the  skir- 
mishers and  the  reserve;  whenever  bayonets  are  required 
to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  bo  given.  The  cap- 
tain will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the  whole 
deployment,  and  then  promptly  place  himself  about  eighty 
paces  in  the  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  lino.  lie  will  have 
with  him  a  bugler  and  four  men  taken  from  the  reserve. 

33.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right  or  the 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  179 

centre  of  the  platoon,  by  the  same  commands,  substituting 
the  indication  right  or  centre,  for  that  of  left  file. 

.34.  The  deployment  on  the  right  or  the  centre  will  be 
made  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  above ;  in  this 
latter  case,  the  centre  of  the  platoon  will  be  marked  by  the 
right  group  of  fours  in  the  second  section  ;  the  fifth  ser- 
geant will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  this  group,  and 
serve  as  the  guide  of  the  platoon  during  the  deployment. 

35.  In  whatever  manner  the  dcploj'ment  be  made,  on  the 
right,  left,  or  centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of  fours  will 
always  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  other,  and  upon  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file.  The  deploy- 
ments will  habitually  be  made  at  twenty  paces  interval; 
but  if  a  greater  interval  be  required,  it  will  be  indicated  in 
the  command. 

36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers,  so  near 
the  main  body  as  to  render  a  reserve  unnecessary,  the  en- 
tire company  will  be  extended  in  the  same  manner,  and 
according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for  the  deployment  of 
a  platoon.  In  this  case,  the  third  lieutenant  will  command 
the  fourth  section,  and  a  non-commissioned  officer  desig- 
nated for  that  purpose,  the  second  section  ;  the  fifth  ser- 
geant will  act  as  centre  guide ;  the  file  closers  will  place 
themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  their 
places  in  line  of  battle.  The  first  and  second  lieutenant 
will  each  have  a  bugler  near  him. 


180  INSTllUCTION    FOR    SKIUM  ISII KRS. 


To  deploy  hy  the  jlank. 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain  shall 
wish  to  deplo}'  it  by  the  flank,  holding  the  first  platoon  in 
reserve,  he  will  coramand  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  By  the  right 
Jlank — take  intervals.  3.  M.\ii.cii  (ot  double  quick 
— March). 

38.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieiitenants 
will  place  themselves,  respectively,  two  paces  behind  the 
centres  of  the  first  and  second  sections  of  the  second  pla- 
toon;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  pace  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon;  the  third  ser- 
geant, as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  satne  platoon.  The  captain 
will  indicate  to  him  the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to 
direct  his  march.  The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  exe- 
cute Avhat  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon,  Nos.  23  and  24.  The  fourth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  sergeant 
will  remain  on  the  right  flank. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third  lieuten- 
ants will  place  themselves  two  paces  behind  the  left  group 
of  their  respective  sections. 

40.  At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  commence  the  movement;  the  left  group 
of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but  will  deploy  as  soon  as  there  is 


Pa<r 


"^sms^m" 


2  |[:ii  B  s  B  a  Ks  c  a  h:  a  B  D  %      o* 


INSTRUCTIOX    FOR    SKIRMISIIKRS.  181 

room  on  its  right,  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed, 
No.  26;  the  third  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of 
the  right  group,  to  conduct  itj  the  second  group  will  halt 
at  twenty  paces  from  the  cne  on  its  left,  the  third  group  at 
twenty  paces  from  the  second,  and  so  on  to  the  right.  A3 
the  groups  halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy,  and  deploy  as 
has  been  explained  for  the  left  group. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular  attention 
to  the  successive  deployments  of  the  groups,  keeping  near 
the  group  about  to  halt,  so  as  to  rectify  any  errors  which 
may  be  committed.  When  the  deployment  is  completed, 
they  will  place  themselves  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  cen- 
tre of  their  sections,  as  has  been  heretofore  prescribed. 
The  non-commissioned  oflScers  will  also  place  themselves 
as  previously  indicated. 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  causing  it  to  face  about,  will  move  it  as 
indicated,  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  substituting  left  flank  for 
right  flanh. 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deploy  the  company 
upon  the  centre  of  one  of  the  platoons,  he  will  command : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  By  the  right 
and  left  flanks — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

45.  At  the  first  command,  the  officers  and  non-commis- 
sioned officers  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed, 
No.  38. 

14 


182  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

46.  At  the  second  command,  tbo  first  lieutenant  will 
place  himself  behind  the  left  group  of  the  right  section  of 
the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieutenant  behind  the  right 
group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same  platoon. 

47.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  section  will  face 
to  the  right,  the  left  section  will  face  to  the  left,  the  group 
on  the  right  of  this  latter  section  will  stand  fast.  The 
two  sections  will  move  off  in  opposite  directions;  the  third 
sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  file  to 
conduct  it,  the  second  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  left  file. 
The  two  groups  nearest  that  which  stands  fast,  will  each 
halt  at  twenty  paces  from  this  group,  and  each  of  the 
other  groups  will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  group 
which  is  in  rear  of  it.  Each  group  will  deploy  as  hereto- 
fore prescribed.  No.  40. 

48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct  the  move- 
ment, holding  themselves  always  abreast  of  the  group 
which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be  made 
on  any  named  group  whatsoever;  in  this  case,  the  fifth 
sergeant  will  place  himself  before  the  group  indicated,  and 
the  deployment  will  bo  made  according  to  the  principles 
heretofore  prescribed. 

50.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed,  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles. 

To  extend  intervals. 

51.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend  a  line 
of  skirmishers,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  deployments. 


INSTRUCTIOX    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  183 

52.  If  it  bo  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is  at  a 
halt,  and  that  the  captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to  the  left,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  By  the  left  Jlank  (so  many  paces),  extend  intervals, 
2.  March  (or  douUe  quick — March). 

53.  At  the  command  march,  the  group  on  the  right  will 
stand  fast,  all  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
each  group  will  extend  its  interval  to  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance bj'  the  means  indicated,  No.  40. 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to  pre- 
serve between  each  other  the  distance  of  five  paces,  unless 
the  nature  of  the  ground  should  render  it  necessary  that 
they  should  close  nearer,  in  order  to  keep  in  sight  of  each 
other.  The  intervals  refer  to  the  spaces  between  the 
groups,  and  not  to  the  distances  between  the  men  in  each 
group.  The  intervals  will  be  taken  from  the  right  or  left 
man  of  the  neighboring  group. 

55.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the  front, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the  right, 
he  will  command : 

1.  On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces),  extend  inter- 
vals,    2.  March  (or  double  quick — MarchJ. 

56.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  con- 
tinue to  march  on  the  point  of  direction ;  the  other 
groups  throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and  taking 
the    double   quick    step,  will   open   their  intervals  to  the 


184  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

prescribed  distance,  by  tbe  means  indicated,  No.  25,  con- 
forming also  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  54. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre  of  the 
line,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

58.  If  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that  one 
company  or  platoon  should  occupy  a  line  which  had  been 
previously  occupied  by  two,  the  men  of  the  company  or 
platoon  which  is  to  retire  will  fall  successively  to  the 
rear  as  they  are  relieved  by  the  extension  of  the  in- 
tervals. 

To  clone  intervals. 

59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals,  will 
bo  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the 
deployments. 

60.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and  the  cap- 
tain should  wish  to  close  intervals  to  the  left,  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces),  close  intervals. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

61.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  will  stand 
fast,  tbe  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left  and  close  to  the 
prescribed  distance,  each  group  facing  to  the  enemy  as  it 
attains  its  proper  distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  captain 
will  command  : 

1.  On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces),  close  intervals. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


a.Tr. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  185 

63.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  con- 
tinue to  move  on  in  the  direction  previously  indicated  ; 
the  other  groups,  advancing  the  right  shoulder,  will  close 
to  the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced  to  the  pre- 
scribed distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on  the 
centre,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

65.  When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order  to 
reinforce  a  line  of  skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause  two  com- 
panies to  cover  the  ground  which  had  been  previously 
occupied  by  one,  the  new  company  will  deploy  so  as  to 
finish  its  movement  at  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  it 
is  to  occupy,  and  the  men  will  successively  move  upon 
that  line,  as  they  shall  be  unmasked  by  the  men  of  the 
old  company.  The  reserves  of  the  two  companies  will 
unite  behind  the  centre  of  the  line. 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  be  relieved, 
the  captain  will  be  advised  of  the  intention,  which  he 
will  immediately  communicate  to  his  first  and  second 
lieutenants. 

67.  The  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment  for- 
ward, so  as  to  finish  the  movement  at  about  twenty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  line. 

68.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  now  com- 
pany, by  command  of  their  captain,  will  advance  rapidly 
a  few  paces  beyond  the  old  line  and  halt;  the  new  line 
being  established,  the  old  company  will  assemble  on  its 
reserve,  taking  care  not  to  get  into  groups  of  fours  until 
they  are  beyond  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 


186  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

69.  If  tho  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  marching  in 
retreat,  the  company  thrown  out  to  relieve  them  will 
deploy  by  the  flank,  as  prescribed.  No.  38  and  following. 
The  old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire  with  order, 
and  having  passed  the  new  line,  they  Avill  form  upon  the 
reserve. 


Article  Second. 

To  advance. 

To  advance  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line. 

70.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company,  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, is  marching  by  tho  front,  the  guide  will  be 
habitually  in  tho  centre.  No  particular  indication  to 
this  effect  need  be  given  in  the  commands,  but  if  on  the 
contrary  it  be  intended  that  tho  directing  guide  should 
be  on  the  right,  or  left,  tho  command  yuide  riyht,  or  (juidc 
left,  will  bo  given  immediately  after  that  of  forward. 

71.  The  captain,  wisliing  the  line  of  skirmishers  to 
advance,  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  jNIarcti  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the  greatest 
rapidity  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and  in  case  of  need,  by 
the  sergeants.  This  rule  is  general,  whether  the  skir- 
mishers march  by  tho  front  or  by  the  flank. 


INSTRUCTION   FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  18/ 

73.  At  the  first  command,  three'  sergeants  will  move 
briskly  on  the  line,  the  first  on  the  right,  the  second  on 
the  left,  and  the  third  in  the  centre. 

74.  At  the  command  march,  the  lino  will  move  to  the 
front,  the  guide  charged  with  the  direction  will  move  on 
the  point  indicated  to  him,  the  skirmishers  will  hold  them- 
selves aligned  on  this  guide,  and  preserve  their  intervals 
toward  him. 

75.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  immediately  be- 
hind their  sections,  so  as  to  direct  their  movements. 

76.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence  to 
the  movement. 

77.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  he  will 
command: 

Halt. 

78.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will 
halt.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify  any 
irregularity  in  the  alignment  and  intervals,  and  after  tak- 
ing every  possible  advantage  which  the  ground  may  oflFer 
for  protecting  the  men,  they,  with  the  three  sergeants  in 
the  line,  will  retire  to  their  proper  places  in  rear. 

79.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skirmishers  in 
retreat,  will  command  : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

80.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will  move 
on  the  line  as  prescribed,  No.  73. 

81.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will   face 


188  INSTRUCTIOX    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

about  individually,  and  march  to  the  rear,  conforming  to 
the  principles  prescribed,  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exertion  to 
preserve  order, 

8.3.  To  halt  the  skirmi.'^hers,  marching  in  retreat,  the 
captain  will  command : 

Halt. 

84.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt,  and 
immediately  face  to  the  front. 

85.  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  guides  will 
each  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  78. 

To  change  direction. 

86.  If  the  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will 
command: 

1.  llifjht  loheel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

87.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  mark 
time  in  his  place ;  the  left  guide  will  move  in  a  circle  to 
the  right,  and  that  ho  may  properly  regulate  his  move- 
ments, will  occasionally  cast  his  ej'cs  to  the  right,  so  as  to 
observe  the  direction  of  the  line,  and  the  nature  of  the 
ground  to  be  passed  over.  The  centre  guide  will  also 
march  in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and  in  order  to  conform  his 
movements  to  the  general  direction,  will  take  care  that  his 
steps  are  only  half  the  length  of  the  steps  of  the  guide  on 
the  left. 


INSTPtUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  189 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of  their 
steps  by  their  distance  from  the  marching  flank,  being 
less  as  they  approach  the  pivot,  and  greater  as  they  are 
removed  from  it;  they  will  often  look  to  the  marching 
flank,  so  as  to  preserve  the  direction  and  their  intervals. 

89.  "When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to 
resume  the  direct  march,  he  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  cease  to  wheel, 
and  the  skirmishers  Avill  move  direct  to  the  front;  the 
centre  guide  will  march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indi- 
cated to  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  Avish  to  halt  the  line,  in  place 
of  moving  it  to  the  front,  he  Avill  command: 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command,  the  line  will  halt. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  made 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  means,  and  by  the  same 
commands,  as  a  line  marching  in  advance;  for  example, 
if  the  captain  should  wish  to  refuse  his  left,  now  become 
the  right,  he  will  command:  1.  Left  wheel.  2.  March. 
At  the  command  halt,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the 
enemy. 

95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  the  line,  the  captain  should 
wish  to  continue  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will,  when  he 
judges  the  line  has  wheeled  sufficiently,  command: 


190  INRTRUCTIOX    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March. 
To  march  hj  the  Jiank. 

96.  The  captain,  wishing  the  skirmishers  to  march  by 
the  right  flank,  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  Jlank.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

97.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will  place 
themselves  on  the  line. 

98.  At  the  command  iiuo-ch,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  move  oS";  the  rigl^t  guide  will  place  himself 
bj'  the  side  of  the  leading  man  on  the  right  to  conduct 
him,  and  will  march  on  the  point  indicated;  each  skir- 
misher will  take  care  to  follow  exactly  in  the  direction  of 
the  one  immediately  preceding  him,  and  to  preserve  his 
distance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  bo  marched  by  the  left  flank, 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  com- 
mands, sul)stituting  Irft  for  riijht ;  the  left  guide  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  to  conduct 
h  i  m . 

lUO.  If  the  skiniiishers  be  marrhing  by  the  llaiik,  and 
the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  them,  he  will  command: 

Halt. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  191 

101.  At  this  commanJ,  the  skirmishers  will  bait  ami 
face  to  the  enemy.  The  oflBcers  and  sergeants  will  con- 
form to  what  has  been  prescribed,  No.  78. 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements  of 
the  line,  and  be  held  always  about  one  hundred  and  fifty 
paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  position  to  second  its  opera- 
tions. 

103.  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to  march 
it  in  advance,  he  will  command:  1.  Plalnon,  foricard.  2. 
Guide  left.  3.  March.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  it  in 
retreat,  he  will  command:  1.  In  retreat.  2.  March.  3. 
Guide  ri'jht.  At  the  command  halt,  it  will  re-face  to  the 
enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  vinderstand  that  the 
signals  or  commands,  such  as  forward,  mean  that  the 
skirmishers  shall  march  on  the  enemy;  in  retreat,  that 
they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  left  fank,  that  the 
men  must  face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever  may  be  their 
position. 

105.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
the  captain  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the  right 
(or  left),  he  will  command:  1.  By  file  rifjht  {ox  left).  2. 
March.  These  movements  will  also  be  executed  by  the 
signals  Nos.  14  and  15. 


Article  Third. 

The  firings. 
106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 


192  INSTIUXTION    FOR    SKrR:MISHKI{S. 


To  fire  at  a  halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  cajitain  will 
command : 

Commence — Firing. 

108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  men  of  the 
front  rank  will  commence  firing ;  they  will  reload  rapidly, 
and  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  fire  again.  During 
this  time  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  come  to  a  ready, 
and  as  soon  as  their  respective  file  loaders  have  loaded, 
they  will  also  fire  and  reload.  The  men  of  each  file  will 
thus  continue  the  firing,  conforming  to  this  principle,  that 
the  one  or  the  other  shall  always  have  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to  aim 
with  accuracy  ;  they  should,  moreover,  endeavor  to  esti- 
mate correctly  the  distances  between  themselves  and  the 
enemy  to  bo  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  deliver  their  fire 
with  the  greater  certainty  of  success. 

110.  Skirnii.shers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place 
whilst  reloading,  unless  protected  by  accidents  in  the 
ground. 


To  fire  marcliing. 


111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands 
the  fire  at  a  halt. 


INSTIircTIOX    FOK    SK 1 KMISHKUS.  lUS 

112.  At  the  command  commeuce  fin'ixj,  if  tlie  line  be 
advancing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  fire, 
and  reload  before  throwing  himself  forward.  The  rear 
rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and 
after  passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank 
man,  will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select  his  object,  and  fire 
when  his  front  rank  man  has  loaded;  the  fire  will  thus 
continue  to  be  executed  by  each  file  ;  the  skirmishers  will 
keep  united,  and  endeavor  as  much  as  possible  to  preserve 
the  general  direction  of  the  alignment. 

11.3.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  command 
commence  Jiriny,  the  front  rank  man  of  evcrj^  file  will 
halt,  face  to  the  enemy,  fire,  and  then  reload  whilst  mov- 
ing to  the  rear ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will 
continue  to  march,  and  halt  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond 
his  front  rank  man,  face  about,  come  to  a  ready,  and  fire 
when  his  front  rank  man  has  passed  him  in  retreat  and 
loaded 3  after  which,  he  will  move  to  the  rear  and  reload; 
the  front  rank  man  in  his  turn,  after  marching  briskly  to 
the  rear,  will  halt  at  ten  or  twelve  paces  from  the  rear 
rank,  face  to  the  enemy,  load  his  piece  and  fire,  conform- 
ing to  what  has  just  been  prescribed;  the  firing  will  thus 
be  continued. 

114.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  at 
the  command,  commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man  of 
every  file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  step  one  pace  forward, 
halt,  and  fire;  the  rear  rank  man  will  continue  to  move 
forward.  As  soon  as  the  front  rank  man  has  fired,  he  will 
place  himself  briskly  behind  his  rear  rank  man  and  reload 
whilst  marching.  AVhen  he  has  loaded,  the  rear  rank 
man  will,  in  his  turn,  step  one  pace  forward,  halt,  and 
15 


104  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISIIKRS. 

fire;  and  returning  to  the  rank?,  Avill  place  himself  behind 
his  front  rank  man  ;  the  latter,  in  his  turn,  will  act  in  the 
same  manner,  observing  the  same  principles.  At  the  com- 
mand, cvase  Jin'uf/,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake 
their  original  positions,  if  not  already  there. 

115.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  tlank,  the 
fire  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  but 
in  this  case,  it  will  bo  the  rear  rank  men  who  will  fire 
first. 

116.  The  following  rules  will  be  observed  in  the  cases 
to  which  they  apply. 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  marching 
by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  Forward — March,  it  Avill 
be  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded,  without  regard  to  the 
particular  rank  to  which  they  belong,  who  will  move  to 
the  front.  Those  men  whose  pieces  have  been  discharged, 
will  remain  in  their  places  to  load  them  before  moving 
forward,  and  the  firing  will  be  continued  agreeably  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  No.  112. 

118.  If  the  line  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or 
whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  command.  In  re- 
treat— March,  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded  will  remain 
faced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  firo  in  this  position;  the  men 
whose  pieces  are  discharged  will  retreat  loading  them,  and 
the  fire  will  be  continued  agreeably  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed. No.  113. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  cither  at  a  halt, 
advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at  the  command,  liy  the  right  (or 
Ic/t)  Jiauk — March,  the  men  whoso  pieces  are  loaded  will 
step  one  pace  out  of  the  general  alignment,  face  to  the 
enemy,  and  fire  in  this  position ;  the  men  whose  pieces  are 


INSTRUCTION    TOR    .SKIRMISHERS.  195 

unloaded  will  face  to  the  right  (or  left)  and  march  in  the 
direction  indicated.  The  men  who  stepped  out  of  the 
ranks  will  place  themselves,  immediately  after  firing,  upon 
the  general  direction,  and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear 
rank  men,  as  the  case  may  be.  The  fire  will  be  continued 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed.  No.  114. 

120.  Skirmishers  will  be  habituated  to  load  their  pieces 
whilst  marching;  but  they  will  be  enjoined  to  halt  always 
an  instant,  when  in  the  act  of  charging  cartridge  and 
priming. 

121.  The3'  should  be  practised  to  fire  and  load  kneeling, 
lying  down  and  sitting,  and  much  liberty  should  be 
allowed  in  these  exercises,  in  order  that  they  may  be 
executed  in  the  manner  found  to  be  most  convenient. 
Skirmishers  should  be  cautioned  not  to  forget  that,  in 
whatever  position  they  may  load,  it  is  important  that  the 
piece  should  be  placed  upright  before  ramming,  in  order 
that  the  entire  charge  of  powder  maj  reach  the  bottom  of 
the  bore. 

122.  In  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same 
rank  should  not  all  fire  at  once,  and  the  men  of  the  same 
file  should  be  particular  that  one  or  the  other  of  them  be 
always  loaded. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the  skir- 
mishers should  seize  on  every  advantage  which  the 
ground  may  present  for  arresting  the  enemy  as  long  as 
possible. 

124.  At  the  signal  to  cease  firing,  the  captain  will  see 
that  the  order  is  promptly  obeyed ;  but  the  men  who  may 
not  be  loaded,  will  load.  If  the  line  be  marching,  it  will 
continue    the  movement;    but   the   man   of  each  file  who 


19G  INSTHCCTIOX    FOR    SKI JOI  ISIlliliS. 

happens   to  be  in   front,  will   wait  until  the   man  in  rear 
shall  be  abreast  with  him. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  bo  firing  advancing,  at 
the  command  halt,  the  line  will  re-form  upon  the  skir- 
mishers who  are  in  front  :  when  the  line  is  retreating, 
upon  the  skirmif^hers  who  are  in  rear. 

126.  Officers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  possible 
vigilance  over  a  line  of  skirmishers;  in  battle,  they 
should  neither  carry  a  rifle  or  fowling  piece.  In  all  the 
firings,  they,  as  well  as  the  sergeants,  should  see  that 
order  and  silence  are  preserved,  and  that  the  skirmishers 
do  not  wander  imprudently;  they  should  especially  cau- 
tion them  to  be  calm  and  collected;  not  to  fire  until  they 
distinctly  perceive  the  objects  at  which  they  aim,  and  are 
sure  that  those  objects  are  within  proper  range.  Skir- 
mishers should  take  advantage  promptly,  and  with  intel- 
ligence, of  all  shelter,  and  of  all  accidents  of  the  ground, 
to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  and 
to  protect  themselves  from  bis  fire.  It  may  often  happen 
that  intervals  are  momentarily  lost  when  several  men 
near  each  other  find  a  common  shelter;  but  when  they 
quit  this  position,  they  should  immediately  resume  their 
intervals  and  their  places  in  line,  so  that  they  may  not, 
by  crowding,  needlessly  expose  themselves  to  the  fire  of 
the  enemy. 


Di 

■''Ir 

llBIQISiaOXD 

i  L^fliiaii  I  ii  lis 

a 

^ 

■ 

t   a 

y^^cc^^;.^o 

-^F'Vi. 

^cr^^tl^pijyia 

p 

veiMB 

i 

Bi  E  PI  r;  r.  ■  r  T  rj  *  ■?•  r 

■  r.  c  !v  I. '   ;: 
« 

b"  -a  13  II  Q  B  ia«i>»f  •  ■  ■  1 

rj 

1 

°f 

■■.|n 

L4:..^^ 

instruction  for  skirmishers.  197 

Article  Fourth. 

the  rally. 

To  form  column. 

127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied  in 
order  to  oppose  the  enemy  with  better  success ;  the  rallies 
are  made  at  a  run,  and  with  bayonets  fixed;  when  or- 
dered to  rally,  the  skirmishers  fix  bayonets  without 
command. 

128.  There  are  several  ways  of  rallying,  which  the  chief 
of  the  line  will  adopt  according  to  circumstances. 

129.  If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely  dis- 
turbed by  scattered  horsemen,  it  will  not  be  necessary  to 
fall  back  on  the  reserve,  but  the  captain  will  cause  bayo- 
nets to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  should,  however, 
advance  to  charge  the  skirmishers,  the  captain  Avill  com- 
mand, rally  by  fours.  The  line  will  halt  if  marching,  and 
the  four  men  of  each  group  will  execute  this  rally  in  the 
following  manner :  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  num- 
bered file  will  take  the  position  of  guard  against  cavalry  ; 
the  rear  rank  man  of  the  odd  numbered  file  will  also  take 
the  position  of  guard  against  cavalry,  turning  his  back  to 
him,  his  right  foot  thirteen  inches  from  the  right  foot  of 
the  former,  and  parallel  to  it;  the  front  rank  man  of  the 
odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file,  will  also 
place  themselves  back  to  back,  taking  a  like  position,  and 


198  IXSTKUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

between  the  two  men  already  established,  facing  to  the 
right  and  left;  the  right  feet  of  the  four  men  will  be 
brought  together,  forming  a  square  and  serving  for  mu- 
tual support.  The  four  men  in  each  group  will  come  to  a 
ready,  fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load  without  moving 
their  feet. 

130.  The  captains  and  chiefs  of  seetions  will  each  cause 
the  four  men  who  constitute  his  guard  to  form  square,  the 
men  separating  so  as  to  enable  him  and  the  bugler  to 
place  themselves  in  the  centre.  The  three  sergeants  will 
each  promptly  place  himself  in  the  group  neare.-t  him  in 
the  line  of  skirmishers. 

131.  Whenever  the  captain  shall  judi>,c  these  squares 
too  weak,  but  should  wish  to  hold  his  position  by  strength- 
ening his  line,  he  will  command: 

llalbj  hy  sections. 

132.  At  this  eoniniand,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  move- 
rapidly  on  the  centre  group  of  their  respective  sections, 
or  on  any  other  interior  group  whose  position  might 
otfer  a  shelter,  or  other  particular  advantage ;  the  skir- 
mishers will  collect  rapidly  at  a  run  on  this  group,  and 
without  distinction  of  numbers.  The  tnon  composing  the 
group  on  which  the  formation  is  made,  will  immediately 
form  square,  as  heretofore  explained,  and  elevate  their 
pieces,  the  bayonets  uppermost,  in  order  to  indicate  the 
point  on  which  the  rally  is  to  bo  made.  The  other  skir- 
mishers, as  they  arrive,  will  occupy  and  fill  the  open 
angular  spaces  between  these  four  men,  and  successively 


INSTRUCTION    FOK    SKIRMISHERS.  199 

rally  around  this  first  nucleus,  and  in  sucb  manner  as  to 
form  rapidly  a  compact  circle.  Tbc  skirmishers  will  take 
as  they  arrive,  the  position  of  charge  bayonet,  the  point 
of  the  bayonet  more  elevated,  and  will  cock  their  pieces 
in  this  position.  The  movement  concluded,  the  two  ex- 
terior ranks  \yill  fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load 
without  moving  their  feet, 

133.  The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his  guard, 
wherever  be  may  judge  his  presence  most  necessary. 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular  to 
observe  that  the  rally  is  made  in  silence,  and  with  prompt- 
itude and  order;  that  some  pieces  in  each  of  their  sub- 
divisions be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the  fire  is  di- 
rected on  those  points  only  where  it  will  be  most  effective. 

135.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will  form 
into  a  circle  around  its  chief. 

136.  If  the  captain,  or  commander  of  a  line  of  skir- 
mishers formed  of  many  platoons,  should  judge  that  the 
rally  by  section  does  not  offer  sufficient  resistance,  he  will 
cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  executed,  and  for  this 
purpose,  will  command  : 

Rally  hy  platoons. 

137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  accordino-  to  the  **'V 
same  principles,  and  by  the  same  means,  as  the  rally  by 
sections.     The  chiefs  of  platoons  will  conform  to  what  has 

been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  section. 

138.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers  on 
the  reserve,  will  command  : 


200  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


Rally  on  the  reserve. 

139.  At  this  commainl,  the  captain  will  move  briskly  on 
the  reserve ;  the  officer  who  commands  it  will  take  imme- 
diate steps  to  form  square;  for  this  purpo3e,  he  will  cause 
the  half  sections  on  the  flanks  to  be  thrown  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  rear ,;  he  will  order  the  men  to  come  to  a 
ready. 

140.  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the  run, 
will  form  rapidly  into  groups,  and  upon  that  man  of  each 
group  who  is  nearest  the  centre  of  the  section.  These 
groups  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  toward  each 
other,  and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  into,  sections  with 
the  greatest  possible  rapidity  while  moving  to  the  rear : 
the  officers  and  sergeants  will  see  that  this  formation  is 
made  in  proper  order,  and  the  chiefs  will  direct  their  sec- 
tions upon  the  reserve,  taking  care  to  unmask  it  to  the 
right  and  left.  As  the  skirmishers  arrive,  they  will  con- 
tinue and  complete  the  formation  of  the  squai-e  begun  by 
the  reserve,  closing  in  rapidly  upon  the  latter,  without 
regard  to  their  places  in  line ;  they  will  come  to  a  ready 
without  command,  and  firo  upon  the  enemy ;  which  will 
also  be  done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked  by 
the  skirmishers. 

1  U.  If  a  section  should  he  closely  pressed  by  cavalry 
while  retreating,  its  chief  will  command  halt;  at  this 
command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly  into  a  compact  circle 
around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his  section  and  resume 
the  march,  the  moment  he  can  do  so  with  safety. 

142.  The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt  and  effi- 


IXSTllUCTION    FOR    SKIIIMISHEKS.  201 

cient  manner,  requires  coolness  and  activity  on  the  part  of 
both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment  of 
respite  which  the  enemy's  cavalry  may  leave  him  ;  as  soon 
as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place  himself  beyond  the 
reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a  position  where 
he  may  defend  himself  with  advantage,  or  by  returning  to 
the  corps  to  which  he  belongs.  For  this  purpose,  being  in 
square,  he  will  cause  the  company  to  break  into  column 
by  platoons  at  half-distance  :  to  this  effect,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Form,  column.     2.  March. 


144.  At  tTie  command  march,  each  platoon  will  dress  on 
its  centre,  and  the  jilatoon  which  was  facing  to  the  rear 
will  face  about  without  command.  The  guides  will  place 
themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  their  respective  pla- 
toons, these  of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves  at 
half  distance  from  those  of  the  first,  counting  from  the 
rear  rank.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  captain 
can  move  the  column  in  whatever  direction  he  may  judge 
proper. 

145.  If  he  Avishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

146.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  imme- 
diately face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  move   off  in  the  oppo- 


202  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

site  direction.     A.*  .soon    ji.**   the  column   is   in  motion,  the 
captain  will  command  : 

3.   (Juide  right  (or  left). 

147.  He  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading  guide: 
the  guides  will  march  at  their  ]iroper  distances,  and  the 
men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  captain  will 
command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt:  the 
tirst  platoon  will  face  about  briskly,  and  the-  outer  half 
sections  of  each  platoon  will  be  thrown  perpendicularly  to 
the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and  third  fronts  of  the 
square.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  promptly  rectify 
any  irregularities  which  may  be  committed. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  in  advance, 
the  captain  will  conimand: 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  174. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 
Guide  left  (or  right). 

153.  At  the  second    command,   the    column    will   move 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMI8IIERS.  203 

forward,  and  at  the  third  command,  the  men  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

154.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain 
ground  to  the  right  or  left,  he  will  do  so  by  rapid  wheels 
to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  and  for  this  purpose,  will 
change  the  guide  whenever  it  may  be  necessary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at  half  dis- 
tance, right  in  front,  the  captain  can  deploy  the  first  pla- 
toon as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already  expliiined;  but 
if  it  should  be  the  wish  to  deploy  the  second  platoon  for- 
ward on  the  centre  file,  leaving  the  first  platoon  in  reserve, 
he  will  command : 


I,  Second  platoon — as  skirmhliers.  2.  On  the  centre 
jile — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  double  quick 
— March). 


156.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
will  caution  his  platoon  to  stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves  before 
the  centre  of  their  sections ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right 
section,  second  platoon,  will  command  :  Section,  right  face; 
the  chief  of  the  left  section  :  Section,  left  face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will  move 
off  briskly  in  opposite  directions,  and  having  unmasked 
the  first  platoon,  the  chief  of   sections  will  respectively 


201  INSTRTTCTIOX    FOR    SKI  UMISIIFRS. 

command :  Tiij  ike  left  jlanh — March,  and  By  the  right 
jiank — March  ;  and  as  soon  as  these  sections  arrive  on  the 
alignment  of  the  first  platoon,  they  will  command:  As 
likirmixhevH — March.  The  groups  will  then  deploy  accord- 
ing to  prescribed  principles,  on  the  right  group  of  the  left 
section,  which  will  lie  directed  by  the  fifth  sergeant  on  the 
point  indicated. 

•  159.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  dci)loyment  made 
by  the  flank,  the  second  platoon  will  be  moved  to  the 
front  by  the  means  above  stated,  and  halted  after  passing 
some  steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the  first  platoon  ;  the 
deployment  will  then  be  made  by  the  flank  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed. 

160.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, and  the  captain  should  Avish  to  rally  them  on  the 
battalion,  he  will  command  : 


lldUy  on  the  hallcdion. 


161.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve, 
no  matter  what  position  the  company  to  which  they  be- 
long may  occupy  in  order  of  battle,  will  rapidly  unmask 
the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing  themselves  in  a  run 
toward  its  nearest  flank,  and  then  form  in  its  rear. 

162.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed  beyond  the 
line  oT  file  closers,  the  men  will  take  the  quick  step,  and 
the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section  will  re-form  his  sub- 
division, and  place  it  in  column  behind  the  wing  on  which 
it  is  rallied,  and  at  ten  paces  from  the  rank  of  file  closers. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  205 

These  subdivisions  will  not  be  moved  except  by  order  of 
the  commander  of  the  battalion,  who  may,  if  ho  thinks 
proper,  throw  them  into  line  of  battle  at  the  extremities  of 
the  line,  or  in  the  intervals  between  the  battalions. 

163.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the  same 
wing  of  a  battalion,  or  behind  any  shelter  whatsoever, 
they  should  be  formed  always  into  close  column,  or  into 
column  at  half  distance. 

164.  When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  company  of  skir- 
mishers, shall  be  formed  into  square,  the  platoons  and 
sections  of  the  covering  company  will  be  directed  by  their 
chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will  be  opened  at 
the  angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers,  who  will  be  then 
formed  into  close  column  by  platoons  in  rear  of  the  first 
front  of  the  square. 

165.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles  of  the 
square  from  being  opened,  the  skirmishers  will  throw 
themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank  men,  the  right 
knee  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  piece  resting  on  the 
thigh,  the  bayonet  in  a  threatening  position.  A  part  may 
also  place  themselves  about  the  angles,  where  they  can 
render  good  service  by  defending  the  sectors  without  fire. 

166.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are  ral- 
lied be  in  column  ready  to  form  square,  the  skirmishers 
will  be  formed  into  close  column  by  pkitoon,  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  third  division,  and  at  the  command,  Form 
square — March,  they  will  move  forward  and  close  on  the 
buglers. 

167.  When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  platoon  or 
section  behind  the  wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it  be  wished  to 
deploy  them  again  to  the  front,  they  will  be  marched  by 

16 


20G  INSTUUCTION    FOR    SKIIOIISIIKRS. 

the  flank  toward  the  intervals  on  the  wings,  and  be  then 
deployed  so  as  to  cover  tha  front  of  the  battalion. 

168.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the  interior 
of  squares  and  columns,  arc  to  be  deployed,  they  will  be 
marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and  then  thrown  forwanl,  as  is 
prescribed.  No.  157,-  as  soon  as  they  shall  have  unmasked 
the  column  or  square,  they  will  be  deployed,  the  one  on 
the  rioiht,  the  other  on  the  left  file. 


Tlie  assembly. 

169.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  assem- 
bled when  there  is  no  lon<;er  danger  of  its  being  disturbed  : 
the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually  in  quick  time. 

170.  The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmishers 
on  the  reserve,  will  command  : 

Assemble  on  the  reserve. 

171.  At  this  coiinnnnd.  tlic  .^kirniisbers  will  assemble  by 
groups  of  fours;  the  front  rank  men  will  place  themselves 
behind  their  rear  rank  men ;  and  each  group  of  fours  will 
direct  itself  on  the  reserve,  where  each  will  take  its  proper 
place  in  the  ranks.  »When  the  company  is  re-formed,  it 
will  rejoin  the  battalion  to  which  it  belongs. 

172.  It  may  bo  also  proper  to  assemble  the  skirmishers 
on  the  centre,  or  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line,  either 
marching  or  at  a  halt. 

173.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble  them  on  the 
centre  while  marching,  he  will  command  : 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIKiMISIIKRS.  20; 


Assemble  on  the  centre. 


174.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  continue 
to  march  directly  to  the  front  on  the  point  indicated;  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  directing  file  will  follow  the  guide, 
and  be  covered  by  his  rear  rank  man ;  the  other  two 
comrades  of  this  group,  and  likewise  those  on  their  left, 
will  march  diagonally,  advancing  the  left  shoulder  and 
accelerating  the  gait,  so  as  to  re-form  the  groups  while 
drawing  nearer  and  nearer  the  directing  file  ;  the  men  of 
the  right  section  will  unite  in  the  same  manner  into 
groups,  and  then  upon  the  directing  file,  throwing  forward 
the  right  shoulder.  As  they  successively  unite  on  the 
centre,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  right 
.shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles. 

176.  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat  will 
also  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  the 
front  rank  men  marching  behind  their  rear  rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt,  and 
on  the  line  they  occupy,  the  captain  will  give  the  same 
commands ;  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right  or  left, 
according  as  they  should  march  by  the  right  or  left 
flank,  reform  the  groups  while  marching,  and  thus  arrive 
on  the  file  which  served  as  the  point  of  formation.  As 
they  successively  arrive,  the  skirmishers  will  support 
arms. 


208  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKlKMISHKIiS. 


Article  Fifth. 

To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers,  and  to  rally  this 
battalion. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skir^nishers. 

178.  A  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  if  the  com- 
mander should  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  right  of  the  sixth 
company,  holding  the  three  right  companies  in  reserve,  he 
will  signify  his  intention  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  and 
adjutant,  and  also  to  the  major,  who  will  be  directed  to 
take  charge  of  the  reserve.  He  will  point  out  to  the 
lieutenant-colonel  the  direction  he  wishes  to  give  the 
line,  as  well  as  the  point  where  ho  wishes  the  right  of  the 
sixth  company  to  rest,  aiid  to  the  commander  of  the  re- 
servo  the  place  he  may  wish  it  established. 

179.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  move  rapidly  in  front 
of  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  and  the  adjutant  in 
front  of  the  left  of  the  same  company.  The  commander 
of  the  reserve  will  dis[)osc  of  it  in  the  manner  to  be 
hereinafter  indicated. 

180.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Fii'st  (or  second)  platoons — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  right  of  the  sixth  company — take  in- 
tervals. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


J'c-cT 


vi 


L- ,!  .i  &■  I  r 


.  • . , 


a  ', 
and...' 


i 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  209 

181.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the  fifth 
and  sixth  companies  will  prepare  to  deploy  the  first  pla- 
toons of  their  respective  companies,  the  sixth  on  its  right, 
the  fifth  on  its  left  file. 

182.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  face  it 
to  the  right,  and  the  captains  of  the  seventh  and  eight 
companies  will  face  their  respective  companies  to  the  left. 

183.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  movement  will  com- 
mence. The  platoons  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies 
will  deploy  forward ;  the  right  guide  of  the  sixth  will 
march  on  the  point  which  Avill  be  indicated  to  him  by  the 
lieutenant-colonel. 

184.  The  com))any  which  has  faced  to  the  right,  and 
also  the  companies  which  have  faced  to  the  left,  will 
march  straight  forward.  The  fourth  compai>y  will  take 
an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces  counting  from  the  left 
of  the  fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  its  first  platoon  on 
its  left  file.  The  seventh  and  eighth  companies  will  each 
take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces,  counting  from  the 
first  file  of  the  company,  which  is  immediately  on  its 
right;  and  the  chiefs  of  these  companies  will  afterward 
deploy  their  first  platoons  on  the  right  file. 

185.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which  the 
deployment  is  made,  should  be  careful  to  direct  themselves 
toward  the  outer  man  of  the  neighboring  company, 
already  deployed  as  skirmishers;  or  if  the  company  has 
not  finished  its  deployment,  they  will  judge  carefully  the 
distance  which  may  still  be  required  to  place  all  these 
files  in  line,  and  will  then  march  on  the  point  thus 
marked  out.  The  companies,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line, 
will  align  themselves  on  those  already  deployed. 


210  INSTRUCTION    FOll    SKIIIMISIIKRS. 

186.  The  licntenant-cdlonel  and  juljutant  will  follow 
the  de]iloymcnt,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the 
left;  the  movement  concluded,  they  will  i)lace  themselvce 
near  the  colonel. 

187.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  established 
in  echellon  in  the  following  manner:  the  reserve  of  the 
sixth  company  will  be  placed  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  right  of  this  company:  the  reserves  of  the 
fourth  and  fifth  companies,  united,  opposite  the  centre  of 
their  line  of  skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  in  advance 
of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company  ,•  the  reserves  of 
tlic  seventh  and  eighth  companies,  also  united,  opposite 
the  centre  of  their  line  of  skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces 
farther  to  the  rear  than  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  com- 
pany. 

188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  composing 
the  reserve,  on  receiving  an  order  from  the  colonel  to  that 
etfect,  will  march  these  companies  thirty  paces  to  the 
rear,  and  will  then  deploy  them  into  column  by  company, 
at  half  distance;  after  which,  he  will  conduct  the  column 
to  the  point  which  shall  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

189.  The  colonel  will  have  a  general  snperintendence  of 
the  movement;  and  when  it  is  finished,  will  move  to  a 
point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence  his  view  may  best 
embrace  all  the  parts,  in  order  to  direct  their  move- 
ments. 

190.  If,  instead  of  deploying  forward,  it  be  desired  to 
deploy  by  the  flank,  the  sixth  and  fifth  companies  will  be 
moved  to  the  front  ton  or  twelve  paces,  halted,  and  de- 
ployed by  the  flank,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the 
left    file,   by  the    means   already    indicated.     Each  of  the 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMI8IIEKS.  211 

other  companies  will  be  inarched  by  the  flank;  and  as 
soon  as  the  last  file  of  the  compauy,  next  toward  the 
direction,  shall  have  taken  its  interval,  it  will  be  moved 
upon  the  line  established  by  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies, 
halted,  and  deployed. 

191.  In  the  preceding  example,  it  has  been  supposed 
that  the  battalion  was  in  order  of  battle;  but  if  in  column, 
it  would  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  by  the  same  commands 
and  according  to  the  same  principles. 

192,  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  forward,  the  di- 
recting company,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  be  moved 
ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  head  of  the  column, 
and  will  be  then  deployed  on  the  file  indicated.  Each  of 
the  other  companies  will  take  its  interval  to  the  right  or 
left,  and  deploy  as  soon  as  it  is  taken. 

19?).  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the  flank,  the 
directing  company  will  be  moved  in  the  same  manner  to 
the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  and  will  then  be  halt- 
ed and  deployed  by  the  flank  on  the  file  indicated.  Each 
of  the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the  flank,  and 
when  its  interval  is  taken,  will  be  moved  on  the  line,  halt- 
ed, and  deployed  as  soon  as  the  company  next  toward  the 
direction  shall  have  finished  its  deployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribed  to  place  the  reserves  in 
echellon,  in  order  that  they  may,  in  the  event  of  a  rally, 
be  able  to  protect  themselves  without  injuring  each  other; 

j  and  the  reserves  of  two  contiguous  companies  have  been 
united,  in  order  to  diminish  the  number  of  the  echellons, 
and  to  increase  their  capacity  for  resisting  cavalry. 

195.  The  echellons,  in  the  example  given,  descend  from 
right  to  left,  but  they  may,  on  an  indication  from  the  colo- 


212  INSTUUCTION    FOR    SKI  IIM  ISIIKUS. 

nel  to  that  effect,  he  posted  on  the  sauie  principle,  so  as  to 
descend  from  left  to  right. 

19G.  When  the  color-company  is  to  be  dei)loyod  as  skir- 
mishers, the  color,  without  its  guard,  will  be  detached,  and 
remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 


The  rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various  movement.-; 
prescribed  for  a  company,  to  he  executed  by  the  battalion, 
and  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  signals.  When 
he  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion,  he  will  cause  the  rally  on 
the  battalion  to  be  sounded,  and  will  so  dispose  his  reserve 
as  to  protect  this  movement. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  ral- 
lied in  squares  on  their  respective  reserves  j  each  reserve 
of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form  the  first  front  of 
the  S({uare,  throwing  to  the  rear  the  sections  on  the  flanks : 
the  skirmishers  who  arrive  first  will  complete  the  lateral 
fronts,  and  the  last  the  fourth  front.  The  ofiicers  and  ser- 
geants will  superintend  the  rally,  and  as  fast  as  the  men 
arrive,  they  will  form  them  into  two  ranks,  without  regard 
to  height,  and  cause  them  to  face  outward.  * 

199.  The  rally  being  efiected,  the  commanders  of  squares 
will  profit  by  any  interval  of  time  the  cavalry  may  allow 
for  i)utting  them  in  safety,  either  by  marching  upon  the 
battalion  reserve,  or  by  seizing  an  advantageous  position  ; 
to  this  end,  each  of  the  s(iuares  will  be  formed  into  col- 
umn, and  march  in  this  order  j  and  if  threatened  anew,  it 
will  halt,  and  again  form  itself  into  square. 


r'Wiij^ 


■^ 


n  I 


IJ  u 


I  I 


*te 


on 


a::i 


H  ti 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  213 

200.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the  bat- 
talion-reserve, each  will  re-form  as  promptly  as  possible, 
and  without  regard  to  designation  or  number,  take  place 
in  the  column  next  in  rear  of  the  companies  already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if  itself 
threatened  by  cavalry.  In  this  ease,  the  companies  in 
marching  toward  it  will  place  themselves  promptly  in  the 
sectors  without  fire,  and  thus  march  on  the  squares. 


•il4  -W<Oil)     MAXIAI.,    E\C. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  FOR 
OFFICERS. 

POSITION  OF  THE  SWOKD  OR  SABRE,  UNDER  ARMS. 

Tlw  vuny.  Tlie  jrripe  in  in  the  ri^^ht  hand,  which  will  be 
snpported  against  the  ri^ht  hip,  the  back  of  the  blade 
afjainst  the  slufuldcr. 


T(.>  SAi.iTK  w  11  n  Tin:  swokd  or  sahre. 

Three  times  (or  pauses). 

Oni .  At  tin*  di.-^taiicc  of  .<i.\  paces  from  the  person  to  be 
.Maluted,  raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpendicularly,  the  point 
up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  to  the  right  eye,  the 
;;uard  at  the  liei;;lit  of  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  supported 
on  the  body. 

Two.  I)r(ip  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by  extend- 
ing the  arm.  so  that  the  right  hand  may  be  brought  to  the 
.side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain  in  that  position  until 
the  per.son  to  whom  the  salute  is  rendered  shall  be  passed, 
or  shall  have  pas.sed,  six  paces. 

Three,  liaise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place  the 
back  of  the  blade  against  the  right  shoulder. 


COLOK-SALUTE,    ETC.  215 


COLOR-SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or  in 
march,  will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the  color-lance  sup- 
ported at  the  right  hip,  the  right  hand  generally  placed 
on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  to  hold  it 
steady.  When  the  color  has  to  render  honors,  the  color- 
bearer  will  salute  as  follows  : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand  along 
the  lance  to  the  height  of  the  eye  ;  lower  the  lance  by 
straightening  the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  the  heel  of  the 
lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and  bring  back  the  lance  to 
the  habitual  position  when  the  person  saluted  shall  be 
passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 


MANUAL 

FOR    RELIEVING    SENTINELS. 

Anns — Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  lock 
to  the  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  instant  with 
both  hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left  at  the  lower 


21 G  RKLIEVING     SEXTINKLS. 

band,  the  two  thumbs  pointinji^  toward  the  muzzle,  the 
barrel  sloping  upward  and  cro.ssing  opposite  the  point  of 
the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  proportionally  lowered.  The 
palm  of  the  right  hand  will  be  above,  and  that  of  the  left 
under  the  piece,  the  nails  of  both  hands  next  to  the  body, 
to  which  the  elbows  will  be  closed. 


Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 


{First  }uotion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  right 
shoulder,  placing  the  right  hand  as  in  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  the  fingers  extended. 

[Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the 
side. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms,  if  it  be  wished  to 
give  the  men  rest,  the  command  will  be  : 

Parade — Rest. 


At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel  of  the 
butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the 
centre  of  the  body ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the 
left  hand  just  above,  and  with  the  right  at  the  upper 
band  J  carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  to  the  rear,  the  left 
knee  slightly  bent. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUCrLER,  ETC. 


INSTRUCTION 

FOR  THE  CHIEF  BUGLER  AND  DRUM-MA.TOU. 

The  posts  of  the  field  music  and  band  have  been  s^iven. 
TiTLK  I,  for  the  order  in  battle. 

In  column  in  manoeuvre,  the  field  music  and  band  will 
march  abreast  with  the  left  centre  company,  and  on  the 
side  opposite  the  guide. 

In  column  in  route,  as  well  as  in  the  passu i^e  of  defiles, 
to  the  front  or  in  retreat,  they  will  march  at  the  head  of 
rheir  respective  battalions. 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


1. 

Attention. 

2. 

4. 

The  general. 
The  assemblt/. 
To  the  CDior. 

5, 

The  recall. 

(I. 

Quick  time. 

7. 

Double  quick  tirnf. 

s. 

The  charge. 

9. 

The  reveille. 

10. 

Retreat. 

11. 

Tattoo. 

12. 
13. 

2\)  extinguish  lights. 
Assembly  of  the  buglers 

ir 

21.S       IXSTRT'CTIOX  FOR  CHIEF  RTGLER,  FTC. 

14.  Asi^emhlf/  of  the  guar<l. 

15.  Orders  for  orderlf/  serrfeants. 

16.  For  officers  to  take  their  ])l aces 

in  line  after  firing. 

1 7.  The  disperse. 

18.  Officers'  call. 

19.  Breakfast  call. 

20.  Dinner  call. 

21.  Sick  call. 

22.  Fatigue  call. 
2.S.  Cliurch  call. 
24.  Z)/-///  rail. 
2.').  School  rail. 

CALLS  FOR  SKTR]\nSHERS. 

1.  F/.r  bagonet. 

2.  f^nfi.r  bayonet. 
;j.   Quick  time. 

4.  Double  (/uick  time. 

(5.  Deplog  as  skirmishers. 

7.  Forirard. 

8.  /n  retreat. 

9.  ^a//. 

10.  ^?/  ^//e  right  flank. 

11.  %<//e  left  flank. 


INSTRUCTION   FOR  (JIHEl'  BLGLEK,  KTC       21i^ 

1 2.  Com ineiice  Jirin</. 

13.  Cease  Jiring. 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right. 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left. 
1  6.  Z/e  doivn. 

1  7.  /ii.s'e  t^y>. 

ly.  Rally  by  fours. 

19.  Rally  by  sections. 

20.  Rally  by  platoons. 

21.  ita%  on  ^y^e  reserve. 

22.  ita%  on  i/^e  battalion. 

23.  Assemble  on  the  battalion. 

Note. — When  the  whole  of  the  troops,  in  the  same 
camp  or  garrison,  are  to  depart,  the  general,  the  assembly, 
and  to  the  color,  will  be  beaten  or  sounded,  at  the  proper 
intervals,  in  the  order  here  mentioned.  At  the  first,  the 
ti'oops  will  prepare  for  the  movement:  at  the  second,  they 
will  form  by  company,  and  at  tlie  third  unite  by  battalion. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Vol.  I. 


T  I  T  L  E     F  j;  R  S  T. 


I'AGK. 

Fi»rmatiou  of  a  regiment  in  order  of  buttie,  or  in  line.  5 

Posts  of  companj'  officers,  sergeants  and  corporals...  7 

Posts  of  field  officers  and  regimental  stafl' 8 

posts  of  field  music  and  baud 9 

Color-guard 1* 

(General  guides 10 

Artici-k  Second. 

Instruction  of  the  battalion 1] 

Instruction  of  officers 1:5 

Instruction  of  sergeants lo 

Instruction  of  corporals 11 

Commands U 


TABLK    OK    CONTENTS 


TITLE     SECOND. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

PART  FIRST. 

rA(.:i;. 

General  rules  aud  ilivision  of  the  school  of  tlie  sol- 
dier       IH 

Lesson  I. — Positio^i  of  the  soldier  (No.  78).  Eyes 
right,  left  and  front  (Nos.  SO,  83) IS 

Lesson  II.— Facings  (Nos.  88,  91) 2;; 

Lesson  III. — Principles  of  the  direct  stop  in  eoinmon 
and  quick  time  (Nos.  94,102) 24 

Lksson  IV. — Principles  of  the  double  ([uick  step  (No. 
llllj 2C. 

PART  SECOND. 

(ieneral  rules 28 

IjKSSon  I. — Principles  of  shouldered  arms 29 1 

Lksson  IL — Manual  of  arms.  Support  arms  (No. 
133).  Present  arms  (No.  143).  Order  arms  (No. 
117).  Position  of  order  arras  (No.  149).  Load  in 
nine  times  (No.  156).  Heady  (No.  171).  Aim  (No, 
174).  Fire  (No.  177).  Fix  bayonet  (No.  188). 
Charge  bayonet  (No.  198).     Trail  arms   (No,  197). 


TAHLE    OF    COXTEXTS.  223 


Unfix  bayonet  (Xo.  200).  Secure  arm?  (No.  204). 
Right  shoulder  shift  arms  (No.  210).  Arms  at  will 
(No.  219).  Ground  arms  (No.  222).  Inspection 
Arms  (No.  227).  Remarks  on  the  manual  of  arms 
(No.  237).  Mark  time  (No.  241).  Change  step 
(No.  245).     March  backwards  (No.  247) ?>0 

Lesson  III. — Load  in  four  times  (No.  260).  Load 
at  will  CNo.  257) 56 

Lksson  IV.— Firings.  Direct  fire  (No.  261).  01)lique 
firings  (No.  266).  Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the 
oblique  fire  to  the  right  (No.  267).  Position  of  the 
two  ranks  in  the  oblique  fire  to  the  left  (No.  270). 
Fire  by  file  (No.  275).     Fire  by  rank  (No.  285) 57 

Lesson  V. — Fire  and  load,  kneeling  (No.  292).  Fire 
and  load,  lying  (No.  300) 62 

Lesson  VT. — Bavonet  exercise 65 


PART    THIRD. 

Lesson  I. — Alignments 67 

Lesson  II. — March  by  the  front  (No.  325).  March 
by  the  front  in  double  quick  time  (No.  334).  Face 
about  in  marching  (No.  343).  March  backwards 
(No.  345 ) 70 

Lesson  III.— March  by  the  flank  (No.  351).  March 
l)y  the  flank  in  double  quick  time  (No.  368) 76 

Lesson  IV. — General  principles  of  wheeling  (No. 
377).     Wheeling  from  a  halt  (No.  383).     Wheeling 


224  lAlil-K    or    {'ONTINIS. 


iu     murching     (No.    o'Jii).      Tiiruing     (No.    400). 
Wlieelinj;   and    turning    in  double  quick   time  No. 

403) Ml 

Lksson  V. — Long  miirc-hos  in  duuldo  quick  time  and 
the  run  (No.  400).  Stuck  arms  (No.  410).  Take 
arms  (No.  413) S7 


TITLK     TIIIKJJ. 
SCHOOL  OF    THE  COMPANY. 

General  ruK-s  and  division   n!'  the  scLiool    of  the  com- 
pany        90 


Lrss, 


A nricLE  I. — To  open  ranks  ( No.  8) H.J 

Articli:  TI. — Alignments  in  open  ranks  (No.  IS). . . .  5»5 

Article  III. — Manual  of  arms  (No.  2(5) I'T 

Article  IV. — To  close  ranks  (No.  28) ws 

Articlk  V. — Alignments,    an.l    nnumal    of   arms    in 

closed  ranks  (No.  lid) ....    9S 


TABLE    OF    CONTENT^ 


Lesson  Skcoxd. 

PAGE. 

Article  I. — To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will  (No. 

44) 100 

Article  II. — To  fire  by'eompany  (No.  48) 101 

Article  III.— To  fire  by  file  (No.  56) 102 

Article  IV.— To  fire  by  rank  (No.  58) 10."> 

Article  V. — To  fire  by  the  rear  rank  (No.  08) 10& 


Lesson  Third. 

Article^ I. — To  advance  in  line'of  battle-  (No.  S4)  . .  108 
Article  II. — To^halt  tlie|company,  marching  in  line 

of  battle,  and  to  align  it  (No.  99) Ill 

Article  III. — Oblique  inarch   in  line  of  battle  (No. 

101) Ill 

ArticlI^  IV. — To   mark  time,    to    march   in    doubl'e 

quick  time,  and  to  back  step  (No.  109) 11^^ 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  (No.  119) 115 


Lesson  Foitrth. 

Article  I.— To  march. by  "the  flank  (No.' 135) 118 

Article  II. — To  change  direction  by  file  (No.  142). .   120 
Article  III. — To   halt   the    company,  marching   by 
the  flank,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front  (No.  145). . .  •   121 
18 


226  TABLE    OF    CONTENTvS. 

PARK. 

Article  IV. — The  company  being  in  march  by  the 
flank,  to  form  it  on  the  ri,t,'lit  or  lefr.  by  file,  into 
line  of  battle  (No.  148) 121 

AuTiCLK  V. — The  company  marching  l>y  the  flank, 
to  form  it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching 
(Xo.  153^ .123 

LrS'^ON    FlKTT?. 

Artici.e   I. — To  bro.il;  into  coluin;!  by  platoon,  either 

at  a  lialt,  or  marching  (No.  1 71 ) 127 

Article  II. — To  march  in  column  (No.  105) lo2 

Article  III. — To  change  direction  (No.  211) L'U> 

Article  IV.— To  halt  the  column  (No.  231) 14li 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to 
the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt, 
or  marching  (No.  23.)) 1 40 

liF.ssoN  Sixth. 

Article  I. — To  break  the  company  into  platoons, 
and  to  re-form  the  company  (No.  265) 140 

Article  II. — To  break  hies  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause 
them  to  re-enter  into  line  (No.  289) 150 

Article  III. — To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to 
execute  the  movements  incident  thereto  (No.  306)..   154 

Article  IV.— Countermarch  (No.  334) 160 


TAHLK    OF    COXTKX'IS.  ^'iT 

PAdK. 

Article  V. — Beiuj^  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on 

the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  343) 162 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  single 

rank,  and  reciprocally  (No.  859) 1  G.> 

Formation   of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four, 

and   reciprocalljs    at    a   halt,    and    marching    (No. 

371) Ifi7 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

(.l-eneral  principles  and  division  of  tlie  instruction.  ...    171 

Artict.e  First. 

Deployments  (No.  15).  De])loy  forward  (No.  22). 
Deploy  by  the  flank  (No.  37).  Extend  intervals 
(No.  51).  Close  intervals  (No.  59).  Relieve  skir- 
mishers (No.  66) 174 

Article  Secoxo, 

March  to  the  front  (No.  71).  March  in  retreat  (No. 
79).  Change  direction  (No.  86).  March  by  the 
flank  (No.  96) 186 

IS* 


2'^ii  lABLE    OF    CONTEXTS. 


Akticlk  Third. 

PAGK. 

BMrings  (No.   106).     Fire  at   a  halt  (No.   107).'    Five 
mnrchiu.tr  (No.  1  U).     Observations  (No.  120) 101 


Articm-:  Foi  kth. 

Rally  (No.  127).  Rally  by  sections  (No.  lo2).  Rally 
by  platoons  (No.  137).  Rally  on  the  reserve  (No. 
139).  Form  column  (No.  143).  Rally  on  the  bat- 
talion (No.  161).  Assemble  on  the  reserve  (No. 
171).     Assemble  on  the  centre  (No.  174) 


Articl!-:  Fifth. 

Dej)loy   the   battalion  as  skirmishers  (No.  178;.     Ob- 
servations (No.  194).     Rally  (197) 208 

Manual  "f  the  fabre  fur  oflicers 214 

Salute  of  the  color 215 

Manual  for  relieving  sentinels 215 

Instruction  for  parade  rest 210 

Instruction  for  chief  bugler,  etc 217 

General  calls 217 

Calls  for  skirmishers 21S 


R I  F  L  E 

AND 

LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS; 

THE  EXERCISE  AND  MANffi'JVRES 


TROOPS  WHEN  ACTING  AS    LIGHT    INFANTRY  OR 
RIFLEMEN. 

PHF-PARED    UNDER    THE    DIRECTION    OI-" 
THE    WAR   DEPARTMENT, 

BY 

BREVET  LIEUT.-COL.  W.  J.  HARDEE, 

V.  S.  AKMY. 


VOL.  II. 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION. 


RICHMONU.  YA. 

J.    W.    RANDOl.PH.    121    MAIN    STREET. 

1861. 


STKAM  I'OWKR    I'UK.S.SKS    Of   KVAXS    AXD   COGSWKl.l 
BROAD  STRKKT,  CHARLESTON.   8.   C. 


RIFLE  AND  LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE       FOURTH 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

1.  Every  colonel  will  labor  to  habituate  his  battalion 
to  form  line  of  battle,  by  night  as  well  as  by  day,  with 
the  greatest  possible  promptitude. 

2.  The  color-company  will  generally  be  designated  as 
the  directing  company.  That,  as  soon  as  formed,  will 
be  placed  on  the  direction  tlie  colonel  may  have  deter- 
mined for  the  line  of  battle.  The  other  companies  will 
form  on  it,  to  the  right  and  left,  on  the  principles  of 
successive  fi,rmations  which  will  be  herein  prescribed. 

3.  The  color-bearer  may  have  received  the  color  from 
the  hands  of  the  colonel ;  but  if  there  be  daylight,  and 
time,  the  color  will  be  produced  with  due  solemnity. 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color  escort. 

4.  When   the  battalion  ttirns   out  under  arms  and  the 


♦>  SCHOOL    or    TIIK    J?A'l  TALION  —  I'AUT    I. 

color  is  wanted,  a  company,  other  than  that  of  the  color, 
will  be  put  in  march  to  receive  and  escort  it. 

5.  The  march  will  be  in  the  following  order,  in  quick 
time,  and  without  music  ;  the  field  music,  followed  by  the 
band  J  the  escort  in  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front, 
with  arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  and  the  color-bearer 
between  the  platoons. 

6.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  quarters  of  the  colonel. 
the  escort  will  form  line,  the  field  music  and  band  on  the 
right,  and  arms  will  be  brought  to  a  shoulder. 

7.  The  moment  the  escort  is  in  line,  the  color-bearor, 
preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant,  and  followed  by  a  ser- 
geant of  the  escort,  will  go  to  receive  the  color. 

8.  When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  followed  by 
the  lieutenant  and  sergeant,  he  will  halt  before  the  en- 
trance; the  escort  will  present  arras,  and  the  field  music 
will  sound  to  the  color. 

9.  After  some  twenty  seconds,  the  captain  will  cause 
the  sound  to  cease,  arms  to  be  shouldered,  and  then  break 
by  platoon  into  column ;  the  color-bearer  will  place  him- 
self between  the  platoons,  and  Hie  lieutenant  and  sergeant 
will  resume  their  posts. 

10.  The  escort  will  march  back  to  the  battalion  to  the 
sound  of  music  in  quick  lime,  and  in  the  same  order  as 
above,  the  guide  on  the  right.  The  inarch  will  be  so 
conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives  at  one  hundred 
and  fifty  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  battalion, 
the  direction  of  the  march  will  be  parallel  to  its  front, 
and  when  the  color  arrives  nearly  opposite  its  place  in 
line,  the  column  will  change  direction  to  the  left,  and 
the  right  guide  will  direct  himself  on  the  centre  of  the 
battalion. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — I'AKT    I. 


Honors  paid  to  the  color. 

11.  Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces  from  the 
battalion,  the  escort  will  halt,  and  the  music  cease ;  the 
colonel  will  place  himself  six  paces  before  the  centre  of 
the  battalion,  the  color-bearer  will  approach  the  colonel, 
by  the  front,  in  quick  time  j  when  at  the  distance  of  ten 
paces,  he  will  halt :  the  colonel  will  cause  arms  to  be  pre- 
sented, and  to  the  color  to  be  sounded,  which  being  exe- 
cuted, the  color-bearer  will  take  his  place  in  the  front  rank 
of  the  color-guard,  and  the  battalion,  by  command,  shoul- 
der arms. 

12.  The  escort,  field  music,  and  baud,  will  return  in 
quick  time  to  their  several  places  in  line  of  battle,  march- 
ing by  the  rear  of  the  battalion. 

13.  The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  colonel's  tent 
or  quarters  in  the  above  order. 


General   Rules  and   Division   of  the   School   of  the 
Battalion. 

14.  This  school  has  for  its  object  the  instruction  of  bat- 
talions singly,  and  thus  to  prepare  them  for  manoeuvres  in 
line.  The  harmony  so  indispensable  in  the  movements  of 
many  battalions,  can  only  be  attained  by  the  use  of  the 
same  commands,  the  same  principles,  and  the  same  means 
of  execution.  Hence,  all  colonels  and  actual  commanderi^ 
of  battalions  will  conform  themselves,  without  addition  or 
curtailment,  to  what  will  herein  be  prescribed. 


8  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    HATTAI-IOX — PART    I. 

I.').  When  a  battalion  instructed  in  this  drill  shall  man- 
cpuvre  in  line,  the  colonel  will  regulate  its  movements,  as 
prescribed  in  the  third  volume  of  the  Tactics  for  heavy 
infantry. 

16.  The  school  of  the  battalion  will  bo  divided  into  five 
parts, 

17.  The  first  will  comprehend  opening  and  closing  ranks, 
and  the  execution  of  the  different  fires. 

18.  The  second,  the  different  modes  of  passing  from  the 
order  in  battle,  to  the  order  in  column. 

19.  The  third,  the  march  in  column,  and  the  other  move- 
ments incident  thereto. 

20.  The  fourth,  the  different  modes  of  passing  from  tlie 
order  in  column  to  the  order  in  battle. 

21.  The  fifth  will  comprehend  the  march  in  line  of  battle, 
in  advance  and  in  retreat  j  the  passage  of  defiles  in  retreat: 
the  march  by  the  flank;  the  formation  by  file  into  line  of 
battle;  the  change  of  front;  the  column  doubled  on  the 
centre;  dispositions  against  cavalr}^ ;  the  rally,  and  rule.-, 
for  !n;ino  uvring  by  the  rear  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I. 


PART  FIRST. 

Opening  and  closing  r-anJcs,  and  (he  execution  of  (he 
different  fires. 

Article  First. 

To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

22.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  will 
command : 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranks. 

2?>.  At  this  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major 
will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  battalion,  the 
first  on  the  flank  of  the  file  closers,  and  the  second  four 
paces  from  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion. 

24.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

2.   To  the  rear,  open  order.     3.  March. 

25.  At  the  second  command,  the  covering  sergeants,  and 
the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion,  will  place  them- 
selves four  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  opposite 
their  places   in   line   of  battle,  in  order  to  mark  the  new 


10       SCHOOL  01"  Till-:  dattaliox — part  i. 

alignment  of  the  rear  rank :  they  will  be  aligned  by  the 
major  on  the  left  sergeant  of  the  battalion,  who  will  be 
careful  to  place  himself  exactly  four  paces  in  roar  of  the 
front  rank,  and  to  hold  bis  piece  between  the  eyes,  erect 
and  inverted,  the  better  to  indicate  to  the  major  the  direc- 
tion to  be  given  to  the  covering  sergeants. 

20.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  and  the  tile 
closers  will  step  to  the  rear  without  counting  steps ;  the 
men  will  pass  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line  traced  for  this 
rank,  halt,  and  dress  forward  on  the  covering  sergeants, 
who  will  align  correct!}'  the  men  uf  their  respective  com- 
panies. 

27.  The  file  closers  will  I'all  liack  and  i)rcservo  the  di.s- 
tance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  glancing  eyes  to  the 
right;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will,  from  the  right,  align 
them  on  the  tile  closer  of  the  left,  who,  having  phiced  him- 
self accurately  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  will  invert 
his  piece,  and  to  hold  it  up  erect  between  his  eyes,  th«' 
better  to  bo  seen  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

2S.  The  culoncl,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  com- 
mand : 

4.  Fkoxt. 


At  this  command,  the  licutenant-colonul,  major,  and  the 
left  sergeant,  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

29.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  dosed  by  the 
commands  prescribed  for  the  instructor  in  the  school  of 
the  company,  No.  28. 


school  of  the  battalion' — i'akt  i.        11 

Article  Second. 

Manual  of  ai'Jiis. 

;iO.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  colonel  will  cause  the 
fullowing  times  and  pauses  tu  be  executed: 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Order  arrns.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  haijonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Unjix  bayonef.  Shoulder  arms. 


Article  Third. 
Loading  at  will,  and  the  Firings. 

31.  The  colonel  will  next  cause  to  be  executed  loading 
at  will,  by  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
company.  No.  45 ;  the  ofi5cers  and  sergeants  in  the  ranks 
will  half  face  to  the  right  with  the  men  at  the  eighth  time 
()f  loading,  aud  will  face  to  the  front  when  the  men  next  to 
them  come  to  a  shoulder. 

32.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  fire  bj- 
company,  the  fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by 
file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  to  be  herein 
indicated. 


12  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    J3ATTALI0N — PAHT    I. 

33.  The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file  will  always 
be  direct;  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by  wing,  and  thu 
fire  by  rank,  may  be  either  direct  or  oblique. 

34.  When  the  fire  ought  to  be  oblique,  the  colonel  will 
give,  at  every  round,  the  caution  right  (or  left)  oblique, 
between  the  commands  ready  and  aim. 

35.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alternately  by 
the  right  and  left  companies  of  each  division,  as  if  the 
division  were  alone.  The  right  company  will  fire  first; 
the  captain  of  the  left  will  not  give  bis  first  command  till 
he  shall  see  one  or  two  pieces  at  a  ready  in  the  right  com- 
pany ;  the  captain  of  the  latter,  after  the  first  discharge, 
will  observe  the  same  rule  in  respect  to  the  left  company  : 
and  the  fire  will  thus  be  continued  alternately. 

36.  The  colonel  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  the  firing 
by  wing. 

37.  The  fire  ])y  file  will  connnence  in  all  the  companies 
at  once,  and  will  he  executed  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company,  No.  55  and  following.  The  fire 
by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  rank  alternatcl}'^,  as  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  58  and 
following. 

38.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  reserve  itself  for 
the  defence  of  the  color. 


The  fire  hi/  company. 

39.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  fire  by  company  to  be  exe- 
cuted, will  command : 


SCHOOL    OF    THP:    battalion — PART    1.  1  .'5 

1.  Fire  by  company.     2.   Commence  firing. 

40.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  covering 
.sergeants  will  take  the  positions  indicated  in  the  school  of 
the  company,  No.  49. 

41.  The  color  and  its  jruard  will  step  back  at  the  same 
time,  so  as  to- bring  the  front  rank  of  the  guard  in  a  line 
with  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion.  Thlt  rule  in  f/enfral 
for  all  the  differ eut  JiritH/9. 

42.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd-numbered  compa- 
nies will  commence  to  fire :  their  captains  will  each  give 
the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company, 
No.  50,  observing  to  precede  the  command  company  by 
that  of  first,  third,  fifth,  or  seventh,  according  to  the  num- 
ber of  each. 

43.  The  captain.«  of  the  even-numbered  companies  will 
give,  in  their  turn,  the  same  commands,  observing  to  pre- 
cede them  by  the  number  of  their  respective  companies. 

44.  In  order  that  the  odd-numbered  companies  may  not 
all  fire  at  once,  their  captains  will  observe,  but  only  for 
the  first  discharge,  to  give  the  command  fire  one  after 
another;  thus,  the  captain  of  the  third  company  will  not 
give  the  command  fire  until  he  has  heard  the  fire  of  the 
first  company:  the  captain  of  the  fifth  will  observe  the 
same  rule  with  respect  to  the  third,  and  the  captain  of  the 
seventh  the  same  rule  with  respect  to  the  fifth. 

45.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  to  cease  by  the  sound 
to  cease  firiny  ;  at  this  sound,  the  men  will  execute  what 
is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company.  No.  63 :  at  the 
.sound,  for  oflScers  to  take  their  places  after  tiring,  the  eaj)- 


14  .SCHOOL    OF    THK    HAl  lAJ.iON — I'AKT    I. 

tainy,  covering  sergeants,  and  color-guard,  will  promptly 
resume  their  places  in  line  of  battle :  thix  rule  is  i/tneraJ 
fur  all  tliv  Jirimi^. 

'lilt  fir t  by  iciity. 

■in.  When  flic  ccdoncl  ghall  wish  this-  firt-  to  be  executed, 
lie  will  eoinraand  : 

1.  Fire  hy  iciny.     2.  RiylU  wing.     o.  Ready. 
4.  Aim.     5.  Fire.     6.  Load. 

47.  The  colonel  ^vill  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alternately, 
and  he  will  recommence  the  tire  by  the  commands,  1. 
Right  wivy ;  2.  Aim:  .'!.  Fihk;  4.  Load.  1.  Le/t  winy  ; 
2.  Aim;  ."1.  Fiiu; :  1.  Load:  in  conforming  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  3.). 

'/'he  fire  by  battalion. 

48.  The  colonel  will  cause  this  lire  tu  be  executed  by  the 
commands  last  prescribed,  substituting  for  the  first  two, 
1.    Fire  by  battulioii.      2.    /iatta/ioii. 

The  fire  by  file. 

49.  To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ready. 
4.   Commence  firing. 

60.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  fire  will  commence  on 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    I.  lb 

(be  right  of  each  company,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  company,  No.  57.  The  colonel  may,  if  he  thinke 
proper,  cause  the  fire  to  commence  on  the  right  of  each 
platoon. 

The  fire  hy  rank. 

51.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Fire  hij  rank.      2.  Battalion.       3.  Ready. 

4.  Rear  rank.      5.  Aim.      6.  Fire. 

7.  Load. 

52.  This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  been  explained 
in  the  school  of  the  company.  No.  59,  in  following  the 
progression  prescribed  for  the  two  ranks  which  should  fire 
alternately. 

To  fire  hj  the  rear  rank. 

53.  "When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  battalion  to  fire 
to  the  rear,  be  will  command: 

1.  Face  hy  the  rear  rank.      2.  Battalion. 
3.  About — Face. 

54.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains,  covering  ser- 
geants, and  file  closers  will  execute  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the   company.  No.  69;  the  color- 

II-2 


16  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    l;ATTALTO^' PART    I. 

bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  and  for  this  purpose, 
the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  before  the  corporal  next 
ou  his  right  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  will  then 
take  his  place  in  the  front  rank;  the  lieutenant-colonel, 
adjutant,  major,  sergeant-major,  and  the  music  will  place 
themselves  before  the  front  rank,  and  face  to  the  rear, 
each  opposite  his  place  in  the  line  of  battle — the  first  two 
pas.-^ing  around  tlic  right,  and  the  others  around  the  left 
of  the  battalion. 

55.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face  about ; 
the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  observing  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  70. 

56.  The  battalion  facing  thus  by  the  rear  rank,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  different  fires  by 
the  same  commands  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the  front 
rank. 

5T.  The  right  and  loft  wings  will  retain  the  same  desig- 
nations, iilthough  faced  about;  the  companies  also  will 
preserve  their  former  designations,  as  firnt,  second,  third, 
etc. 

58.  The  lire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  each 
company,  now  become  the  right. 

59.  The  fire  by  rank  will  commence  by  the  front  rank, 
now  become  the  rear  rank.  This  rank  will  preserve  its 
denomination. 

60.  The  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  color-guard 
will,  at  the  first  command  given  by  the  colonel,  take  the 
places  prescribed  for  them  in  the  fires,  with  the  front  rank 
loading. 

61.  The  colonel,  after  firing  to  the  rear,  wishing  to  face 
the  battalion  to  its  proper  front,  will  command : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    I.  17 


1.  Face  h/f  the  front  rank.     2.  BattaUo7i. 
3.  Ahout — Face. 

62.  At  these  commands,  the  battalion  will  return  to  its 
proper  front  hy  the  means  prescribed,  Nos.  54  and  55. 

6.3,  The  fire  hy  file  being  that  most  used  in  war,  the 
colonel  Avill  g\\Q  it  the  preference  in  the  preparatory  exer- 
cises, in  order  that  the  battalion  may  be  brought  to  exe- 
cute it  with  the  greatest  possible  regularity. 

64:.  When  the  colonel  may  wish  to  give  some  relaxation 
to  the  battalion,  without  breaking  the  ranks,  he  will  exe- 
eate  •vfhat  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, Nos.  37  arid  3S  or  Nos.  39  and  40. 

65.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  arms  to  be 
stacked,  he  will  bring  the  battalion  to  ordered  arms,  and 
then  command: 


1.  Stack — Arms.     2.  Break  ranks. 
3.  March. 


66.  The  colonel  wishing  the  men  to  retntn  to  the  ranks, 
will  cause  attention  to  be  sounded,  at  which  the  battalion 
will  re-form  behind  the  stacks  of  arms.  The  sound  being 
finished,  the  colonel,  after  causing  the  stacks  to  be  broken, 
will  command : 

Battalion. 


18    SCHOOL  OF  THE  HATTALION PART  II. 

67.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  fix    their  attention, 
and  remain  immovable. 


PART  SECOND. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  battle  to 
the  order  in  column. 


Article  First. 

To  break  to  the  right  or  the  left  into  coiu7nn. 

68.  liines  of  battle  will  habitually  break  into  column 
by  company ;  they  may  also  break  by  divisions  or  by 
platoon. 

69.  It  is  here  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  break 
by  company  to  the  right;  he  will  command  : 

1.  Bg  compang,  right  wheel.    2.  March  (or  double 

quick — March).  3 

70.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  him- 
aolf  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution 

it  that  it  has  to  wheel  to  the  right ;  each  covering  sergeant  | 

will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front  rank.  , 

71.  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will  break  to  J 
the  right,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  t^ie  j 
school  of  the  company,  No.  173;  each   captain  will    con- 


^IMlf'iP^llT 


Hliill^i'llliiti^ 


liTlEEIir: 


ISEHHIir 


HII!!lliH!lii|l!!iHi!i;ii.r 


^llliliin 


'^igliiiiSiiiiiiiiiiiiir 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    II.         19 

form  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  jDla- 
toon;  the  left  guide,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  to  conduct  the 
marching  flank,  and  when  he  shall  have  approached  near 
to  the  perpendicular,  the  captain  will  command  :  1.  Such 
company.     2.  Halt. 

72.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  left  guide  shall  be  at  the  distance  of  three 
paces  from  the  perpendicular,  the  company  will  halt ;  the 
guide  will  advance  and  place  his  left  arm  lightly  against 
the  breast  of  the  captain,  who  will  establish  him  on  the 
alignment  of  the  man  who  has  faced  to  the  right;  the 
covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  correctly  on  the 
alignment  on  the  right  of  that  man;  which  being  executed, 
the  captain  will  align  his  company  by  the  left,  command 
Front,  and  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

73.  The  captains  having  commanded  Front,  the  guides, 
although  some  of  them  may  not  be  in  the  direction  of  the 
preceding  guides,  will  stand  fast,  in  order  that  the  error  of 
a  company  that  has  wheeled  too  much  or  too  little  may  not 
be  propagated;  the  guides  not  in  the  direction  will  readily 
come  into  it  when  the  column  is  put  in  march. 

74.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into  column 
by  company  to  the  left,  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means;  the  covering  sergeant  of  each  com- 
pany will  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and  the  left  guide 
will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  at  the  mo- 
ment the  company  halts. 

75.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division,  the  indication 
division  will  be  substituted  in  the  commands  for  that  of 
company ;  the  chief  of  each  division  (the  senior  captain) 


20         SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    I5ATTALION — PART    II. 

will  couform  himself  to  what  is  prcseribod  for  the  chief  of 
oompany,  and  will  place  himself  two  paces  before  the  cen- 
tre of  his  division  ;  the  junior  captain,  if  not  already  there, 
will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  compa- 
nies in  the  front  rank,  and  be  covered  by  the  coverinj;  t^er- 
geant  of  the  left  company  in  the  rear  rank.  The  ri<rht 
guide  of  the  ri;;ht  company  will  be  the  right  guide,  and  thv 
left  guide  of  the  left  company,  the  left  guide  of  the  di- 
vision. 

76.  When  the  battalion  shall  break  by  platoon  to  the 
right  or  to  the  left,  each  first  lieutenant  will  pass  around 
the  left  of  his  company  to  place  himself  in  front  of  the 
second  platoon,  and  for  this  purpose,  each  covering  ser- 
geant, except  the  one  of  the  right  company,  will  step,  for 
the  moment,  in  rear  of  the  right  file  of  his  company. 

77.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division  to  the  right, 
and  there  is  an  odd  company,  the  captain  of  this  company 
(the  left),  after  wheeling  into  column,  will  cause  it  to  oblique 
to  the  left,  halt  it  at  company  distance  from  the  preceding 
division,  place  his  left  guide  on  the  direction  of  the  column, 
and  then  align  his  company  by  the  left.  When  the  line 
breaks  by  division  to  the  left,  the  odd  company  will  be  in 
front;  its  captain,  having  wheeled  it  into  column,  will 
cause  it  to  oblique  to  the  right,  halt  it  at  division  distance 
from  the  division  ne.xt  in  the  rear,  place  his  right  guide  on 
the  direction  of  the  other  guides,  and  align  the  company 
by  the  right. 

78.  The  battalion  being  in  column,  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel and  major  will  place  themselves  on  the  directing  flank, 
the  first  abreast  with  the  leading  subdivision,  and  the  other 
abreast  with  the  last,  and  both  six  paces  from  the  flank. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PAKT    IT.  21 

The  adjutant  will  be  near  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  the 
jerpjeaut-major  near  the  major. 

79.  The  colonel  will  have  no  fixed  place  as  the  instrvctor 
of  his  battalion;  but  in  columns  composed  of  many  bat- 
talions, he  will  place  himself  habitually  on  the  directing 
flank  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  the  guides,  and  abreast 
with  the  centre  of  his  battalion. 

80.  AVhen  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  move  the  column 
forward  without  halting  it,  he  will  caution  the  battalion  to 
that  effect,  and  commaml: 


1.  By  company^  right  wheel.     2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March)  . 


81.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  companies 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  for  breaking  into  column 
from  a  halt. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  they  will  remain  in  front 
of  their  companies  to  superintend  the  movement;  the  com- 
panies will  wheel  to  the  right  on  fixed  pivots  as  indicated 
in  the  school  of  the  company.  No.  185;  the  left  guides  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  above;  when  they  shall  ar- 
rive near  the  perpendicular,  the  colonel  will  command: 


3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  left. 
83.  At  the  third  command,  each  covering  sergeant  will 


22         SCHOOL    OF    Till-:    UATTALION — PART    II. 

place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  man  ou  the  right  of 
the  front  rank  of  his  eomiiauy.  At  the  foucth  counnand, 
which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  completed, 
the  companies  will  cease  to  wheel  and  march  straight  for- 
ward. At  the  fifth,  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows 
to  the  left.  The  leading  guide  will  inarch  in  the  direction 
indicated  to  him  by  the  lieutenant-colonel.  The  guides 
will  immediately  conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of 
the  march  in  column,  school  of  tlic  company,  No.  200  and 
following. 

84.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of  battle,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  wheel  to  the  right  or  left,  by  the 
same  commands  and  the  same  means,  but  he  should  pre- 
viously caution  the  battalion  that  it  is  to  continue  the 
march. 

85.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into  column 
by  company  to  the  left,  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means  j  the  covering  sergeant  of  each  com- 
pany will  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and  the  left  guides 
will  place  themselves  on  the  left  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies at  the  command /orir((i<f. 

86.  When  a  battalion  has  to  prolong  itself  in  column 
toward  the  right  or  left,  or  has  to  direct  its  march  in  col- 
umn perpendicularly  or  diagonally  in  front,  or  in  rear  of 
cither  flank,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break  by  company 
to  the  right  or  left,  as  has  just  been  prescribed;  but  when 
the  line  breaks  to  the  right,  in  order  to  march  toward  the 
left,  or  the  reverse,  the  colonel  will  command :  Break  to 
the  right  to  march  to  the  left,  or  break  to  the  left  to  inarch  to 
the  riyht,  before  giving  the  command,  hij  compa)ri/,  right  (or 
left)  wheel.     As  soon  as  the  battalion  is  broken,  the  lieu- 


r 


r 


m--''^\in- 


r^ 


TSffif 


( 


/: 


r 


"ll!J''":l!'|!li!!'inr 


8CTI()0L    OF    TIIK    15ATTALION — PART    II.  23 

lonant-colonel  will  i)lace  a  marker  abreast  with  the  right 
guide  of  the  leading  company.  The  instant  the  column  ig 
put  in  motion,  this  company  will  wheel  to  the  left  (or  right), 
march  ten  paces  to  the  front  without  changing  the  guide, 
and  wheel  again  to  the  left  (or  right).  The  second  wheel 
being  completed,  the  captain  will  immediately  command 
(jiiide  lift  (or  right).  The  guide  of  this  company  will 
march  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  guides  of  the  column. 
The  lieutenant-colonel  will  be  careful  to  place  a  second 
marker  at  the  point  where  the  first  company  is  to  change 
direction  the  second  time. 


Article  Second. 

To  break  to  (lie  reai%  by  the  right  or  left^  into  column, 
and  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companies. 

87.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the  battalion 
to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  into  column  by  cora- 
panj',  he  will  command  : 

I.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column. 
2.  Battalion,  right — Face.  3.  March  (or  double 
quick- — March). 

88.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  to 
face  to  the  right  j  the  covering  sergeants  will  step  into  th(; 
front  rank.  • 


24    SCHOOL  OF  THE  HATTALION — PART  II. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  the  hattalion  will  face  to 
the  right;  each  captain  will  hasten  to  the  right  of  his 
company,  and  break  two  files  to  the  rear;  the  first  file  will 
break  the  whole  depth  of  the  two  ranks ;  the  second  file 
less;  which  being  executed,  the  captain  will  place  himself 
so  that  his  breast  may  touch  lightly  the  left  arm  of  the 
front  rank  man  of  tlio  last  file  in  the  company  next  on  the 
right  of  his  own.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will 
place  himself  as  if  there  were  a  company  on  his  right,  and 
will  align  himself  on  the  other  captains.  The  covering 
sergeant  of  each  company  will  break  to  the  rear  with  the 
right  files,  and  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  of  the 
first  file,  to  conduct  him. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each  com- 
pany will  wheel  to  the  right;  the  covering  sergeant  placed 
before  this  file,  will  conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear. 
The  other  files  will  cdiae  successively  to  wheel  ou  the 
i^auie  si)ot.  The  captain^;  will  stand  fast,  see  their  ccm- 
panies  file  past,  and  at  the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have 
wheeled,  each  captain  will  command  : 


1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Fiiont, 
4.  Left — DuESS. 


91.  At  the  instant  the  conii»any  faces  to  the  front,  its 
left  guide  will  place  himseif  so  that  liis  left  arm  may 
touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

92,  At  the  fourth  command,  the  company  will  align 
itself  ou  its  left  guide,  the  captain  so  directing  it,  that  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    11.  2.) 

new  alignment  may  be  perpendicular  to  that  which  the 
company  had  occupied  in  line  of  battle,  and,  the  better  to 
judge  this,  ho  will  step  back  two  paces  from  the  flank. 

93.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand :   FuoNT,  and  take  his  place  before  its  centre. 

94.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  break  into  column  by  company,  to 
the  rear,  by  the  right,  he  will  command: 


1.  By  the  right  of  companies  io  the  rear  into  column. 
2.  Battalion^  hy  the  right  flank.  3.  Makch  (or 
double  quick — March). 


95.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  step  briskly 
in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  to 
face  by  the  right  Jlaii/c. 

96.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face  to 
the  right;  each  captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of 
his  company,  and  cause  it  to  break  to  the  right;  the  first 
file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  placed  in  front  of  this  file  will  conduct  it 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear ;  the  other  files  will  wheel  suc- 
cessively at  the  same  place  as  the  first.  The  captains  will 
.see  their  companies  file  past  them;  when  the  last  files  have 
wheeled,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  Battalion,  hy  the  left  flank — March. 
4.   Guide  left. 


2G       SCHOOL  OK  thk  battalion — part  il 

97.  At  the  command  iiiarvli,  the  companies  will  face  to 
the  left,  and  march  in  column  in  the  new  direction.  The 
captains  will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centres  of 
their  respective  companies.  At  the  fourth  command,  the 
guides  will  conform  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in 
column;  the  leading  one  will  move  in  the  direction  indi- 
cated to  him  by  the  lieutenant-uolonel.  The  men  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

98.  To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  colonel  will  give 
the  same  commands  as  in  the  case  of  breaking  to  the  rear 
by  the  right,  substituting  the  indication  h/t.  for  that  of 
right. 

99.  The  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles.  Each  captain  will  hasten  to  the  left  of 
his  company,  cause  the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear, 
and  then  place  his  breast  against  the  right  file  of  the  com- 
pany next  on  the  left  of  his  own,  in  the  manner  prescribed 
above. 

100.  As  soon  as  the  two  files  break  to  the  rear,  the  left 
guide  of  each  company  will  place  himself  before  the  front 
rank  man  of  the  headmost  file,  to  conduct  him. 

101.  The  instant  the  companies  face  to  the  front,  the 
right  guide  of  each  will  place  himself  so  that  his  right  arm 
may  lightly  touch  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

102.  The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division  to  thej 
rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  in  like  manner;  in  this  case,  the 
indication  divisions  will  be  substituted,  in  the  first  com-' 
mand,  for  that  of  companies ;  the  chiefs  of  division  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  j 
company.  The  junior  captain  in  each  division  will  place 
himself,  when  the  division  faces  to  a  flank,  by  the  side  of! 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PART  II.    2  i 

the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company,  who  steps  into 
the  front  rank. 

10.3.  If  there  be  an  odd  number  of  companies,  and  the 
battalion  breaks  by  division  to  the  rear,  whether  by  the 
right  or  left,  the  c«aptain  of  the  left  company  will  conform 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  77. 

104.  This  manner  of  breaking  into  column  being  at 
once  the  most  prompt  and  regular  will  be  preferred  on 
actual  service,  unless  there  be  some  particular  reason  for 
breaking  to  the  front. 

105.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line  and  at  a  halt,  and  the 
colonel  shoiild  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of 
companies,  he  will  command  : 


1.  By  the  rigid  of  companies  to  the  front  for  rear). 
2.  Battalion,  right — Face.  3.  March  (or  double 
quicTc — March).  4.  Guide  right,  (J^fO  or  (cen- 
tre). 


106.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move  rap- 
idly two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
caution  it  to  face  to  the  right :  the  covering  sergeants  will 
replace  the  captains  in  the  front  rank. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  each  captain  moving  quickly  to  the  right 
of  his  company  will  cause  files  to  break  to  the  front,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  indicated  No.  89. 

108.  At  the  command  mnrch,  each  captain  placing  him- 
II-3 


28    SCHOOL  OF  THE  nATTALIOX — PART  11. 

self  on  the  left  of  his  leading  guide  will  conduct  bis  com- 
pany perpendicularly  to  the  original  line.  At  the  fourth 
command,  the  guide  of  each  company  will  dress  to  the 
right,  left,  or  centre,  according  to  the  indication  givei*. 
taking  care  to  preserve  accurately  his  distance. 

109.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  to  the  front,  or 
rear,  by  the  left  of  companies,  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  means  and  the  same  commands,  substi- 
tuting left  for  r\qhi. 

110.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  should 
wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of  companies,  he 
will  command : 


1.  By  the  rigid  of  companies  to  the  front  (or  rear). 
2.  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank.  3.  March  (or 
double  quick — March).  4.  Guide  right  (l<fi)  or 
(centre). 

111.  Which  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
and  means  prescribed,  Nos.  95  and  following,  and  106  and 
following.  At  the  first  command,  the  color  and  general 
guides  will  take  their  places  as  in  column. 

112.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire 
by  the  left  of  companies,  the  movement  will  be  executed 
by  the  same  moans  and  the  same  commands,  substituting 
left  for  rii/ht. 

113.  If  the  battalion  be  advancing  by  the  right  or  left 
of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  line  to 
the  front,  he  will  command : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    II,         29 

1.  Bij   companies  into   line.     2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March).     3.   Guide  centre. 

HI.  At  tlie  command  march,  briskly  repeated  hy  the 
captains,  each  company  will  be  formed  into  line,  as  pro- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  154. 

115.  At  the  third  command,  the  color  .ind  general 
guides  will  move  rapidly  to  their  places  in  line,  as  will 
be  hereinafter  prescribed,  No.  405. 

116.  If  the  battalion  be  retiring  by  the  right  or  left 
of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  line 
facing  the  enemy,  he  will  first  cause  the  companies  to  face 
about  while  marching,  and  immediately  form  in  line  by 
the  commands  and  means  prescribed,  Nos.  113  and  fol- 
lowin"-. 


Article    Third. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column. 

117.  This  movement  may  be  executed  by  company  or 
by  division,  on  the  right  or  left  subdivision,  or  on  any 
other  subdivision,  right  or  left  in  front. 

118.  The  examples  in  this  school  will  suppose  the  pre- 
sence of  four  divisions,  with  directions  for  an  odd  com- 
pany ;  but  what  will  be  prescribed  for  four,  will  servo 
equally  for  two,  three  or  five  divisions. 


30  SCHOOL    OF    THE    15ATTALION PART    II. 

119.   To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  l)y  division 
in  rear  of  the  first,  the  colonel  will  commaud: 


1.  Close  column^  hy  division.  2.  On  the  first  divi- 
sion^ right  in  front.  3.  Battalion,  right — Face. 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


120.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  chiefs  of  division 
will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their  divisions  ; 
the  chief  of  the  first  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast;  the 
chiefs  of  the  three  others  will  remind  them  that  they  will 
have  to  face  to  the  right,  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  the 
right  company  of  each  division  will  replace  his  captain  in 
the  front  rank,  as  soon  as  the  latter  steps  out. 

121.  At  the  third  command,  the  last  three  divisions  will 
face  to  the  right;  the  chief  of  each  division  will  hasten  to 
its  right,  and  cause  files  to  be  broken  to  the  rear,  as 
indicated,  No.  89;  the  right  guide  will  break  at  the  same 
time,  and  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  man  of  the 
first  file,  to  conduct  him,  and  each  chief  of  division  will 
place  liimself  by  the  side  of  this  guide. 

122.  The  moment  these  divisions  face  to  the  right,  the 
junior  captain  in  each  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company,  who  will  place 
himself  in  the  front  rank.  Thin  ride  is  (jcneral  for  all  the 
plorjmeu(8  hy  division. 

123.  At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first  divis- 
ion will  add,  fjuide  left ;  at  this,  its  left  guide  will  place 
himself  on  its  left,  as  soon  as  the  movement  of  the  second 


"D^r— ^---cv 


r- — , 


Fi-6.3 


«in 


V       ,>|!|,HI|;i7'MI|l!l' 1,1.1    .„,|lli,HllM, .<)<] 


irt^  Mii!ilii!!liM!ilill!h»!li!;:ii,!IBlF^ 


^■'■i''  41ii|lllii»ii!ll!ili!il!lN'l!i!iiMlill!illiMF 


::t 


iTTirr™ 


K. 


'^l|!l!i!!!l!ilSltiJl!ife^'lllki:!lli!aiilliir 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PAKT  11.    31 

division  may  permit,  and  the  file  closers  will   advance  one 
pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

124.  All  the  other  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its  chief, 
will  step  off  together,  to  take  their  places  in  the  column; 
the  second  will  gain,  in  wheeling  by  file  to  the  rear,  the 
space  of  six  paces,  which  ought  to  separate  its  guide  from 
the  guide  of  the  first  division,  and  so  direct  its  march  as 
to  enter  the  column  on  a  line  parallel  to  this  division  ;  the 
third  and  fourth  divisions  will  direct  themselves  diagon- 
ally toward,  l)ut  a  little  in  rear  of,  the  points  at  which 
they  ought,  respectively,  to  enter  the  column;  at  six  paces 
from  the  left  flank  of  the  column,  the  head  of  each  of  these 
divisions  will  incline  a  little  to  the  left,  in  order  to  enter 
the  column  as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  tak- 
ing care  also  to  leave  the  distance  of  six  paces  between  its 
guide  and  the  guide  of  the  preceding  division.  At  the 
moment  the  divisions  put  themselves  in  march  to  enter  the 
column,  the  file  closers  of  each  will  incline  to  the  left,  so 
as  to  bring  themselves  to  the  distance  of  a  pace  from  the 
rear  rank. 

125.  Each  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will  conduct 
his  division  till  he  shall  be  up  with  the  guide  of  the  direct- 
ing one  ;  the  chief  will  then  himself  halt,  see  his  division 
file  past,  and  halt  it  the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have 
passed,  commanding:  1.  Such  division;  2.  Halt;  .3. 
Front  ;    4.  Left — Dress.- 

126.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt;  the 
left  guide  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction,  six 
paces  from  the  guide  which  precedes  him,  in  order  that 
the  column  being  formed,  the  divisions  may  be  separated 
the  distance  of  four  paces. 


:V2  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAIJT    II. 

127.  At  the  third  command,  tho  division  will  face  to  the 
front;  at  the  fourth,  it  will  be  aligned  by  its  chief,  who 
will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and 
direct  the  alignment  so  that  his  division  may  be  parallel 
to  that  which  precedes — which  being  done,  he  will  com- 
mand Front,  and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his 
division. 

128.  If  any  division,  after  the  command  front,  be  not  at 
its  proper  distance,  and  this  can  only  happen  through  the 
negligence  of  its  chief,  such  division  will  remain  in  its 
place,  in  order  that  the  fault  may  not  be  propagated. 

129.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  execution  of  the 
movement,  and  cause  the  prescribed  principles  to  be  ob- 
served. 

130.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself  in  succes- 
sion in  rear  of  the  left  guides,  will  assure  them  on  the 
direction  as  they  arrive,  and  then  move  to  his  place  outside 
of  the  left  flank  of  the  column  six  paces  from,  and  abreast 
with,  the  first  division.  In  assuring  the  guides  on  the 
direction,  he  will  be  a  mere  observer,  unless  one  or  more 
should  fail  to  cover  exactly  tho  guide  or  guides  already 
established.      Thin  rule  is  r/etieraL 

I. '51.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with 
tho  left  of  the  fourth  division,  and  afterward  take  his 
position  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the  coUnun,  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with,  this  division. 

132.  To  ploy  tho  battalion  in  front  of  the  first  division, 
the  colonel  will  give  tho  same  commands,  substituting  the 
indication  I'/t  for  that  of  right  in  front. 

133.  At  the  second  and  third  commands,  the  chiefs  of 
division  and  the  junior  captains  will  conform  themselves 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    II.         33 

to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  120,  121,  122;  but  the  chiefs  of 
the  last  three  divisions,  instead  of  causing  the  first  two 
files  to  break  to  the  rear,  will  cause  them  to  break  to  the 
front. 

134.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divis- 
ion will  add:  Guide  right. 

135.  The  three  other  divisions  will  step  ofi"  together  to 
take  their  places  in  the  column  in  front  of  the  directing 
division ;  each  will  direct  itself  as  prescribed,  Xo.  124, 
and  will  enter  in  such  manner  that,  when  halted,  its  guide 
may  find  himself  six  paces  from  the  guide  of  the  division 
next  previously  established  in  the  column. 

136.  Each  chief  of  these  divisions  will  conduct  his  divis- 
ion, till  his  right  guide  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  guide 
of  the  directing  one;  he  will  then  halt  his  division,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  front:  at  the  instant  it  halts,  its 
right  guide  will  face  to  the  rear,  place  himself  six  paces 
from  the  preceding  guide,  and  cover  him  exactly — which 
being  done,  the  chief  will  align  his  division  by  the  right. 

137.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  in  front  of  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  guides  on  the 
direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  and  then  move  out- 
side of  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  to  a  point  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with,  the  fourth  division,  now  in  front. 

138.  The  major  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed. No.  131,  and  then  move  outside  of  the  right  flank 
of  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first 
division,  now  in  the  rear. 

139.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  RATTALION — PAUT  II. 


Guides,  about — Face. 

1 10.  At  til  is.  the  guide.',  who  arc  faced  to  the  rear,  will 
face  to  the  front. 

141.  To  jjloy  the  hattalion  in  rear,  or  in  front  of  the 
fourth  division,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  the  fourth  di- 
vision, left  (or  rif/ht)  in  front.  3  Battalion,  left 
— Face.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

142.  These  movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  of  those  which  precede,  but  bj-^  inverse  means  : 
the  fourth  division  on  which  the  battalion  ploys  will  stand 
fast;  the  instant  the  movement  commences,  it.s  chief  will 
command,  (jnkle  right  (or  left). 

14;l.  The  foregoing  examples  embrace  all  the  principles: 
thus,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  ploy  the  battalion  on 
an  interior  division,  he  will  command: 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  such  division, 
riyht  for  left)  in  front.  3.  Battalion,  inward — 
Face.     4.  March  (ov  double  quick — March). 

144.  The  instant  the  movement  commences,  the  chief  of 
the  directing  division  will  command,  guide  left  (or  right). 

145.  The  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle,  are  to 
the  right  of  the  directing  division,  will  face  to  the  left: 
those  which  arc  to  the  left,  will  face  to  the  right. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    II.  35 

146.  If  the  right  is  to  be  in  front,  the  right  divisions 
will  ploy  in  front  of  the  directing  division,  and  the  left  in 
ity  rear;  the  rejerse,  if  the  left  is  to  be  in  front.  And  in 
all  the  foregoing  suppositions,  the  division  or  divisions 
contiguous  to  the  directing  one,  in  wheeling  by  file  to  the 
front  or  rear,  will  gain  the  space  of  six  paces,  which  ought 
to  separate  their  guides  from  the  guide  of  the  directing 
division. 

147.  In  all  the  ployments  on  an  interior  division,  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides 
in  front,  and  the  major  those  in  rear  of  the  directing 
division. 

148.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a  halt, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  by  combining  the  two 
gaits  of  quick  and  double  quick  time,  and  always  in  rear 
of  one  of  the  flank  divisions. 

149.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  in  rear  of 
the  first  division,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  tlie  Jirst  division. 
3.  Battalion — hy  the  right  fiank.  4.  Double  quick 
—March. 


150.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division  will 
move  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  division  and  caution 
it  to  face  to  the  right 

151.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  it  to 
continue  to  march  to  the  front,  and  he  will  command: 
Quick  1)1  arch. 


36  SCHOOL    OF    TlIK    BATTALION — J'AllT    II. 

152.  At  the  commanti  mnnh,  the  chief  of  the  first  clivifs- 
ion  will  command  :  Giiide  left.  At  this,  the  left  guide  will 
move  to  the  left  flank  of  the  division  and  dy-eot  himself  on 
the  point  indicated. 

153.  The  three  other  divisions  will  face  to  the  right  and 
move  off  in  double  quick  time,  breaking  to  the  right  to 
take  their  places  in  column ;  each  chief  of  division  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  division  in  order  to  con- 
duct it.  The  files  will  be  careful  to  preserve  their  dis- 
tances, and  to  march  with  a  uniform  and  decided  step. 
The  color-bearer  and  general  guides  will  retake  their 
places  in  the  ranks. 

154.  The  second  division  will  immediately  enter  the 
column,  marching  parallel  to  the  first  division  ;  its  chief 
will  allow  it  to  file  past  him,  and  when  the  last  file  is 
abreast  of  him,  will  command  :  1.  Second  division,  hy  the 
left  fiaitk — March.  2.  Guide  left,  and  i)lace  himself  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  his  division. 

ir)5.  At  the  command  march,  tlic  division  will  face  to 
the  left  ;  at  the  second  command,  tlie  left  guide  will 
march  in  the  trace  of  the  left  guide  of  the  first  division: 
the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  When 
the  second  division  has  closed  to  its  proper  distance,  its 
chief  will  command  :  Quick  time — MAncil.  This  division 
will  then  change  its  step  to  quick  time. 

156.  The  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will 
execute  their  movements  according  to  the  same  principles, 
taking  care  to  gain  as  much  ground  as  possible  toward 
the  head  of  the  column. 

157.  If  the  battalion  had  been  previously  marching  in 
line  at  double  quick  time,  when  the  fourth  division  shall 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    UATTALIOX — PART    III.        37 

have   gained    its    distance,    the    colonel    will    command  : 
J)onble  quick — MAncn. 

158.  In  this  movement,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  side  of  the  leading  guide,  give  him  a  point 
of  direction,  and  then  follow  the  movements  of  tlie  first 
division.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  left  of  the  fourth  division. 

Remarks  on  ploying  the  battalion  into  column. 

159.  The  battalion  may  be  ployed  into  column  at  full,  or 
half  distance,  on  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same 
commands,  substituting  for  the  first  command :   Column  at 

fall  (or  half)  distance  by  division. 

160.  In  the  ploymcnts  and  movements  in  column,  when 
the  subdivisions  execute  the  movements  successively,  such 
as — to  take  or  close  distances  ;  to  change  direction  by  the 
flank  of  subdivisions,  each  chief  of  subdivision  will  cause 
his  men  to  support  arms  after  having  aligned  it  and  com- 
manded, Front. 


PART     THIRD. 

Article  First. 

To  march  in  column  at  full  distance. 

161.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the  column  in 
march,  ho  will  indicate  to  the  leading  guide  two  distinct 


38   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

objects  in  front,  on  the  Hue  which  the  guide  ought  to 
follow.  This  guide  will  immediately  put  his  shoulder's  in  a 
square  with  that  line,  take  the  more  distant  object  as  the 
point  of  direction,  and  the  nearer  one  as  the  intermediate 
point. 

162.  If  only  a  single  prominent  object  present  itself  in 
the  direction  the  guide  has  to  follow,  he  will  face  to  it  as 
before,  and  immediately  endeavor  to  catch  on  the  ground 
some  intermediate  point,  by  which  to  give  steadiness  to 
his  march  on  the  point  of  direction. 

163.  There  being  no  prominent  object  to  serre  as  the 
point  of  direction,  the  colonel  will  despatch  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  or  adjutant  to  place  himself  forty  paces  in  ad- 
vance, facing  the  column,  and  by  a  sign  of  the  sword 
establish  him  on  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the 
leading  guide  ;  that  officer  being  thus  placed,  this  guide 
will  take  him  as  the  point  of  direction,  conforming  him- 
self to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company. 
No.  87. 

164.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.   Column  forward.     2.   Guide  left  (or  right). 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

165.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  subdivision,  the  column  will  put  itself  in  march, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, No.  200  and  following. 

166.  The  leading  guide  may  always  maintain  himself 
correctly  on  the  direction  by  keeping  steadily  in  view  the 


/ 


SCHOOL    OV    THE    liATTALION PART    III.        39 

two  points  indicated  to  liim,  or  chosen  by  himself;  if 
these  points  have  a  certain  elevation,  he  may  bo  assured 
he  is  on  the  true  direction,  when  the  nearer  masks  the 
more  distant  point. 

107.  The  following  guides  will  preserve  with  exactness 
both  step  and  distance ;  each  will  march  in  the  trace  of 
the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  him,  without  occupy- 
ing himself  with  the  general  direction. 

168.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  hold  himself,  habitu- 
ally, abreast  with  the  leading  guide,  to  see  that  he  does 
not  deviate  from  the  direction,  and  will  observe,  also,  that 
the  next  guide  marches  exactly  iu  the  trace  of  the  first. 

lOy.  The  major  will  generally  be  abreast  with  the  last 
subdivision;  he  will  see  that  each  guide  marches  exactly 
in  the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  preceding ;  if  either 
deviate  from  the  direction,  the  major  will  promptly  rectify 
the  error,  and  prevent  its  being  propagated ;  but  he  need 
not  interfere,  in  this  way,  unless  the  deviation  has  become 
sensible,  or  material. 

170.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel  will  fre- 
quently cause  the  <ibout  to  be  executed  while  marching  :  to 
this  effect,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Battalion^  right  about.     2.  March. 
3.   Guide  right. 


171.  At  the  second  command,  the  companies  will  face  to 
the  right  about,  and  the  column  will  then  march  forward 
II-4 


40        SCHOOL    OK    TIIK    BATTALION PART    III. 

in  an  opposite  direction;  the  chiefs  of  suKdivisions  will  re- 
main behind  the  front  raul;,  the  file  closers  in  front  of  the 
roar  rank,  and  the  gniJes  will  place  themselves  in  the 
same  rank.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  remain  abreast  of 
the  first  division,  now  in  rear;  the  major  will  give  a  point 
of  direction  to  the  loading  guide,  and  march  abreast  of 
him. 

172.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  habitually  on  the 
directing  flank ;  ho  will  look  to  the  step  and  to  the  dis- 
tances, and  see  that  all  the  principles  prescribed  for  the 
march  in  column,  school  of  the  company,  are  observed. 

173.  These  means,  which  the  practice  in  that  school 
ought  to  have  rendered  familiar,  will  give  sufficient  exact- 
ness to  the  direction  of  the  column,  and  also  enable  it  to 
form  forward  or  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  right,  or  on  the 
left,  into  line  of  battle,  and  to  close  in  niasa. 

174.  But  when  a  column,  arriving  in  front,  or  in  rear  of 
the  line  of  battle,  or,  rather,  on  one  of  the  extremities  of 
that  line,  has  to  prolong  itself  on  it,  in  order  to  form  to  the 
left  or  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  then,  as  it  is  essen- 
tial, to  prevent  the  column  from  cutting  the  line,  or  sensi- 
bly deviating  from  it,  other  moans,  as  follows,  will  be 
employed. 


The  column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of  battle,  to 
prolong  it  on  this  line. 


175.  If  the  column  right  in  front  arrive  in  front  of  the 
line  of  battle,   as  it  should   cross  it  and   find  itself  four 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — rART    IIL        41 

paces  beyond  it  after  having  changed  direction,  the  colonel 
will  cause  to  bo  placed,  in  advance,  a  marker  on  the  line 
to  indicate  the  point  at  which  the  column  ought  to  cross 
it,  and  another  marker  to  indicate  the  point  where  the 
first  subdivision  should  commence  to  wheel;  he  will  be  so 
placed  that  when  the  wheel  is  executed,  the  left  guide  will 
find  himself  four  paces  within  the  line  of  battle.  The 
chief  of  the  leading  subdivision,  when  the  head  of  the 
column  shall  have  arrived  near  the  line,  will  take  the 
guide  to  the  right,  and  this  guide  will  immediately  direci, 
himself  on  the  second  marker.  On  arriving  abreast  of 
him,  this  subdivision  will  be  wheeled  to  the  left,  and  when 
the  wheel  is  completed,  the  guide  will  be  changed  again  to 
the  left;  this  guide  will  then  march  parallel  to  the  line  of 
battle  by  the  means  to  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

176.  The  instant  the  first  subdivision  wheels,  the  right 
general  guide,  who,  by  a  caution  from  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel, will  before  have  placed  himself  on  the  line  of  battle 
at  the  point  where  the  column  crosses  it,  and  who  will 
have  faced  to  the  two  points  of  direction  in  his  front,  indi- 
cated l)y  the  colonel,  will  march  forward  correctly  on  the 
prolongation  of  those  points. 

177.  The  color-bearer  will  place  himself  in  like  manner 
on  the  line  of  battle  :  and,  at  the  instant  the  color  subdi- 
vision wheels,  he  will  prolong  his  march  on  that  line, 
abreast  with  this  subdivision,  taking  care  to  carry  the 
color-lance  before  the  centre  of  his  person,  and  to  main- 
tain himself  exactl}'^  in  the  direction  of  the  general  guide 
who  precedes  him,  and  the  point  of  direction  in  front 
which  will  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

178.  Finally,  the  lefD  general  guide  will  place  himself  in 


42        SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    IIL 

the  same  manner  on  the  line  of  battle;  and,  at  the  instant 
the  last  sulxJivision  of  the  battnlion  wheels,  he  will  march 
correctly  in  the  direction  of  the  color-bearer,  and  the  other 
general  fjuide. 

179.  The  guide  of  the  first  subdivision  will  march  stead- 
ily abreast  with  the  right  general  guide,  and  about  four 
pace;>  to  his  right;  each  of  the  guides  of  the  following 
subdivisions  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who  im- 
mediately precedes  him,  as  prescribed,  No.  107. 

180.  The  colonel,  placed  outside  of  the  general  guides, 
will  see  that  the  column  marches  nearly  parallel  to,  and 
about  four  paces  within  these  guides. 

181.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  look  to  the 
direction  of  the  general  guides,  and  to  this  end,  place 
thejnselves  sometimes  in  rear  of  the  color-bearer,  or  the 
left  general  guide. 

182.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battiilions, 
the  general  guides  of  each  will  successively  place  them- 
gelves  on  the  line  of  battle  to  prolong  their  march  on  this 
line,  as  the  leading  subdivision,  that  of  the  color,  and  the 
one  in  the  rear  of  their  battalion,  shall  wheel  into  the  new 
direction  :  these  guides  will  conform  themselves  respect- 
ively, as  will  also  the  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and 
major,  to  what  is  prescribed  above  for  those  of  the  lead- 
ing battalion. 

183.  In  the  case  of  several  battalions,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  of  each  will  maintain  steadily  the  guide  of  his 
leailing  subdivision  about  four  paces  within  the  line  of 
general  guides,  even  should  the  last  subdivisions  of  the 
battalion  iminediatuly  preceding  deviate  from  the  parallel- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    III.        43 

ism.  in  order  that  the  false  direction  of  one  battalion  may 
not  influence  that  of  the  battalions  which  follow. 


The  column  arriving  behind  (he  line  of  bottle,  to  p?'o- 
long  it  on  this  line. 


184.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  arrive  behind  the 
line  of  battle,  as  it  ought  to  find  itself  four  paces  within 
this  line,  after  having  changed  direction,  the  colonel  will 
cause  a  marker  to  be  placed  at  the  point  where,  according 
to  that  condition,  the  first  subdivision  ought  to  commence 
wheeling.  Another  marker  will  be  established  on  the  line 
of  battle,  to  indicate  the  point  at  which  the  general  guides 
ought,  in  succession,  to  begin  to  prolong  themselves  on 
that  line;  he  will  be  so  placed  that  each  subdivision,  hav- 
ing finished  its  wheel,  may  find  itself  nearly  in  a  line  with 
this  marker. 

185.  At  the  instant  the  first  subdivision,  after  having 
wheeled  to  the  right,  begins  to  prolong  itself,  parallelly  to 
the  line  of  battle,  the  leading  general  guide,  placed  in 
advance  on  that  line,  will  direct  himself  on  the  two  points 
taken  in  his  front ;  the  color-bearer  and  the  other  general 
guide  will  successively  place  themselves  on  the  same  line 
the  instant  that  their  respective  subdivisions  shall  have 
finished  their  wheel. 

186.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battalions, 
the  general  guides  of  the  following  battalions  will  suc- 
cessively execute  what  has  been  just  prescribed  for  those 


44         SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    III. 

of  the  leadin-^  battiilion,  and  the  whole  will  conform  them- 
selves, as  well  as  the  guides  of  subdivisions,  and  the  field 
officers  of  the  several  battalions,  to  what  is  indicated, 
above,  for  a  column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of  battle. 
187.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  arriving  in  front  or  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  these  movements  will  bo  exe- 
cuted on  the  same  i^rinciplcs,  and  by  inverse  means. 


The  column  arrivwg  on  the  right  or  the  loft  of  the  I'm 
of  battle^  to  prolong  it  on  this  line. 


188.  If  the  column,  instead  of  arriving  in  front  or  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  arrive  on  its  right  or  left,  and  if 
it  have  to  prolong  itself  on  that  line,  in  order  afterward 
to  form  to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel 
will  bring  the  color  and  general  guides  on  the  flank  of  the 
column  by  the  command  color  and  general  gukles  on  the 
line:  and  these  guides  will  prolong  themselves  on  the  line 
of  battle,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  above. 


Manner  of  prolonging  a  line  of  battle  by  markers. 

189.  When  a  column  prolongs  itself  on  the  line  of  battle, 
it  being  all-important  that  the  general  guides  march  cor- 
rectly on  that  Hue,  it  becomes  necessary  that  colonels, 
lioutenaut-folonels,  and  majors,  whose  duty  it  is  to  main- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PART  III.   45 

tain  the  true  direction,  should  be  able  to  see,  as  far  as 
practicable,  the  two  objects,  on  which  the  march  of  the 
general  guides  ought  to  be  directed;  consequently,  when 
no  prominent  objects  present  themselves  in  the  desired 
direction,  the  chief  of  the  column  Avill  supply  the  want  of 
them  in  advance  by  aids-de-camp,  or  other  mounted  offi- 
cers, and  in  such  number  as  may  be  necessary. 

190.  Three  such  officers  may  prolong  a  line  as  far  as 
may  be  desired  in  the  following  manner:  they  will  place 
themselves  in  advance  on  the  line  of  battle,  the  first  at  the 
point  where  the  head  of  the  column  ought  to  enter;  the 
second,  three  or  four  hundred  paces  behind  the  first,  and 
the  third,  a  like  distance  behind  the  second.  The  first  of 
these  officers  will  remain  in  position  till  the  leading  gen- 
eral guide  shall  have  entered  on  the  line  of  battle,  and 
then,  at  a  gallop,  place  himself  at  a  convenient  distance 
l)ehind  the  third.  The  second  will  do  the  like  in  respect 
to  the  first,  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall  be  near 
him,  and  so  on  in  continuation.  These  officers,  without 
dismounting,  will  face  to  the  column,  and  cover  each  other 
accurately  in  file.  It  Avill  be  on  them  that  the  general 
guides  will  steadily  direct  their  march,  and  it  will  be  so 
much  the  more  easy  for  the  latter  to  maintain  themselves 
on  the  direction,  as  they  will  always  be  able  to  see  the 
mounted  officers  over  the  heads  of  the  preceding  guides; 
thus  the  deviation  from  the  direction,  by  one  or  more  gen- 
eral guides,  need  not  mislead  those  who  follow. 

191.  A  single  mounted  officer  may  suffice  to  assure  the 
direction  of  a  column,  when  the  point  of  direction  toward 
which  it  marches  is  very  distinct.  In  this  case,  that  officer 
will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  within  that  point, 


4G        SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    nATTAI.ION — PART    III. 

and  bcj'ond  the  one  at  wbich  the  head  of  the  column  will 
halt,  and  remain  in  position  till  the  column  halts:  serving 
thus  as  the  intermediate  point  for  giving  steadiness  to  the 
march  of  the  general  guides. 

192.  For  a  column  of  one  or  two  battalions,  markers  on 
foot  will  suffice  to  indicate  the  line  to  be  followed  by  the 
genernl  guides. 


JicmarL'^  on  the  march  in  column. 

193.  Although  the  unoadonecd  step  be  that  of  columns 
in  route  marches,  and  also  that  which  ought  to  be  habitu- 
ally employed  in  the  Evolutions  of  the  Line,  because  it 
leaves  the  men  more  at  ease,  and,  consequently,  is  better 
adapted  to  movements  on  a  large  scale  and  to  difficult 
grounds,  nevertheless,  as  it  is  of  paramount  importance  to 
confirm  soldiers  in  the  measure  and  the  movement  of  the 
cadenced  pace,  the  route  stop  will  be  but  little  practised  in 
the  exercises  by  battalion,  except  in  going  to,  and  return- 
ing from,  the  ground  of  instruction,  and  for  teaching  the 
mechanism  and  movements  of  columns  in  route. 

194.  It  is  highly  essential  to  the  regularity  of  the  march 
in  column  that  each  guide  follow  exactly  in  the  trace  of 
the  one  immediately  preceding,  without  occupying  his 
attention  witli  the  general  direction  of  the  guides.  If  this 
principle  be  steadily  observed,  the  guiilcs  will  find  them- 
selves aligned,  provided  that  the  leading  one  march  exactly 
in  the  direction  indicated  to  him;  and  even  should  obsta- 
cles in  his  way  force  him  into  a  momentary  deviation,  the 
direction  of  the  column  would  not  necessarily  be  changed; 


l\ 


\i\^ 


''-1 

p 

H_               ,      i-^ 

__:i' 

rr            'p 

%- 

M 

^i— 

^.._.._H 

u-f_ 

1 1 

H._. 

■-.p 

cj- 

P 

i- 

-._p 

H...__ 

-p 

4..  - 

...J- 

n 

. — 

— P 

M.  .. 

f' 

H_ 

._  H 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    15ATTALIOX — PAllT    III.        47 

whereas,  if  the  following  guides  endeavor  to  conform  them- 
selves at  once  to  all  the- movements  of  the  leading  one,  in 
I  order  to  cover  him  in  file,  such  endeavors  would  nt-cessa- 
V^ily  cause  corresponding  fluctuations  in  the  column,  from 
right  to  left,  and  from  left  to  right,  and  render  the  pres- 
04-vation  of  distances  extremely  difficult. 

I'Jo.  As  a  consequence  of  the  principle,  that  ench  (jnide 
nhall  exaciJy  foUoio  in  {he  trace  of  the  one  who  immediately 
pretedes,  if,  pending  the  march  of  the  column,  the  colonel 
shall  give  a  new  point  of  direction,  too  near  to  the  first  to 
require  a  formal  change  of  direction,  the  leading  guide, 
advancing  the  one  or  other  shoulder,  will  immediately 
direct  himself  on  this  point;  the  other  guides  will  only 
conform  themselves  to  this  movement  as  each  arrives  at 
the  point  at  which  the  first  had  executed  it.  Each  sub- 
division will  conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  its  guide, 
the  men  insensibly  lengthening  or  shortening  the  step, 
and  advancing  or  refusing  (throwing  back)  the  shoulder 
opposite  to  the  guide,  but  without  losing  the  touch  of  the 
elbow  toward  his  side. 

196.  The  column,  by  company,  being  in  march,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  diminish  front  by  platoon,  from 
front  to  rear,  at  once,  and  to  increase  front  by  platoon  in 
like  manner,  which  movements  will  be  commended  and 
executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  Nos. 
282  and  273  and  following,  changing  the  command  form 
compa7iij  to  form  companies.  So  may  he  increase  and 
diminish,  or  diminish  and  increase  front,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  at  once,  by  company,  changing  the 
command  form  companies  to  form  divisions,  and  the  com- 
mand  break   into  platoons,   to    break   into  companies.     In 


48        SCHOOL    OK    Tin:    HATTALION — PART    III. 

this  case,  the  companies  and  divisions  will  execute  what 
is  prescribed  for  platoons  and  companies  respectively. 

197.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  colonel  should 
wish  to  march  it  to  the  rear,  and  the  distance  to  be  gained 
be  so  inconsiderable  as  to  render  a  countermarch  a  dispro- 
portionate loss  of  time,  he  will  cause  the  column  to  face 
about,  and  then  put  it  in  mai'ch  by  the  commands  pre- 
scribed, No.  164;  the  chiefs  of  the  subdivisions  will  re- 
main behind  the  front  rank,  the  file  closers  before  the  rear 
rank,  and  the  guides  will  step  into  the  rear  rank,  now  in 
front.  In  a  column,  by  division,  the  junior  captains,  in 
the  intervals  between  companies,  will  replace  thtir  cov- 
ering sergeants  in  the  rear  rank,  and  these  sergeants  will 
step  into  the  lino  of  file  closers  in  front  of  their  in- 
tervals. 


Article  Skcond. 
Column  in  route. 

198.  A  column  in  route,  like  a  column  in  raanreuvro, 
ouglit  never  to  have  a  depth  greater  than  about  the  front 
it  had  occupied  in  the  line  of  battle,  less  the  front  of  a 
subdivision. 

199.  The  observance  of  this  iiriiiciplc  rccjuircs  no  par- 
ticular rule  for  a  column  in  manoeuvre;  but,  as  a  column 
in  route  may  have  hourly  to  pass  narrow  ways,  bridges,  or 
other  defiles,  rendering  it  necessary  to  diminish  the  front 
of  subdivisions,  it  becomes  important  to   give  rules  and 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    III.        49 

ir.cans  by  which  the  column  may,  for  any  length  of 
march,  preserve  the  case  of  the  route  step  without  clon- 
<;ation  from  front  to  rear. 

200.  A  column  in  route  will  be  habitually  formed  by 
company. 

201.  AVhen  a  column  in  route  shall  arrive  at  a  pass  too 
narrow  to  receive  the  front  of  a  company,  the  column 
will  diminish  front  by  platoon  before  entering.  This 
movement  will  be  executed  successively,  or  by  all  the 
companies  at  once. 

202.  If,  however,  the  defile  be  very  short,  and  it  may 
be  passed  by  the  diminution  of  a  few  files,  it  will  be 
preferable  to  break  to  the  rear  the  limited  number  of 
files. 

203.  The  column  being  by  platoon,  and  the  want  of 
space  rendering  a  further  diminution  of  front  necessary, 
it  will  be  diminished  by  section,  if  the  platoons  be  of 
twelve  or  more  files. 

204.  The  column  being  by  section,  will  continue  to 
march  by  that  front  as  long  as  the  defile  may  permit. 

205.  If  the  platoons  have  le?s  than  twelve  files,  one 
or  two  files  will  be  broken  to  the  rear,  according  to  the 
narrowing  of  the  defile,  and  the  route  step  continued  as 
long  as  six  files  can  march  abreast. 

206.  What  has  just  been  explained  for  breaking  files  to 
the  rear  in  a  column  by  platoon,  is  equally  applicable  to  a 
column  by  section. 

207.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  permit  six  men 
to  march  abreast,  the  subdivisions  will  be  marched  suc- 
cessively by  the  flank,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed, 
Nos.  314  and  315,  school  of  the  company. 


50        SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    I'.ATTAMOX — IWUT    III. 

208.  The  l>att!iliun,  miirohinp^  by  the  flank,  will  be 
formed  into  column,  by  section,  by  platoon,  or  by  com- 
pany, as  soon  as  the  breatlth  of  the  way  may  jiermit: 
the  several  movements  which  these  formations  include 
will  be  executed  by  the  commands  of  the  companies, 
as  their  companies  successively  clear  the  defile,  observing 
the  followinjjj  rules. 

209.  As  soon  as  the  way  is  sufTiciently  broad  to  contain 
six  men  abreast,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  By  section  {or  hy  jilaioon^   into  line.     2.  March. 

210.  At  the  command  march,  the  subdivisions  indicated 
will  form  themselves  into  linej  the  files  which  have  not 
been  able  to  enter,  will  follow  (by  the  flank)  the  last 
four  files  of  their  subdivision  which  have  entered  into 
line. 

211.  The  column  marching  in  this  order,  the  files  in 
rear  will  bo  caused  to  enter  into  line  as  the  increased 
breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

212.  The  column  marching  by  section  or  by  platoon, 
platoons  or  companies,  will  be  formed  as  soon  as  the 
breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

213.  The  leading  subdivision  will  follow  the  windings 
of  the  pass  or  defile ;  the  following  subdivisions  will  not 
occupy  themselves  with  the  direction,  but  all,  in  succes- 
sion, pass  over  the  trace  of  the  subdivisions  which  pre- 
cede them  respectively.  The  men  will  not  seek  to  avoid 
the  bad  parts  of  the  way,  but  pass,  as  far  as  practicable, 
each  in  the  direction  of  his  file. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOX — PART  III.   51 

214.  Changes  of  direction  will  always  be  made  without 
command  J  if  the  change  be  important,  a  caution  merely 
from  the  respective  chiefs  to  their  subdivisions  will  suflBce, 
and  the  rear  rank,  as  well  as  the  files  broken  to  the  rear, 
will  execute  successively  the  movement  where  the  front 
rank  had  executed  it. 

215.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
battalion  ;  he  will  regulate  the  step  of  the  leading  subdi- 
vision, and  indicate  to  its  chief  the  instant  for  executing 
the  various  movements  which  the  nature  of  the  route  may 
render  necessary. 

216.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battalions, 
each  will  conform  itself,  in  its  turn,  to  what  shall  have 
been  commanded  for  the  leading  battalion,  observing  to 
execute  each  movement  at  the  same  place,  and  in  the  same 
manner. 

217.  Finally,  to  render  the  mechanism  of  all  those 
movements  familiar  to  the  troops,  and  to  habituate  them 
to  march  in  the  route  step  without  elongating  the  column, 
commanders  will  generally  cause  their  battalions  to  march 
in  this  step,  going  to,  and  returning  from,  fields  of  exer- 
cise. Each  will  occasionally  conduct  his  battalion  through 
narrow  passes,  in  order  to  make  it  perceive  the  utility  of 
the  principles  prescribed  above  ;  and  he  will  several  times 
in  every  course  of  instruction,  march  it  in  the  route  step, 
and  cause  to  be  executed,  sometimes  at  once,  and  some- 
times successively,  the  divers  movements  which  have  just 
been  indicated. 

II-5 


52      8t"!iu(>L  or  Tin:  hatiamon — i'akt  m. 


General  remarks  on  the  column  in  route. 

218.  The  lesson  relative  to  the  coluiiin  in  route  is,  by  its 
frequent  application,  one  of  the  most  important  that  can 
be  given  to  troops.  If  it  be  not  ■well  taught  and  estab- 
lished on  right  principles,  it  will  happen  that  tlie  rear  of 
the  column  in  route  will  be  obliged  to  run,  to  regain  dis- 
tances, or  thiit  the  front  will  be  forced  to  halt  till  the  roar 
shall  have  accomplished  that  object;  thus  rendering  the 
march  greatly  slower,  or  greatly  more  fatiguing,  generally 
both,  than  if  it  were  executed  according  to  rule. 

219.  The  ordinary  progress  of  a  column  in  route  ought 
to  be,  on  good  roads  or  good  grounds,  at  the  rate  of  one 
hundred  and  ten  paces  in  a  minute.  This  rate  may  be 
easily  maintained  by  columns  of  almost  any  length;  but 
over  bad  roads,  ploughed  lields,  loose  sands,  or  mountain- 
ous districts,  the  progress  cannot  be  so  great,  and  must 
therefore  be  regulated  according  to  circumstances. 

220.  The  most  certain  mcaus  of  marching  well  in  route, 
is  to  preserve  always  a  regular  and  equal  movement,  and, 
if  obstailes  oblige  one  or  more  subdivisions  to  shicken  or 
to  shorten  the  step,  to  cause  the  primitive  rate  of  march  to 
be  resumed  the  moment  the  difficulties  are  passed. 

221.  A  subdivision  ought  never  to  take  more  than  the 
prescribed  distance  from  the  subdivision  immediately  pre- 
ceding ;  but  it  is  sometimes  necessary  to  lessen  that  dis- 
tance. 

222.  Thus  :  the  head  of  the  column  encounters  an  obsta- 
cle which  obliges   it  to  relax  its  march ;  all  the  following 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX — PART    III.        5d 

subdivisions  will  preserve  the  habitual  step,  and  close  up 
in  mass,  if  necessary,  on  the  subdivision  nearest  to  the 
obstacle.  Distances  will  afterward  naturally  be  recovered 
as  each  subdivision  shall  successively  have  passed  the 
obstacle.  Nevertheless,  if  the  diflSculty  be  too  great  to  be 
overcome  by  one  subdivision,  whilst  the  next  is  closing  up, 
so  that  distances  cannot  afterward  be  recovered  with- 
out running,  the  chief  of  the  column  will  halt  the  leading 
subdivision  beyond  the  obstacle,  at  a  distance  sufficient  to 
contain  the  whole  column  in  mass.  He  will  then  put  the 
column  in  march,  the  subdivisions  taking  distances  by  the 
head,  observing  to  commence  the  movement  in  time,  so 
that  the  last  subdivision  may  not  be  obliged  to  halt,  after 
having  cleared  the  obstacle. 

223.  When  the  chief  of  a  column  shall  wish  to  change 
the  rate  of  march,  he  will  cause  the  leading  battalion  to 
quicken  or  to  relax  the  step  insensibly,  and  send  orders  to 
the  other  battalions  each  to  regulate  itself  by  that  which 
precedes  it. 

224.  The  column  being  composed  of  several  battalions, 
the  gencral-in-chief  will  always  leave  an  aid-de-camp  with 
its  rear  to  bring  him  prompt  information  if  it  find  a  diffi- 
culty in  following, 

225.  Subdivisions  ought  always  to  step  out  well  in 
obliquing,  both  in  breaking  and  forming  companies  or 
platoons.  When  either  is  done  in  succession,  it  is  highly 
important  that  no  subdivision  slacken  or  shorten  the  step 
whilst  that  which  precedes  it  is  engaged  in  the  movement. 
The  observance  of  this  principle  can  alone  prevent  an 
elongation  of  the  column. 

226.  If  the  battalion,  marching  by  the  flank,  encounter 


54      SCHOOL  OF  Tin:  ijattamon — i'aut  hi. 

a  pass  so  narrow  as  to  oblige  it  to  defile  with  a  front  of 
two  men,  the  colonel  will  order  support  arms,  take  the 
cadenced  step,  and  undouble  the  files,  which  will  be  execu- 
ted as'  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  326 ; 
the  files  will  double  again  as  soon  as  the  breadth  of  the 
way  will  permit. 

227.  If  the  defile  be  only  sufficient  to  receive  a  front  of 
one  man,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  men  to  pass  one  at  a 
time.  The  men  of  the  same  file  should  follow  each  other 
in  their  order  as  closely  as  possible,  and  without  loss  of 
time.  As  soon  as  the  defile  permits  a  front  of  two  or  four 
men,  the  battalion  will  be  re-formed  into  two  or  four  ranks, 
and  will  march  in  this  order  until  there  be  space  to  form 
platoons  or  sections,  as  indicated,  No.  209. 

228.  In  both  cases,  just  supposed,  the  head  of  the  bat- 
talion, after  having  passed  the  defile,  will  march  till  suffi- 
cient space  be  left  to  contain  the  whole  of  the  subdivisions 
in  mass;  afterward  it  will  be  put  in  march  by  the  moans 
indicated,  No.  222. 

229.  When  a  command  has  to  move  rapidly  over  a  given 
distance,  the  movements  prescribed  in  this  article  will  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time;  if  the  distance  be  long,  the 
chief  of  the  column  will  not  allow  the  march  at  this  gait  to 
be  continued  for  more  than  fifteen  minutes;  at  thq  end  of 
this  time,  ho  will  order  ^hc  ordinary  route  step  to  be 
marched  for  five  minutes,  and  then  again  resume  the 
double  quick.  If  the  ground  be  uneven,  having  consid- 
erable ascents  and  descents,  ho  will  reserve  the  double 
quick  for  those  parts  of  the  ground  most  favorable  to  this 
march. 

230.  A  cidumu    marching  alternately    in  double   quick 


i 


^lamiK'^iH 


i       i 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III.        55 

time  and  the  ordinary  route  step,  in  the  mailner  stated, 
can  easily  accomplish  very  long  distances  in  a  very  short 
space  of  time ;  but  when  the  distance  to  be  passed  over  be 
.not  greater  than  two  miles,  it  ought  to  be  accomplished, 
when  the  ground  is  favorable,  without  changing  the  rate 
of  march. 


Article  Third. 
To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  cadcnced  step, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction, 
he  will  go  to  the  point  at  which  the  change  ought  to  be 
commenced,  and  establish  a  marker  there,  presenting  the 
breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column ;  this  marker,  no  matter 
to  which  side  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made,  will 
be  posted  on  the  opposite  side,  and  he  will  remain  in  posi- 
tion till  the  last  subdivision  of  the  battalion  shall  have 
passed.  The  leading  subdivision  being  within  a  few  paces 
of  the  marker,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  right). 

232.  At  this,  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision  will 
immediately  take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite  the  change 
of  direction,  if  not  already  there.  This  guide  will  direct 
himself  so  as  to  graze  the  breast  of  the  marker;  arrived  at 


56         SCHOOL    OF    THE    battalion — PART    III. 

this  point,  the  chief  will  cause  his  subdivision  to  change 
direction  by  the  commands  and  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company.  When  the 
wheel  is  completed,  the  chief  of  this  subdiv*ision  will  ro-, 
take  the  guide,  if  changed,  on  the  side  of  the  primitive  di- 
rection. 

233.  The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivis^ion,  as  well 
as  the  guides,  will  conform  to  Avhat  has  just  been  explain- 
ed for  the  leading  subdivision. 

23-4.  The  cidonel  will  carefully  see  that  the  guide  of  each 
subdivision,  in  wheeling,  does  not  throw  himself  without 
or  within,  but  passes  over  all  the  points  of  the  arc  of  the 
circle,  which  he  ought  to  describe.  • 

235.  As  often  as  no  distinct  object  presents  itself  in  the 
new  direction,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself 
upon  it  in  advance,  at  the  distance  of  thirty  or  forty  paces 
from  the  marker,  and  be  assured  in  this  direction  by  the 
colonel;  the  leading  guide  will  take,  the  moment  he  shall 
have  changed  direction,  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the 
straight  line  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would  pass  be- 
tween the  heels  of  the  lieutenant-colonel,  taking,  after- 
ward, new  points  as  he  advances. 

236.  The  major  will  see  that  the  guides  direct  them- 
selves on  the  marker  posted  at  the  point  of  change,  so  as 
to  graze  his  breast. 

237.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battaliiuis, 
the  lieutenant-colonel  of  the  second  will  cause  the  marker 
of  the  first  battalion,  to  be  replaced  as  soon  as  the  last 
subdivision  of  this  battalion  shall  have  passed;  this  dispo- 
sition will  be  observed  by  battalion  after  battalion,  to  the 
rear  of  the  column. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IIL        57 


Bemarks. 

238.  It  has  bceu  demonstrated,  school  of  the  company, 
how  important  it  is,  first,  that  each  subdivision  execute  its 
change  of  direction  precisely  at  the  point  where  the  lead- 
ing one  had  changed,  and  that  it  arrive  in  a  square  with 
the  direction ;  second,  that  the  wheeling  point  ought,  al- 
ways, to  be  cleared  in  time,  in  order  that  the  subdivision 
engaged  in  the  wheel  may  not  arrest  the  movement  of  the 
following  one.  The  deeper  the  column,  the  more  rigorous- 
ly ought  these  principles  to  be  observed ;  because,  a  fault 
that  would  be  but  slight  in  a  column  of  a  single  battalion, 
would  cause  much  embarrassment  in  ona  of  great  depth. 


Article  Fourth. 

To  halt  iJie  column. 

239.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command : 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

240.  At  the  second  command,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
captains,  the  column  will  halt;  no  guide  will  stir,  though 
he  may  have  lost  his  distance,  or  be  out  of  the  direction 
of  the  preceding  guides. 


58         SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III. 

241.  The  column  being  in  mjircb,  in  double  quick  time, 
will  be  halted  by  the  same  commands.  At;  the  command 
halt,  the  men  will  halt  in  their  places,  and  will  themselves 
rectify  their  positions  in  the  ranks. 

242.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  move  a  little  in 
front  of  the  leading  guide,  and  face  to  him  ;  this  guide  and 
the  following  one  will  fix  their  eyes  on  the  colonel,  in 
order  promptly  to  conform  theuiselves  to  his  directions. 

243.  If  the  colonel  judge  it  not  necessary  to  give  a  gen- 
eral direction  to  the  guides,  be  will  limit  himself  to  rectify- 
ing the  position  of  such  as  may  be  without,  or  within  the 
direction,  by  the  command  guide  of  (such)  comjyany,  or 
fjntdea  of  (such)  compatiiea,  to  the  riyht  (or  to  the  left)  ;  at 
this  command,  the  guides  designated  will  place  themselves 
on  the  direction;  the  others  will  stand  fast. 

244.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it  necessary 
to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  the  column,  he 
will  place  the  first  two  on  the  direction  be  shall  have 
chosen,  and  command: 


Guides,  cover. 


245.  At  this,  the  following  guides  will  promptly  place 
themselves  on  the  direction  covering  the  first  two  in  file, 
and  each  precisely  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his 
company,  from  the  guide  immediately  preceding;  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel will  assure  them  in  the  direction,  and  the 
colonel  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.    59 


Lefl  (or  rirjlit) — Dress. 

246.  At  this  command,  each  company  will  incline  to 
the  right  or  left,  and  dress  forward  or  backward,  so  as 
to  bring  the  designated  flank  to  rest  on  its  guide  ;  each 
captain  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide, 
promptly  align  his  company  parardly  with  that  which 
precedes,  then  command  Imiont,  and  return  to  hi?  place 
in  column. 

247.  Finally,  if  the  general  guides  march  on  the  flank 
of  the  column,  the  colonel,  having  halted  it,  will  place 
himself  in  rear  of  the  color-bearer,  to  ascertain  whether 
the  leading  general  guide  and  the  color-bearer  be  exactly 
on  the  direction  of  the  two  points  in  advance,  and  estab- 
lish them  on  that  direction  if  they  be  not  already  on  it; 
the  major  will  do  the  like,  in  respect  to  the  general  guide 
in  the  rear :  which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Guides — On  the  line. 


243.  At  this  command,  the  guide  of  each  company  of 
the  directing  flank  will  step  promptly  into  the  direction 
of  the  general  guide?,  and  face  to  the  front.  The  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, placed  in  front  of,  and  facing  to,  the  lead- 
ing general  guide,  and  the  major,  "placed  in  rear  of  the 
rearmost  one,  will  promptly  align  the  company  guides. 

249.  The  colonel,  having  verified  the  direction  of  the 
guides,  will  command  : 


60        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III. 

Left  (or  right) — DiiESS. 

250.  This  will  be  executed  as  prcscribeil,  No.  240. 

Remarks. 

251.  The  means  indicated,  No.  244,  and  following,  for 
giving  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  a  column,  at 
full  distance,  will  apply  only  to  a  column  composed  of 
two,  or,  at  most,  three  battalions.  If  the  number  be  more 
numerous,  its  chief  will  cause  the  colors  and  general 
guides  of  all  the  battalions  to  step  out  and  place  them- 
selves on  the  direction  which  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the 
column,  as  is  explained  in  the  evolutions  of  the  line. 


Article  Fiftii. 
To  close  the  column  to  half  distance,  or  m  7nass. 

252.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  distance  right 
in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wisH  to 
cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance,  on  the  loading  company, 
he  will  command  : 

1.   2o  half  distance,  close  column.     2.  Mahcu  (or 
double  quick — IMaucii). 

253.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 


SCHOOL    OF    TUE    BATTALION — PART    IIL        Gl 

254.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  repeated 
by  all  the  captains,  except  the  captain  of  the  leading 
compau}',  this  company  will  stand  fast,  and  its  chief  will 
align  it  by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace 
upon  the  rear  rank. 

255.  All  the  other  companies  will  continue  to  march, 
and  as  each  in  succession  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from 
the  one  Avhich  precedes,  its  captain  will  halt  it. 

256.  At  the  instant  that  each  company  halts,  its  guide 
will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides  who 
precede,  and  the  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the 
left ;  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the  rear 
rank. 

257.  No  particular  attention  need  be  given  to  the  gen- 
eral direction  of  the  guides  before  they  respectively  halt  ; 
it  will  suffice  if  each  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  one  who 
precedes  him. 

258.  The  colonel,  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  will  super- 
intend the  execution  of  the  movement,  observing  that  the 
captains  halt  their  companies  exactly  at  platoon  distance 
the  one  from  the  other. 

259.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  a  few  paces  in  front,  will 
face  to  the  leading  guide  and  assure  the  positions  of  the 
following  guides  as  they  successively  place  themselves  on 
the  direction. 

260.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with 
the  last  guide. 

261.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  cause 
it  to  close  by  the  same  commands. 

262.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time, 
at  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leauing  company 


G2        6CIIOOL    OF    TIIK    IIATTALION — PART    III. 

Avill  command  quick  time  ;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  compa- 
nies will  caution  (hem  to  continue  their  march. 

2G3.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company  will 
march  in  quick,  and  the  other  companies  in  double  quick 
time;  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the 
preceding  one,  its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick 
time. 

264.  When  the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gained  its 
distance,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Douhle  (luick — M.VRCii. 

2(>5.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  the  column 
and  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance  at  the  same  time, 
he  will  notify  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  of  his 
intention,  who  at  the  command  march  will  halt  his  com- 
pany and  align  it  by  the  left. 

2GG.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and  the 
colonel  should  not  give  the  ctjmmand  double  quick,  the 
captain  of  tlio  leading  company  will  halt  his  company  at 
the  command  march,  and  align  it  by  the  left.  In  the 
case  where  the  colonel  adds  the  command  double  quick, 
the  captains  of  companies  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  202,  and  the  movement  will  bo  executed  as 
indicated,  No.  263. 

To  close  the  colinnn  on  the  eighth,  or  rearmost  com- 
pani/. 

267.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of  causing 
it  to  close  to  half  distance  on  Ihe  first  company,  the 
colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  on  the  eighth, 
he  will  command  : 


^^ 

^''J* 

i 

1 

1 

1 

N- 

r 

1 

f~ 

r 

•!^ 

Li 

r 

'■           v 

rr 

M 

r 

i 

1       '^' 

^-r 

__p 

h 

1 

1 

i-! 

.p 

H 

'^'  i 

Hillllffli-' 

1               ■*■ 

1 

1  iiiiSiiii^ 

MlihSlHlF' 

M 

H 

H 

1 

h 

r' 

— — n 

h 

ZIr 

t]— 

1 

H 

SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    III.         G3 

1.  On  the  eighth  company^  to  half  distance  close 
column.  2.  Battalion  about — Face.  3.  Column 
forward.  4.  Guide  right.  5.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

268.  At  the  second  comraand,  all  the  companies  except 
the  eighth,  will  face  about,  and  their  guides  will  remain 
in  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 

269.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  outside  of  their  companies  on  the 
directing  flank. 

270.  At  the  command  march,  the  eighth  company  will 
stand  fast,  and  its  captain  will  align  it  by  the  left,  the 
other  companies  will  put  themselves  in  march,  and,  as 
each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  one  established 
before  it,  its  captain  will  halt  it  and  face  it  to  the  front. 
At  the  moment  that  each  company  halts,  the  left  guide, 
remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will  place  himself  promptly 
on  the  direction  of  the  guides  already  established.  Imme- 
diately after,  the  captain  will  align  his  company  by  the 
left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  on  the  rear 
rank.  If  this  movement  be  executed  in  double  quick  time, 
each  captain,  in  turn,  will  halt,  and  command:  Such  com- 
pany, right  about — Halt.  At  this  command,  the  company 
designated  will  face  to  the  right  about  and  halt. 

271.  All  the  companies  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will 
cause  the  guides,  who  stand  faced  to  the  rear,  to  face 
about. 

272.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself  behind  the 
rearmost  guide,  will  assure  successively  the  positions  of 

II-6 


64        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PAUT    IIL 

the   other  guides,   ns  prescribed,    No.  259;  tlic  innjor  will 
remain  abreast  with  the  rearmost  company. 

273.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  close  it  on  the  eighth  company,  he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance,  close  col- 
umn. 2.  Battalion,  riyht  about.  3.  ;M.\14CU  (or 
double  quick — March).     4.   Guide  riyht. 

274.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  eighth 
company  will  caution  his  company  that  it  will  remain 
faced  to  the  front;  the  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  caiiliun  tlieir  companies  that  they  will  have  to  face 
about. 

275.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  eighth 
company  will  halt  his  company  and  align  it  by  the  left; 
the  tile  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

276.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the  same 
command,  will  place  themselves  on  the  flank  of  the  col- 
umn ;  the  subdivisions  will  face  about,  and  as  each  arrives 
at  platoon  distance  from  the  company  immediately  pre- 
ceding it,  its  chief  will  face  it  to  the  front  and  halt  it  as 
prescribed,  No.  270.  The  instant  each  company  halts,  the 
guide  on  the  directing  flank,  remaining  faced  to  the  rear, 
will  quickly  i)lace  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides 
already  established.  After  which,  the  captain  will  align 
the  company  by  the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one 
pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

277.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  follow  the  movement 
abreast  of  the  first  company.  The  major  will  place  him- 
self a  few  paces  in  roar  of  the  guide   of  the  eighth  com- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IIL        65 

pany,  and  ^Yill  assure  successively  the  position  of  the  other 
guides. 

Remarks. 

278.  A  column  by  division  at  full  distances  will  close  to* 
half  distance  by  the  same  means  and  the  same  commands. 

279.  A  column,  by  company,  or  by  division,  being  at 
full  or  half  distance^  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  close  in 
mass  by  the  same  means  and  commands,  substituting  the 
indication,  column,  clone  in  mass,  for  that  of  to  half  dis- 
tance, close  column.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  con- 
form himself  to  all  that  has  just  been  prescribed,  except 
that  he  will  not  halt  his  subdivision  till  its  guide  shall  be 
at  a  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  guide  of  the  subdivi- 
sion next  preceding. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  these  various  move- 
ments will  be  executed  on  the  same  princijiles. 

\  • 

Article  Sixth. 

To  march  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in 
mass. 

281.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being  at  a 
halt,  the  colonel  will  put 'it  in  march  by  the  commands 
prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

282.  The  means  of  direction  will  also  be  the  same  for  a 
column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  as  for  a  column  at  full 
distance,  except  that  the  general  guides  will  not  step  out. 


6G        SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    JJATTALION — part    III. 

2S3.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  iu  mass,  being  in 
march,  when  the  colonel  .>*hall  wi.sh  to  halt  it,  ho  will  give 
the  commands  prej!cribe<l  for  halting  a  column  at  full  dis- 
tance, and  if.  afterwards,  he  judge  it  necessary  to  give  a 
general  direction  to  the  guides  of  the  column,  he  will 
employ,  to  this  end,  the  commands  and  means  indicated. 
No.  244,  and  following. 

284.  In  columns  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass, 
chiefs  of  subdivision  will  repeat  the  commands  nmrch  and 
halt,  as  in  columns  at  full  distance. 

285.  The  colonel  will  often  march  the  column  to  the 
rear,  by  the  means  and  the  commands  prescribed,  Nos. 
170  and  171. 

286.  A  column  by  division  or  company,  whether  at  full 
or  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  at  a  halt  or  marching, 
can  be  faced  to  the  right  or  left,  and  marched  off  in  the 
new  direction. 


.     Article  Seventh. 

To  cJiaiu/e  direction  in  column  at  half  distance. 

287.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  commands  and  according  to 
the  same  principles  as  a  column  at  full  distance;  but  as 
the  distance  between  the  subdivisions  is  less,  the  pivot  man 
in  each  subdivision  will  take  sttps  of  fourteen  inches  in- 
stead of  nine,  and  of  seventeen  inches  instead  of  eleven, 
according  to  the  gait,  in  order  to  clear,  in  time,  the  wheel- 
ing point,  a)iid  the  marching  flank  will  describe  the  arc  of 
a  larger  circle,  the  better  to  facilitate  the  movement. 


66 


F.3^ 


school  of  the  battalion — part  iii.      67 

Article  Eighth. 

To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 

1st.    To  chcnige  direction  in  marching. 

288.  A  eolumn  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  being  in 
march,  will  change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdivisions. 

289.  Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse,  or  to 
the  pivot  flank,  it  will  always  be  executed  on  the  principle 
of  wheeling  in  marching;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  first 
cause  the  battalion  to  take  the  guide  on  the  flank  opposite 
to  the  intended  change  of  direction,  if  it  be  not  already 
on  that  flank. 

290.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  having  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  the  colonel, 
after  having  caused  a  marker  to  be  placed  at  the  point 
where  the  change  ought  to  commence,  will  command : 

1.  Battalion,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

291.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  division  will 
wheel  as  if  it  were  part  of  a  column  at  half  distance. 

292.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the 
wheel,  all  the  others  will,  at  once,  conform  themselves  to 
its  movement ;  to  this  end  the  left  guide  of  each,  advancing 
slightly  the  left  shoulder,  and  lengthening  a  little  the  step, 
will  incline  to  the  left,  and  will  observe,  at  the  same  time, 


68        SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    III. 

to  gain  so  much  ground  to  the  front  that  there  may  con- 
stantly be  an  interval  of  four  paces  between  his  division 
and  that  which  precedes  it;  and  as  soon  as  he  shall  cover 
the  preceding  guide,  he  will  cease  to  incline  and  then 
march  exactly  in  his  trace. 

293.  Each  division  will  conform  itself  to  the  movement 
of  its  guide ;  the  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  toward 
him  and  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder  the  instant  the 
movement  commences;  each  tile,  in  inclining,  will  gain  so 
much  the  less  ground  to  the  front,  as  the  tile  shall  be  nearer 
to  the  pivot,  and  the  right  guide  will  gain  only  so  much 
as  may  be  necessary  to  maintain  between  liis  own  and  the 
l)receding  division  the  same  distance  which  separates  their 
marching  Hanks. 

294.  Each  chief  of  division,  turning  to  it,  will  regulate 
its  march,  and  see  that  it  remains  constantly  included  be- 
tween its  guides,  that  its  alignment  continues  nearly  par- 
allel to  that  of  the  preceding  division,  and  that  the  centre 
bends  only  a  little  to  the  rear. 

295.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  movement,  and 
cause  the  pivot  of  the  leading  division  to  lengthen  or  to 
shorten  the  step,  conforming  to  the  principle  established, 
school  of  the  company,  No.  227 — if  either  be  necessary  to 
facilitate  the  movement  of  the  other  divisions. 

290.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  near  the  left  guide 
of  the  leading  division,  will  regulate  his  march,  and  take 
care,  above  all,  that  he  does  nut  throw  himself  within  the 
arc  he  ought  to  describe. 

297.  The  major,  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  guides,  will 
see  that  the  last  three  conform  themselves,  each  by  slight 
degrees,  to  the  movement  of  the  guide  immediately  pre- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART   HI.        69 

ceding,  and  that  neither  inclines  too  much  in  the  endeavor 
to  cover  too  promptly  the  guide  in  his  front;  he  will  rectify 
any  serious  fault  that  ma)'  be  committed  in  either  of  those 
particulars. 

298.  The   colonel,  seeing   the  wheel  nearly   ended,  will 
command  : 


1.  Forward.     2.  March. 


299.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  leading  division  completes  its  wheel,  it  will 
resume  the  direct  march;  the  other  divisions  will  conform 
themselves  to  this  movement;  and  if  any  guide  find  him- 
self not  covering  his  immediate  leader,  he  will,  by  slight 
degrees,  bring  himself  on  the  trace  of  that  guide,  by  ad- 
vancing the  right  shoulder. 

300.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  has  to  change  direc- 
tion to  the  left,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it  to  take  the 
guide  to  the  right,  and  then  command  : 


1.  Battalion,  left  wheel.     2.  March. 


301.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  change 
direction  to  the  left,  according  to  the  principles  just  pre- 
scribed, and  by  inverse  means. 

302.  When  the  battalion  shall  have  resumed  the  direct 


70        SCHOOL    OF    THF.    BATTALION PART    IIL 

march,  the  colonel  will  change  the  guide  to  the  left,  on 
seeing  the  last  three  guides  nearly  in  the  direction  of  the 
one  in  front, 

803.  The  foregoing  changes  of  direction  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  in  a  column,  left  in  front. 

304.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  will  change 
direction  in  marching,  by  the  commands  and  means  indi- 
cated for  a  column  by  division. 

305.  The  guide  who  is  the  pivot  of  the  particular  wheel, 
ought  to  maintain  himself  at  his  usual  distance  of  six 
paces  from  the  guide  who  precedes  him ;  if  this  distance 
be  not  exactly  preserved,  the  divisions  would  necessarily 
become  confounded,  which  must  be  carefully  avoided. 


2(i.    To  chantje  direction  from  a  halt. 

306.  A  column  bj'  company,  or  by  division,  closed  in 
mass,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give 
it  a  new  direction,  and  in  which  it  is  to  remain,  he  will 
cause  it  to  execute  this  movement  by  the  flanks  of  subdi- 
visions, in  the  following  manner  : 

307.  The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  by  the 
right  flank,  he  will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  the 
point  of  direction  to  the  right;  this  officer  will  immediately 
establish,  on  the  new  direction,  two  markers,  distant  from 
each  other  a  little  less  than  the  front  of  the  first  subdi- 
vision, the  first  marker  in  front  of  the  right  file  of  this 
subdivision;  which  being  executed,  he  will  command: 


t 


i 


•m. 


U 


4_.        JL 

M          y 

H 

1:^  .  -    i^ 

H 

.4. _1_ 

H 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III.         71 

1.  Change  direction  hj/  the  right  flank.  2.  Batta- 
lion, right — Face.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

308.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  each  chief  of  subdivision  will  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

309.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  subdivisions  will 
step  off  together;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  one  will 
direct  himself  from  the  first  step,  parallelly  to  the  markers 
placed  in  advance  on  the  new  direction;  the  chief  of  the 
subdivision  will  not  follow  the  movement,  but  see  it  fiie 
pstst,  and  as  soon  as  the  left  guide  shall  have  passed,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  First  company  (or  Jirst  division).     2.  Halt. 
3.  Front.     4.  Left — Dress. 

310.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  subdivision  will  place 
itself  against  the  two  markers,  and  be  promptly  aligned 
by  its  chief. 

311.  The  right  guide  of  each  of  the  following  subdivi- 
sions will  conform  himself  to  the  direction  ot  the  right 
guide  of  the  subdivision  preceding  his  own  in  the  column, 
so  as  to  enter  on  the  new  direction  parallelly  to  that  sub- 
division, and  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  its  rear 
rank. 

312.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  halt  in  his  own 
person,  on  arriving  opposite  to  the  left  guides  already 
placed  on   the  new  direction,  see  his  subdivision  file  past, 


72        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    111. 

and  conform  himself,  in  baltin;^   and  aligning-  it,  to  what 
is  prescribed,  No.  309, 

31.3.  If  the  change  of  direction  be  by  the  left  flank,  the 
colonel  will  cause  the  markers  to  be  established  as  before, 
the  first  in  front  of  the  left  file  of  the  leading  subdivision, 
and  then  give  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indi- 
cation left  for  rif/ht. 

314.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  subdivisions  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  will  place  himself  by  the 
side  of  his  left  guide. 

315.  At  the  command  viawh,  all  the  subdivisions  will 
step  off  together,  each  conducted  bj'  its  chief. 

'  316.  The  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  direct 
himself,  from  the  first  step,  parallelly  to  the  markers;  the 
subdivision  will  be  conducted  by  its  chief;  and  as  soon  as 
its  left  guide  shall  have  passed  the  second  marker,  it  will 
be  halted  and  aligned  as  prescribed  above;  and  so  of  each 
of  the  following  subdivisions. 

317.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  on  the  designated 
flank,  to  see  that  each  subdivision  enters  the  new  dirojtion 
parallelly  to  the  leading  one,  and  at  the  presc-ribed  dis- 
tance from  that  which  precedes. 

318.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  in  front 
of,  and  facing  to,  the  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision, 
and  will  assure  the  i)ositions  of  the  following  guides,  as 
they  successively  arrive  on  the  new  direction. 

319.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with 
the  last  subdivision. 

320.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  bo  executed  iVith 
facility  and  precision,  it  is  necessary  that  the  loading  sub- 
division should  entirely  unmask  the  column  ;  for  example, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IIL        73 

the  movement  being  made  by  the  right  flank,  it  is  neces- 
dary,  before  halting  the  leading  subdivision,  that  its  left 
guide  shall,  at  least,  have  arrived  at  the  place  previously 
occupied  by  its  right  guide,  in  order  that  each  folloAving 
subdivision  which  has  to  pass  over  a  space  at  least  equal 
to  its  front  to  put  itself  in  the  new  direction,  and  whose 
left  ought  to  pass  the  point  at  which  the  right  had  rested, 
may,  at  the  command  halt,  find  itself,  in  its  whole  front, 
parallel  to  the  leading  subdivision. 

321.  By  this  method  there  is  no  direction  that  may  not 
be  given  to  a  column  in  mass. 


Article  Ninth. 

Being  in  column  at  half  distance^  or  closed  in  mass, 
to  take  distances. 

322.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  take  full  distances 
hjl  the  head  of  the  column  when  it  has  to  prolong  itself  on 
the  line  of  battle.  If,  on  the  contrary,  it  has  to  form 
itself  in  line  of  battle  on  the  ground  it  occupies,  it  wil^ 
take  distances  on  the  leading  or  on  the  rearmost  subdivi- 
sion, according  as  the  one  or  other  may  find  itself  at  the 
point  where  the  right  or  left  of  the  battalion  ought  to  rest 
in  line  of  battle. 

Is/.   To  take  distances  hy  the  head  of  the  column. 

323.  The  column  being  by  company  at  half  distance  and 
at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  take 
full  distances  by  the  head,  he  will  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  RATTAMON — PART  III, 


By  the  head  of  cohnnn,  taTce  wheeling  dislance. 

324.  At  this  ooramand,  the  captain  of  the  leading  com- 
pany will  put  it  in  march  ;   to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.  First  company,  forward.     2.   Guide  left. 
3.  Makcii  (or  double  quick — March). 

325.  When  the  .second  shall  have  nearly  its  wheeling 
distance,  its  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  company,  forward.     2.   Guide  left. 
3.  ]M.A.ucn  (or  double  quick — March). 

326.  At  the  command  luavrh,  which  will  be  pronounced 
at  the  in.stant  that  this  company  shall  liave  its  wheeling 
distance,  it  will  step  off  smartly,  taking  the  step  from  the 
preceding  company.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will 
successively  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
second. 

327.  The  colonel  will  sec  that  each  company  puts  itself 
in  march  at  the  iuh-tant  it  has  its  distance. 

328.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  and  direct  the  march  of  the  leading 
guide. 

329.  The  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the  rear- 
most guide. 

330.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  at  a  halt,  be  in 
march,  the  colonel  will  give  the  same  commands,  and  add : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III.         75 


March  (or  double  quick — March). 

331.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the 
command  vmrch,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will 
cause  double  quick  time  to  be  taken;  which  will  also  be 
done  by  the  other  captains  as  the  companies  successively 
attain  their  proper  wheeling  distance. 

332.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time, 
the  leading  company  will  continue  to  march  at  the  same 
gait.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies  will  cause 
quick  time  to  be  taken,  and  as  each  company  gains  its 
proper  distance,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  retake  the 
double  quick  step. 


2d.    To  take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

333.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on  the  rear- 
most company,  he  will  establish  two  markers  on  the  direc- 
tion he  shall  wish  to  give  to  the  line  of  battle,  the  first 
opposite  to  the  rearmost  company,  the  second  marker 
toward  the  head  of  the  column,  at  company  distance 
from  the  first,  and  both  facing  to  the  rear;  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  general  guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the 
lieutenant-colonel,  will  move  rapidly  a  little  beyond  the 
point  to  which  the  head  of  the  column  will  extend,  and 
place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two 
markers.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 
II-7 


76         SCHOOL    OF    THK    HATTALION PAKT    III. 


1.  On  the  eighth  company^  take  wheelinrj  dhtance. 
2.  Column  forward.  3.  Guide  left.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — Makcii). 

33'i.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  outside  of  the  directing  flank : 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  caution  it  to 
stand  fast. 

335.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the  cap- 
tains, except  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company,  this  latter 
company  will  stand  fast;  its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left 
on  the  first  marker,  who  is  opposite  to  this  company,  and 
place  himself  before  its  centre,  after  commanding:  Front. 
At  this  command,  the  marker  will  retire,  and  the  left  guide 
will  take  his  place. 

336.  All  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves  in 
march,  the  guide  of  the  leading  one  directing  himself  a 
little  within  the  right  general  guide;  when  the  seventh 
company  has  arrived  opposite  the  second  marker,  its  cap- 
tain will  halt,  and  align  it  on  this  marker,  in  the  manner 
prescribed  for  the  eighth  company. 

337.  "When  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company  shall  seu 
that  there  is,  between  his  company  and  the  seventh,  the 
necessary  space  for  wheeling  into  line,  he  will  halt  his 
company  ;  the  guide  facing  to  the  rear  will  place  himself 
promptly  on  the  direction,  and  the  moment  he  shall  be 
assured  in  his  position,  the  captain  will  align  the  company 
by  the  left,  and  then  place  himself  two  paces  before  its 
centre;    the   other   companies    will   successively    conform 


W ' 

'  - 

lr,^I^::,liarl-. 

« 

.  ■      ■•■           ■  h 

n 

i 

JilKWiffl. 

^nafiiiin 

^ ^ 

JiiiiilM. 

1 

,-r — — «. 

1 

— — 1    11 

!  H'iiiiiiiiiiiiiiffliik 

.-.! 

U 

r- 

—  >      1 

:-  — 

—^ 

I 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTAT.TOX PART    III.         7  7 

themselves  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  sixth 
oompauy. 

ooS.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  and  see 
that  each  company  halts  at  the  prescribed  distance; 
he  will  promptly  remedy  any  fault  that  may  be  com- 
mitted, and,  as  soon  as  all  the  companies  shall  be 
aligned,  he  will  cause  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the 
rear,  to  face  about. 

339.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  successively  assure  the 
loft  guides  on  the  direction,  placing  himself  in  their  rear, 
!i3  they  arrive. 

340.  The  major  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  will  direct  the  march  of  the  leading  guide. 

3d.    To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  coluviu. 

341.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  take  distances  on  the  lead- 
ing company,  will  establish  two  markers  in  the  manner 
just  prescribed,  one  abreast  with  this  company,  and  the 
other  at  company  distance  in  rear  of  the  first,  but  both 
facing  to  the  front :  the  left  general  guide,  on  an  intima- 
tion from  the  lieutenant-colonel,  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
rear  and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
two  markers,  a  little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the  rear  of 
the  column  will  extend  :  these  dispositions  being  made, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  frst  company,  take  wheeling  distance. 
2.  Battalion,  about — Face.  3.  Column  forward. 
4.  Guide  right.  5.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 


/8    SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTAF.ION PART  III. 

342.  At  the  second  commaml,  uU  the  companies,  except 
the  one  designated,  will  face  about,  the  guides  remaining 
in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

343.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  outside  of  their  guides. 

344.  At  the  command  7uarch,  the  captain  of  the  desig- 
nated company  will  align  it,  as  prescril)cd.  No.  .335,  on  the 
marker  placed  by  its  side, 

345.  Tiie  remaining  companies  will  put  themselves  in 
march,  the  guide  of  the  rearmost  one  will  direct  himself  a 
little  within  the  left  general  guide ;  when  the  second  com- 
pany shall  have  arrived  opposite  the  second  marker,  its 
captain  will  face  it  about,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  270,  and  align  it,  as  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  first  company. 

346.  The  instant  that  the  third  coni])any  shall  have  its 
wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  halt  it  facing  it  about, 
as  proscribed.  No.  270,  and  align  it  by  the  left ;  the  cap- 
tains of  the  remaining  companies  will  each,  in  succession, 
conform  himself  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
captain  of  the  third. 

347.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as  indicated 
No.  38S ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  339  and  340. 

348.  Those  various  movements  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  in  a  column  with  the  left  in 
front. 

349.  They  will  be  executed  in  like  manner  in  a  column 
closed  in  mass  ;  but,  if  it  bo  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to 
open  out  the  column  to   half,  instead  of  full  distance,  he 


li.   -    .^ 

y^ 

»  - 

B  ..     '  "^ 

J :_r 

^^« 


'\J 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.    /9 

will  substitute,  in  the  commands,  the  indication  half,  for 
that  of  wheeling  distance. 

350.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will  be  taken 
according  to  the  same  principles. 


Article  Tenth. 

Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance. 

351.  In  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  coun- 
termarch will  be  executed  by  the  means  indicated,  school 
of  the  compan}' ;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion,  right  for  left) — 
Face.  3.  By  file  left  (or  right).  4.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

To  countermarch  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

352.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
subjoined. 

353.  The  column  being  supposed  formed  by  division, 
right  in  front,  the  colonel  will  command : 

I.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion,  right  and  left — Face. 
3.  By  file  left  and  right.  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 


80    SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PART  III. 

354.  At  the  first  commiiml,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  num- 
bered divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
the  chiefs  of  the  others  to  face  to  the  left. 

355.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  divisions  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  the  even  to  the  left;  the  right  and  left 
guides  of  all  the  divisions  will  face  about;  the  chiefs  of 
odd  divisions  will  hasten  to  their  right  and  cause  two  files 
to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each  chief  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  leading  front  rank  man  of  his  division;  the 
chiefs  of  even  divisions  will  hasten  to  their  left,  and 
cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each  chief  place 
himself  on  the  right  of  his  leading  front  rank  man. 

356.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  divisions,  each 
conducted  by  its  chief,  will  step  oflF  smartly,  the  guides 
standing  fast ;  each  odd  division  will  wheel  by  file  to 
the  left  around  its  right  guide;  each  even  division  will 
wheel  by  file  to  the  right  around  its  left  guide,  each 
division  so  directing  its  march  as  to  arrive  behind  its 
opposite  guide,  and  when  its  head  shall  bo  up  with  this 
guide,  the  chief  will  halt  the  division  and  cause  it  to 
face  to  the  front. 

357.  Each  division,  on  facing  to  the  front,  will  be 
aligned  by  its  chief  by  the  right;  to  this  end,  the  chiefs 
of  the  even  divisions  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of 
their  respective  divisions. 

358.  The  divisions  being  aligno<l,  each  chief  will  com- 
mand, Fuont;  at  thin,  the  guides  will  shift  to  their  proper 
flanks. 

359.  In  a  column  with  the  left  in  front,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  b}'  the  snme  commands  and 
means;     but    all    the    divisions    will    be    alignt^d    by    the 


rf-    -                    H    ■ 

J-                       -W 

•i                   L 

r-r-    -"  tr 

X                L 

-      -  -D 

.H              u.    ■ 

i 

r         '      ■    '-"v.. 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III.        81 

left;  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  divisions  will 
hasten  to  the  left  of  their  respective  divisions  as  soon 
as  the  latter  shall  have  been  faced  to  the  front. 

360.  The  colonel,  placed  on  the  directing  flank,  will 
superintend  the  general  movement. 

361.  The  countermarch  being  ended,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  always  place  himself  abreast  with  the  lead- 
ing, and  the  major  abreast  with  the  rearmost  division. 

362.  In  a  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  the  coun- 
termarch will  be  executed  by  the  same  means  and  com- 
mands, applying  to  companies  what  is  prescribed  for 
divisions. 

363.  The  countermarch  will  always  take  place  from 
a  halt,  whether  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  or  at  full, 
or  half  distance. 


Article  Eleventh. 

Being  in  column  hij  company^  closed  in  mass,  to  form 
dioisions. 

364.  The  column  being  closed  in  mass,  right  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divi- 
sions, he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  divisions.      2.  Left  companies,  left — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


82        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III. 

30').  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  left  com- 
panies will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  left. 

366.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  companies  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  their  captains  will  place  themselves 
by  the  side  of  their  respective  left  guides. 

367.  The  right  companies  and  their  captains,  will  stand 
fast;  but  the  right  and  left  guides  of  each  of  these  com- 
panies will  place  themselves  respectively  before  the  right 
and  left  files  of  the  company,  both  guides  facing  to  the 
right,  and  each  resting  his  right  arm  gently  against  the 
breast  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  file,  in  order  to  mark 
the  direction. 

368.  At  the  command  mnrch,  the  left  companies  only 
will  put  themselves  in  march,  their  captains  standing  fast; 
as  each  shall  see  that  his  company,  filing  past,  has  nearly 
cleared  the  column,  he  will  command : 


1.  Such  compan)/.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 


360.  The  first  command  will  bo  given  when  the  com- 
pany shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  march  ;  the  second  at 
the  instant  it  shall  have  cleared  its  right  company;  and 
the  third  immediately  after  the  second. 

370.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  front,  the  files, 
if  there  bo  intervals  between  them,  will  promptly  incline 
to  the  right  ;  the  captain  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of 
the  right  company  of  the  division,  and  align  himself  cor- 
rectly on  the  front  rank  of  that  company. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III.        83 

371.  The  left  guide  Avill  place  himself  at  the  same  time 
before  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company,  face  to 
the  right,  and  cover  correctly  the  guides  of  the  right  com- 
pany ;  the  moment  his  captain  sees  him  established  on  the 
direction',  he  will  command: 

Right — Dress. 

372.  At  this,  the  left  company  will  dress  forward  on  the 
alignment  of  the  right  company;  the  front  rank  man, 
who  may  find  himself  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  will, 
without  preceding  his  rank,  rest  lightly  his  breast  against 
the  right  arm  of  this  guide;  the  captain  of  the  left  com- 
pany will  direct  its  alignment  on  this  man,  and  the  align- 
ment being  assured,  he  will  command,  Front;  but  not 
quit  his  position. 

373.  The  colonel  seeing  the  divisions  formed,  will  com- 
mand: 

Guides — Posts. 

374.  At  this,  the  guides  who  have  marked  the  fronts  of 
divisions  will  return  to  their  places  in  column,  the  left 
guide  of  each  right  company  passing  through  the  interval 
in  the  centre  of  the  division,  and  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  as  prescribed.  No.  75. 

375.  The  colonel,  from  the  directing  flank  of  the  column, 
will  superintend  the  general  execution  of  the  movement. 

376.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a  halt, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divisions,  he  will  com- 
mand : 


84         SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION IWItT    111. 


1.    Form  divisions.      2.    Left  companies.,   hj/  the  left 
Jiank.     3.  Mauch  (or  double  quick — March). 

377.  At  tlie  first  command,  the  captains  of  tho  right 
companies  will  command,  viark  time,  the  captains  of  the 
left  companies  will  caution  their  companies  to  face  by  the 
left  flmik. 

378.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  companies  will 
mark  time,  tho  left  companies  will  face  to  the  left;  the 
captains  of  the  left  companies  will  each  see  his  companj- 
file  past  him,  and  when  it  has  cleared  the  column,  will 
command : 

Such  company.,  by  the  right  Jlank — March. 

As  soon  as  the  divisions  arc  formed,  tho  colonel  will 
command  : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March. 


379.  At  tho  fifth  command,  the  column  will  resume  the 
gait  at  which  it  was  marching  previous  to  the  commence- 
ment of  tho  movement.  The  guides  of  each  division  will 
remain  on  the  right  and  Icfi  of  their  respective  companies; 
the  left  guide  of  the  right  company  will  pass  into  the  line 
of  file  closers,  before  the  two  companies  are  united;  the 
right  guide  of  the  left  company  will  step  into  the  rear 
rank.  Tho  captains  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed, 
No.  75. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    III.         85 


Being  in   column   at  full  or  half  distance,  to  form 
divisions. 

380.  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  and,  instead  of  being 
closed  in  mass,  is  at  full  or  half  distance,  divisions  will  be 
formed  in  the  same  manner;  but  the  captains  of  the  left 
companies,  if  the  movement  be  made  in  quick  time,  after 
commanding  Front,  will  each  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  his  company,  and  command:  1.  Such  company, 
forward.  2.  Guide  right.  3.  March.  If  the  movement 
be  made  in  double  quick  time,  each  will  command  as  soon 
aa  his  company  has  cleared  the  column, 

1.  Such  company .1  by  the  right  flank.     2.  March. 

381.  The  right  guide  of  each  left  company  will  so  direct 
his  march  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left 
of  the  right  company.  The  left  company  being  nearly  up 
with  the  rear  rank  of  the  right  company,  its  captain  will 
halt  it,  and  the  movement  will  be  finished  as  prescribed, 
No.  371  and  following. 

382.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  inverse  means:  the  right  companies  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  above  for  the  left  compa- 
nies ;  and  the  two  guides,  placed  respectively,  before  the 
right  and  left  files  of  each  left  company,  will  face  to  the 
left.  As  the  command,  guidefi,  posts,  given  by  the  colonel, 
the  guides,  who  have  marked  the  front  of  divisions,  and 
the  captains,  will  quickly  retake  their  places  in  the  column. 

383.  If  the  column  be  marching  at  full  distance,  the  di- 


86        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    III. 

visions  will  be  formed  as  proscribed,  No.  19fi.  If  it  be 
marching  at  half  distance,  the  formation  will  take  place  by 
the  commands  and  according  to  the  principles  indicateil.  ' 
No.  376;  if  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time, 
the  companies  which  should  mark  time  will  march  in 
quick  time  by  the  command  of  their  captains. 

]lema7-ks  on  the  formation  of  (Jiri^lons  from  a  halt. 

.384.  As  this  movement  may  be  considered  as  the  element 
of  depl(»ymeuts,  it  ought  to  be  executed  with  the  utmost 
accuracy. 

385.  If  com])anies  marching  by  the  flank  do  not  preserve 
exactly  their  distances,  there  will  be  openings  between  the 
files  at  the  instant  of  facing  to  the  front. 

380.  If  captains  halt  their  conipanies  too  early,  they 
will  want  space,  and  the  files  which  have  not  cleared  the 
flanks  of  the  standing  companies  will  not  be  able  to  dress 
into  line  without  pushing  their  ranks  laterally. 

387.  If  on  the  contrary  the  companies  be  halted  too 
late,  it  will  be  necessary  for  them  to  incline  to  the  right  or 
left  in  dressing;  and  in  deployments,  either  of  these  faults 
would  lead  to  error  in  the  following  companies. 

388.  As  often  as  a  guide  shall  have  to  step  out  to  place 
himself  before  his  subdivision  in  order  to  mark  the  direc- 
tion, he  will  be  particularly  careful  to  place  himself  so  as 
to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  outer  files  of  the  subdi- 
vision when  they  shall  be  aligned ;  if  he  take  too  much 
distance,  and  neither  of  those  files  finds  itself  against 
him,  the  chiefs  of  the  subdivision  will  have  no  assured 
point  on  which  to  direct  the  alignment. 


r-'-:w 


^: 


;i^ 


# 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV.    87 


PART  FOURTH. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  column 
to  the  order  in  battle. 


Article   First. 

Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle. 

389.  The  line  of  battle  may  be  marked  or  determined  in 
three  difiFerent  manners :  1«^  by  placing  two  markers  eighty 
or  a  hundred  paces  apart,  on  the  direction  it  is  wished  to 
give  to  the  line  j  2c?,  by  placing  a  marker  at  the  point  at 
which  it  may  be  intended  to  rest  a  flank,  and  then  choosing 
a  second  point  toward,  or  beyond  the  opposite  flank,  and 
there  posting  a  second  marker  distant  from  each  other  a 
little  less  than  the  leading  subdivision;  Sd,  by  choosing 
at  first  the  points  of  direction  for  the  flanks,  and  then 
determining,  by  intermediate  points,  the  straight  line 
between  those  selected  points,  both  of  which  may  some- 
times be  beyond  reach. 

Article  Second. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  full  dis- 
tance into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right), 

I:  Forwa'rd!"^^  ^''  ^'^'^'  ^  ^^^^  ^^^^  ^^  ^^"^^- 
4.  Faced  to  the  rear, 
11-8 


88    SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV. 


1st.   Column  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle. 

390.  A  column,  right  iu  front,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  to  the  left  into  line,  ho  will 
assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  b^'  the  means  previonsly 
indicated,  and  then  command  : 


1.    Left   inlo   line,  wheel.      2.    March    (or   double 
quick — March). 

391.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  hasten  to  place  himself  on  the  direction 
of  the  left,  guides  of  the  column,  face  to  them,  and  place 
himself  so  as  to  bo  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  right  files 
of  his  company,  when  they  shall  be  in  line  :  he  will  ho 
assured  in  this  position  by  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

3ii2.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
captains,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each  company  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the 
right  arm  of  his  guide;  the  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
left  on  the  principle  of  wheeling  from  a  halt,  conforming 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  school  of  the  company, 
No.  239:  each  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  observe 
the  execution  of  the  movement,  and,  wlien  the  right  of 
the  company  shall  arrive  at  three  paces  from  the  line  of 
battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Such  company.     2.  Halt. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.        89 

oi)3.  The  company  being  halted,  the  captain  will  place 
himself  on  the  line  by  the  side  of  the  left  front  rank  man 
of  the  company  next  on  the  right,  align  himself  corrijctly, 
and  com  maud  : 

3.  Right — Dress. 

o94.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  dress  up  be- 
tween the  captain  and  the  front  rank  man  on  its  left,  the 
i-aptain  directing  the  alignment  on  that  man;  the  front 
rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  right  company,  who  finds 
himself  opposite  to  its  right  guide,  will  lightly  rest  his 
))rGast  against  the  left  arm  of  this  guide. 

;}95.  Each  captain,  having  aligned  his  company,  will 
command,  FRO^'T,  and  the  colonel  will  add : 

Guides — Posts. 

396.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  return  to  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  each  passing  through  the  nearest 
captain's  interval ;  to  permit  him  to  pass,  the  captain  will 
momentarily  step  before  the  first  file  of  his  company,  and 
tlie  covering  sergeant  behind  the  same  file.  This  rule  is 
(feneral  for  all  the  fornintions  into  line  of  battle. 

397.  When  companies  form  line  of  battle,  file  closers 
will  always  place  themselves  exactly  two  paces  from  the 
rear  rank,  which  will  sufficiently  assure  their  alignment. 

398.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  the  colonel, 
lieutenant-colonel,  and  major,  as  well  as  the  adjutant  and 
sergeant-major,  will  return  to  their  respective  places  in 
line  of  battle.      This  rule  is  general  for  all  the  formations 


90   SCHOOL  OF  THK  HATTALION — PART  IV. 

into  line  of  battle  ;  ncverthclcsp,  the  battalion  beinj;  in  the 
school  of  elcincnlary  instruction,  the  colonel  will  go  to  any 
point  he  may  deem  necessary. 

399.  A  column,  with  the  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  tv 
the  riyht  Into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples ;  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company  will  place  himself, 
at  the  first  command,  on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides, 
in  a  manner  corresponding  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  391, 
for  the  right  guide  of  the  right  company. 

400.  At  the  command  guides,  posts,  the  captains  will  take 
their  places  in  line  of  battle  as  well  as  the  guides.  This 
rule  18  general  for  all  for7nation»i  into  line  of  battle  in  which 
the  conipanien  are  aligned  by  ilie  left. 

401.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itself  into  line  of 
battle  \iy  the  same  commands,  and  means,  but  observing 
what  follows :  if  the  right  be  in  front,  at  the  command 
halt,  given  by  the  chiefs  of  division,  the  left  guide  of  each 
right  company  will  place  himself  on  the  alignment  oppo- 
site to  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of  his  company  : 
the  left  guide  of  the  first  company  will  be  assured  on  the 
direction  by  the  lieutenant-colonel ;  the  left  guides  of  the 
other  right  companies  will  align  themselves  correctly  on 
the  division  guides  ;  to  this  end,  the  division  guides  (on 
the  alignment)  will  invert,  and  hold  their  pieces  up  perpen- 
dicularly before  the  centre  of  their  bodies,  at  the  command 
left  into  line,  wheel.  If  the  column  by  division  bo  with 
the  left  in  front,  the  right  guides  of  left  companies  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  left  guides  of  right  companies,  and  place  themselves 
on  the  line  opposite  to  one  of  tho  three  right  files  of  their 
respective  companies. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.        91 

402.  A  column  in  march  will  be  formed  into  line,  with- 
out halting,  by  the  same  commands  and  means.  At 
the  command  march,  the  guides  will  halt  in  their  places, 
and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  promptly  rectify  their  posi- 
tions. 

403.  If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  move  forward,  without  halting,  he  will 
command : 

1.    By  companies,  left  wheel.    2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

404.  At  the  command  inarch,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
captains,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed 
pivot,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No. 
261 ;  the  left  guides  will  step  back  into  the  rank  of  file 
closers  before  the  wheel  is  completed,  and  when  the  right 
of  the  companies  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

3.  Forward.     4.   March.     5.  Guide  centre. 

405.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant  the 
wheel  is  completed,  the  companies  will  march  directly  to 
the  front.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  color  and  the  gen- 
eral guides  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  to  the  front.  The 
colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of  the  color;  the  captains 
of  companies  and  the  men  will,  at  once,  conform  them- 
selves to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  of  battle,  to 
be  hereinafter  indicated,  No.  587  and  following. 


92         SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    HATTALION — PART    IV. 

•lOG.  The  same  principles  arc  applicable  to  a  column  lefl 
in  front. 

By  inversion,  to  the  ricjht  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle. 

407.  When  a  column,  right  in  front,  .shall  be  under  the 
necessity  of  forming  itself  into  line,  faced  to  the  reverse 
flank,  and  the  colonel  i^hall  wish  to  execute  this  formation 
by  the  shortest  movement,  he  will  commaud  : 

1.    Bi/  inversion,  riglit  into  line,  wheel.     2.    Battalion, 
guide  right. 

408.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
place  himself  in  front,  and  facing  to  the  right  guide  of  the 

■  loading  subdivision;  at  the  second  command,  he  will  rec- 
tify, as  promptly  as  possible,  the  direction  of  the  right 
guides  of  the  column ;  the  captain  of  the  odd  company,  if 
there  be  one,  and  the  column  be  by  division,  will  promptly 
bring  the  right  of  his  company  on  the  direction,  and  at 
company  distance  from  the  division  next  in  front;  the 
left  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  place  himself  on 
the  direction  of  the  right  guides,  and  will  bo  assured  in 
bis  position  by  the  lieutenant-colnnel ;  which  being  exe- 
cuted, the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

409.  At  this,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  sub- 
division will  face  to  the  right,  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  left  arm  of  his  guide,  and  the  battalion  will 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.        93 

form  itself  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed;  which  being  executed,  the  colonel 
will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 


410.  If  the  column  be  with  the  left  in  front,  it  will  form 
itself,  by  inversion,  to  the  left  into  line,  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

411.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion,  when 
formed  into  line  of  battle,  to  be  moved  forward,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  commands,  and  according 
to  the  principles  indicated  in  No.  403 ;  always  preceding 
the  command,  by  companies,  right  (or  left)  tchecl,  by  the 
command,  by  inversion. 


Successive  Formations. 

412.  Under  the  denomination  of  successive  formations 
are  included  all  those  formations  where  the  several  subdi- 
visions of  a  column  arrive  one  after  another  on  the  line  of 
battle  ;  such  are  formations  on  the  right,  or  left,  forward 
and  faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle,  as  well  as  deploy- 
ments of  column  in  mass. 

413.  The  successive  formations  which  may  be  ordered 
when  the  column  is  marching,  and  is  to  continue  march- 
ing, will  be  executed  by  a  combination  of  the  two  gaits, 
<iaick  and  double  quick  time. 


94        SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PAKT    IV. 


2(1.    Column   at.  full  distance,  on  the  rhjht  (or  on  the  left), 
into  line  ofhatth. 

414.  A  column  by  company,  at  full  distance  and  right 
in  front,  having  to  form  itself  on  the  right  into  line  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  a 
little  in  advance,  the  point  of  apjnii,  or  rest,  for  the  right, 
as  well  as  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left;  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  hasten  with  two  markers,  and  establish  them 
iu  the  following  manner  on  the  direction  indicated. 

415.  The  first  marker  will  be  placed  at  the  point  of 
appui  for  the  right  front  rank  man  of  the  leading  com- 
pany; the  second  will  indicate  the  point  where  one  of  the 
three  left  files  of  the  same  company  will  rest  when  in 
lino  ;  they  will  be  placed  so  as  to  present  the  right  shoul- 
der to  the  battalion  when  formed. 

416.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.    On  the  rights  into  line.     2.   Battalion,  guide  right. 

417.  At  the  second  command,  the  right  will  become  the 
directing  flatik,  and  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  bo  to  that 
aide;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  company  will  march 
straight  forward  until  up  with  the  turning  point,  and  each 
following  guide  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  one  imme- 
diately preceding. 

418.  The  leading  company  being  nearly  up  with  the  first 
mai'ker,  its  captain  will  command:  1.  Riijht  turn,  and 
when  the  company  is  precisely  up  with  this  marker,  he 
will  add  :  2.   March. 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.        95 

419.  At  the  comman'l  march^  the  company  will  turn  to 
the  right;  the  right  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  brivg 
the  man  next  to  him  opposite  to  the  right  marker,  and 
when  at  three  paces  from  him,  the  captain  will  command: 


1.  First  company.     2.  Halt. 


420.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt; 
the  files,  not  yet  in  line,  will  form  promptly  :  the  left 
guide  will  retire  as  a  file  closer;  and  the  captain  will  then 
command: 


3.  RigJit — Dress. 


421.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  align  itself; 
the  two  men  who  find  themselves  opposite  to  the  two  mark- 
ers, will  each  lightly  rest  his  breast  against  the  right  arm 
of  his  marker ;  the  captain,  passing  to  the  right  of  the 
front  rank,  will  direct  the  alignment  on  these  two  men. 
These  rulea  arc  general  fur  all  successive  formations. 

422.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  straight 
forward;  when  arrived  opposite  to  the  left  flank  of  the  pre- 
ceding company,  it  will  turn  to  the  right,  and  be  formed 
on  the  line  of  battle,  as  has  just  been  prescribed;  the  right 
guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  come  upon  that  line  by 
the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  first  company. 

423.  At  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line  of 
battle,  the  company  will  be  halted  by  its  captain,  who  will 
place  himself  briskly  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of 


96    SCnOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOX PART  IV. 

the  preoediug  companv,  and  align  himself  correctly  ou  ita 
front  rank. 

424.  The  left  guide  will,  at  the  same  time,  place  himself 
before  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company,  and, 
facing  to  the  right,  he  will  place  himself  accurately  on  the 
direction  of  the  two  markers  of  the  preceding  company. 

425.  The  captain  will  then  command  : 

Right — Dkess. 

426.  At  this  command,  the  second  company  will  dress 
forward  on  the  line ;  the  captain  will  direct  its  alignment 
on  the  front  rank  man  who  had  rested  his  breast  against 
the  left  guide  of  the  company. 

427.  The  following  companies  will  thus  come  successive- 
ly to  form  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle,  each  conform- 
ing itself  to  what  has  just  been  proscribed  for  the  one 
next  to  the  right;  and  when  they  shall  all  be  established, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

428.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  take  their  places 
in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  placed  before  the  right 
company  will  retire. 

429.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and  the 
colonel  should  wish  to  cause  the  movemept  to  be  executed 
in  double  quick  time,  he  will  add  the  command:  Double 
quick — Maucii.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  compa- 
nies will  take  the  double  quick  step,  and  the  movement 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  417  and  following. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.        97 

430.  The  colonel  will  follow  up  the  formation,  passing 
along  the  front,  and  being  always  opposite  to  the  company 
about  to  turn:  it  is  thus  that  he  will  be  the  better  able  to 
see  and  to  correct  the  error  that  would  result  from  a  com- 
mand given  too  soon  or  too  late  to  the  preceding  company. 

431.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will,  with  the  greatest  care, 
assure  the  direction  of  the  guides;  to  this  end,  the  instant 
that  the  markers  are  established  for  the  leading  company, 
he  will  move  a  little  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  left  of 
the  next  company  will  rest,  establish  himself  correctly  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers,  and  assure  the  guide 
of  the  second  company  on  this  direction  ;  this  guide  being 
assured,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  farther 
to  the  rear,  in  order  to  assure,  in  like  manner,  the  guide  of 
the  third  company,  and  so  on,  successively,  to  the  left  of 
the  battalion.  In  assuring  the  guides  in  their  positions  on 
the  line  of  battle,  he  will  take  care  to  let  them  first  place 
themselves,  and  confine  himself  to  rectifying  their  posi- 
tions if  they  do  not  cover  accurately,  and  at  the  proper 
distance,  the  preceding  guides  or  markers.  Tkis  rule  is 
general  for  all  euccesHive  formations. 

432.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  on  the  left 
into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles ;  the 
captains  will  go  to  the  left  of  their  respective  companies  to 
align  them,  and  shift  afterward  to  their  proper  flanks,  as 
prescribed,  No.  400. 


P8         SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    liATTALION PART    IV. 


Remarks  on  the  formation  on  the  rights  or  left^  into 
line  of  battle. 

433.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  cxooutcd  with 
regularity,  it  is  necessary  to  establish  the  line  of  battle,  so 
that  the  guide  of  each  company,  after  turning,  may  have 
at  least  ten  steps  to  take,  in  order  to  come  upon  that  line. 

434.  In  the  first  exercises,  the  line  of  battle  will  be  es- 
tablished on  a  direction  parallel  to  that  of  the  column  : 
but,  when  the  captains  and  guides  shall  comprehend  the 
mechanism  of  the  movement,  the  colonel  will  generally 
choose  oblique  directions,  in  order  to  habituate  the  battal- 
ion to  form  itself  in  any  direction. 

435.  When  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  forms  a 
sensible  angle  with  that  of  the  march  of  the  column,  the 
colonel,  before  beginning  the  movement,  will  give  the  head 
of  the  column  a  new  direction  parallel  to  that  line :  to  this 
end,  he  will  indicate  to  the  guide  of  the  leading  company 
a  point  in  advance,  on  which  this  guide  will  immediately 
direct  himself,  and  the  company  will  conform  itself  to  the 
direction  of  its  guide,  at  the  command,  or  on  a  mere  cau- 
tion, of  the  captain,  according  as  the  change  of  direction 
may  require ;  each  following  company  will  make  the  same 
movement,  on  the  same  ground,  as  it  shall  successively 
arrive.  By  this  means  the  guides  of  all  the  companies  in 
the  column  will  have,  after  turning,  nearly  the  same 
number  of  paces  to  take  in  order  to  come  upon  the  line  of 
battle. 

436.  Every  captain  will  always  observe,  in  placing  him- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    IJATTALIOX — PART    IV.        99 

self  on  that  line,  not  to  give  the  command  dress,  until 
after  the  guide  of  his  company  shall  have  been  assured  on 
the  direction  by  the  lieutenant-colonel.  This  rule  ia  gene- 
ral for  all  successive  formations. 

437.  Each  captain  will  cause  his  compan}--  to  support 
,vrms,  the  instant  that  the  captain,  who  follows  him,  shall 
have  commanded  front.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  suc- 
cessive formations. 

438.  When,  in  the  execution  of  this  movement,  the  colo- 
nel shall  wish  to  commence  firing,  he  will  give  the  order 
to  that  effect  to  the  captain  whose  company  is  the  first  in 
line  of  battle;  this  captain  will  immediately  place  himself 
behind  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  as  soon  as  the  next 
captain  shall  have  commanded  front,  he  will  commence 
the  fire  by  file,  by  the  commands  prescribed,  school  of  the 
company.  At  the  command  fire  bij  file,  the  marker  at  the 
outer  file  of  this  first  company  will  retire,  and  the  other 
will  place  himself  against  the  nearest  man  of  the  next 
company.  The  captain  of  the  latter  will  commence  firing 
as  soon  as  the  captain  of  the  third  company,  in  line,  shall 
have  commanded  front;  the  murker  before  the  nearest  file 
of  the  second  company,  in  line,  will  now  retire,  and  the 
guide  before  the  opposite  flank  will  place  himself  before 
the  nearest  file  of  the  third  company,  in  line,  and  so  on,  in 
continuation,  to  the  last  company  on  the  left  or  right  of 
the  battalion,  according  as  the  formation  may  have  com- 
menced with  the  right  or  left  in  front. 

439.  In  all  the  successive  formations,  the  same  princi- 
ples will  be  observed  for  the  execution  of  the  fire  by  file. 
This  fire  will  always  be  executed  by  the  command  of  each 
captain  of  company. 

II-9 


100    SCHOOL  or  tiik  battalion — part  iv. 


3d.    Cohnnn  at  full  dixtanre,    forirard  into  line  of  battle. 

440.  A  column  bcinc^  by  compimj',  at  full  distanoc,  right 
in  front,  and  at  a  bait,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
if  forward  into  line,  he  will  conform  to  what  is  proscribed 
Nos.  414  and  415,  and  then  command: 

1.    Foncard  into   line.      2.    By   companj/,   left   half 
wheel.     3.    March  (or  double  quick — March). 

441.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  add — (inide  right,  put  the  company  in  march, 
halt  it  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and  align  it  against 
the  latter  by  the  right. 

442.  At  the  comniniid  march,  all  the  other  companies 
will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots  5  and,  at  the  instant 
the  colonel  shall  jiulge,  according  to  the  direction  of  the 
line  of  battle,  that  the  companies  have  suflScicntly  wheeled, 
ho  will  command  : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.  Guide  right. 

443.  At  the  fifth  command,  (he  companies,  ceasing  to 
wheel,  will  march  straight  forward;  and  at  the  sixth,  the 
men  will  touch  elbows  toward  the  right.  The  right  guide 
of  the  second  company,  who  is  nearest  to  the  line  of  battle, 
will  march  straight  forward;  each  succeeding  right  guide 
will  follow  the  file  immediately  before  him  at  the  cessation 
of  the  wheel. 

444.  The    second  company  having  arrived  opposite  to 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    IV.      101 

the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  turn  to 
the  light,  in  order  to  approach  the  line  of  battle;  and  when 
its  right  guide  shall  be  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  the 
captain  will  command : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 

445.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt; 
the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will  come  into  it 
promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
battle,  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  files  on  the 
left  of  the  company;  and,  as  soon  as  he  is  assured  on  the 
direction  by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the  captain,  having 
placed  himself  accurately  on  the  line  of  battle,  Avill  com- 
mand: 

3.  Right — Dress. 

446.  At  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  the  second  com- 
pany begins  to  turn  to  the  right,  the  guide  of  the  third, 
ceasing  to  follow  the  file  immediately  before  him,  will 
march  straightforward:  and,  when  he  shall  arrive  oppo- 
site to  the  left  of  the  second,  his  captain  will  cause  the 
company  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the  line 
of  battle,  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  and  align  it 
by  the  right,  as  pi-eseribed  for  the  second  company. 

447.  Each  following  company  will  execute  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  third,  as  the  preceding  company 
shall  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the  line  of 
battle. 

448.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


102      SCIIOOI-    OF    TIIK    I5ATTAM0X — PART    IV. 


Guides — Posts. 

449.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will  observe  in 
this  formation,  what  is  prescribed  for  them  on  the  right 
into  line. 

450.  A  column  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  forward  into 
line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

451.  When  a  column  by  company  at  full  distance,  right 
in  front,  and  in  march,  shall  arrive  behind  the  right  of  the 
line  on  Avhich  it  is  to  form  into  battle,  the  colonel  and 
lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, Nos.  414  and  415. 

452.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at  com- 
pany distance  from  the  two  markers  established  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    Forward   into   line.      2.    By   company,   left  half 
wheel.     3.  Maucii  (or  double  quick — March). 

45;5.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  com- 
pany will  command,  tjuicle  ri(/ht,  and  caution  it  to  march 
directly  to  the  front,  the  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  caution  theua  to  wheel  to  the  left. 

454.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
captains,  the  first  company  will  continue  to  march  to  the 
front,  taking  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  Its  chief 
will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and  align  it 
by  the  right.     The  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  left 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.      103 

on  fixed  pivots,  and  at  the  instant  the  colonel  shall  judge 
that  they  have  wheeled  sufficiently,  he  will  command : 


4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 


455.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel  and  move  forward.  At  the  sixth,  they  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  The  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  previously  explained. 

456.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  the  column  for- 
ward into  line,  and  to  continue  to  march  in  this  order,  he 
will  not  cause  markers  to  be  established :  the  movement 
will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means,  but  with  the  following  modifications. 

457.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  com- 
pany will  add  quick  time  after  the  command  guide  right. 
At  the  second  command,  the  first  company  will  continue 
to  march  in  quick  time,  and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows 
to  the  right;  its  chief  will  immediately  place  himself  on 
it3  right,  and  to  assure  the  march,  will  take  points  of  di- 
rection to  the  front.  The  captain  of  the  second  company 
will  cause  his  company  to  take  the  same  gait  as  soon  as  it 
.'ihall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  first,  and  will  also  move  to 
the  right  of  his  company;  the  captains  of  the  third  and 
fourth  companies  will  execute  successively  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  second.  The  companies  will  pre- 
serve the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right,  until  the  command, 
guide  centre, 

458.  When  the   color  company  shall  have  entered  the 


104  SCHOOL  OF  tup:  hattalion — paut  iv. 

line,  the  colonel  will  coinnian<l,  .^/M/f/c  centre.  At  this  com- 
mand, the  color-bearer  and  the  right  general  guide  will 
move  rapidly  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  line.  The  colonel 
will  assure  the  direction  of  the  color-bearer.  The  lieuten- 
ant-colonel and  the  right  companies  will  immediately  con- 
form themselves  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  of 
battle.  The  left  companies  and  the  left  general  guide,  as 
they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  also  conform  to  the  same 
principles.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  when  the  last  company  shall  have  arrived  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  double  quick  to  be  resumed. 
459.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  movement  be  entirely 
completed,  before  halting  the  battalion.  As  soon  as  the 
part  of  the  battalion  already  formed  shall  have  arrived 
on  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion  ; 
the  companies  not  in  line  will  each  complete  the  move- 
ment. 


Remarks  on  the  formation  forward,  into  line  of 
battle. 

460,  The  precision  of  this  movement  depends  on  the 
direction  the  companies  have  at  the  moment  the  colonel 
commands,  Furwarcl — March.  The  colonel  will  judge 
nicely  the  point  of  time  for  giving  this  command,  obserr- 
ing  that,  if  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  form  with 
that  of  the  column  a  right,  or  nearly  a  right  angle,  the 
companies  ought  to  wheel  about  the  eighth  of  the  circle, 
and  that  the  more  acute  the  angle  formed  by  the  two  di- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.      105 

rections,  so  much  the  more  the  companies  ought  to  wheel 
before  marching  straight  forward. 

461.  It  is  important  that  each  company  in  marching 
toward  the  line  of  battle  should  turn  exactly  opposite  the 
point  where  its  captain  ought  to  place  himself  on  that  line; 
if  a  company  turn  too  soon,  it  will  find  itself  masked,  in 
part,  by  that  which  preceded  it  on  the  line  of  battle,  and 
be  obliged  to  unmask  itself  by  the  oblique  step ;  if  it  turn 
too  late,  it  will  leave  an  interval  between  itself  and  the 
preceding  company  to  be  regained  in  like  manner.  In 
either  case,  the  next  company  will  be  led  into  error,  and 
the  fault  propagated  to  the  opposite  flank  of  the  battalion. 

462.  The  guide  of  each  company  ought  so  to  regulate 
himself  in  turning,  as  to  bring  his  company  to  the  halting 
point  parallelly  with  the  line  of  battle. 

463.  If  the  angle  formed  by  the. line  of  battle  and  the 
primitive  direction  of  the  column  be  so  acute,  that  the  com- 
panies, on  arriving  opposite  to  their  respective  places  on 
the  line  of  battle,  find  themselves  nearly  parallel  to  it,  the 
captains  will  not  give  the  command,  r{<jht  (or  left)  turn, 
but  each  halt  his  company,  place  himself  on  the  line,  and 
command : 


Right  (or  lejt) — Dress. 


464.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  angle  formed  by  the  line  of 
battle  and  the  primitive  direction  of  the  column  be  much 
greater  than  a  right  angle,  the  formation  should  be  exe- 
cuted, not  by   the  movement  forward  into  line  of  buttle, 


106      SCHOOL    OF    THE    battalion part    IV. 

but  by  that  of  on  the  rujht  (or  left)  into  line  of  bottle,  and 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  this  foi-matioii. 

465.  If  a  company  encounter  an  obstacle  sufficient  to 
prevent  it  from  marching  by  the  front,  it  will  i-iyht  (or  left) 
face  in  marching,  by  the  commands  and  means  indicated 
in  the  school  of  the  company,  Nos.  314  and  315.  The 
guide  will  continue  to  follow  the  same  tile  behind  which 
he  was  marching,  and  will  maintain  exactly  the  same  dis- 
tance from  the  company  immediately  preceding  his  own. 
The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  company  will  be  formed 
into  line  by  the  command  of  its  captain. 


4th.   Column  at  full  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of 
battle. 

466.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance,  right 
in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  wh'ni  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
it  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he  and  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  414 
and  115,  and  the  colonel  will  then  command  : 


1.   Info  lute,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  BaUalion,  right — 
Fack.     '.\.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

407.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  jmt  it  in 
march,  causing  it  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  direct 
its  march  toward  the  line  of  battle  which  it  will  pass  in 
rear  of  the  left  marker ;  the  first  file  having  passed  three 


IV.     107 


again  by 
'f  the  two 
11  hal*  it, 
gainst  the 


T— Iir 


1^ ^ 


jompanies 
elf  by  the 

i  will  put 
e  second, 
Q  advance 
Drescribed 
ate  to  his 
he  line  of 
le  to  the 
r  to    tbat 


iny  shall 
g  one  al- 
and: 

ONT. 


the  com- 
the  halt- 
halt, 
he  front, 
ae  latter 
will    im- 


106    sciic 

but  by  thai 
according  t 
465.  If  i 
prevent  it : 
face  in  ma 
in  the  scb 
guide  will 
be  was  ma 
tanoe  from 
The  obstai 
into  line  b; 


4th.  CoUiih 

466.  A  ( 
in  front,  a; 
it  into  lint 
will  confo 
and  413,  a 

1.   Into  I 
Fack. 

467.  At 
company 
march,  ca 
its  march 
rear  of  tb 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    IV.      107 

paces  beyond  the  line,  the  company  will  wheel  again  by 
file  to  the  left,  in  order  to  place  itself  in  rear  of  the  two 
markers  ;  being  in  this  position,  its  captain  will  halt  it, 
face  it  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against  the 
markers. 

468.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  other  companies 
will  face  to  the  right,  each  captain  placing  himself  by  the 
side  of  his  right  guide. 

^69.  At  the  command  7?(a?-r7/,  the  companies  will  put 
themselves  in  movement;  the  left  guide  of  the  second, 
who  is  tiearest  to  the  line  of  battle,  will  hasten  in  advance 
to  mark  that  line ;  he  will  place  himself  on  it  as  prescribed 
above  for  successive  formations,  and  thus  indicate  to  his 
captain  the  point  at  which  he  ought  to  pass  the  line  of 
battle,  by  three  paces,  in  order  to  wheel  by  file  to  the 
left,  and  then  to  direct  his  company  parallelly  to  that 
line. 

470.  As  soon  as  the  first  file  of  this  company  shall 
have  arrived  near  the  left  file  of  the  preceding  one  al- 
ready on  the  line  oT  battle,  its  captain  will  command : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt.     3.     Front. 
4.  Right — Dress. 

471.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  com- 
pany shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  take  to  reach  the  halt- 
ing point. 

472.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

473.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  face  to  the  front, 
and  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  the  latter 
will  promptly   close  to  the  right;    the   captain   will   im- 


108      SCHOOL    OF    TlIK    HATTALIOX PART    IV. 

mediately  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the 
left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  himself  on  its 
front  rank. 

474.  The  fourth  command  will  be  executed  as  prescribed, 
No.  426. 

475.  The  following  companies  will  be  conducted  and 
established  on  the  line  of  battle  as  just  prescribed  for 
the  second,  each  regulating  itself  by  the  one  that  precedes 
it;  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves  in  time  to  pre- 
cede their  respective  companies  on  the  lino  by  twelve  or 
fifteen  paces,  and  each  place  himself  so  as  to  be  opposite 
to  o^e  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company,  when  in 
line.  If  the  movement  be  executed  in  double  quick  time, 
the  moment  it  is  commenced,  all  the  left  guides  will 
detach  themselves  at  the  same  time  from  the  column, 
and  will  move  at  a  run,  to  establish  themselves  on  the 
line  of  battle. 

470.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  comiiiand: 

Guides— VosTS. 

477.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel,  in  this  forma- 
tion, will  each  observe  what  is  prescribed  for  him  in  that 
of  o»  tfic  ri'jJii,  into  line  of  battle. 

478.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  faced  to 
the  rear  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples and  by  inverse  means. 

479.  If  the  column  bo  in  march,  and  should  arrive  in 
front  of  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  form  into 
battle,  the  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  414  and  415. 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    IV.      109 

•180.  When  the  head  of  the  column  shall  be  nearly  at 
company  distance  from  the  two  markers  established  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


Into   line,   face    to    the   rear.      2.    Battalion,  hy 
the  right  Jlank.     3.    Makcii    (or  double   quick — 


March). 


481.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  caution 
their  companies  to  face  by  the  right  flank. 

482.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
captains  of  companies,  all  the  companies  will  face  to  the 
right;  the  first  company  will  then  wheel  by  file  to  the 
left,  and  be  directed  by  its  captain  a  little  to  the  rear  of 
the  left  marker,-  then  pass  three  paces  beyond  the  line, 
and  wheel  again  by  file  to  the  left;  having  arrived  on  the 
line,  the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and  align  it  by 
the  right.  The  remaining  part  of  the  movement  will  be 
executed  as  heretofore  explained. 

483.  The  foregoing  principles  are  applicable  to  a  col- 
umn, left  in  front. 

484.  As  the  companies  approach  the  line  of  battle,  it  is 
necessary  that  their  captains  should  so  direct  the  march 
as  to  cross  that  line  a  little  in  rear  of  their  respective 
guides,  who  are  faced  to  the  basis  of  the  formation ; 
hence  each  guide  ought  to  detach  himself  in  time  to  find 
himself  correctly  established  on  the  direction  before  his 
company  shall  come  up  with  him. 


110    school  ok  tiik  battalion part  iv. 

Article   Third. 

Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  two  movements. 

485.  If  a  column  by  company,  right  in  front,  and  at 
a  halt,  find  itself  in  part  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  the 
colonel  should  think  proper  to  form  line  of  battle  before 
all  the  companies  enter  the  new  direction,  the  formation 
will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner: 

486.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  column  has  arrived 
behind  the  line  of  battle,  and  that  five  companies  have 
entered  the  new  direction.  The  colonel  having  assured 
the  guides  of  the  first  five  companies  on  the  direction, 
will  command: 

1.  Left   into  line,  iclieel.     2.   Three  rear  companies, 
forward  into  line. 

437.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  each  of  the 
rear  companies  will  command :  J^y  vompatiy,  left  half 
wheel  ;    and  the  colonel  will  add  : 

8.  March  (or  double  quick — March^. 

488,  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  five 
companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into  line  of 
battle,  and  the  three  last  forward  into  line  of  battle,  by 
the  means  prescribed  for  these  respective  formations ; 
each  captain  of  the  three  rear  companies  will,  when 
his   company  shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  command : 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    IJATTALIOX PAUT    IV.        11  J 


1.  Forward.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

489.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

I.    To  the  left.,  and  forward  into  line.     2.   March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

490.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  those  com- 
I>anies  which  have  not  entered  on  the  new  direction,  will 
'•ommand  :  By  compauij,  left  half  wheel.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  five  companies  will 
form  left  into  line,  and  the  last  three  forward  into  line,  a? 
prescribed  for  those  respective  formations.  Those  captain? 
who  form  their  companies  forward  into  line  will  conforir. 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  488. 

491.  If  the  colonel  should  wish,  in  forming  the  battalion 
into  line,  to  march  it  immediately  forward,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  company  to   the  left.,  and  forward  into   line. 
2.  March. 

402.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  whose  company 
is  not  yet  in  the  new  direction,  will  command  :  1.  By  cnm- 
pniiy,  left  half  wheel.  2.  Double  quick.  At  the  command 
march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains,  the  companies  not 
in  the  new  direction  will  execute  what  is  prescribed  above 
for  forming  forward  into  line  while  marching  ;  each  of  the 
other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and 
11-10 


l\2       SCHOOL    OF    XriK    KATTALION PAUT    IV. 

when  the  right,  of  these  corapunies  shall  arrive  on  the  line, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  centre. 

493.  The  fifth  cojnniand  will  ho  given  when  the  color- 
bearer  arrives  on  the  line,  if  not  already  there. 

494.  If  the  battalion  be  marchinjj  in  double  quick  time, 
t.he  colonel  will  cause  quick  time  to  bo  taken  before  com- 
mencing the  movement. 

495.  If,  instead  of  arriving  behind,  the  column  should 
arrive  before  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Left   into  line,   icheel.     2.    Three  rear  companies 

into  line,  faced  to  the  rear. 

496.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  the 
three  rear  companies   will  command  :     1.  Such   company. 

2.  /ii(fht—F\(:K.     The  colonel  will  then  a.ld  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

497.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  tirst  five 
companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  the  three  last  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle, 
by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  respective  formations. 

498.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 


t^CHOOL    OF    TIIK    llATTALION PART    IV.       118 


1.    To  the  left,  and  into  line  faced  to  the  rear. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

499.  The  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  Now. 
\Vn,  480  aud  following. 

i>00.  These  several  movements  in  a  column,  left  in  front, 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
inverse  means. 

Article  Fourth. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half  dis- 
tance, into  line  of  battle. 


1.  To  the  left  (or  right), 

2.  On  the  right  (or  left), 

3.  Forward,  by  deployment, 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear, 


into  line  of  battle. 


1st.   Column  at  luilf  distance,  to  the  lejt  [or  rifjht)  into  linn 
of  battle. 

501.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form  itself 
to  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  take  distances  by  one  of  the  means  prescribed. 
Article  IX,  Part  Third,  of  this  school ;  which  being  ext- 
cuted,  he  will  form  the  column  into  line  of  battle,  as  has 
been  indicated,  No.,  390  and  following. 

502.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  be  in 
march,  and  it  be  necessary  to  form  rapidly  into  lino,  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  command : 


(  1-1       SCHOOL    OK    TIIK    HATTAHON — PAUT 


1.    By  the  rear  of  column,  left   (or  rii/ht)  into  line, 
wheel     2.  March  (or  dovble  quick — March). 

503.  At  the  first  coiumaiul,  the  right  general  giiitle  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  front,  and  place  himself  a  little  beyond 
the  point  where  the  l;eail  of  the  column  will  rest,  and  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  guides.  The  captain  of  the  eighth 
oonipany  will  command:  Left  into  line,  n-h eel :  the  other 
captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  continue  to  march 
to  the  front. 

504.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
oaptain  of  the  eighth  company,  the  guide  of  this  comi)any 
will  halt  short,  and  the  company  will  wheel  to  the  left, 
oonforming  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  wheeling  from 
4  halt ;  when  its  right  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  the  cap- 
tain will  halt  the  company,  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The 
other  captaiijs  will  place  themselves  briskly  on  the  flank 
of  the  column  ;  when  the  captain  of  the  seventh  sees  there 
is  sufficient  distance  l)etween  his  company  and  the  eighth 
to  form  the  latter  into  line,  he  will  command :  Left  into 
tine,  wheel — Maucm  :  the  left  guide  will  halt  short,  and 
facing  to  the  rear,  will  place  himself  on  the  line  ;  the  com- 
pany will  wheel  to  the  left,  the  man  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast  against 
the  left  arm  of  the  guide  ;  the  captain  will  halt  the  com- 
pany when  its  right  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  and  will 
align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  companies  will  conform 
successively  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
30veuth. 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — I'ART    IV.       115 

5flf>.  Each  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  of  his  com- 
l>any  on  the  left  man  in  the  front  rank  of  the  company 
next  on  his  right. 

506.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  be  watchful  that  the 
leading  guide  marches  accurately  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  line  of  battle,  and  directs  hiinself  on  the  right, 
general  guide.  The  major,  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  left, 
guide  of  the  eighth  company,  will,  as  soon  as  the  guide  of 
the  seventh  company  is  established  on  the  direction,  hast- 
en in  rear  of  the  guides  of  the  other  companies,  so  as  to 
assure  each  of  them  in  succession  on  the  line. 

2d.    Coluni)!  at  half  distance,  on  the  n'(/ht  (or  left)  into  line 
of  battle. 

507.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  form  itself  on  the 
riglit  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle,  as  prescribed  for  a  col- 
umn at  full  distance. 

3d.    Colnmn   at  haff  distance,  fuyinurd,    into  line  of  hattU. 

508.  If  it  be  wished  to  form  a  column  at  half  distance, 
forward  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it. 
to  close  in  mass  and  then  deploy  it  on  the  leading  com- 
pany. 

1th.    C'(duirin  at  lialf  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of 
battle. 

509.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  formed  into  lint 
of  battle,  faced  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  for  a  column  at 
full  distance. 


IIG     SCHOOL  or  the  ijattalion — paut  iv. 

Article  Fifth. 

Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass. 

DIO.  A  column  in  ma4:s  may  be  formed  into  lino  of 
battle : 

1.  Faced  to  the  front,  by  the  deployment. 

2.  Faced  to   tlio   rear,  by  the   countorniarch   .ind   the 

deploy  men  t. 

3.  Faced    to    the    right  and   faced   to    the    left,   by    a 

chanf!je  of  direction   by  the    Hank,    and    the    ile- 
ploymcnt. 

511.  "When  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  arrives  be- 
hind the  line  on  which  it  is  intended  to  deploy  it,  the 
colonel  will  indicate,  in  advance,  to  the  lieutenant-colonel, 
tho  direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  as  well  as  the  point 
on  which  he  may  wish  to  direct  the  column.  The  lieu- 
tenant-colonel will  immediately  detach  himself  with  two 
markers,  and  establish  them  on  that  line,  the  first  at  the 
point  indicated,  the  second  a  little  less  than  the  front  of  a 
division  from  tho  first. 

512.  Deployments  will  always  be  made  upon  lines  par- 
allel, and  lines  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle  ;  cou.se- 
qucntly,  if  the  head  of  the  column  be  near  the  line  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  commence  by  establishing  the 
direction  of  the  column  perpendicularly  to  that  line,  if 
it  be  not  already  so,  by  one  of  the  means  indicated. 
No.   244  and    following,   or   No.    'M)7    and    following.     If 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    RATTALION — PART    IV,       117 

tlie  column  be  in  march,  he  will  so  direct  it  that  it  may 
arrive  exactly  behind  the  markers,  perpendicularly  to 
the  line  of  battle,  and  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  that 
line. 

5ir>.  The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halted,  it  is  sup- 
posed that  the  colonel  wishes  to  deploy  it  on  the  first 
division ;  he  will  order  the  left  general  guide  to  go  to 
a  point  on  the  line  of  battle  a  little  beyond  ttat  at  which 
the  left  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  deployed,  and 
place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  mark- 
ers established  before  the  first  division. 

.314.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.   On  the  first  division^  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion, 
left— Fack. 

i>15.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divi- 
sion will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the  three 
other  divisions  will  remind  them  that  they  will  have  to 
face  to  the  left. 

.516.  At  the  second  command,  the  three  last  divisions 
will  face  to  the  left  ;  the  chief  of  each  division  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  its  left  guide,  and  the  junior  cap- 
tain by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  com- 
pan)-,  who  will  have  stepped  into  the  front  rank. 

517.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
place  a  third  marker  on  the  alignment  of  the  two  first, 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  right  com- 
pany, first  division,  and  then  place  himself  on  the  line  of 


118       SCHOOL    OV    TIIK    UATTAMOX — PART    IV. 

liattlc  a  few  paces  bcj'ond  the  puint  at    which    the  Icf'l  of 
the  second  division  will  rest. 

518.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

3.  March — (or  double  quick — March). 

519.  At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  lirst  division 
will  t,'o  to  its  right,  and  command: 

Jligh(~-J)llKSS. 

520.  At  this,  the  division  will  dress  up  against  the 
markers;  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  its  junior  captain, 
will  each  align  the  company  on  his?  left,  and  then  com- 
mand : 

Front. 

521.  The  tliree  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will  put 
themselves  in  march  :  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will 
direct  himself  parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle;  the  left 
guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  march 
abreast  with  the  guide  of  the  second;  the  guides  of 
the  third  and  fourth,  ea-h  preserving  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance between  himself  and  the  guide  of  the  division 
which  preceded  his  own   in  the  column. 

522.  The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  not  follow 
its  movement;  he  will  see  it  file  by  him,  and  when 
its  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Second  d'wmon.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    I5A ITALION- -PART    IV.        Hi) 

523.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  divisio'.i 
shall  yet  have  seven  or  eight  paces  to  march;  the  sccoucl, 
when  the  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  the  chief  of 
the  division,  and  the  third  immediately  after  the  second. 

524.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt;  at 
the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if  there  be  openings 
between  the  files,  the  chief  of  the  division  will  cause  them 
to  he  promptly  closed  to  the  right;  the  left  guides  of  both 
companies  will  step  upon  the  line  of  battle,  face  t)  the 
right,  and  place  themselves  on  the  direction  of  the  mark- 
ers established  before  the  first  division,  each  guide  oppo- 
site to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company. 

525.  The  division  having  faced  to  the  front,  its  chief 
will  place  himself  accurately  on  the  line  of  battle,  on  the 
left  of  the  first  division;  and  when  he  shall  see  the  guides 
iis.-<ured  on  the  direction,  he  will  command.  Right — Dress. 
At  this,  the  division  will  be  aligned  by  the  right  in  the 
manner  indicated  for  the  first. 

526.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  continue  to 
march;  at  the  command  huh,  given  to  the  second,  the 
chief  of  the  third  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  place  him- 
self exactly  opposite  to  the  guide  of  the  second,  after  this 
division  shall  have  faced  to  the  front  and  closed  its  files ; 
he  will  see  his  division  file  juist.  and  when  his  right  guide 
."^hall  be  abreast  with  him,  ho  will  oommaud  : 

1.   Third  division.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

527.  As  soon  as  the  division  faces  to  the  front,  its  chief 
will  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre,  and  cin- 
mand : 


120       SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    UATTALIOX — I'AUT    IV. 


1.   Third  division,  forioard.     2.   Guide  right. 
3.  March. 

528.  At  tlic  tliiri.1  command,  the  division  will  march  to- 
ward the  line  of  battle:  the  right  guide  will  so  uiroct  him- 
self as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the 
second  division,  and  when  the  division  is  at  three  paces 
from  the  line  of  battle,  its  chief  will  halt  it  and  align  it  by 
the  right. 

529.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  conform  him- 
self (and  the  chief  of  the  fifth,  if  there  be  a  fifth)  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third. 

630.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

531.  At  this  command,  tlie  guides  will  resume  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  will  retire. 

532.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  without  halting  tho 
«;olunin,  he  will  make  the  dispositions  indicated,  Nos.  512 
and  513,  and  when  the  first  division  shall  have  arrived  at 
three  paces  from  the  line,  he  will  command  : 

J.  (fn  the  first  dii'ision,  dcploij  column.  2.  Battalion, 
hy  the  left  Jlanlc.  3.  Makcii  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

533.  At  the  firtt  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division 


SCHOOL  OF  THK  BATTAMOX PART  IV.   121 

will  caution  it  to  halt,  aud  will  command,  Jirst  divhiou  ; 
l!ie  other  chiefs  will  caution  their  divisions  to  face  by  the 
loft  flank. 

534.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  the  rear  divisions,  the  chief  of  tlie  first  division 
will  command.  Halt,  and  will  align  his  division  by  the 
right  against  the  markers;  the  other  divisions  will  face  to 
the  left,  their  chiefs  hastening  to  the  left  of  their  divisions. 
The  second  division  will  conform  its  movements  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  522  and  following.  The  third  and  fourth 
divisions  will  execute  what  is  prescribed,  No.  526  and  fol- 
lowing;  but  the  chief  of  each  division  will  halt  in  his 
own  person  at  the  command  march  given  by  the  chief  of 
the  division  which  precedes  him,  and  when  the  right  of  his 
division  arrives  abreast  of  him,  he  will  command:     * 

Such  diolnion,  hy  the  right  Jiank — Marcei. 

535.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  position  of 
the  guides,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  431. 
The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the 
fourth  division. 

536.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  the  column 
without  halting  it,  and  to  continue  the  march,  the  markers 
will  not  be  posted  ;  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands  and  the  same  means  as  the  foregoing,  but 
with  the  following  modifications  : 

537.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division 
will  command:  1.  Guide  right.  2.  Quick  time.  At  the 
command,  Double  quick — Matich,  given  by  the  colonel, 
the  first  division  will  march  in  quick  time  and  will  take 


1  2'i     SCHOOL  OK  Trri.  rattauox — part  iv. 

the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  ri.i^ht;  the  captains  will  plac»- 
tlicm.selves  on  the  right  of  their  respective  companies;  the 
captain  on  the  right  of  the  hattalion  will  take  points  on 
the  ground  to  assure  the  direction  of  the  march.  Tiie 
chief  of  the  second  division  will  allow  his  division  to  file 
past  liim,  and  when  he  sees  it  right  abreast  of  him,  he  will 
command:  \.  Second  division,  l>;.i  the  rirjht  Jiaiik.  2.  MARCH. 
'A.  Guide  ri(/ht,  and  when  this  division  shall  arrive  on  the 
alignment  of  the  first,  he  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick 
time.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  deploy  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  as  the  second. 

538.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  major,  and  color- 
bearer,  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  proscribed. 
No.  458. 

[)'.VJ.  The  colonel  will  scis,  pending  the  movement,  that 
the  principles  just  prescribed  are  dul^'  observed,  and  par- 
ticularly that  the  divisions,  in  deploying,  be  not  halted  too 
soon  or  too  late.  He  will  correct  promptly  and  quickly  the 
faults  that  rday  be  committed,  and  prevent  their  propaga- 
tion.     T/iin  rti/c  is  (jcneral  fov  all  dcploymentn. 

540.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of  deploying 
it  on  the  first,  the  colonel  shiill  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the 
rearmost  division,  he  will  cause  the  dispositions  to  be 
made  indicated.  No.  511  and  following;  but  it  will  be  the 
right  general  guide  whom  he  will  send  to  place  himself 
beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  battalion  will 
rest  when  deployed. 

541.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 

1.    On  the  fourth  (or  such)  division,  deploy  column. 
2.  Battalion^  right — Face. 


.  SCHOOL  OF  Tin-:  hattaliox — part  iv.     123 

542.  At  the  first  command,  the  cliief  of  the  fourth  di- 
vision will  fcaution  it  to  stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  the  other 
divisions  will  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to 
the  right. 

543.  At  the  second  command,  the  fir?t  three  divisions 
will  face  to  the  right :  and  the  chief  of  each  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  its  right  guide. 

544.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
place  a  thifd  marker  between  the  first  two,  so  that  this 
marker  may  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  right  files  of 
the  left  company  of  the  division  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  then  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  a  few  paces 
be3'ond  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  third  division 
will  rest  when  deployed. 

545.  The  colonel  Avill  then  command: 


3.  March — (or  double  quick — March). 


546.  At  this  command,  the  three- right  divisions  will 
put  themselves  in  march,  the  guide  of  the  first  so  direct- 
ing himself  as  to  pass  three  paces  within  the  line  marked 
by  the  right  general  guide.  The  chief  of  the  third  divi- 
sion will  not  follow  its  movement:  he  will  see  it  file  past, 
halt  it  when  its  left  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  front;  and,  if  there  be  openings 
between  the  files,  he  will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed 
to  the  left. 

547.  The  chief  of ,  the  fourth  division,  when  he  sees  it 
nearly  unmasked  by  the  three  others,  will  command  : 

11-11 


12-1        SCIIOOI.    OF    TIIK     i'.A'n'AI.iON^i'AK  r     IV. 

1.    Fourth    division,    fovirarcL       2.    Guide    left.       'J. 
March. 

548.  At  tlif  commauil  march,  which  will  be  givon  the 
inatant  the  fourth  is  uuin.iakc-d,  this  division  will  ap: 
proach  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  i)acos  from 
the  markers  on  that  line,  its  chief  will  halt  it,  ami 
c'oniniunil  : 

Xe//!— DllESS. 

.049.  At  this  command,  the  division  will  dress  forward 
n>;;ainst  the  markers  ;  the  chief  of  the  division  and  tln' 
junior  captain  will  each  align  the  company  on  his  rifrht, 
and  then  command  : 

FUONT. 

5r)fl.  The  instant  that  the  third  division  is  unmaskoil. 
its  chief  will  cause  it  to  apjtroach  the  lino  of  battle,  and 
halt  it  in  the  manner  just  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

bb\.  The  moment  the  division  halts,  its  rijjjht  guide  and 
the  covering  sergeant  of  its  left  company  will  step  on  the 
line  of  battle,  placing  themselves  on  the  prolongation  of 
the  markers  established  in  front  of  the  fourth  division  ; 
as  soon  as  they  shall  be  assured  in  their  positions,  the 
division  will  be  aligned,  as  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  fourth. 

552.  The  second  and  first  divisiims  which  will  have 
continued    to    march,   will,  in    succession,   bo   halted  and 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION PA  HT  IV.   ] 'I't 

aligned  by  the  left,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  third : 
the  chiefs  of  these  divisions  will  conform  themselves  to 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  526.  The  second  bcin;,'  ne:ir  the 
line  of  battle,  the  command  will  not  be  given  :or  it  to 
move  on  this  line,  but  it  will  be  dressed  up  to  it 

,'i5o.   The  deployment  ended    the  colonel  will  command  : 

G  uldcs —  Po  s  r  8 


.354.  At  this  command,  the  chieib  of  division  and  the 
guides  will  resume  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the 
markers  will  retire. 

555.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of 
the  guides  by  the  means  indicated.  No.  431,  and  the  major 
will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  fourth  di- 
vision. 

556.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  fourth  division,  he  will  make 
the  dispositions  indicated.  No.  511  and  following;  and 
when  the  head  of  the  column  shall  arrive  within  three 
paces  of  the  line,  he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  fourth  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Bat- 
talion, hy  the  right  flank.  3.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

557.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth  di- 
vision  will  caution   it  to  Ijalt,  and  will  command,  Fourth 


126       SCHOOL    OF    Till-:    I5AJ  lALIDN  —  TAliT    1 V. 

din'aioii ;  the    chiefs    of  the    other    (livisions   will  caution 
their  divisions  to  face  to  the  right. 

558.  At  the  comiuand  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  the  first  three  divisions,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
will  command:  Ualt.  The  first  three  divisions  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  be»  directed  parallelly  to  the  line  of 
battle.  The  chief  of  each  of  these  divisions  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  its  right  guide.  The  chief  (.f  the 
third  division  will  see  his  division  file  past  him,  and 
when  his  left  guide  is  abreast  of  hiui,  he  will  halt  it,  and 
face  it  to  the  front.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division, 
when  he  shall  sec  it  nearly  unmasked,  will  command : 
1.  Fourth  (/icinioti,  fitriL-ard ;  2.  (hiide  h-ft;  ?>.  Marcu 
(or  double.  </uick — Mahch).  This  division  will  move 
toward  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  paees  from 
tliis  line,  it  will  be  liallcd  b}'  its  chief,  and  aligned  by 
the  left. 

559.  The  chief  of  the  third  division  Avill  move  his  di- 
vision forward,  conforming  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  fourth. 

500.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  lirBt  divisiuns,  after 
halting  their  divisions,  will  confurni  to  what  is  prescribed, 
No.  552. 

5G1.  If  the  colonel  should  wi^•h  to  deploy  on  the  fourth 
division  withuut  halting  the  column,  and  to  continue  to 
march  forward,  he  will  not  have  markers  posted,  and  the 
movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and 
the  same  means,  with  the  following  modifications:  the 
fourth  division,  when  unmasked,  will  bo  moved  forward 
iu  quick  lime,  and  will  continue  to  march,  instead  of 
being  halted,  and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows   to  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    IV.       127 

left.  The  third  division,  on  being  unmasked,  will  be 
moved  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time,  but  when  it 
arrives  on  the  alignment  of  the  fourth  it  will  take  the 
quick  step,  and  dress  to  the  left  until  the  command  guide 
centre,  is  given  by  the  colonel.  The  chiefs  of  the  second 
and  first  divisions  will  conform  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  third.  When  the  first  division  shall  arrive 
on  the  line,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  take 
the  double  quick  step. 

562,  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.  458  and  459. 

563.  To  deploy  the  column  on  an  interior  division,  the 
colonel  will  cause  the  line  to  be  traced  by  the  means 
above  indicated,  and  the  general  guides  will  m')ve  briskly 
on  the  line,  as  prescribed,  Nos.  51.3  and  540.  This  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion, 
outward — Face.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

564,  Whether  the  column  be  with  the  right  or  left  in 
front,  the  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle,  belong  to 
the  right  of  the  directing  one,  will  face  to  the  right ;  the 
others,  except  the  directing-  division,  will  face  to  the  left ; 
the  divisions  in  front  of  the  latter  will  deploy  by  the  means 
indicated.  No.  542  and  following;  those  in  its  rear  will 
deploy  as  is  prescribed,  No.  513  and  following. 

565.  The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  finds  itself 
unmasked,  will   approach  the  line  of  battle    taking  thi 


128     SCHOOL  or  the  ijattaliox — part  iy. 

j;uide  left  or  right,  aceordiuji;  as  ibc  ri>;bt  or  left  uf  tho 
column  m;iy  be  in  front.  The  chief  of  this  divinion  will 
align  it  by  the  directiu<^  flank,  and  then  step  bauk  into 
the  rear,  in  order  luomentarily  to  give  place  to  the  chief  of 
the  next  for  aligning  the  next  division. 

566.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  tlie  positions  of 
the  guides  of  divisions,  which,  in  the  line  of  battle,  take 
the  riglu  of  the  directing  division,  and  the  major  will 
assure  the  positions  of  tiie  otlier  guides. 

.367.  If  the  ooluuin  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  coiii- 
mand  : 

1.  On  such  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion,  htf 
the  right  and  Icjl  Jlank's.  3.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

568.  Tho  divisions  which  are  in  front  of  the  directing 
one  will  ik'iduy  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  557  and  fol- 
lowing: those  in  rear,  as  {)rescribcd,  No.  5.^.3  and  following. 

509.  The  directing  division,  when  unmnsked,  will  con- 
form to  what  is  prcscril)ed  for  tho  fourth  division.  No.  558. 

570.  Tho  colonel,  lieulcnant-eolonel,  and  major  will  con- 
form to  what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.  158  and  459. 

571.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  deployments  will  bo 
executed  according  to  tlie  sairle  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 


i 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION' — PART    IV.       129 


Renutrks  on  the   deployment  of  cohtmns,    clo.^ed   in 


572.  All  the  divisions  ought  to  deploy  rectangularly,  to 
march  off  abreast,  and  to  preserve  their  distances  toward 
the  line  of  battlo. 

573.  Each  division,  the  instant  that  it  is  unmasked, 
ought  to  be  marched  toward  the  line  of  battle,  and  to  be 
aligned  upon  it  by  the  flank  next  to  the  directing  division  ,< 
the  latter,  whether  the  right  or  left  be  in  front,  will  always 
be  aligned  by  the  flank  next  to  the  point  of  appui,  when 
the  <lcployment  is  made  on  the  first  or  last  division;  but 
if  the  column  be  deployed  on  the  interior  division,  this 
division  will  be  aligned  by  the  flank  which  wan  that  of 
■lirection. 

574.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  see  that,  in  deploying, 
the  principles  prescribed  for  marching  by  the  flank  are 
well  observed,  and  if  openings  between  the  files  occur, 
which  ought  not  to  happen  except  on  broken  or  difficult 
grounds,  the  openings  ought  to  be  promptly  closed  toward 
the  directing  flank  as  soon  as  the  divisions  face  to  the 
front. 

575.  If  a  chief  of  division  give  the  command  halt,  or 
the  command,  hy  the  right  or  left  flank,  too  soon  or  too 
late,  his  division  will  be  obliged  to  oblique  to  the  right  or 
left  in  approaching  the  line  of  battle,  and  his  fault  may 
lead  the  following  subdivision  into  error. 

576.  In  the  divisions  which  deploy  by  the  left  flank,  it 
is  always  the  left  guide  of  each  company  who  ought  to 
place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  to  mark  the  direction  ; 


130       SCHOOL    OF    Tin:    battalion — PART    IV. 

in  divisions  which  ilcjiloy  bj'  (he  right  flank,  it  is  the  right 
guide. 

577.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may  be 
formed  to  the  left  or  to  the  right  into  line,  in  the  same 
manner  as  a  column  nt  half  distance,  and  by  the  means 
indicated,  No.  502  and  followiug. 

578.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may  be 
formed  on  the  right  or  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  as  a 
column  at  half  distance ;  but  in  order  to  execute  this 
movement,  without  arresting  the  march  of  the  column,  it 
is  necessary  that  the-  guides  avoid,  with  the  greatest  care. 
shortening  the  step  in  turning,  and  that  the  men  near 
them,  respectively,  conform  themselves  rapidly  to  the 
movements  of  their  guides. 


Rejuarls  on  iniiersions. 

.)79.  Inversions  giving  frequently  the  means  of  forming 
line  of  battle,  in  thp  promptest  manner,  arc  of  great  utility 
in  the  movements  of  an  army. 

580.  The  application  that  may  be  made  of  inversions  in 
the  formations  to  the  right  and  to  the  left  in  lino  of  battle, 
has  been  indicated.  No.  407  and  following.  They  may  also 
be  advantageously  employed  in  the  successive  formations, 
except  in  that  of  faceil  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 

581.  Formations,  by  inversion,  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  as  formations  in  the  direct 
order;  but  tlic  coluners  first  command  will  always  begin 
hi/  inversion. 

582.  The  battalion   being  in   line  of  battle  by  invcrsi<»ii 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION' — PART    IV.       131 

when  tho  colonel  shall  wish,  bj'  forming  it  into  column,  to 
l)ring  it  back  to  the  direct  order,  he  will  cause  it  either  to 
hreak  or  to  jjloy  by  Company,  or  by  division,  accordingly 
as  the  column  may  have  been  by  company  or  by  division 
l)efore  it  had  been  formed  into  line  of  battle  by  inversion. 

J8I3.  AVhen  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  formed  by  inver- 
.sion,  has  to  be  ployed  into  column,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  as  if  the  lii;e 
were  in  the  direct  order,  but  observing  what  follows. 

584.  If  it  be  intended  that  the  column  shall  be  b}'  divi- 
sion, with  the  first  in  front,  or  by  company,  with  the  first 
company  in  front,  the  colonel  will  announce  in  the  second 
command — left  in  front,  because  the  battalion  being  in 
line  of  battle  by  inversion,  that  subdivision  is  on  the  left. 

.)85.  Each  chief  whose  subdivision  takes  position  in  the 
column  in  front  of  the  directing  one,  will  conduct  his  sub- 
ilivision  till  it  halts,-  and  each  chief  whose  subdivision 
takes  position  in  rear  of  the  directing  one,  will  halt  in  his 
own  person  when  up  with  the  preceding  right  guide,  and 
stie  his  subdivision  file  past:  and  each  chief  will  align 
his  subdivision  by  the  right.  When  the  column  is  to  be 
put  in  march,  the  second  command  will  be — ynide  lefty  be- 
cause the  proper  right  is  in  front. 

;)86.  For  the  same  reason,  if  it  be  intended  that  the  last 
subdivision  shall  be  in  front,  riifht  in  front,  will  be  an- 
nounced in  the  second  command :  the  subdivisions  will  be 
aligned  by  the  left,  and  to  put  the  column  in  march,  the 
second  command  will  be,  yuidc  n'yht,  because  the  proper 
left  is  in  front. 


i:^2        SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    UATTAMON — I'AUT    V. 

PART    FIFTH. 

AuTicLE   First. 
To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

6S7.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and  supposed 
to  be  the  directing  one,  when  the  colonel  sliall  wish  to 
march  in  line  of  battle,  he  will  give  the  lieutenant-colonel 
an  intimation  of  his  purpose,  place  himself  about  forty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  color-file,  and  face  to  the  front. 

5S8.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place 'himself  a  like  dis- 
tance in  front  of  the  same  file,  and  face  to  the  colonel, 
who  will  establish  him  as  correctly  as  possible,  by  signal 
of  the  sword,  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle  oppot'ite 
to  the  color-bearer.  The  colonel  will  next,  above  the 
heads  of  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  color-bearer,  take  a 
point  of  direction  in  the  field  beyond,  if  a  distinct  one  pre- 
sent itself,  exactly  in  the  prolongation  of  those  first  two 
points. 

589.  The  colonel  will  then  move  twenty  paces  farther  to 
the  rear,  and  establish  two  markers  on  the  prolongation  of 
tlie  straight  line  passing  through  the  color-bearer  and  the 
lieuLen:int-colonel  J  these  markers  will  face  to  the  rear,  the 
first  placed  about  twenty-five  paces  behind  the  rear  rank 


le  distance  from 

efl  to  take,  the 
tablished  on  the 
in  the  straight 
is.s  between  the 
ts  will  be  taken 
iarer. 
he    colonel  will 


-guard  will  ad- 
•als  in  the  rear 
ank,  and  these 

closers ;  at  the 
ve  in  advance, 
he  right,  oppo- 
;  other  opposite 
-ttalion. 

shift,  passing 
•espective  coni- 
talion  will  step 
ergeant  of  the 
lany,  will  step 

red  the  color- 
corporal  of  the 
o  the  position 


p 


^  H" 


^'     -      -^  -Y 


"1 


SCHOOL    OF    TUK    RATTALIOX I'AUT    V.        13:5 

oi'  the  battalion,  and  the  second  at  the  same  distance  from 
the  first. 

590.  The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to  take,  the 
moment  the  lieutenant-colonel  shall  be  established  on  tho 
perpendicular,  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight 
line  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would  pass  between  the 
heels  of  that  officer;  the  first  of  these  points  will  l)e  taken 
at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  the  color-bearer. 

591.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Battalion,  forward. 

592.  At  this,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard  will  ad- 
vance six  paces  to  the  front;  the  corporals  in  the  rear 
rank  will  place  themselves  in  the  front  rank,  and  these 
will  be  replaced  by  those  in  the  rank  of  file  closers;  at  the 
same  time  the  two  general  guides  will  move  in  advance, 
abreast  with  the  color-bearer,  the  one  on  the  right,  oppo- 
gite  to  the  captain  of  the  rigbt  company,  the  other  opposite 
to  the  sergeant  who  closes  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

593.  The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  shift,  passing 
before  the  front  rank,  to  the  left  of  their  respective  com- 
panies ;  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  step 
back  into  the  rear  rank.  The  covering  sergeant  of  the 
company  next  on  the  left  of  the  color-company,  will  step 
into  the  front  rank. 

594.  The  lieutenant-colonel  having  assured  the  color- 
bearer  on  the  line  between  himself  and  the  corporal  of  the 
color-file,  now  in  the  front  rank,  will  go  to  the  position 
which  will  be  hereinafter  indicated,  No.  602. 


134      scriooL  OF  Tin:  battalion' — part  v. 

595.  The  m.ajor  will  place  himself  six  or  eight  paee?  on 
ciihcr  flank  of  (he  color-rank. 

bOQ.  The  colonel  will  (hen  command: 


2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


597.  At  this  command,  the  battalion  will  step  off  with 
life  :  the  color-bearer,  charged  with  the  step  and  direction, 
will  st'rui)ulously  observe  the  length  and  cadence  of  the 
pace,  marchiiig  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  points  pre- 
viously taken,  and  successivelj'  taking  others  in  advance 
by  the  means  indicated  in  the  schofd  of  the  company :  the 
corporal  on  his  right,  and  the  one  on  his  left,  will  march 
in  the  same  step,  taking  care  not  to  turn  the  head  or 
slioulders,  the  color-bearer  supporting  the  color-lance 
against  the  hip. 

598.  The  two  general  guides  will  inarch  in  the  same 
step  with  the  color-rank,' each  maintaining  himself  abreasl 
or  nearly  so,  with  that  rank,  and  neither  occupying  him- 
self with  the  movement  of  the  other. 

699.  The  three  corporals  of  the  color-guar'l.  now  in  the 
front  rank  of  (ho  battalion,  will  march  well  aligned,  elbow 
to  elbow,  heads  direct  to  the  front,  and  without  deranging 
the  line  of  their  shoulders ;  the  centre  one  will  follow 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  color-bearer,  and  maintain  the 
same  step,  without  lengthening  or  shortening  it,  except  on 
an  intimation  from  the  colonel  or  lieutenant-colonel,  al- 
though he  should  find  liiraself  more  or  less  than  six  paces 
from  the  color-rank. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    HATTALTON — PAUT    V.         135 

GOO.  The  covering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank,  between 
the  color  company  and  the  next  on  the  left,  will  march 
elbow  to  elbnw,  and  on  the  same  line,  with  the  three  cor- 
porals in  the  centre,  his  head  well  to  the  front. 

601.  The  captains  of  the  color  company,  and  the  com- 
pany next  to  the  left,  will  constitute,  with  the  three 
corporals  in  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  the  basis  of 
alignment  for  both  wings  of  the  battalion ;  they  will 
march  in  the  same  step  with  the  color-bearer,  and  exert 
themselves  to  maintain  their  shoulders  exactly  in  the 
square  with  the  dix-ection.  To  this  end,  they  will  keep 
their  heads  direct  to  the  front,  only  occasionally  casting 
an  eye  on  the  three  centre  corjiorals,  with  the  slightest 
possible  turn  of  the  neck,  and  if  they  perceive  themselves 
in  advance,  or  in  rear  of  these  corporals,  the  captain,  or 
two  captains,  will  almost  insensibly  shorten  or  lengthen 
the  step,  so  as,  at  the  end  of  several  paces,  to  regain  the 
true  alignment,  without  giving  sudden  checks  or  impul- 
sions to  the  wings  beyond  them  resi>ectivcly. 

602.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  twelve  or  fifteen 
paces  on  the  right  of  the  captain  of  the  color-company, 
will  maintain  this  captain  and  the  next  one  beyond, 
abreast  with  the  three  centre  corporals:  to  this  end,  he 
will  caution  either  to  lengthen  or  to  shorten  the  step  as 
may  be  necessary,  which  the  captain,  or  two  captains,  will 
execute  as  has  just  been  explained. 

603.  All  the  other  captains  will  maintain  themselves  on 
the  prolongation  of  this  basis ;  and,  to  this  end,  they  will 
cast  their  eyes  toward  the  centre,  taking  care  to  turn  the 
neck  but  slightly,  and  not  to  derange  the  direction  of  their 
shoulders. 

11-12 


13G        SCHOOL    OK    TIIK    HATTALIOX — P.MIT    V. 

60i.  The  cai'tains  will  observe  the  marcli  of  their  coin- 
panies,  and  prevent  the  men  from  getting;  in  advance  of 
the  line  of  captains  ;  they  will  not  lengthen  or  shorten  stcti 
except  when  evidently  neci'.-sarj' ;  because,  to  orrect. 
with  too  scrupuh.us  attention,  small  faults,  is  apt  to  cau^e 
the  production  of  greater — loss  of  calmness,  silence,  and 
equality  of  step,  each  of  which  it  is  so  important  to 
maintain. 

fi05.  The  men  will  constantly  keep  their  heads  well 
directed  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  toward  the 
centre,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  flank,  give  the 
greatest  attention  to  the  squareness  of  shoulders,  and  hold 
themselves  always  very  sliglitly  behind  the  lino  of  the 
captains,  in  order  never  to  shut  out  from  the  view  of  the 
latter  the  basis  of  alignment;  they  will,  from  time  to 
time,  cast  an  eye  on  the  color- rank,  or  on  the  general 
guide  of  the  wing,  in  order  to  march  constantly  in  the 
same  step  with  those  advanced  persons. 

606.  Pending  the  march,  the  lino  determined  by  the 
two  markers  (A  and  d)  will  ha  prolonged  b^-  placing,  in 
proportion  as  the  battalion  advances,  a  third  mitrker  (?) 
in  the  rear  of  the  tirst  (h),  then  the  marker  ((/)  will  quit 
his  place  and  go  a  like  distance  in  rear  of  (/) ;  the  marker 
(A)  will,  in  his  turn,  do  the  like  in  respect  to  (d),  and  so 
on,  ill  succession,  as  long  as  the  battalion  continues  to 
advance;  each  marker,  on  shifting  position,  taking  care  to 
face  to  the  rear,  and  to  cover  accurately  the  two  markers 
already  established  on  the  direction.  A  statf  officer,  or 
the  quartermaster-sergeant,  designated  for  the  purpose, 
!ind  who  will  hold  himself  constantly  fifteen  or  twenty 
iiaces  facinir  the  marker  farthest  from  the  battalion,  will 


J 


IT    V.         1-5^ 
d  assure  him 

dui!?clf  about 
talion,  taking 
i-kers;  if,  for 
,  or  the  indi- 
foUowing,  be 
not  pcrpcn- 


left). 


hasten  thirty 
ik,  halt,  face 
•ection  which 
ord ;  the  cor- 
n  direct  him- 
the  colonel, 
der ;  the  cor- 
n   themselves? 

self  upon  the 
major  onus- 
right  or  left, 
•  iiis  file;  the 
round  in  this 


themselves  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTA  I.ION— PAKT  V.    K)7 

caution  Oiich  nuirker  wlicii   to  shift  place,  and  assure  him 
on  the  direction  behind  the  other  two. 

607.  The  colonel  will  habitually  hold  himself  about 
thirty  paces  in  roar  of  the  centre  of  bis  battalion,  taking 
care  not  to  put  himself  on  the  line  of  markers;  if,  for 
example,  by  the;  slanlint,'  of  the  battalion,  or  the  indi- 
cations which  will  be  given,  Xo.  G17  and  following,  he 
find  that  the  march  of  the  color-bearer  is  not  perpen- 
dicular, he  will  promptly  eommaud  : 


Point  of  direction  to  the  right  (or  Icft^. 


608.  At  this  command,  the  major  will  hasten  thirty 
or  forty  paces  in  advance  of  the  color-rank,  halt,  face 
to  the  colonel,  and  place  himself  on  the  direction  which 
the  latter  will  indicate  by  signal  of  the  sword;  the  cor- 
))oral  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  will  then  direct  him- 
self upon  the  major,  on  a  caution  from  the  colonel, 
advancing,  to  that  end,  the  opposite  shoulder;  the  cor- 
l)orals  on  his  right  and  left  will  conform  themselves 
to  bis  direction. 

609.  The  color-bearer  will  also  direct  himself  upon  the 
major,  advancing  the  opposite  shoulder,  the  major  caus- 
ing him,  at  the  same  time,  to  incline  to  the  right  or  left, 
until  be  shall  exactly  cover  the  corporal  of  his  file;  the 
color-bearer  will  then  take  points  on  the  ground  in  this 
new  direction. 

610.  The  two  general  guides  will  conform  themselves  to 
the  new  direction  of  the  color-rank. 


138        SCHOOL    OF    TlIK    IJATTALION — I'AUT    V. 

Gil.  The  officer  charged  with  observing  the  successive 
replacing  of  the  markers  in  the  rear  of  the  centre,  will 
establish  them  promptly  on  the  new  direction,  taking 
for  basis  the  color-bearer  and  the  corporal  of  his  file 
in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  ;  the  colonel  will  verily  the 
new  direction  of  the  markers. 

012.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  fr;'m  the  position  given^ 
No.  G02,  will  see  that  the  two  centre  ompauies,  and  suc- 
cessively all  the  others,  conform  themselves  to  the  new 
direction  of  the  ccitre,  but  without  precipitancy  or  dis- 
order; he  will  then  endeavor  to  maintain  that  basis  of 
alignment  for  the  battalion,  perpendicularly  to  the  direc- 
tion pursued  by  the  color-bearer. 

Ol.'i.  He  will  often  observe  the  march  of  the  two  wings: 
and,  if  ho  discover  that  the  captains  neglect  to  conform 
themselves  to  the  basis  of  alignment,  he  will  recall  their 
attention  by  the  command — captain  nf  (such)  compaui/,  or 
coptainH  of  (such)  comjxini'ei.  on  the  line — without,  how- 
over,  endeavoring  too  scrupulously  to  correct  small  faults. 

Gil.  The  major  on  the  flank  of  the  color-rank  will, 
during  tlio  march,  place  himsolf,  from  time  to  time, 
twenty  paces  in  front  of  that  rank,  face  to  the  rear,  and 
place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  mark- 
ers established  behind  the  centre,  in  order  to  verify  the 
exact  march  of  the  color-bearer  on  that  line ;  he  will 
rectif3',  if  necessary,  the  direction  of  the  color-bearer, 
who  will  immediately  take  two  new  points  on  the  ground 
between  himself  and  the  major. 

615.  All  the  principles  applicable  to  the  advance  in  line, 
are  the  same  for  a  Huhurdinate  as  for  the  clirectin(j  battal- 
ion ;  but  when  the  battalion  under  instruction  is  apposed 


I 


f 

„ .^...iicu,  a  me  nies  crowd  each  otbcr, 

if,  in  short,  disorder  ensue,  the  remedy  ought  to  be  applied 
as  promptly  as  possible,  but  calmly,  with  few  words,  and 
as  little  noise  as  practicable. 

620.  The  object  of  the  general  guides,  in  the  march  in 
line  of  battle  is,  to  indicate  to  the  companies  near  the 
flanks  the  step  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  and  to  afford 
more  fsfcility  in  establishing  the  wings  on  the  direction  of 


"MIIIIHfflfili'WiiiHHlllWli- 


^ 


IHl 


laiiiiiiiffliiiHi'ipiBiiiiB 


"^iiiiiiuiiaKiiLiiMiwjeLi:^!!    i| 


^''t 


ja a_ B Q- ^' 


_jL „H & 


J B ~i    s X-  -  -j:,- 


HIBP  ■■  Bi" 


^rM 


M„_,J 1 ^ 


:^' 

L*- 

X 

^, 

c 

_^J____ 

----fl 

n          ra  . 

__  H, 

A— 

ti._._ 

f^ 

8CH00L    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.         139 

to  be  mhordiuate,  no   markers   will   bo  placed  behind  its 
centre. 


Remarks  on  the  advance  in  line  of  hatlle. 

616.  If,  in  the  exercise  of  detail,  or  courses  of  element- 
ary instruction,  the  officers,  sergeants,  corporals,  and  men, 
have  not  been  well  confirmed  in  the  principles  of  the  posi- 
tion under  arms,  as  well  as  in  the  length  and  cadence  of 
the  step,  the  march  of  the  battalion  in  line  will  be  floating, 
unsteady  and  disunited. 

617.  If  the  color-bearer,  instead  of  marching  perpendic- 
ularly forward,  pursue  an  oblique  direction,  the  battalion 
will  slant;  crowdings  in  one  wing,  and  openings  in  the 
other,  will  follow,  and  these  defects  in  the  march,  becom- 
ing more  and  more  embarrassing  in  proportion  to  the  <le- 
viation  from  the  perpendicular,  will  commence  near  the 
centre. 

618.  It  is  then  of  the  greatest  importance  that  the  color- 
bearer  should  direct  himself  perpendicularly  forward,  and 
that  the  basis  of  alignment  should  always  be  perpendicu- 
lar to  the  line  pursued  by  him. 

619.  If  openings  be  formed,  if  the  files  crowd  each  other, 
if,  in  short,  disorder  ensue,  the  remedy  ought  to  be  applied 
as  promptly  as  possible,  but  calmly,  with  few  words,  and 
as  little  noise  as  practicable. 

620.  The  object  of  the  general  guides,  in  the  march  in 
line  of  battle  is,  to  indicate  to  the  companies  near  the 
flanks  the  step  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  and  to  afford 
more  fsfcility  in  establishing  the  wings  on  the  direction  of 


140        SCHOOL    or    THK    HATTALION — PART    V. 

the  centre  if  they  should  be  too  inuch  in  the  rear;  hence 
the  necessity  that  these  guides  should  maintain  the  same 
step,  and  march  abreast,  or  very  nearly  so,  with  the  color- 
rank,  which  it  will  be  easy  for  them  to  do  by  casting  from 
time  to  time  an  eye  on  that  rank. 

621.  If  the  battalion  happen  to  lose  the  step,  the  colonel 
will  recall  its  attention  by  the  command,  ^^  the — Step; 
captains  and  their  companies  will  immediately  cast  an  eye 
on  the  color-rank,  or  one  of  the  general  guides,  and 
promptly  conform  themselves  to  the  step. 

622.  Finally,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  the  at- 
tainment of  regularity  in  the  march  in  line  of  battle,  to 
habituate  the  battalion  to  execute  with  as  much  order  as 
promptness  the  movements  prescribed,  No.  607  and  follow- 
ing, for  rectifying  the  direction;  it  is  not  less  essential 
that  commanders  of  battalions  sliould  exercise  themselves, 
with  the  greatest  care,  in  forming  their  own  cuup  d'opil,  in 
(jrdcr  to  be  able  to  judge  with  precision  the  direction  to  be 
'jriven  to  their  baltulious. 


school  of  the  battalion part  v.      141 

Article  Second. 
Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

623.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the 
oolouel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  oblique,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)   oblique.      2.    March   (or  double 
quick — March)  . 

624.  x\t  the  first  command,  the  major  will  place  himself 
in  front  of,  and  faced  to  the  color-bearer. 

625.  At  the  command  vmrch,  the  whole  battalion  will 
rake  the  oblique  step.  The  companies  and  captains  will 
>>trietly  t)bserVe  the  principles  established  in  the  school  of 
the  company. 

626.  The  major  in  front  of  the  color-bearer  ought  to 
maintain  the  latter  in  a  line  with  the  centre  corporal,  so 
that  the  color-bearer  may  oblique  neither  more  nor  less 
than  that  corporal.  He  will  carefully  observe  also  that 
they  follow  parallel  directions,  and  preserve  the  same 
length  of  step. 

627.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  take  care  that  the  cap- 
tains and  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre  keep  exactly  on 
a  line  and  follow  parallel  directions. 

62S.  The  colonel  will  see  that  the  battalion  preserves  its 
parallelism  ;  he  will  exert  himself  to  prevent  the  files  from 
opening  or  crowding.  If  he  perceive  the  latter  fault,  he 
will  cause  the  files  on  the  flank,  to  which  the  battalion 
obliques,  to  open  out. 


1  42        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX PART    V, 

629.  The  colonel,  Avisliing  the  direct  imirch  to  be  re- 
sumed, -will  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

630.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  resume 
the  direct  march.  The  major  will  place  himself  thirty 
paces  in  front  of  the  color-bearer,  and  face  to  the  colonel, 
who  will  establish  him,  by  a  signal  of  the  sword,  on  the 
<lirection  which  the  color-bearer  ought  to  pursue.  The 
latter  will  immediately  take  two  points  on  the  ground 
between  himself  and  the  major. 

631.  In  resuming  the  direct  march,  care  will  be  taken 
that  the  men  do  not  close  the  intervals  which  may  exist 
between  the  files  at  once:  it  should  be  done  almost  insen- 
sibly. 

Remarks  on  the  oblique  march. 

632.  The  object  of  the  oblique  step  is  to  gain  ground  to 
the  right  or  left,  preserving  all  the  while  the  primitive 
direction  of  the  line  of  battle;  and  thus,  for  example  :  the 
battalion,  departing  from  the  line  {hz),  arrives  on  the  line 
{.r.r)  parallel  to  {hz). 

633.  It  is  then  essential  that  the  corporals  in  the  centre 
of  the  battalion,  and  the  captains  of  companies  should 
follow  parallel  directions,  and  maintain  themselves  at  the 
same  height;  without  which  they  will  give  a  false  direc- 
tion to  the  battalion. 

634.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will  exert  them- 
selves to  prevent  the  files  from  crowding ;  for,  without 
such  precaution,  the  oblique  march  cannot  be  executed 
with  facility. 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    JJAI'JALION I'AKT    V.        14o 


Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  battalion^  marching  in  line  of  battle^  and 
to  align  it. 

()."]5.  The  battalion,  marching  in  the  line  of  battle,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

636.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  halt ; 
the  color-rank  and  the  general  guides  will  remain  in  front; 
but  if  the  colonel  should  not  wish  immediately  to  resume 
the  advance  in  line,  nor  to  give  a  general  alignment,  he 
will  command : 

Color  and  general  guides — Posts. 

637.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  the 
captains  in  the  left  wing  will  shift  to  the  right  of  their 
companies. 

638.  If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary  to 
rectify  the  alignment,  he  will  command : 

Captains.,  rectify  the  alignment. 

639.  The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an  eye  toward 
the  centre,  align  themselves  accurately,  on  the  basis  of 
the  alignment,  which  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  see  well 
directed,  and  then   promptly  dress   their  respective  com- 


144        pCIIOOL    ok    TIIK    HATTALION — PART    V. 

]ianic's.  Tlic  licutcnant-eoloucl  will  admoniMli  sucb  cap- 
tains as  may  not  be  accurately  on  the  alignment  by  the 
command:  Captain  of  (such)  cnmpnny,  or  cnjjtuius  oj 
(such)  companicH,  move  up  or  fall  back. 

640.  But  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  the  battal- 
ion a  general  alignment,  cither  parallel  or  oblique,  iisstea'l 
of  rectifying  it  as  above,  he  will  move  some  paces  outside 
of  one  of  the  general  guides  (the  right  will  here  be  sup- 
posed) and  caution  the  right  general  guide  and  the  color- 
l)earer  to  face  him,  and  then  establish  them  by  signal  of 
the  sword,  on  the  direction  which  he  may  wish  to  give  to 
the  battalion.  As  soon  as  they  shall  bo  correctly  estab- 
lished, the  left  general  guide  will  place  himself  on  their 
ilirectiou,  and  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  major. 
The  color-bearer  will  carry  the  color-lance  perpendicularly 
between  his  eyes,  and  the  two  corporals  of  his  rank  will 
return  to  their  places  in  tlie  front  rank  the  moment  lie 
.-hall  face  to  the  colonel. 

(ill.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand  : 

1.   Guides — O.v  Tin-:  Link. 

012.  AL  this  command,  the  right  guide  of  each  company 
in  ihe  right  wing,  an<l  the  left  guide  of  each  company  in 
the  left,  will  each  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
color-bearer  and  the  two  general  guides,  face  to  the  color-  | 
bearer,  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  guide  who  is  next 
before  him  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his  com- 
pany, and  align  himself  upon  the  color-bearer  and  the 
general  guide  beyond. 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    V.       145 

()Kj.  The  captains  in  the  right  wing  will  .shift  to  the  left 
of  their  companies,  except  the  captain  of  the  color-com- 
pany, who  will  remain  on  its  right,  but  step  into  the  rear 
rank  ;  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  will  shift  to  the  right 
of  their  companies. 

(544.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  promptly  rectify,  if  ne- 
cessary, the  positions  of  the  guides  of  the  right  wing,  and 
the  major  those  of  the  other;  which  being  executed,  the 
colonel  will  command  : 

2.  On  the  centre — Dress. 

1)45.  At  this  command,  the  companies  will  move  up  in 
quick  time  against  the  guides,  where,  having  arrived,  each 
captain  will  align  his  company  according  to  prescribed 
principles,  the  lieutenant-colonel  aligning  the  color-com- 
pany. 

646.  If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  the  captains  will  take 
care  to  conform  their  companies  to  it  in  conducting  them 
toward  the  line. 

647.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

3.    Color  and  guides — Posts. 

6-18-  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer,  the  general  and 
company  guides,  and  the  captains  in  the  right  wing,  will 
take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle,  and  the  color-bearer 
will  replace  the  heel  of  the  color-lance  against  the  rigist 
hip. 

6i9.  If  the  new  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  bo  such 
that  one  or  more  companies  find  themselves   in  advance 


146       SCHOOL    OF    TUK    I5ATTALION — PAUT    V. 

of  that  line,  the  colonel,  before  estiiblishinir  the  geueviil 
•guides  on  the  line,  will  cause  such  companies  to  be  moved 
to  the  rear,  either  by  the  back  step,  or  by  first  facing  about, 
according  as  there  may  be  less  or  more  ground  to  be  re- 
passed to  bring  the  companies  in  rear  of  the  new  direction. 
G50.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  a  general 
alignment,  and  the  color  and  general  guides  nrc  not  on 
the  line,  he  will  cause  them  to  move  out  by  the  command  : 

1.   Color  and  general  guides — On  the  Line. 

651.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  and  the  general 
guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  line,  conforming  t" 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  040. 


Article  Fourth. 

Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  line  of  battle. 

652.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he 
will  command  : 

1.    Change  direction  to   the  right.     2.    March    (or 
double  quick — March). 

653.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will  com- 
mence; the  color-rank  will  shorten  the  step  to  fourteen  or 
seventeen  inches,  and  direct  itself  circularly  to  the  right, 
taking  care  to  advance  the  left  shoulder,  but  only  insensi- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    Y.      14  7 

bly  :  the  major  will  place  himself  before  the  color-hearer, 
acing  him,  and  so  direct  his  march  that  he  may  describe 
n  arc  of  a  circle  neither  too  large  nor  too  small ;  be  will 
Iso  see  that  the  color-bearer  takes  steps  of  fourteen  or 
leventeen  inches,  according  to  the  gait, 

654.  The  right  general  guide  will  wheel  on  the  right 
aptain  of  the  battalion  as  his  pivot ;  the  left  general 
uide   will   circularly  march   in  the  step  of  twenty-ei^t 

inches  or  thirty-three  inches,  according  to  the  gait,  and 
11  align  himself  upon  the  color-bearer  and  the  right 
neral  guide. 

655.  The  corporal  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion 
will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  and  will 
■wheel  to  the  right  by  advancing  insensibly  the  left  shoul- 
der :  the  battalion  will  conform  itself  to  the  movement  of 
the  centre ;  to  this  end,  the  captain  of  the  color-company, 
and  the  captain  of  the  next  to  the  left,  will  attentively 
regulate  their  march,  as  well  as  the  direction  of  their 
shoulders,  on  the  three  centre  corporals.  All  the  other 
captains  will  regulate  the  direction  of  their  shouldei's  and 
the  length  of  their  step  on  this  basis. 

656.  The  men  will  redouble  their  attention  in  order  not 
to  pass  the  line  of  captains. 

657.  In  the  left  wing,  the  pace  will  be  lengthened  in 
proportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  centre ;  the 
captain  of  the  eighth,  company  who  closes  the  left  flank 
of  the  battalion,  will  take  steps  of  twenty-eight  or  thirty- 

hree  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

658.  In  the  right  wing  the  pace  will  be  shortened  in 
)roportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  centre ;  the 
japtain  who  closes  the  right  flank  will  only  slowly  turn 

11-13 


■  '1 

148      SCHOOL    OF    THK    BATTALION — PART    V. 

ia    his     person,    observing    to   yield    ground    a   little    if 
pushed. 

6;>9.  The  colonel  will  take  great  caro  to  prevent  the 
conti-c  of  the  battalion  from  describing  an  arc  of  a 
circle,  cither  too  great  or  too  small,  in  order  that  the 
wings  may  conform  themselves  to  its  movement.  He 
will  see  also  that  the  captains  keep  their  companies  con- 
stantly aligned  upon  the  centre,  so  that  there  may  be 
no  opening  and  no  crowding  of  files.  lie  will  endeavor 
to  prevent  faults,  and,  should  they  occur,  correct  them 
without  noise. 

660.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  before  the  battalion, 
will  give  his  attention  to  the  same  objects. 

661.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  direct  march  to 
be  resumed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

662.  At  the  command  march,  the  color-rank,  the  gen- 
eral   guides,    and    the    battalion    will   resume    the    direeti 
march ;  the  major  will  immediately  place  himself  thirt)i 
or  forty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  colonel,  placed  in  rear; 
of  the  centre,  who   will   establish   him  by   signal  of  the 
sword  on  the  perpendicular  direction  which  the  corpora^ 
in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  ought  to  pursue;  the  majof 
will   immediately  cause  the   color-bearer,  if  necessary,  to 
incline  to  the  right  or  left,  so  as  to  be  exactly  opposite 
to  his  file ;  the  color-bearer  will  then  take  two  points  on 
the  ground  between  himself  and  the  major. 

663.  The  lieutenant-colonel   will   endeavor   to   give    to 

P( 
ta 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    UATTALION PART    V.       149 

[the  color-company  and  the  next  on  the  left  a  direction 
perpendicular  to  that  pursued  by  the  centre  corporal  ; 
and  all  the  other  companies,  without  precipitancy,  will 
[conform  themselves  to  that  basis. 


/ 


Article  Fifth. 

To  march  in  retreat.^  in  line  of  battle. 


664.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  be  the  wish  of 
the  colonel  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

.    1.  Face  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  about — Face. 

665.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about;  the  color-rank  and  the  general  guides,  if  in  ad- 
vance, will  take  their  places  in  line  ;  the  color-bearer  will 
pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  leading;  the  corporal  of  his 
file  will  step  behind  the  corporal  next  on  his  own  right,  to 
let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  then  step  into  the  front 
rank,  now  rear,  to  re-form  the  color-file ;  the  colonel  will 
place  himself  behind  the  front  rank,  become  the  rear  ; 
the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  place  themselves 
before  the  rear  rank,  now  leading. 

666.  The  colonel  will  take  post  forty  paces  behind  the 
color-file,  in  order  to  assure  the  lieutenant-colonel  on  the 
perpendicular,  who  will  place  himself  at  a  like  dis- 
tance in  front,  as  prescribed  for  the  advance  in  line  of 
battle. 


150      SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    V. 

607.  If  the  battalion  be  the  one  charged  with  the  di- 
rection, the  colonel  will  establish  markers  in  the  manner 
indicated,  No.  589,  except  that  they  will  face  to  the  bat- 
talion, and  that  the  first  will  be  placed  twenty-five  paces 
from  the  lieutenant-colonel.  If  the  markers  be  already 
established,  the  oflBccr  charged  with  replacing  them  in 
succession  will  cause  them  to  face  about,  the  moment 
that  the  battalion  executes  this  movement,  and  then  the 
marker  nearest  to  the  battalion  will  hasten  to  the  rear  ot 
the  two  others". 

668.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

3.  Battalion,  forward. 

669.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  will  advance 
six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers,  accompanied 
by  the  two  corporals  of  his  guard  of  that  rank,  the  centre 
corporal  stepping  back  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass;  the 
two  file  closers  nearest  this  centre  corporal  will  unite 
on  him  behind  the  color-guard  to  serve  as  a  basis  of 
alignment  for  the  line  of  file  closers;  the  two  general 
guides  will  place  themselves  abreast  with  the  color  rank| 
the  covering  sergeants  will  place  themselves  in  the  line 
of  file  closers,  and  the  captains  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
leading:  the  captains  in  the  left  wing,  now  right,  will, 
if  not  already  there,  shift  to  the  left  of  their  companiea,| 
now  become  the  right. 

670.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    Y.       151 

671.  The  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the  same 
principles  which  govern  the  advance  in  line :  the  centre 
corporal  behind  the  color-bearer  will  march  exactly  in  his 
trace. 

672.  If  it  be  the  directing  battalion,  the  color-bearer 
will  direct  himself  on  the  markers,  who  will,  of  their  own 
accord,  each  place  himself  in  succession  behind  the  mark- 
er most  distant,  on  being  approached  hj  the  battalion  ; 
the  officer  charged  with  the  superintendence  of  the  mark- 
ers will  carefully  assure  them  on  the  direction. 

673.  In  the  case  of  a  subordinate  battalion,  the  color- 
bearer  will  maintain  himself  on  the  perpendicular  by 
means  of  points  taken  on  the  ground. 

674.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  major  will  each 
discharge  the  same  functions  as  in  the  advance  in  line. 

675.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  on  the  outside  of  the 
file  closers  of  the  color-company,  will  also  maintain  the 
three  file  closers  of  the  basis  of  alignment  in  a  square 
with  the  line  of  direction  :  the  other  file  closers  Avill  keep 
themselves  aligned  on  this  basis. 


Article  Sixth. 

To  halt  the  battalion  marching  in  retreat^  and  to  face 
it  to  the  front. 

676.  The  colonel  having  halted  the  battalion,  and  wish- 
ing to  face  it  to  the  front,  will  command  : 

1.  Face  to  the  front.     2.  Battalion,  about — Face. 


152       SCHOOL    OF    THK    BATTALION — PART    V. 

G77.  At  the  second  comman<l,  the  color-rank,  general 
guides,  captains,  and  covering  sergeants,  will  all  retake 
their  habitual  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  color-bearer 
will  repass  into  the  front  rank. 

678.  The  battalion  uaarching  in  lino  of  battle  by  the 
front  rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in 
retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.  Battalion,  right  about.     2.  Makch. 

679.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face  to 
the  rear  and  move  off  at  the  same  gait  by  the  rear  rank. 
The  principles  prescribed.  No.  669  and  following  will  bo 
carefully  observed. 

680.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion  to  march 
again  by  the  front,  he  will  give  the  same  commands. 


Article  Skvkntii. 

Change,  of  direction,  in  marching  in  retreat. 

681.  A  battalion  retiring  in  line  will  change  direction  by 
the  commands  and  moans  indicated.  No.  ()b2  aiul  follow- 
ing; the  three  file  closers,  united  behind  the  color-rank, 
will  conform  themselves  to  the  movement  of  this  rank, 
and  wheel  like  it;  the  centre  file  closer  of  the  three  will 
take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  according  to 
the  gait,  and  keep  himself  steadily  at  the  same  distance 


to 
a- 
at 
he 
It 
ird 


my 
id: 
mn. 
the 


5  to 
dis- 
ide, 
luct 
elly 
iself 


'PI  ^f'^. 


n 


V 


p.     .  -^ol 


-A 


-y/ 


Ky 


u-ii       j 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       153 

from  the  color-bearer ;  the  line  of  file  closers  will  conform 
themselves  to  the  movement  of  its  centre,  and  the  lieuten- 
aut-colonel  will  maintain  it  on  that  basis. 


Article  Eighth. 

Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  retreating. 

682.  The  battalion  advancing  in  line  will  be  supposed  to 
encounter  an  obstacle  which  covers  one  or  more  compa- 
nies ;  the  colonel  will  cause  them  to  ploy  into  column  at 
full  distance,  in  rear  of  the  next  company  toward  the 
color,  which  will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner.  It 
will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  only  covers  the  third 
company,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Third  company,  obstacle. 

683.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third  company 
will  place  himself  in  its  front,  turn  to  it,  and  command  : 

1.  Third  company,  by  the  left  fanh,  to  the  rear  into  column. 

2.  Doable  quick.     ?>.  March.     He  will  then  hasten  to  the 
left  of  his  company. 

684.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  left  in  marching;  the  two  left  files  will  promptly  dis- 
engage to  the  rear  in  double  quick  time ;  the  left  guide, 
placing  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  will  conduct 
it  behind  the  fourth  company,  directing  himself  parallelly 
with  this  company;  the  captain  of  the  third  will  himself 
halt  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  fourth,  and  see  his  com- 


154       SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — rAUT    V. 

pany  file  past:  when  its  right  file  shall  bo  nearly  up  with 
bim,  he  will  command:  1.  Third  company.  2.  By  the 
right  Jlaulc.  3.  Maucii.  4.  Guide  rirjht,  and  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  his  company. 

685.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right,  preserving  the  same  gait,  but  the  moment  it 
shall  be  at  the  prescribed  distance,  its  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

686.  This  company  will  thus  follow  in  column  that  be- 
hind which  it  finds  itself,  and  at  wheeling  distance,  its 
right  guide  marching  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  captain 
of  that  company. 

687.  As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have  faced  to 
the  left,  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and  maintain 
between  himself  and  the  right  of  the  fourth  the  sjuxce  ne- 
cessary for  the  return  into  line  of  the  third. 

688.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Third  company^  fonoard  into  line. 

689.  At  this  command,  the  captain  turning  to  bis  com- 
pany, will  add : 

1.  By  company^  right  half  icheel.     2.  Double  quick. 
3.  March. 

690.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the 


155 

ptain 
hiide 
coin- 

irect 
i  re- 
pre- 

sev- 
i  the 


lefi 
ck— 


esig- 
.boit 

i4ke 

bead 
the 

ink  ; 

aself 
to  wh„.  ._  r-  viiocu,  i^u.  U04  una  loiiowing ;  the  cap- 
tains of  the  other  companies  will  conduct  them  by  the 
flank  in  rear  of  the  third,  inclining  toward  the  head  of 
the  column  ;  and,  as  the  head  of  each  company  arrives 


f 


^^ 


f:l  I 


/7 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.      155 

double  quick  step,  and  execute  a  half  wheel :  its  captain 
will  then  command  :  1.  Foncard.  2.  March.  3.  Guide 
left.  The  second  command  will  be  given  when  the  com- 
pany shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled. 

691.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  direct 
itself  straight  forward  toward  the  line  of  battle,  and  re- 
take its  position  in  it  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  formation  forward  into  line  of  battle. 

692.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  covers  sev- 
eral contiguous  companies  (the  three  companies  on  the 
right  for  example),  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Three  right  companies ^  obstacle.  2.  By  the  left 
Jlank,  to  the  rear,  into  column.  3.  Double  quick — 
March. 

693.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  desig- 
nated companies  will  each  place  himself  before  the  centr/9 
of  his  company,  and  caution  it  as  to  the  movement  about 
to  be  executed. 

694.  At  the  command  march,  the  designated  companies 
will  face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and  immediately  t^ke 
the  double  quick  step ;  each  captain  will'  cause  the  head 
of  his  company  to  disengage  itself  to  the  rear,  and  the 
left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank ; 
the  captain  of  the  third  company  will  conform  himself 
to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  684  and  following ;  the  cap- 
tains of  the  other  companies  will  conduct  them  by  the 
flank  in  rear  of  the  third,  inclining  toward  the  head  of 
the  column  ;   and,  as  the  head  of  each  company  arrives 


15G       SCHOOL    OF    THE    IJATTALIOX — I'ART    V. 

opposite  to  the  right  of  t])e  one  next  before  it  in  column, 
its  captain  will  himself  halt,  see  his  company  file  past, 
and  conform  himself  for  facing  it  to  the  front,  in  march- 
ing, to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  684  and  following. 

695.   When   the   last   company   in    column   shall   have 
passed  the  obstacle,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.    Three  right  companies^  forward,  into  line. 


696.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  these 
three  companies  will  command,  Jii/  compamj,  right  half 
tcheel.     The  colonel  will  then  add  : 


1.   Double  quick.     2.  March. 

697.  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of  the 
three  companies,  each  company  will  conform  itself  to  what 
is  prescribed.  No.  690  and  following. 

698.  It  is  supposed,  in  the  foregoing  examples,  that  the 
companies  belonged  to  the  right  wing ;  if  they  make  part 
of  the  other,  they  will  execute  the  passage  of  an  ob- 
stacle according  to  the  same  yirinciples  and  by  inverse 
means. 

699.  When  flank  companies  arc  broken  off  to  pass  an 
obstacle,  the  general  guide  on  that  flank  will  place  him- 
self six  paces  in  front  of  the  outer  file  of  the  nearest 
company  to  him  remaining  in  line. 

700.  l»i  the  preceding  movements,  it  has  been  supposed 
that  the  battalion  was  marching  in  quick  time,  but  if  it 


SCHOOL    OF    THK    BATTALIOX — PART    V.      157 

be  inarching  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  colonc4  shall 
wish  to  cause  several  contiguous  companies  to  break  to 
the  rear,  he  will  first  order  the  battalion  to  march  in 
quick  time  ;  the  companies  will  break  as  indicated,  No. 
692. 

701.  When  the  movement  is  completed,  the  colonel  will 
order  the  double  quick  step  to  be  resumed.  He  will  also 
cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  quick  time  when  he  shall 
wish  to  bring  into  line  the  several  companies  which  are 
to  the  rear  in  column ;  the  movement  will  be  executed  as 
previously  indicated;  and  when  the  last  company  shall 
have  nearly  completed  its  movement,  the  colonel  will 
cause  the  double  quick  step  to  be  resumed. 

702.  In  the  movement  of  a  single  company,  or  of  sev- 
eral companies  not  contiguous  to  each  other,  the  battal- 
ion will  continue  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  but  in 
these  cases  the  companies  which  are  to  ploy  into  column, 
or  re-enter  the  line,  will  increase  the  gait. 

703.  In  the  march  in  retreat,  these  several  movements 
will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  if  the  battalion 
marched  by  the  front  rank. 

704.  When  a  battalion,  advancing  in  line  of  battle, 
shall  be  obliged  to  execute  the  right  about  in  order  to 
retreat,  if  there  be  companies  in  column,  behind  the  rear 
rank,  these  companies  will  also  execute  the  right  about, 
put  themselves  in  march,  at  the  same  time  with  the  bat- 
talion, and  will  thus  precede  it  in  the  retreat :  they  will 
afterward  successively  put  themselves  into  line  by  the 
oblique  step,  as  the  ground  may  permit. 

705.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  retreat  in  double 
quick  time,  and  many  contiguous  companies  be  marching 


158       SCIIOOr,    OF    TTIK    BATTALIOX — PART    V. 

before  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  not 
change  the  _<rait  of  the  battalion  in  causing  them  to  re- 
enter into  line. 

706.  When  the  color-company  shall  be  obliged  to  exe- 
cute the  movement  of  passing  an  obstacle,  the  color-rank 
will  return  into  line  at  the  moment  the  company  shall 
face  to  the  left  or  right;  the  major  will  place  himself  six 
paces  before  the  extremity  of  the  company  behind  which 
the  color-company  marches  in  column,  in  order  to  give 
the  step  and  the  direction;  he,  himself,  first  taking  the 
step  from  the  battalion. 

707.  As  soon  as  the  color-company  shall  have  returned 
into  line,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard  will  again 
move  out  six  paces  in  front  of  the  battalion,  and  take 
the  step  from  the  major;  the  latter  will  immediately 
place  himself  twenty  or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the 
color-bearer,  and  face  to  the  colonel  placed  behind  the 
centre  of  the  battalion,  who  will  establish  him  on  the 
perpendicular;  and,  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  assured  on  it, 
the  color-bearer  will  instantly  take  two  points  on  the 
ground  between  himself  and  the  major. 

708.  It  is  prescribed,  as  a  general  rule,  that  the  com- 
panies of  the  right  wing  ought  to  execute  the  movement 
of  passing  obstacles  by  the  left  flank,  and  the  reverse  for 
the  companies  of  the  other  wing ;  but  if  the  obstacle 
cover  at  once  several  companies  of  the  centre,  each  will 
file  into  column  behind  that,  still  in  line,  and  of  the  same 
wing,  which  may  be  the  nearest  to  it. 


1 

n 

p 

i 

- 

^' 

1 

1 

|:: 

J^CHOOL    OF    TIIF.    HATTALIOX — PART    V.       159 


Article  Ninth. 

To  pass  a  dejile,  in  retreat,  hy  the  right  or  left 
flank. 

709.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall  encounter 
a  defile  which  it  must  pass,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battal- 
ion, and  face  it  to  the  fi-ont. 

710.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in  rear  of  the 
left  flank,  and  that  its  width  is  sufiBcient  to  give  passage 
to  a  column  by  platoon ;  the  colonel  will  place  a  marker 
fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers  at  the 
point  around  which  the  subdivisions  will  have  to  change 
direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile;  he  will  then  com- 
mand : 

To  the  rear,  hy  the  right  flank,  pass  the  defile. 

711.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  immediately 
command : 

1.    First  company,   right — Face.      2.    March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

712.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company  will 
commence  the  movement ;   the  first  file  will  wheel  to  the 

11-14 


160       SCHOOL    OF    THK    IJATTALIOX — PAUT    V. 

right,  march  to  the  rear  till  it  shall  have  passed  four  pacp.> 
beyond  the  lile  closer^,  wheu  it  will  wheel  again  to  the 
right,  and  then  direct  itself  straight  forward  toward  the 
left  flank.  All  the  other  files  of  this  company  will  come 
to  wheel  in  succession  at  the  same  place  where  the  first 
had  wheeled. 

713.  The  second  company  will  execute,  in  its  turn,  the 
same  movement,  by  the  commands  of  its  captain,  who  will 
give  the  command  March,  so  that  the  first  file  of  his  com- 
pany may  immediately  follow  the  last  of  the  first,  without 
constraint,  however,  as  to  taking  the  step  of  the  first ;  the 
first  file  of  the  second  company  will  wheel  to  the  right,  on 
its  ground ;  all  the  other  tiles  of  this  company  will  come 
in  succession  to  wheel  at  the  same  place.  The  following 
companies  will  execute,  each  in  its  turn,  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

714.  When  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall  be  on 
the  same  direction  with  the  first,  the  captain  of  the  first 
will  cause  it  to  form,  by  platoon  into  line,  and  the  moment 
that  it  is  in  column,  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will 
direct  himself  on  the  marker  around  whom  he  has  to 
change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile. 

715.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  by  the 
flank,  directing  itself  parallelly  with  the  line  of  battle  ; 
and  it,  in  its  turn,  will  form  by  platoon  into  line,  when  the 
third  company  shall  be  wholly  on  the  same  direction  with 
itself. 

716.  The  following  companies  will  successively  execute 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  and  each 
will  form  by  platoon  into  line,  when  the  next  company 
shall  be  on  the  same  direction  with  itself. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       161 

717.  The  first  platoon  of  the  leading  company  having 
arrived  opposite  to  the  marker  placed  at  the  entrance  of 
the  defile,  will  turn  to  the  left,  and  the  following  platoons 
will  all  execute  this  movement  at  the  same  point.  As  the 
last  companies  will  not  be  able  to  form  platoons  before 
reaching  the  defile,  they  will  so  direct  themselves,  in  enter- 
ing it,  as  to  leave  room  to  the  left  for  this  movement. 

718.  The  battalion  Avill  thus  pass  the  defile  by  platoon ; 
and,  as  the  two  platoons  of  each  company  shall  clear  it, 
companies  will  be  successively  formed  by  the  means  indi- 
cated, school  of  the  company.  No.  273  and  following, 

719.  The  head  of  the  column  having  cleared  the  defile, 
and  having  reached  the  distance  at  which  the  colonel 
wishes  to  re-form  line  faced  to  the  defile,  he  may  cause 
the  leading  company  to  turn  to  the  left,  to  prolong  the 
column  in  that  direction,  and  then  form  it  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle;  or  he  may  halt  the  column,  and  form  it  into 
line  of  battle  faced  to  the  rear. 

720.  If  the  defile  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right  flank,  it  will 
be  passed  by  the  left;  the  movement  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

721.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front  of 
a  platoon,  it  will  be  passed  by  the  flank.  Captains  and 
file  closers  will  be  watchful  that  the  files  do  not  lf)se  their 
distances  in  marching.  Companies  or  platoons  will  be 
formed  into  line  as  the  width  of  the  defile  may  permit,  or 
as  the  companies  shall  successively  clear  it. 


162    school  of  the  battalion — pakt  v. 

Article  Tenth. 

To  march  by  the  fiank. 

722.  The  colouel,  wishing  the  battalion  to  march  by  the 
flank,  will  command : 

1.  Battalion.      2.  Right    for  hft)—F\cv..     3.  For- 
ward.    4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

723.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  and  covering 
sergeants  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed,  Nos.  1.36 
and  141,  school  of  the  company. 

724.  The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  place 
himself  to  the  left  and  b}'  the  side  of  the  last  file  of  his 
company,  covering  the  captains  in  file. 

725.  The  battalion  having  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  the 
captains,  at  the  second  command,  will  shift  rajiidly  to  the 
left  of  their  companies,  and  each  place  himself  by  the  side 
of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  company  preceding  his 
own,  except  the  captain  of  the  left  company,  who  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the 
battalion.  The  covering  sergeant  of  the  right  company 
will  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  front  rank  man 
of  the  rearmost  file  of  his  company,  covering  the  captains 
in  file. 

726.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  step  off" 
with    life ;    the    sergeant,    placed    before  the   leading   file 


/^,e 


I'.ss 


L.I   I   U 
1.  -i    I   \ '  I 

Lj_lx.i 
nrrn 


I  I  I  i  I 


1  1  I"1"l 

1  'TT'  1  i 

1   I  .■^  r--i- 

L.I.  i-r  1 

Li4J  1 

i-i.J_U 

!-L  1  . 1    1 

i^i^.n 

LJ_!    1    I 

I.I  1  1 '  I 

Mill 

n  1  'in 

r  M  1  1 

Mill 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       163 

(right  or  left  in  front),  will  be  careful  to  preserve  exactly 
the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  to  direct  himself 
straight  forward  j  to  this  end,  he  will  take  points  on  the 
ground. 

727.  "Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right  or  left 
flank,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  abreast 
with  the  leading  file,  and  the  major  abreast  with  the  color- 
file,  both  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank,  and  about  six 
paces  from  it. 

728.  The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieutenant-colonel 
and  the  front  rank,  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the 
head  of  the  battalion,  and  the  sergeant-major,  placed 
between  the  major  and  the  color-bearer,  will  march  in 
the  same  step  with  the  adjutant. 

729.  The  captains  and  file  closers  will  carefully  see  that 
the  files  neither  open  out  nor  close  too  much,  and  that 
they  regain,  insensibly,  their  distances,  if  lost. 

730.  The  colonel  wishing  the  battalion  to  wheel  by  file, 
will  command  : 


1.  By  file  right  (or  left).     2.  March. 


731.  The  files  will  wheel  in  succession,  and  all  at  the 
place  where  the  first  had  wheeled,  in  conforming  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

732.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  it  to  halt,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 


164       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V. 

733.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  company,  No.  14  G. 

734.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  by  the  flank  and  the 
colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  line,  either 
to  the  front  or  to  the  rear,  the  movements  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company. 


Article  Eleventh. 

To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or  left,  hy  file,  into 
line  of  battle. 

735.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  right  flank,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  on  the  right  by  file, 
he  will  determine  the  line  of  battle,  and  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  place  two  markers  on  that  line,  in  conformity 
with  what  is  prescribed.  No.  415. 

736.  The  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly  up  with  the 
first  marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1,    On   the  right,   by  fie,  into  line.     2.  March   (or 
double  quick — March). 

737.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company  will 
form  itself  on  the  right,  by  file,  into  line  of  battle,  as 
indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company.  No.  149 ;  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  first  file  will  rest  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  right  arm  of  the  first  marker;  the  other 
companies  will  follow  the  movement  of  the  leading  com- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       165 

pany ;  each  captain  will  place  himself  on  the  line  at  the 
same  time  with  the  front  rank  man  of  his  first  file,  and  on 
the  right  of  this  man. 

738.  The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  the  lead- 
ing one,  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  mark- 
ers, and  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  his  company,  at  the 
instant  that  the  front  rank  man  of  this  file  arrives  on  the 
line. 

739.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 

740.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  successive  forma- 
tion of  the  battalion,  moving  along  the  front  of  the  line  of 
battle. 

741.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will,  in  succession,  assure 
the  direction  of  the  guides,  and  see  that  the  men  of  the 
front  rank,  in  placing  themselves  on  the  line,  do  not 
pass  it. 

742.  If  the  battalion  march  by  the  left  flank,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  Twelfth. 

Changes  of  front. 

Chanye   of  front  perpendicularly  forward. 

743.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is  supposed 
to  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  a  change  of  front 


16^   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOX — PART  V. 

forward  on  the  right  compauy,  and  that  the  angle  formed 
by  the  old  and  new  positions  be  a  right  angle,  or  a  few 
degrees  more  or  less  than  one  ;  he  will  cause  two  markers 
to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the  position 
to  .be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  order  its  captain 
to  establish  it  against  the  markers. 

744.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  immedi- 
ately direct  it  upon  the  markers  by  a  wheel  to  the  right 
on  the  fixed  pivot:  and  after  having  halted  it,  he  will 
align  it  by  the  right. 

745.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Change  front  forward  on  firat  company.  2.  Bij 
company^  right  half  icheel.  3.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

746.  At  the  second  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company. 

747.  At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  ti.\ed  pivot;  the  left  guide  of  each  will 
place  himself  on  its  left  as  soon  as  he  shall  bo  able  to 
pass;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  that  the  com- 
panies have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  command  : 


4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

748.  At  the  fifth   command,   the   companies  ceasing  to 
wheel    will    march    straight   forward;    at   the    sixth,    the 

men  will  touch  elbows  toward  the  right. 


-H 


re 


/ 


/ 


' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.   167 

749.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company  will  march 
straight  forward  until  this  company  shall  arrive  at  the 
point  where  it  should  turn  to  the  right;  each  succeeding 
right  guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately  before  him  at 
the  cessation  of  the  wheel,  and  will  march  in  the  trace  of 
this  file  until  this  company  shall  turn  to  the  right  to 
move  upon  the  line  :  this  guide  will  then  march  straight 
forward. 

750.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite  to 
the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  turn  to 
the  right;  the  right  guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to 
arrive  squarely  upon  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  he  shall 
be  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  the  captain  will  command: 

1.  Second  company.     2,  Halt. 

751.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt;  the 
files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will  come  into  it  prompt- 
ly, the  left  guide  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle, 
and  as  soon  as  he  is  assured  in  the  direction  by  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, the  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the 
right. 

752.  Jlach  following  company  will  conform  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

753.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

G  u  ides — Po  s  t  s . 

754.  If  the  battalion  t^e  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  change  front  forward  on  the  first  company,  and 
that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new  positions  be  a 


1G8      SCHOOL    OF    THK    HATTALION — I'AUT    V. 

right  angle,  he  will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the 
new  direction,  before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by  that 
company,  and  will  command  : 

1.  Cuange  front  forward  on.  first  company.  2.  By 
company.,  right  half  wheel.  3.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

755.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  move  rapid- 
ly before  the  centre  of  their  respective  companies ;  the 
captain  of  the  first  company  will  command:  1.  Right 
tarn.  2.  Quick  time ;  the  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the  right. 

756.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company  will  turn 
to  the  right  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402 ;  its  captain  will  halt  it  at 
three  paces  from  the  markers,  and  the  files  in  rear  will 
promptly  come  into  line.  The  captain  will  align  the  com- 
pany by  the  right. 

757.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  right 
on  a  fixed  pivot;  the  left  guides  will  place  themselves  on 
the  left  of  their  respective  companies,  and  when  the  col- 
onel shall  judge  they  have  wheeled  sufTu-icntly,  he  will 
command  : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     G.   Guide  right. 

758.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  indicated,  No. 
746  and  following. 

759.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  change  front 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.   169 

forward   on   the  eighth   company,  according  to    the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

Change  of  front  perpeiidir.ularly  to  the  rear. 

760.  The  colonel  wishing  to  change  front  to  the  rear  on 
the  right  company,  will  impart  his  purpose  to  the  captain 
of  this  company.  The  latter  will  immediately  face  his 
company  about,  wheel  it  to  the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot,  and 
halt  it  when  it  shall  be  in  the  direction  indicated  to  him  by 
the  colonel :  the  captain  will  then  face  his  company  to  the 
front,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against  the  two  markers, 
whom  the  colonel  will  cause  to  be  established  before  the 
right  and  left  files. 

761.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Change  front  to  the  rear^  on  Jirst  company.  2. 
Battalion^  about — Face.  3.  By  company^  left  half 
wheel.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

762.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except 
the  right,  will  face  about. 

763.  At  the  third,  the  captains,  whose  companies  have 
faced  about,  will  each  place  himself  behind  the  centre  of 
his  company,  two  paces  from  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 

764.  At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
left  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  the  rear  rank ;  the  left  guide  of 
each  will,  as  soon  as  he  is  able  to  pass,  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  company,  now  become  the 


170        SCHOOL    OF    TTTE    RATTALIOX — PART    V. 

right;  and  wlien  tho  colonel  phall  judije  t.liat  the  compa- 
nies have  sufficiently  whccleti,  he  will  command  : 

5.  Forward.     6.  March.     7.   Guifle  left. 

765.  At  the  sixth  command,  the  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel,  march  straight  forward  toward  the  new  line  of  hat- 
tie,  and,  at  the  seventh,  take  the  touch  of  the  elhow  to- 
ward the  left. 

766.  The  guide  of  each  company'  on  its  right  flank, 
become  left,  will  conform  himself  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, No.  748. 

767.  The  second  company  from  the  right  having  arrived 
opposite  to  the  left  of  the  first,  will  turn  to  the  left ;  the 
guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive  parallelly  with  the 
line  of  battle,  cross  that  line,  and  when  the  front  rank, 
now  in  the  rear,  shall  be  three  paces  beyond  it,  the  captain 
will  conlmand  :     1.  Second  cotiipaiii/.     2.  Halt. 

768.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt ; 
the  files  which  may^  not  yet  he  in  lino  with  the  guide  will 
promptly  come  into  it;  the  captain  will  cause  the  company 
to  face  about,  and  then  align  it  by  the  right. 

769.  All  the  other  companies  will  execute  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  second,  each  as  it  successively 
arrives  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  company  that  precedes 
it  on  the  new  line  of  battle. 

770.  Tho  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

Guides — Posts. 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    V.       171 

771.  The  colonel  will  cause  a  change  of  front  on  the  left 
company  of  the  battalion  to  the  rear,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

772.  In  changes  of  front,  the  colonel  will  give  a  general 
superintendence  to  the  movement. 

773.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of 
the  guides  as  they  successively  move  out  on  the  line  of 
battle,  conforming  himself  to  what  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  successive  formations. 


Remarks  on  changes  of  front. 

774.  "When  the  new  direction  is  perpendicular,  or  nearly 
so,  to  that  of  the  battalion,  the  companies  ought  to  make 
about  a  half  wheel  (the  eighth  of  the  circle)  before  march- 
ing straight  forward;  but  when  those  two  lines  are  oblique 
to  each  other,  the  smaller  the  angle  which  they  form  the 
less  ought  the  companies  to  wheel.  It  is  for  the  colonel  to 
judge,  according  to  the  angle,  the  precise  time  when  he 
ought  to  give  the  command  march,  after  the  caution  for- 
tcard,  and  if  he  cannot  catch  the  exact  moment,  the  word 
of  execution  should  rather  be  given  a  little  too  soon  than 
an  instant  too  late. 

775.  When  the  old  and  the  new  lines  form  an  angle  of 
forty-five  or  fewer  degrees,  the  colonel  will  find  it  necessa- 
ry to  arrest  the  wheel  of  the  companies  when  the  marching 
flanks  shall  have  taken  but  a  few  paces,  or,  it  may  be, 
have  but  disengaged,  respectively,  from  the  fixed  pivots 
of  the  next  companies ;  and  in  all  such  cases,  the  compa- 
nies will  arrive  so  nearly  parallel  to  the  new  line,  as  to  be 

11-15 


172      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V. 

able  to  align  themselves  upon  it  without  the  intermediate 
turn  to  the  right  or  left:  to  execute  the  movement  under 
either  circumstances  supposed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Oblique  change  of  front,  forward  (or  to  the  rea?')  on 
(such  company). 


Article  Thirteenth. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  the 
centre. 

11Q>.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying  the  correspond- 
ing companies  of  the  right  and  left  wings  into  column  at 
company  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  in  rear  of  the  two 
centre  companies,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
Article  Third.  Part  Second,  of  this  school. 

777.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  form  the  double  column  at 
company  distance  (the  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle), 
will  command  : 

1.  Double  column,  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion, 
inward — Face.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

778.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  place  them- 
selves two  paces  in  front   of  their  respective  companies; 


rr'-h 


:! 


J^ 


f^- 
f^ 


d 


m 

CO 

ce: 
Ar 

coi 
vri] 


iront  of  their  respective  companies; 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       173 

the  captains  of  the  two  centre  companies  will  caution  them 
to  stand  fast,  and  the  other  captains  will  caution  their 
companies  to  face  to  the  left  and  right,  respectively.  The 
covering  sergeants  will  step  into  the  front  rank. 

779.  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
panies will  stand  fast;  the  others  of  the  right  wing  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of  the  left  wing  face  to  the 
right ;  each  captain  whose  compan}'  has  faced,  will  hasten 
to  break  to  the  rear  the  two  files  at  the  head  of  his  com- 
pany; the  left  guide  of  each  right  company,  and  the  right 
guide  of  each  left  company  will  each  place  himself  at  the 
head  of  its  front  rank,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  his 
guide. 

780.  At  the  command  mctrch,  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
panies, which  are  to  form  the  first  division,  will  stand  fast; 
the  senior  captain  of  the  two  will  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  the  division,  and  command:  guide  right;  the 
junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between 
the  two  companies,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company 
will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank  on  the  left  of  the 
division,  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to  pass. 

781.  All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by  their  cap- 
tains, will  step  off  with  life  to  arrange  themselves  in  col- 
umn at  company  distance,  each  company  behind  the  pre- 
ceding one  in  the  column  of  the  same  wing,  so  that,  in  the 
right  wing,  the  third  may  be  next  behind  the  fourth,  the 
second  next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to  the  right  company ; 
and,  in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth  may  be  next  behind  the 
fifth,  the  seventh  next  to  the  sixth,  and  so  on  to  the  left 
company  of  the  battalion. 

782.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  two  wings  will 


174   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

unite  into  divisions  in  arriingin-i^  themselves  iu  column  ; 
an  instant  before  the  union,  at  the  centre  of  the  column, 
the  left  guides  of  right  companies  will  pass  into  the  line  of 
file  closers,  and  each  captain  will  command:  1.  Such  com- 
pany.    2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

783.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  of  union,  each  company  will  halt;  at  the  third, 
it  will  face  to  the  front.  The  senior  captain  in  each  divi- 
sion will  place  himself  on  its  right,  and  command,  Jiight — 
Duicss,  and  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the 
interval  between  the  two  companies.  The  division  being 
aligned,  its  chief  will  command  Front,  aud  take  his  posi- 
tion two  paces  before  its  centre. 

784.  The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  divisions  will 
take  the  respective  denominations  of  firxt,  second,  third, 
etc.,  according  to  position  in  the  column,  beginning  at  the 
front. 

785.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  who,  at  the  second  com- 
mand given  by  the  colonel,  will  have  placed  himself  at  a 
little  more  than  company  distance  in  rear  of  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  right  guides  on 
the  direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  b}'  placing  him- 
self in  their  roar. 

786.  The  music  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

787.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the  double 
column  at  company  distance  without  halting  the  battalion, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Double  column  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion  by 
the  right  and  left  flanks.  3.  March  (or  double 
(juick — March). 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.      175 

788.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company ;  the  cap- 
tains of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will  caution  their  companies 
to  march  straight  forward;  the  other  captains  will  caution 
their  companies  to  face  to  the  right  and  left. 

789.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
panies will  continue  to  march  straight  forward;  the  senior 
captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  divi- 
sion and  command,  </»)V/e  right;  the  junior  captain  will 
place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies. 
The  left  guide  of  the  fifth  company  will  place  himself 
on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division.  The  men 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  The  color  and 
general  guides  will  retake  their  places.  The  three  right 
companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  three  left  com- 
panies will  face  to  the  right.  Each  captain  will  break 
to  the  rear  two  files  at  the  head  of  his  company ;  the 
left  guides  of  the  right  companies,  and  the  right  guides 
of  the  left  companies  will  each  place  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and  the  captain 
by  the  side  of  his  guide. 

790.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the 
column  and  direct  themselves  parallelly  to  the  first  di- 
vision. Each  of  the  other  companies  will,  in  like  manner, 
place  itself  behind  the  company  of  the  wing  to  which  it 
belongs,  and  will  be  careful  to  gain  as  much  ground  as 
possible  toward  the  head  of  the  column. 

791.  The  corresponding  companies  of  each  wing  will 
unite  into  divisions  on  taking  their  positions  in  column, 
and   each    captain,  the  instant  the  head  of  his  company 


176   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

arrives  at  the  centre  of  the  column,  will  command,  1. 
Such  comjniuy  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank.  2.  March.  The 
senior  captain  of  the  two  companies  will  place  himself  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  his  division,  and  command,  yuide 
n'tjhi ;  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  in- 
terval between  the  two  companies.  The  two  companies 
thus  formed  into  a  division  will  take  the  touch  of  el- 
bows to  the  right,  and  when  each  division  has  gained 
its  proper  distance,  its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in 
quick  time. 

792.  When  the  battalion  presents  an  odd  number  of 
companies,  the  formation  will  be  made  in  like  manner, 
and  the  company  on  either  flank  which  shall  find  itself 
without  a  corresponding  one,  will  place  itself  at  company 
distance  behind  the  wing  to  which  it  belongs. 

793.  The  double  column,  closed  in  mass,  will  be  formed 
according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  com- 
mands, substituting  the  indication,  cloned  in  ?«««»,  for  that 
of  at  half  distance. 

794.  The  double  column  never  being  formed  when  two 
or  more  battalions  are  to  be  in  one  general  column,  it 
will  habitually  take  the  guide  to  the  right,  sometimes 
to  the  left,  or  in  the  centre  of  the  column  ;  in  the  last  case, 
the  command  will  be,  guide  centre.  The  column  will 
march  and  change  direction  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  a  simple  column  by  division. 

795.  The  double  column  at  company  distance  will  be 
closed  in  mass,  or,  if  in  mass,  will  take  half  distance, 
by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  for  a  simple  col- 
umn by  division. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       177 

Deployment  of  the  double  column^  faced  to  the  front. 

796.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  deploy  the  double  column 
will  place  a  marker  respectively  before  the  right  and 
left  files  of  the  first  division,  and  a  third  before  the 
left  file  of  the  right  company,  same  division ;  which 
being  done,  he  will  cause  the  two  general  guides  to 
spring  out  on  the  alignment  of  the  markers  a  little 
beyond  the  points  at  which  the  respective  flanks  of  the 
battalion   ought  to  i-est ;    he   will  then   command : 

1.    Deploy  column.      2.  Battalion,   outivard — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

797.  The  column  will  deploy  itself  on  the  two  com- 
panies at  its  head,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  deployment  of  columns  in  mass.  The  captains 
of  these  companies  will  each,  at  the  command  ntarch, 
place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  own  company,  and 
align  it  by  the  right ;  the  captain  of  the  fourth  will  then 
place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  at  the  moment  the  captain  of 
the  third  shall  come  to  its  left  to  align  it. 

798.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 

799.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  the  fire 
to  commence  pending  the    deployment,   he  will  give  an 


1  78      SCHOOL    OF    THK    BATTALION — PART    V. 

order  to  that  effect  to  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies,  and  the  fire  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  No.  438. 

800.  The  battalion  being  in  double  column  and  in 
march,  if  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  cause  three  markers  to  be 
posted  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  the  head  of  the 
column  shall  arrive  near  the  markers,  he  will  command : 


1.  Deploy  column.  2.  Batlalio7i,  hy  the  right  and 
left  Jlanks.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

801.  The  column  will  deploy  on  the  two  leading  com- 
panies, according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  de- 
ployment of  a  close  column,  No.  5o3  and  following-;  at 
the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
halt  it,  and  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies 
will  align  their  companies  by  the  right. 

802.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  colonel  to  deploy  the  column  and  to  continue  to 
march  in  the  order  of  battle,  he  will  not  cause  markers 
to  be  established  at  the  head  of  the  column.  The  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  in- 
dicated, No.  800,  observing  what  follows.  At  the  first 
command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  command, 
quick  time.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  division 
will  continue  to  march  in  quick  time  ;  the  colonel  will 
command,  guide  centre.  The  captains  of  the  fourth  and 
fifth  companies,  the  color,  and  the  men,  will  immediately 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.   179 

conform  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  of  battle. 
The  companies  will  take  the  quick  step  by  the  command 
of  their  captains,  as  they  successively  arrive  in  line.  The 
movement  completed,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion 
to  march  in  double  quick  time. 

To  form  the  double  column  into' line  of  battle^  faced 
to  the  right  or  left. 

803.  The  double  column,  being  at  company  distance  and 
at  a  halt,  may  be  formed  into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the 
right  or  left ;  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  faced 
to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  into  line  loheel,  left  coynpanies  on  the  right 
into  line.  2.  Battalion,  guide  right.  3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

804.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  his  company ;  the  right  compa- 
nies will  be  cautioned  that  they  will  have  to  wheel  to  the 
right  into  line,  the  left  companies  that  they  will  have  to 
march  straight  forward. 

805.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  of  the  fourth 
company  will  place  himself  briskly  on  the  direction  of  the 
right  guides  of  the  column,  face  to  them,  and  opposite  to 
one  of  the  three  last  files  of  his  company  when  in  line  of 
battle  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  him  in  that  po- 
sition. 

806.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  all  the 


180      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V. 

captaius,  the  right  companies  will  form  to  the  right  into 
line  of  battle,  the  left  companies  will  put  themselves  in 
order  to  form  on  the  right  into  line  of  battle ;  thesp  forma- 
tions will  be  executed  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  391  and 
following.  No.  41G  and  following ;  the  lieutenant-colonel 
Avill  assure  the  guides  of  the  left  wing  on  the  line  of  battle 
as  they  successively  come  upon  it. 

807.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Right  into  line  wheel.  2.  Left  companies^  on  the 
right  into  line.  3.  Battalion^  guide  right.  4.  March 
— (or  double  quick — March). 

808.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  him- 
self promptly  before  the  centre  of  his  company;  the  right 
companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will  have  to  wheel 
to  the  riglit,  and  the  left  companies  that  they  will  have  to 
form  on  the  right  into  line. 

809.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the  right 
companies  will  form  to  the  right  into  line,  and  the  left 
companies  on  the  right  into  line.  These  formations  will 
be  executed  as  prescribed,  Nos.  402,  417  and  following. 

810.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  the  battalion 
forward,  at  the  moment  the  right  companies  have  com- 
pleted the  wheel,  he  will  command  : 

5.  Forward.     6.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 


SCHOOL    OF    THE   BATTALION — PART    V.        181 

811.  At  the  command  forward,  the  captains  of  the  right 
companies  will  command,  quick  time.  At  the  command 
march,  the  right  companies  will  cease  to  wheel,  and  march 
straight  forward.     The  colonel  will  then  add  : 


7.   Guide  centime. 


812.  The  movement  of  the  left  companies  will  be  exe- 
cuted in  double  quick  time,  as  prescribed  above,  and  as 
they  arrive  on  the  line  each  captain  will  cause  his  company 
to  march  in  quick  time. 

•81.3.  The  column  maybe  formed  faced  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

814.  If  the  company  be  closed  in  mass  instead  of  at 
company  distance,  these  movements  will  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed,  Nos.  417,  502  and  510. 


Remark  on  the  deployment  of  the  double  column. 

815.  The  depth  of  the  double  column,  at  company  dis- 
tance, being  inconsiderable,  closing  it  in  mass,  if  at  a  halt, 
in  order  to  deploy  it,  may  be  dispensed  with  ;  but  if  it  be 
in  march,  it  will  be  preferable  to  cause  it  so  to  close,  in 
halting,  before  deploying. 

816.  The  double  column  will  be  deployed  habitually  on 
the  centre  companies,  but  the  colonel  may  sometimes 
deploy  it  on  any  interior  company,  or  on  the  first  or 
eighth  company. 


182       SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    V. 


Article  Fourteenth. 

Dispo.<<i({o7is  against  Cavalry. 

817.  A  battalion  heing  in  column  by  company,  at  full 
distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first  cause  divis- 
ions to  be  formed:  which  being  done,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.   To  half  distance,  close  col- 
umn.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

818.  At  tho  command  march,  the  column  will  close  to 
company  distance,  the  second  division  taking  its  distance 
from  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  division. 

819.  At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth  division,  the 
file  closers  of  each  company  of  which  it  la  composed, 
passing  by  the  outer  flank  of  their  companies,  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  before  the  front  rank,  opposite  to 
their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  face  toward 
the  head  of  the  column. 

820.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement,  the  major 
will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  column  abreast  with 
the  first  division  ;  the  buglers  formed  in  two  ranks  will 
place  themselves  at  platoon  distance,  behind  tho  inner  pla- 
toons of  the  second  division. 

821.  These   dispositions  being    made,  tho  colonel  may. 


7 

f- 

H     ■ 

.:dDDUa  aau 

uric 

^=4 

H 

;c^^ 

sJIca'rT 

r  r;  3 

B 

]-:  an  !3 

Dn  dnn 

r'  nn 

±.       _ 

H 

-" 

5^1^..  2, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.      183 

according  to  circumstances,  put  the  column  in  march,  or 
cause  it  to  form  square ;  if  he  wish  to  do  the  latter,  he  will 
command: 


1.    Form  square.     2.    Right  and  left  into  line,  wheel. 


822.  At  the  first  coftmand,  the  lieutenant-colonel,  fac- 
ing to  the  left  guides,  and  the  major,  facing  to  those 
of  the  right,  will  align  them,  from  the  front,  on  the 
respective  guides  of  the  fourth  division,  who  will  stand 
fast,  holding  up  their  pieces,  inverted,  perpendicularly; 
the  right  guides,  in  placing  themselves  on  the  direction, 
will  take  their  exact  distances. 

823.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast;  all  the  captains  of 
the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves  be- 
fore the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and  caution 
them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel,  the  right  companies  to 
the  right,  and  the  left  companies  to  the  left  into  line  of 
battle. 

824.  The  color-bearer  will  step  back  into  the  line  of 
file  closers,  opposite  to  his  place  in  line  of  battle,  and 
will  be  replaced  by  the  corporal  of  his  file,  who  is  in  the 
rear  rank ;  the  corporal  of  the  same  file  Avho  is  in  the 
rank  of  file  closers  will  step  into  the  rear  rank. 

825.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  command : 
1.  Fourth  division,  forward;  2.  Guide  left,  and  place 
himself  at  the  same  time  two  paces  outside  of  its  left 
flank. 

11-16 


184       SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION PART    V. 

826.  These   dispositions    ended,   the    colonel    will    com- 
mand : 

March  (or  double  quick — March). 


827.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  divis- 
ion will  stand  fast;  but  its  right  file  will  face  to  the 
right,  and  its  left  file  to  the  left. 

828.  The  companies  of  the  second  and  third  divisions 
will  wheel  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  and  the  buglers' 
will  advance  a  space  equal  to  the  front  of  a  company. 

829.  The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the 
square,  and  when  it  shall  have  closed,  its  chief  will  halt  it, 
face  it  about,  and  align  it  by  the  rear  rank  upon  the 
guides  of  the  division,  who  will,  for  this  purpose,  remain 
faced  to  the  front.  The  junior  captain  will  pass  into  the 
rear  rank,  now  become  the  front,  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company  will  place  himself  behind  him 
in  the  front  rank,  become  rear.  The  file  closers  will,  at 
the  same  time,  close  up  a  pace  on  the  front  rank,  and 
the  outer  file  on  each  flunk  of  the  division  Avill  face 
outward. 

830.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 

Guides — Posts. 


831.    At   this    command,    the    chiefs   of    the    first    and 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.        185 

fourth    divisions,    as    well    as  the    guides,   will    enter  the 
square. 

832.  The  captains  whose  companies  have  formed  to 
the  right  into  line,  will  remain  on  the  left  of  their  com- 
panies; the  left  guide  of  each  of  those  companies  will, 
in  the  rear  rank,  cover  his  captain,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  of  each  will  place  himself  as  a  file  closer  behind 
the  right  file  of  his  company. 

833.  The  field  and  staff  will  enter  the  square,  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel placing  himself  behind  the  left,  and  the 
major  behind  the  right  of  the  first  division. 

834.  If  the  battalion  present  ten,  instead  of  eight  com- 
panies, the  fourth  division  will  make  the  same  movements 
prescribed  above  for  the  second  and  third  divisions,  and 
the  fifth,  the  movements  prescribed  for  the  fourth  di- 
vision. 

835.  A  battalion  ought  never  to  present,  near  the 
enemy's  cavalry,  an  odd  company.  The  odd  company, 
under  that  circumstance,  ought,  when  the  battalion  is 
under  arms,  to  be  consolidated,  for  the  time,  with  the 
other  companies. 

836.  The  fronts  of  the  square  will  be  designated  as 
follows:  the  first  division  will  always  be  the  jirst  front ; 
the  last  division,  the  fimrth  front ;  the  right  companies 
of  the  other  divisions  will  form  the  second  front,  and 
the  left  companies  of  the  same  divisions  the  third  front. 

837.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company,  at  full 
distance,  right  in  front,  and  in  march,  when  the  colonel 
shall  Avish  to  form  square,  he  will  cause  this  movement 
to  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  indicated. 
No.  817. 


186       8CH00L    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V. 

838.  At  the  command  mnrch,  the  column  will  close  to 
company  distance,  as  is  prescribed,  No.  278.  When  the 
chief  of  the  fourth  division  shall  command  quick,  march, 
the  file  closers  of  this  division  will  place  themselves  be- 
fore the  front  rank. 

839.  The  major  and  the  buglers  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  820. 

840.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  ho  will 
command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  Right  and  left  into   line,  tcheel. 
3.  March. 

841.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divis- 
ion will  caution  it  to  halt ;  all  the  captains  of  the  second 
and  third  divisions  will  rapidly  place  themseVes  before 
the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and  caution 
them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel,  the  right  companies 
to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies  to  the  left  into  line. 
The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  con- 
tinue its  march,  and  will  hasten  to  its  left  flank.  At 
the  third  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  halt  his  division  and  align  it  to  the 
left,  the  outer  files  will  face  to  the  right  and  left,  the 
rest  of  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed.  No. 
828  and  following. 

842.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  major,  at  the 
command  march,  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed, 
No.  822. 

843.  If  the  battalion,  before  the  square  is  formed^ 
be  in  double  column,  the  two  leading  companies  will  form 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    Y.       187 

the  first  front,  the  two  rear  companies  the  fourth  ;  the 
other  companies  of  the  right  half  battalion  will  form 
the  second,  and  those  of  the  left  half  battalion  the  third 
front. 

844.  The  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  be  commanded  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  fourth  divisions;  each  of  the 
other  two  by  its  senior  captain. 

845.  The  commander  of  each  front  will  place  himself 
four  paces  behind  its  present  rear  rank,  and  will  be  re- 
placed momentarily  in  the  command  of  his  company  by 
the  next  in  rank  therein. 

846.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  instead  of  at 
company  distance,  as  has  been  supposed,  the  square  will 
be  formed  in  the  manner  prescribed.  No.  817  or  838  and 
following;  and  the  dispositions  indicated,  Nos.  819  and 
820,  will  be  executed  at  the  command  form  square. 

847.  If  the  column  by  division,  whether  double  or  single, 
be  in  mass,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
square,  he  will  first  cause  it  to  take  companj^  distance  :  to 
this  effect,  he  will  command: 

1.   To  form  aquare.     2.  By  the  head  of  column,  take 
half  distance. 

848.  The  divisions  will  take  half  distance  by  the  means 
indicated.  No.  324  and  following.  What  is  prescribed,  No. 
820,  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and  second  divisions  are 
put  in  motion. 

849.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  the  moment  the 
third  division  shall  have  its  distance.     As  soon  as  the  col- 


188        SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PAllT    V. 

umu  is  halted,  the  dispDsitions  indicated,  Xo.  SID,  will  bo 
executed,  and  when  these  are  completed,  the  colonel  may 
proceed  to  form  square. 

850.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  also,  in  the  first 
place,  cause  company  distance  to  be  taken,  and,  for  this 
purpose,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  By  the  head  of  column,  take 
half  distance.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

851.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  Nu. 
3.*i0  and  following.  What  is  prescribed,  No.  820,  Will  be 
executed  as  the  first  and  second  divisions  are  put  in  motion. 

852.  'XXi.ii  colonel  will  proceed  to  form  squai'e  the  moment 
the  third  division  shall  have  its  distance  ;  at  tlio-command 
form  square,  the  dispositions  indicated,  No.  S19,  will  be  ex- 
ecuted. If  it  be  intended  merely  to  dispose  the  colaimt  for 
square,  the  colonel  will  not  halt  the  column  until  the  last 
division  has  its  distance. 

853.  In  a  simple  column,  left  in  front,  these  several 
movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  by  inverse  means  ;  but  the  fronts  of  the  square 
will  have  the  same  designations  as  if  the  right  of  the  col- 
umn were  in  front,  that  is,  the  first  division  will  constitute 
the  first  front,  and  thus  of  the  other  subdivisions. 

854.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  distance  le^;-< 
than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command: 

1.  Bf/  (suuli)  front,  forward.     2.   March. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V,       189 

855.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  be  made  by  the 
irst  front,  the  chief  of  this  front  will  command : 


1.  First  division,  forward.    2.  Guide  centre. 


856.  The  chief  of  the  second  front  "will  face  his  front  to 
the  left.  The  captains  of  the  companies  composing  this 
front  will  place  themselves  outside,  and  on  the  right  of 
their  left  guides,  who  will  replace  them  in  the  front  rank  : 
the  chief  of  the  third  front  will  face  his  front  to  the  right, 
and  the  captains  in  this  front  will  place  themselves  out- 
side, and  on  the  left  of  their  covering  sergeants;  the  chief 
of  the  fourth  front  will  face  his  front  about,  and  command  : 
I.  Fourth  division,  forward.  2.  Guide  centra.  The  captain 
wh(x  is  in  the  centre  of  the  first  front,  will  be  charged  with 
the  direction  of  the  march,  and  will  regulate  himself  by 
the  means  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  89. 

857.  At  the  command  march,  the  square  will  put  itself 
in  motion  ;  the  companies  marching  by  the  flank  will  be 
carefiil  not  to  lose  their  distances.  The  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  cause  his  division  to  keep  constantly  closed 
on  the  flanks  of  the  second  and  third  fronts. 

858.  This  movement  will  only  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

859.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  in  rear  of 
the  file  of  direction  in  order  to  regulate  his  march. 

860.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  halt  the  square,  he 
will  command  : 


190       SCHOOL    OF    THK    HATTALIOX — PART    V 


1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

Sf)l.  At  the  second  command,  the  square  will  halt;  the 
fourth  front  will  face  about  immediately,  and  without  fur- 
ther command  ;  the  second  and  third  fronts  will  face  out- 
ward; the  captains  of  companies  will  resume  their  place? 
as  in  square. 

862.  In  moving  the  square  forward  by  the  second,  third 
or  fourth  fronts,  the  same  rules  will  be  observed. 

863.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  greater  distance 
than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command: 

1.   Form  column. 

804.  The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  command: 

1.  First  division,  forward.     2.  Guide  left. 

865.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  caution  it 
to  stand  fast;  the  commander  of  the  second  front  will 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  left,  and  then  command :  hi/  com- 
pany,  bi/  file  left.  The  commander  of  the  third  front  will 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  then  command:  bi/  coin- 
]}anij,  bji  file  7'iffht.  At  the  moment  the  second  and  third 
fronts  face  to  the  left  and  right,  each  captain  will  cause 
to  break  to  the  rear  the  two  leading  files  of  his  companj'. 


ooD^ci; noaiA^  c  zj 


Tl6  .  J 


an  DO  on  g  pan. 


--1 —-y 


|h°^°;°^h^;^"^i  ^_ 


FX^.    '2.. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    J5ATTALIOX — PART    V.       191 

866.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

3.  Makch  (or  double  quick — March). 

867.  At  this  command,  the  first  front  will  march  for- 
ward;  its  ohief  will  halt  it  when  it  shall  have  advanced  a 
space  equal  to  half  its  front,  and  align  it  by  the  left. 

868.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  second  and 
third  fronts  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  left  and  right,  and 
march  to  meet  each  other  behind  the  centre  of  the  first 
division,  and  the  moment  they  unite,  the  captain  of  each 
company  will  halt  his  company  and  face  it  to  the  front. 
T!ie  division  being  re-formed,  its  chief  will  align  it  by 
the  left. 

869.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cause  it 
to  face  about :  its  file  closers  will  remain  before  the  front 
rank. 

870.  The  column  being  thus  re-formed,  the  colonel  may 
put  it  in  march  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed. 
No.  164,  and  following;  the  right  guides  will  preserve 
company  distance  exactly  as  the  directing  guides. 

871.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  square,  he 
will  give  the  commands  indicated,  No.  840. 

872.  To  cause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat  a  dis- 
tance greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will  first  cause 
column  to  be  formed  as  indicated.  No.  863  ;  and  when 
formed,  he  will  cause  it  to  face  by  the  rear  rank ;  to  this 
end,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  warch  in  retreat.     2.  Face  hy  the  rear  rank. 
3.  Battalion,  about — Face. 


192       SCHOOL    OF    THE    UATTALION rAUT    V. 

873.  At  the  second  coinniund,  the  file  closers  of  the  in- 
terior divisions  will  place  themselves,  passing  by  the  outer 
flanks  of  their  respective  companies,  behind  the  front 
rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line  of  battle:  the  file 
closers  of  the  other  divisions  will  stand  fast. 

874.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about:  each  chief  of  division  will  place  himself  before 
its  rear  rank,  become  front,  passing  through  the  interval 
between  its  two  companies;  the  guides  will  step  into  the 
rear  rank,  now  front. 

875.  The  column  being  thus  disposed,  the  colonel  may 
put  it  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form  square  as  if  it  were 
faced  by  the  front  rank.  The  square  being  formed,  its 
fronts  will  preserve  the  same  designations  they  had  when 
faced  by  the  front  rank. 

876.  The  battalion  being  in  square  by  the  rear  rank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat  or  in 
advance,  a  distance  less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  con- 
form to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  854  and  following :  other- 
wise, he  will  re-form  the  column  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed.  No.  8G3,  by  marching  forward  the  fourth 
front. 

877.  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the  front  a 
distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will  face 
the  coluniu  by  the  front  rank  ;  te  this  end,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   To  march  in  advance.     2.  Face  hij  the  front  rank. 
3.  Battalion,  about — Face. 

878.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  873  and 
following. 


i- 


I' 


'-■-'^ 


^m^^:^^^ 


'^  ufmm^i^:m*  1 


^^ 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       193 

879.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  advance,  and  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

I.   To  march  in   retreat.     2.  Battalion,  right  about. 
3.  March  {ov  double  quick — March). 

880.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves  rapidly 
before  the  front  rank  of  their  respective  divisions.  At  the 
command  march,  the  column  will  face  about  and  move  off 
to  the  rear  ;  the  chiefs  of  divisions  and  the  guides  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  874. 

881.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  retreat,  and  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   To  march  in  advance.     2.  Battalion,  right  about. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

882.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves  before 
the  rear  rank  of  their  respective  divisions;  at  the  third, 
the  column  will  face  by  the  front  rank. 

To  reduce  the  square. 

883.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  break  the  square,  will 
command : 

1.   Reduce  square.     2.  March  (or   double  quick — 
March). 


1!)4     SCHOOL  OF  Tin-:  battalion — part  v. 

884.  This  moveiuent  will  be  executed  in  the  manner 
indicated,  No.  8G3  and  fidlowing;  but  the  file  closers  of 
the  fourth  front  will  place  themselves  behind  the  rear 
rank  the  moment  it  faces  about;  the  field  and  staff,  the 
color-bearer  and  buglers,  will,  at  the  same  time,  return 
to  their  places  in  column. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  battle. 

885.  A  battalion  deployed,  may  be  formed  into  square 
in  a  direction  cither  parallel  or  perpendicular  to  the  line 
of  battle. 

886.  In  the  first  case,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  battal- 
ion to  break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left, 
and  then  close  the  column  to  half  distance,  as  indicated, 
No.  817  and  following. 

887.  In  the  second  case,  he  will  ploy  the  battalion  into 
simple  column  by  division  at  half  distance  in  rear  of  the 
right  or  left  division,  or  into  column  doubled  on  the 
centre. 

.  888.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  upon  one  of  the 
flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Column  at  half  distance,  by 
division.  3.  On  the  first  (or  fourth)  division.  4. 
Battalion,  right  (or  left) — Face.  5.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

889:  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  No.  119  and  following. 


SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION — PART    V.       195 

890.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  sqnare  in  a  direction  per- 
pendicular to  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command: 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  On  the  Jirst  (or  four(Ji)  di- 
vision, form  column.  3.  Battalion,  hf/  the  right 
(or  left)  flank.  4.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

891.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  ploying  a  column  by  division  at 
half  distance,  No.  150.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
halt  bis  division  at  the  command  march. 

892.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  the  colo- 
nel will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Double  column  at  half  dis- 
tance. 3.  Battalion,  inward — Face.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

893.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No. 
778  and  following. 

894.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into  double 
column  to  form  square,  the  colonel  Avill  command : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.    Form  double   column.     3. 
Battalion,  by  the  right  and  left  flanks.     4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 
11-17 


196       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V. 

895.  Thi3  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No. 
788.  The  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  halt  his  divis- 
ion at  the  command  march. 


Ohservalions  relative  to  the  formation  of  squares  in  ttco 
ranks. 


896.  When  the  colonel  shall  judge  it  proper  to  have  a 
reserve,  this  reserve,  in  a  column  of  three  divisions,  will 
be  formed  of  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  division. 
The  second  division  will,  in  this  ease,  close  to  platoon  dis- 
tance on  the  first  division.  When  the  square  is  formed, 
the  reserve  platoons  will  move  forward  a  distance  nearly 
equal  to  a  platoon  front. 

897.  In  re-forming  column,  the  first  division  will  move 
forward  platoon,  instead  of  company  distance. 

898.  If  the  column  be  formed  of  four  divisions,  the  inner 
platoons  of  the  third  division  will  compose  the  reserve  ; 
then,  in  re-forming  column,  the  first  division  will  conform 
to  the  general  rule,  and  the  chief  of  the  third,  as  soon  as 
bis  division  is  formed,  will  close  it  to  platoon  distance  on 
the  second  division.  The  colonel  may,  if  necessary,  form 
the  reserve  of  the  entire  third  division.  In  this  case,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner. 

899.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  when  it  shall 
close,  at  the  command  to  form  square,  to  half  distance,  the 
chief  of  the  third  division  will  cause  four  files  to  break  to 
the  rear  from  the  right  and  left  of  his  division:  the  guides 
will  close  upon   the  outer  files  remaining  in  line,  and  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTAMOX — PART    V.       197 

left  guide  will  march  exactly  iu  the  trace  of  the  file  imme- 
diately in  front  of  him.  This  division  will  then  close  in 
mass  on  the  second  division  ;  and  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  close  to  half  distance  on  the  same  division. 

900.  At  the  command  form  square,  the  chief  of  the 
reserve  division  will  command:  1.  Third  divinion,  forward. 
2.  Guide  centre  ;  at  this  command,  the  guides  on  the  flanks 
will  fall  into  the  line  of  file  closers.  At  the  command 
march,  the  reserve  will  move  forward  the  distance  of  a 
company  front.  When  halted,  its  chief  will  cause  the  pla- 
toons to  be  doubled,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command  : 


1.   On  the  centre,  double  platoons.     2.  March. 


901.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  will 
place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  respective 
platoons  ;  the  chief  of  each  outer  platoon  will  face  his 
platoon  toward  the  centre,  and  cause  to  break  to  the  rear 
two  files  from  the  left  or  right.  At  the  command  march, 
the  outer  platoons  will  direct  their  march  so  as  to  double 
on  the  centre  platoon  at  the  distance  of  four  paces;  their 
chiefs  will  align  these  outer  platoons  on  the  centre,  and 
the  files  previously  broken  to  the  rear  will  come  into  line. 

902.  If  the  column  be  at  half,  instead  of  full  distance, 
the  colonel  before  forming  square  will  order  the  chiefs  of 
the  third  and  fourth  divisions  to  move  forward  their  divis- 
ions as  prescribed,  No.  899. 

903.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  at  the  command 
to  form  square,  the  chief  of  the  third  division  will   break 


198      SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALIOX — I'AHT    v. 

four  files  to  the  rear  from  each  of  the  flanks  as  prescribed. 
No.  899. 

904.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  as  soou  as  the 
second  division  shall  have  ^'ained  its  distance. 

905.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  column  to  continue 
marching,  at  the  command,  /;y  the  head  of  column,  tale 
half  distance,  the  chief  of  the  reserve  division  will  give  his 
cautionary  commands  in  sufficient  time  to  place  his  divi- 
sion in  motion  simultaneously  with  the  one  which  precedes 
it.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  give  the  command 
march  at  the  instant  there  is  compau}'  distance  between 
his  division  and  the  second. 

906.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  the  column, 
at  the  command  form  column,  the  chief  of  the  third  divis- 
ion will  command:  form  division;  at  this  command,  the 
chiefs  of  the  outer  platoons  which  have  doubled  in  rear  of 
the  centre  platoons,  will  giS'c  the  commands  and  make  the 
preparatory  movements  for  deploying  on  the  centre  pla- 
toons, which  will  be  executed  at  the  command  march,  given 
by  the  colonel  and  briskly  repeated  by  the  chief  of  this 
division.  The  division  being  re-formed,  the  chiefs  of  the 
outer  platoons  will  retake  their  places  in  column,  and  the 
chief  of  this  division  will  again  cause  four  files  from  each 
of  its  flanks  to  break  to  the  rear. 

907.  If  before  the  formation  of  the  square,  the  column 
had  been  left  in  front,  it  would  be  formed  by  the  same 
commands  and  according  to  the  same  principles.  The 
second  division,  in  this  case,  would  form  the  i-eserve. 

908.  The  column  being  formed,  if  the  colonel  should 
•wish  to  march  it  in  i*etreat  ho  will  face  it  by  the  rear  rank 
The  files  of  the  third  division  broken   off  to  the  rear,  will 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PAKT    V.       199 

face  about  with  the  battalion,  and  when  the  column  is  put 
in  motion  will  march  in  front  of  the  rear  rank.  But 
should  the  colonel  wish  to  re-form  the  square,  he  will  cause 
the  battalion  to  face  by  the  front  rank. 

909.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line,  instead  of  in  column, 
the  chief  of  the  reserve  division  will  bring  it  into  column 
in  such  manner  that  there  may  be  a  distance  of  only  four 
paces  between  this  division  and  the  one  which  is  to  be  im- 
mediately in  front  of  it;  and  when  this  division  is  halted 
and  aligned,  its  chief  will  cause  the  usual  nun\ber  of  files 
to  be  broken  to  the  rear.  The  chief  of  the  division  which 
should  occupy  in  column  a  position  immediately  in  rear  of 
the  reserve  division  will,  on  entering  the  column,  take  a 
distance  of  twelve  paces  between  it  and  the  division  estab- 
lished immediately  in  front  of  the  reserve  division. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

910.  If  the  square  formed  in  two  ranks,  according  to 
the  preceding  rules,  should  not  be  deemed  sufficiently 
strong,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  square  to  be  formed  in 
four  ranks. 

911.  The  battalion  being  in  column  by  company  at  full 
distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  square  in  four  ranks,  he  will  first  cause 
divisions  to  be  formed,  which  being  executed,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks.  2.  To  half  dis- 
tance, close  column.  3.  Makch  (or  double  quick 
— March). 


200      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX — PART    V. 

912.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division 
will  caution  the  right  company  to  face  to  the  left,  and  the 
left  company  to  face  to  the  right.  The  chiefs  of  the  other 
divisions  will  caution  their  divisions  to  move  forward. 

913.  At  the  command  mnrch,  the  right  company  of  the 
first  division  will  form  into  four  ranks  on  its  left  file,  and 
the  left  company  into  four  ranks  on  its  right  file.  The 
formation  ended,  the  chief  of  this  division  will  align  it  by 
the  left. 

914.  The  other  divisions  will  move  forward  and  double 
their  files  inarching ;  the  right  company  of  each  division 
will  double  on  its  left  file,  and  the  left  company  on  its 
right  file.  The  formation  completed,  each  chief  of  divis- 
ion will  command,  i/uide  left.  Each  chief  will  halt  his 
division  when  it  shall  have  the  distance  of  a  company 
front  in  four  ranks  from  the  preceding  one,  counting  from 
its  rear  rank,  and  will  align  his  division  by  the  left.  At 
the  instant  the  fourth  division  is  halted,  the  file  closers 
will  move  rapidly  before  its  front  rank. 

915.  The  colonel  will  form  square,  re-form  column,  and 
reduce  square  in  four  ranks,  by  the  same  commands  and 
means  as  prescribed  for  a  battalion  in  two  ranks. 

916.  If  the  square  formed  in  four  ranks  be  reduced  and 
at  a  halt,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the  battalion 
into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  undouhle  Jiles.      2.  Battalion,  out- 
ward— Face.     3.  March. 

917.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  stop  before 
the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and  those  on  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.      201 

right  will  caution   them  to  face  to  the  right,  and  those  on 
the  left  to  face  to  the  left. 

918.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to 
the  right  and  left. 

919.  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will  un- 
double  its  files  and  re-form  into  two  ranks  as  indicated  in 
the  school  of  the  company,  No.  376  and  following.  Each 
captain  Avill  halt  his  company  and  face  it  to  the  front.  The 
formation  completed,  each  chief  of  division  will  align  his 
division  by  the  left. 

920.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  with  divisions  formed 
in  four  ranks,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  them 
into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Guide   centre.     2.  In   two   ranks,  undouhle  files. 
3.  March. 

921.  The  captain,  placed  in  the  centre  of  each  division, 
will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front,  as  will  also 
the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  and  the  right  file  of  the 
left  company.  Each  company  will  then  be  re-formed  into 
two  ranks,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

922.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  two  ranks,  the 
colonel  will  command,  giiide  left  (or  right). 

923.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the  flank 
divisions,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square^  in  four  ranks.  2.  Column  at 
half  distance,  hy  division.  3.  On  the  first  (or 
fourth)  division.  4.  Battalion,  right  (or  left) — 
Face.     5.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


202      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V. 

924.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  division,  and  caution 
it  to  face  to  the  right. 

925.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  right  guide  of  the  first 
division  will  rcmaiu  faced  to  the  front,  the  battulion  will 
face  to  the  right. 

926.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four  men  of 
the  first  division  will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled. 
All  the  other  files  of  four  men  will  step  ofi"  together,  and 
each  in  succession  will  close  up  to  its  proper  distance  on 
the  file  preceding  it,  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining 
doubled.  When  the  last  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of 
division  will  command.  Left — Dress. 

927.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column  in  the 
same  manner  as  with  a  battalion  in  two  ranks,  observing 
what  follows :  the  chiefs  of  division,  instead  of  allowing 
their  divisions  to  file  past  them  on  entering  the  column, 
will  continue  to  lead  them,  and  as  each  division  shall  arrive 
on  a  line  with  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  its  chief 
will  halt  the  right  guide,  who  will  immediately  face  to  the 
frontj  the  first  file  of  four  men  will  also  halt  at  the  same 
time  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  second 
file  will  close  on  the  first,  and  when^loscd,  halt,  and  face 
to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  All  the  other  files  will 
execute  successively  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the 
second.  When  the  last  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of 
division  will  command,  Left — Duess. 

928.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 


I 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       203 


1 .  To  form  square^  in  four  ranks.  2.  On  the  first 
division,  form  column.  3,  Battalion,  hi  the  right 
flank.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — MarchJ. 


929.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division 
will  step  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division  and  caution 
it  to  face  by  the  right  flank.  The  chief  of  the  first  divis- 
ion will  caution  his  covering  sergeant  to  halt,  and  re- 
main faced  to  the  front. 

930.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right;  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  first  division 
will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  first  division 
will  then  form  into  four  ranks  as  heretofore  prescribed. 
The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column  in  the  same 
manner  as  if  the  movement  had  taken  place  from  a 
halt. 

931.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  perpendicu- 
lar square  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Double  column, 
at  half  distance.  3.,  Battalion,  iiiiuard — Face. 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


932.  At   the   second    command,    the    captains    of   com- 
panies  will   place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their 


204       SCHOOL    OF    TIIF:    RATTALIOX — PAUT    V. 

respective  companies,  and  caution  those  on  tbe  right  to 
face  to  the  left,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the  right. 
The  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will  caution  his  covering 
sergeant  to  stand  fast. 

933.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to 
the  left  and  right:  at  the  command  juarch,  the  left  flic  of 
the  fourth,  and  the  right  file  of  the  fifth  company,  will 
face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  fourth  com- 
pany will  close  successively  by  file  of  fours  on  the  left 
file,  and  the  fifth  company,  in  like  manner,  on  the  right 
file;  the  files  will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doublc'd. 
The  formation  completed,  the  chief  of  division  will  com- 
mand, right  dress.  The  junior  captain  will  place  himf^elf 
in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies. 

934.  The  other  companies  will  close  as  prescribed  for 
the  double  column  in  two  ranks,  observing  what  folloAvs  : 
each  captain  will  halt  the  leading  guide  of  his  company 
the  moment  the  head  of  his  company  arrives  on  a  line 
with  the  centre  of  the  column.  In  the  right  companies, 
the  left  guides  will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  and 
the  left  file  of  four  men  will  face  immediately  to  the  front, 
remaining  doubled,  and  by  the  side  of  the  right  guide  of 
the  left  company.  The  companies  will  each  form  into 
four  ranks,  as  prescribed.  No.  926,  the  right  companies 
on  the  left  file,  and  the  left  companies  on  the  right  file. 
The  formation  completed,  the  junior  captain  will  place 
himself  between  the  two  companies,  and  the  senior  will 
command,  rifjht  dress. 

935.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 


I 


205 


(Jonhle 
flanks. 


I  place 
!  coin- 
to  face 
by  the 
autiou 
to  the 

1  com- 
ft  and 
y  will 
■t  will 


n  the 

}  will 


ision 


lonel 
fol- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PAUT    V.      205 


1.  To  form  square^  in  four  ranks.  2.  Fonn  double 
column.  3.  Battalion.,  hy  the  right  and  left  flanks. 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

93G.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  before  the  centres  of  their  respective  com- 
panies, and  those  on  the  right  will  caution  them  to  face 
by  the  left  flank,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  by  the 
right  flank ;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will  caution 
his  covering  sergeant  to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the 
front. 

937.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
panies will  halt.  The  battalion  will  face  to  the  left  and 
right;  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  fifth  company  will 
halt  and  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  movement  will 
then  be  executed  as  if  the  battalion  was  at  a  halt. 


Oblique  squares. 

9o8.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the  oblique  square,  he  will 
command : 

1.  To  form  oblique  square.     2.  On  the  first  division 
form  column. 

939.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  trace  the  alignment  of  the  first  division  in  the  fol- 


20G      SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALIOX — PART    V. 

lowing  manner:  be  will  place  himself  before  and  near 
the  right  file  of  this  division,  face  to  the  left,  march 
twelve  paces  along  the  front  rank,  halt,  face  to  the  right, 
march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly  to  the  front,  halt 
again,  face  to  the  right,  and  immediately  place  a  marker 
at  this  point.  The  covering  sergeant  of  the  right  com- 
pany will  step,  at  the  same  time,  before  its  right  file,  face 
to  the  left,  and  conform  the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  that 
of  the  shoulders  of  the  marker  established  by  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel. These  two  markers  being  established,  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  tame 
alignment,  at  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  division  will 
halt. 

940.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  jdace  themselves  in 
front  of  the  centres  of  their  divisions;  the  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  immediately  establish  it  by  a  wheel  to 
the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot,  against  the  markers,  and  align 
it  by  the  left.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  cau- 
tion them  to  face  to  the  right.  The  colonel  will  then 
command  : 

3.  Battalion^  right — Face.      4.  March    (or  double 
quick — March). 


911.  The  three  rear  divisions  will  direct  their  march 
so  as  to  place  themselves  at  half  distance  from  each 
other,  and  in  the  rear  of  the  first  division,  as  previously 
indicated,  observing  what  follows  : 

942.  The  chief  of  the  second  division,  instead  of  break- 
ing the  headmost  files  to  the  rear,  will  break  them  to  the 


2<'^7 


Fo6^ 


□  D  r;  s     ij 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       207 

front,  and  at  the  command  march,  -will  conduct  his  divis- 
ion toward  the  point  of  entrance  into  the  column.  Ar- 
rived at  this  point,  ho  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  cause 
his  division  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  right,  instructing  the 
right  guide  to  direct  himself  parallelly  to  the  first  divis- 
ion ;  and  as  soon  as  the  left  file  has  passed,  its  chief 
will  halt  the  division,  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  other 
divisions  will  break  to  the  rear,  but  slightly ;  each  will 
enter  the  column  as  prescribed  for  the  second,  and  the 
moment  the  battalion  is  ployed  into  column,  the  colonel 
will  cause  it  to  form  square. 

943.  The  formation  of  a  battalion  into  oblique  square  on 
the  left  division,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

944.  Should  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
first  cause  it  to  halt. 

945.  In  the  preceding  example,  the  battalion  was  sup- 
posed to  be  deployed  ;  but  if  it  be  already  formed  in  col- 
umn, the  desired  obliquity  will  be  established  by  causing 
it  to  change  direction  by  the  flank  ;  to  this  end,  the  colo- 
nel will  command: 

1.   To  form  oblique  square.     2.  Change  direction  by 
the  right  (or  left)  flank. 


946.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
trace  the  new  direction  in  the  following  manner;  he  will 
place  before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  headmost  divis- 
ion, two  markers,  and  a  third  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
first  two,  on  the  side  of  the  change  of  direction,  and  at 
11-18 


208     SCHOOL  of  the  battalion — part  v. 

twelve  paces  from  the  flank  of  the  column.  He  will  then 
place  himself  before  the  third  marker,  march  twelve  paces 
perpendicularly  to  the  front,  halt,  and  finish  tracing  the 
new  dii-ection  in  the  manner  indicated.  No.  939.- 

947.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

3.  Battalion,  right  (or  left) — Face.     4.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

948.  The  change  of  direction  having  been  executed,  the 
colonel  will  cause  the  square  to  be  formed. 

949.  Should  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
first  cause  it  to  halt. 

950.  Oblique  squares  in  four  ranks  will  bo  executed  by 
the  same  moans,  and  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  formation  of  squares  in  four  ranks. 

951.  Whether  the  battalion  be  ployed  into  simple  or 
double  column,  the  particular  dispositions  for  the  forma- 
tion of  the  square  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  819 
and  following.  The  division  which  is  to  form  the  rear  of 
the  column,  will  be  closed  in  mass,  and  as  soon  as  it  is 
aligned,  the  major  will  rectify  the  position  of  the  guides 
on  the  side  of  the  column  opposite  to  the  direction. 

952.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  merely  to  prepare 
for  square,  he  will  in  all  formations  with  that  view  substi- 
tute the  command  prepare  for  square  in  jdace  of  to  form 
square,  and  in  that  case,  the  last  division  will  enter  the 
column  at  company  distance. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  of  squares. 

953.  It  is  a  general  principle  that  a  column  by  company, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION PART    V.       209 

which  is  to  be  formed  into  square,  will  first  form  divisions, 
and  close  to  half  distance.  Nevertheless,  if  it  find  itself 
suddenly  threatened  by  cavalry  without  sufficient  time  to 
form  divisions,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  column  to  close 
to  platoon  distaucc  and  then  form  square  by  the  commands 
and  means  which  have  been  indicated ;  the  leading  and 
rearmost  companies  will  conform  themselves  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  divisions  in  those  positions.  The  other 
companies  will  form  by  platoon  to  the  right  and  left  into 
line  of  battle,  and  each  chief  of  platoon,  after  having 
halted  it,  will  place  himself  on  the  line,  as  if  the  platoon 
were  a  company,  and  he  will  be  covered  b}^  the  guide  in 
the  rear  rank. 

954.  A  battalion  in  column  at  full  distance,  having  to 
form  square,  will  always  close  on  the  leading  subdivision ; 
and  a  column  closed  in  mass,  will  always,  for  the  same 
purpose,  take  distances  by  the  head.  In  either  case,  the 
second  subdivision  should  be  careful  in  taking  its  distance, 
to  reckon  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  subdivision  in  front 
of  it. 

955.  If  a  column  by  company  should  be  required  to 
form  square  in  four  ranks,  the  doubling  of  files  will  always 
take  place  on  the  file  next  the  guide. 

956.  When  a  column,  disposed  to  form  square,  shall  be 
in  taarch,  it  will  change  direction  as  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance ;  thus,  having  to  execute  this  movement,  the  column 
will  take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite  to  that  to  which 
the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made,  if  that  be  not  already 
the  side  of  the  guide. 

957.  A  column  doubled  on  the  centre  at  company  distance 


210      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V. 

or  closed  in  mass,  may  be  formed  into  square  according  to 
the  same  principles  as  a  simple  column. 

958.  When  a  battalion  is  ployed,  with  a  view  to  the 
square,  it  will  alwaj-s  be  in  rear  of  the  right  or  left  divis- 
ion, in  order  that  it  may  be  able  to  commence  firing,  pend- 
ing the  execution  of  the  movement.  The  double  column, 
also,  affords  this  advantage,  and  being  more  promptly 
formed  than  any  other,  it  will  habitually  be  employed, 
unless  particular  circumstances  cause  a  different  formation 
to  be  preferred. 

959.  A  battalion,  in  square,  will  never  use  any  other 
than  the  fire  by  file  and  by  rank  ;  the  color  being  in  the 
line  of  file  closers,  its  guard  will  not  fall  back  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  41  ;  it  will  fire  like  the  men  of  the  company 
of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

960.  If  the  square  be  formed  in  four  ranks,  the  first  two 
ranks  will  alone  execute  the  firings  prescribed  above  ;  the 
other  two  ranks  will  remain  either  at  shoulder  or  support 
arms. 

961.  The  formation  of  the  square  being  often  necessary 
in  war,  and  being  the  most  complicated  of  the  manoeuvres, 
it  will  be  as  frequently  repeated  as  the  supposed  necessity 
may  require,  in  order  to  render  its  mechanism  familiar  to 
both  oflScers  and  men. 

962.  In  the  execution  of  this  manoeuvre,  the  colonel  will 
carefully  observe  that  the  divers  movements  wliich  it  in- 
volves succeed  each  other  without  loss  of  time,  but  also 
without  confusion;  for,  if  the  rapidity  of  cavalry  move- 
ments requires  the  greatest  promptitude  in  the  formation 
of  squares,  so,  on  the  other  hand,  precipitancy  always  re- 


d- 


_>.^  c 


•^mtk-^  ■■^Mi'- 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       211 

suits  in  disorder,  and  in  no  circumstance  is  disorder  more 
to  bo  avoided. 

963.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cover  by  skirmish- 
ers the  movements  of  a  column  preparing  to  form  square, 
ho  will  detach  for  this  purpose  one  or  two  inner  platoons  of 
one  of  the  interior  divisions  of  the  column.  In  this  case, 
the  exterior  platoons  of  this  division  and  the  following 
subdivisions  will,  according  to  circumstances,  close  on  the 
preceding  subdivision,  in  such  manner,  that  there  may  be 
between  them  only  the  distance  necessary  for  forming  into 
line. 

964.  When  the  colonel  shall  be  ready  to  form  square,  he 
will,  in  order  to  recall  the  skirmishers,  cause  to  the  color  to 
be  sounded.  If  on  the  return  of  the  skirmishers  there  be 
not  room  for  them  to  form  into  line  of  battle,  they  will 
double  on  the  outer  platoons  of  their  respective  companies. 


Column  against  cavalry. 

965.  When  a  column  closed  in  mass  has  to  form  square, 
it  will  begin  by  taking  company  distance;  but  if  so  sud- 
denly threatened  by  cavalry  as  not  to  allow  time  for  this 
disposition,  it  will  be  formed  in  the  following  manner: 

966.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Column  against  cavalry.     2.  March. 

967.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  di- 
vision will  caution  it  to  stand  fast  and  pass  behind  the  rear 


212       SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX — PART    V. 

rank;  in  the  interior  divisions  each  captain  will  promptly 
designate  the  number  of  files  necessary  to  close  the  inter- 
val between  his  company  and  the  one  in  front  of  it.  The 
captains  of  the  divisions  next  to  the  one  in  rear,  in  addi- 
tion to  closing  the  interval  in  front,  will  also  close  up  the 
interval  which  separates  this  division  from  the  last ;  the 
chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  face  about, 
and  its  file  closers  will  pass  briskly  before  the  front  rank. 

968.  At  the  command  march,  the  guides  of  each  division 
will  place  themselves  rapidly  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 
The  first  division  will  stand  fast,  the  fourth  will  face 
about,  the  outer  file  of  each  of  these  divisions  will  then 
face  outward  ;  in  other  divisions  the  files  designated  for 
closing  the  intervals  will  form  to  the  right  and  left  into 
line,  but  in  the  division  next  to  the  rearmost  one,  the  first 
files  that  come  into  line  will  close  to  the  right  or  left  until 
they  join  the  rear  division.  The  files  of  each  company 
which  remain  in  column  will  close  on  their  outer  files, 
formed  into  line,  in  order  to  create  a  vacant  space  in  the 
middle  of  the  column. 

909.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  column  against  cav- 
alry will  be  formed  by  the  same  commands  and  means. 
At  the  command  march,  the  first  and  fourth  divisions  will 
halt,  and  the  latter  division  will  face  about ;  the  interior 
divisions  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  above. 

970.  The  battalion  being  no  longer  threatened  by  caval- 
ry, the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  Maiicii. 

971.  At  the  command   march,  the  files  in  column  will 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.      213 

close  to  the  left  and  right  to  make  room  for  those  in  line 
who  will  retake  their  places  in  column  by  stepping  back- 
ward, except  those  closing  the  interval  between  the  two 
rear  divisions,  who  will  take  their  places  in  column  by  a 
flank  movement.  The  fourth  division  will  face  about,  the 
guides  will  resume  their  places. 

972.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  pressed  as  not  to  have 
time  to  order  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  the  men  will  fix  them, 
without  command  or  signal,  at  the  cautionary  command, 
'.olumn  against  cavalry. 

973.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war,  and  with 
decided  advantage,  the  colonel  will  frequently  cause  it  to 
be  executed  in  order  to  render  it  familiar. 


Article  Fifteenth. 
The  rally. 

974.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  the  colonel 
will  sometimes  cause  the  disperse  to  be  sounded,  at  which 
signal,  the  battalion  will  break  and  disperse. 

976.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  battalion, 
he  will  cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounded,  and  at  the  same 
time  place  two  markers  and  the  color-bearer  in  the  direc- 
tion he  may  wish  to  give  the  battalion. 

976.  Each  captain  will  rally  his  company  about  six 
paces  in  rear  of  the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in  line  of  battle. 

977.  The  colonel  will   cause  the    color-company  to  be 


214      SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX — PART    V. 

promptly  established  against  the  markers,  and  each  com- 
pany by  the  command  of  its  captain  will  be  aligned  on  the 
color-company  according  to  the  principles  heretofore  pre- 
scribed. 

978.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  battalion 
in  column,  he  will  cause  the  asaembli/  to  be  sounded,  and 
place  two  markers  before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by 
the  first  company ;  the  captain  of  this  company  will  rally 
his  company  in  rear  of  the  two  markers,  and  each  of  the 
other  captains  will  rally  bis  company  at  platoon  distance, 
behind  the  one  which  should  precede  it  in  the  order  in 
column. 


Article  Sixteenth. 

Rules  for  manceuvring  hy  the  rear  ranlc. 

970.  It  may  often  be  necessary'  to  cause  a  battalion  to 
manoeuvre  by  the  rear  rank  ;  when  the  case  presents  itself, 
the  following  rules  will  be  observed. 

980.  The  battalion  being  by  the  front  rank,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  manoeuvre  by  the  rear  rank,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Face  hy  the  rear  rank.     2.  Battalion. 
3.  Alout — Face. 

981.  If  the  battalion  be  deployed,  this  movement  will  be 
executed  as  has  been  indicated  for  the  iirc  by  the  rear  rank. 

982.  If  the  battalion  be  in  column  by  company,  or  by 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION — PART    V.       215 

platoon,  right  or  left  in  front,  the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  to 
take  their  new  places  in  column,  will  each  pass  by  the  left 
flank  of  his  subdivision,  and  the  file  closers  by  the  right 
flank  ;  the  guides  will  place  themselves  in  the  rear  rank. 

983.  If  the  column  be  formed  by  division,  the  chiefs  of 
division  will  each  pass  by  the  interval  in  the  centre  of 
his  division,  and  the  file  closers  by  the  outer  flanks  of 
their  respective  companies  ,•  the  junior  captain  in  each 
division  will  step  into  the  rear  rank,  and  be  covered  in 
the  front  rank  by  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  com- 
pany. 

984.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  abreast 
with  the  leading  subdivision,  and  the  major  abreast  with 
the  rearmost  one. 

985.  The  battalion  being  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  com- 
panies, divisions,  and  wings,  will  preserve  their  prior 
denominations  respectively. 

986.  The  manoeuvres  by  the  rear  rank  will  be  executed 
by  the  same  commands  and  on  the  same  principles  as  if 
the  battalion  faced  by  the  front  rank;  but  in  such  manner 
that  when  the  battalion  shall  be  brought  to  its  proper 
front,  all  the  subdivisions  may  find  themselves  in  their 
regular  order  from  right  to  left. 

987.  According  to  this  principle,  when  a  column  faced 
by  the  rear  rank  is  deployed,  the  subdivisions  which,  in 
line  of  battle  bj"^  the  front  rank,  ought  to  find  themselves 
on  the  right  of  the  subdivision  on  which  the  dejaloyment 
is  made,  will  face  to  the  left;  and  those  which  ought  to  be 
placed  on  its  left,  will  face  to  the  right. 

988.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  faced  by  the 
rear  rank,  is   to  be  ployed  into   column,  the  colonel  will 


216   SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

announce,  in  the  commands,  left  or  right  in  front,  accord- 
ing as  it  may  bo  intended  that  the  first  or  last  subdivision 
shall  be  at  the  head  of  the  column,  because  the  first  sub- 
division is  on  the  left,  and  the  last  on  the  right  of  the 
battalion  faced  by  the  rear  rank.  The  column  by  the 
rear  rank  will  take  the  guide  to  the  right,  if  the  first 
subdivision  be  in  front,  and  to  the  left  in  the  reverse 
case. 

989.  A  column,  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  will  be  brought 
to  its  proper  front  by  the  means  heretofore  prescribed. 
If  the  column  be  formed  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  the 
chiefs  of  subdivisions,  in  order  to  take  their  new  places  in 
column,  will  pass  by  the  left  of  subdivisions,  now  right, 
and  the  tile  closers  by  the  right,  now  left. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION, 


ARRANGED    INTO    LESSONS. 


Lesson  First. 

Article  I. — Open  ranks  (No.  23). 

Article  II. — Close  ranks  (No.  29). 

Article  III. — Manual  of  arms  (No.    30).      Loading   at 

will  (No.  31). 
Article  IV. — Different  fires  by  the  front  rank  (No.  39), 

and  by  the  rear  rank  (No.  54). 

Lesson  Second. 

Article  I. — Break  by  company  to  the  right  (No.  69),  or 

to  the  left  (No.  74). 
Article  II. — March  in  column,  at  the  cadenced  step,  a 

considerable    distance   (No.   164).     Change  of  direction 

(No.  231).     Diminish  and   increase  front  in  marching 

(No.  196).     March  in  retreat  (No.  170). 


218  SCHOOL    OF    TIIK    BATTALION. 

AuTiCLE  III.— Halt  the  column  (No.  239).  Form  it  to 
the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle  (No.  390).  Execute 
this  formation,  the  column  marching  (No.  402). 

AuTicLE  IV. — Execute  the  countermarch,  and  repeat  the 
same  movements  (No.  351). 

Article  V. — Form  column  into  line  of  battle,  to  the 
right  or  left,  by  inversion  (No.  407). 


Lesson  Third. 

Article  I. — Break  by  company  to  the  rear  by  the  right 
or  left,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt  (No.  87),  or  march- 
ing (No.  94). 

Article  II. — March  in  the  route  step  (No.  198).  Cause 
to  be  'executed,  at  this  gait  and  in  double  quick  time, 
the  divers  movements  incident  to  the  column  in  route, 
and  cause  the  cadenced  step  to  be  resumed. 

Article  III. — Form  the  column  forward  into  line  of  bat- 
tle (Nos.  440,  452),  faced  to  tlie  rear  into  line  of  battle, 
(Nos.  4fiG,  480),  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt,  or  march- 
ing. Form  the  column  forward  into  line,  and  continue 
the  march  in  this  order  (No.  456). 

Article  IV. — Form  the  column  on  the  right  (No.  416), 
or  the  left  (No.  432,)  into  line  of  battle. 

Article  V. — March  by  the  flank  (No.  722),  and  form 
companies  into  line,  marching. 

Article  VI. — The  column  supposed  to  arrive  before  (No. 
175)  or  behind  the  line  of  battle  (No.  484),  to  prolong 
it  on  that  line. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX.  219 

Akticle  VII. — Change  front  forward  (No,  743),  or  in  rear 
(No.  7G0),  on  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  in  direc- 
tions perpendicular  or  oblique. 

Article  VIII. — March  by  the  right  flank  (No.  722),  or 
by  the  left  flank  (No.  725).  Change  direction  by  file 
(No.  730).  Form  the  battalion  into  line  of  battle,  on 
the  right  or  left,  by  file  (No.  735). 

Article  IX. — Pass  the  defile  in  retreat  by  the  right  (No. 
709),  or  by  the  left  flank  (No.  720). 


Lesson  Fourth. 


Article  I. — Break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or 
left,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt  or  marching  (No.  102). 

Article  II. — March  in  column  by  division  (No.  161). 
Diminish  and  increase  front  by  company  (No.  196). 

Article  II F. — Close  the  column  to  half  distance  on  the 
headmost  or  the  rearmost  division  (No.  278). 

Article  IV. — March  in  column  at  half  distance  (No.  2S1), 
and  change  direction  (No.  287). 

Article  V. — The  column  being  at  half  distance,  to  form 
square  at  a  halt  (No.  817),  or  marching  (No.  837). 

Article  VI. — The  battalion  being  in  square,  to  march  to 
the  front  (No.  854).  Halt  the  square  (No.  860).  Form 
column  to  march  to  the  front  (No.  863),  or  in  in  retreat 
(No.  872).     Re-form  the  square  (No.  875). 

Article  VII. — Reduce  the  square  (No.  8So). 
11-19 


u 


220  SCUOUL    OF    THE    BATTALION. 

AuTicLE  VIII. — Close  the  foluran  iu  mass  on  the  head- 
most or  rearmost  division  (No.  270). 

Article  IX. — March  in  column  closed  in  mass,  and 
change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdivisions  (No.  288). 

Article  X. — Form  the  column  against  cavalry  (No.  96G). 

Article  XI. — Take  distances  by  the  head  (Nos.  323  and 
330),  or  on  rear  of  the  column  (No.  333),  the  column 
being  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

Article  XII. — The  column  being  by  company,  cause  to 
be  executed  the  movements  indicated  in  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  6, 
7,  S,  9,  10  and  11  of  this  lesson.  The  column  being  at 
half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  to  form  to  the  left  or 
right,  into  line,  wheel,  on  the  rear  of  the  column  (No. 
502). 

Article  XIII. — The  column  being  by  company,  form  di- 
visions from  a  halt  (No.  36-1),  or  in  march  (No.  376). 

Article  XIV. — The  column  being  by  division,  to  form  it 

.  to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle  at  a  halt  (No  401), 
or  in  march  (No.  402). 


Lesson  Fifth. 


Article  I. — The  battalion  being  iu  line  of  battle,  and  at 
a  halt,  to  ploy  it  t>y  division  into  column  closed  in  mass 
on  the  right  division  (No.  119),  or  on  the  left  division 
(No.  Ml),  or  on  an  interior  division  (No  113),  the  right 
or  left  in  front.  Ploy  the  battalion  marching  in  line  of 
battle  on  the  right  or  left  division  (No.  149). 


SCHOOL  OF    THE    liATTALIOX.  221 

Article  II. — Execute  the  coxintermarch  (Xo.  352). 

Articlk  III. — Change  direction  to  the  right  (No.  307), 
to  the  left  (Xo.  313),  by  the  flank  of  the  column. 

Articlk  IV. — Deploy  the  column  on  the  right  division 
(No.  514),  on  the  left  division  (No  541),  or  on  any  inte- 
rior division,  the  column  being  at  a  halt,  or  marching 
(No.  563). 

Article  V. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  column  by  division 
at  half  distance,  marching  (No.  556). 

Article  YI. — Ploy  the  battalion  by  company,  closed  in 
mass,  and  form  it  on  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle 
(No.  577). 

Article  VII. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  at 
half  distance  (No.  777),  or  closed  in  mass  (No.  793),  the 
battalion  being  at  a  halt,  or  marching. 

Article  VIII. — March  in  this  order,  and  change  direction 
(No.  794). 

Article  IX. — Deploy  the  column  at  a  halt  (No.  796),  or 
marching  (No.  800),  and  without  suspending  the  march  " 
(No.  802). 

Article  X. — The  double  column  being  at  half  distanccw 
form  it  into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the  right  or  left  (No. 
(803),  the  column  being  in  march  (No.  807).  Execute 
the  same  movement  without  suspending  the  march  (Nu. 
810). 

Article  XI. — Perpendicular  or  parallel  squares,  the  bat- 
talion being  deployed  (Nos.  889,  895).  Oblique  squares, 
the  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  (No.  938),  or  in  col- 
umn (No.  945).     Squares  in  four  ranks  (No.  911). 


222  SCHOOL    OF    THK    HATTALION. 


Lessox  Sixth. 

Articlk  I. — March  in  line  of  battle  (No.  587).  Halt  the 
battalion  (No.  6.35).  and  align  it  (No.  640). 

Article  II. — Chani^e  direction  in  line  of  battle,  advanc- 
ing (No.  052),  or  in  retreat  (No.  681).  Execute  passage 
of  obstacles  (No.  682). 

Articlk  III. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle  (No.  623). 

Article  IV. — Disperse  and  rally  the  battalion  in  line  of 
battle  (No,  974),  and  rally  the  battalion  in  column  by 
company  (No.  978). 


REMARKS 

'  OaNT    the    school    of    the    15ATTALI0N. 

In  every  course  of  instruction,  the  first  lesson  will  bo 
executed  several  times  in  the  order  in  which  it  is  ar- 
ranged; but  as  soon  as  the  battalion  shall  be  confirmed 
in  the  principles  of  the  lesson,  the  fires  will  bo  executed 
after  the  advance  in  line,  and  after  the  various  formations 
into  line  of  battle,  and  into  square.  Particular  attention 
will  bo  given  to  the  fire  by  file,  which  is  that  principally 
used  in  war. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALION.  223 

Every  lesson  of  this  school  will  be  executed  with  the 
utmost  precision  ;  but  the  second,  which  comprehends  the 
march  in  column,  and  the  march  in  line  of  battle,  being  of 
the  most  importance,  will  be  the  oftenest  repeated,  espe- 
cially in  the  beginning. 

Great  attention  ought,  also,  to  be  given  to  the  fourth 
lesson,  which  comprehends  the  march  in  column  by  divis- 
ion, and  the  dispositions  against  cavalry. 

The  successive  formations  will  sometimes  be  executed 
by  inversion. 

In  the  beginning,  the  march  in  column,  the  march  in 
line  of  battle,  and  the  march  by  the  flank,  will  be  exe- 
cuted only  in  quick  time,  and  will  be  continued  until  the 
battalion  shall  have  become  well  established  in  the  ca- 
dence of  this  step. 

The  non-cadenced  step  will  be  employed  in  this  school 
only  in  the  repetition  of  the  movements  incident  to  a 
column  in  route,  or  when  great  celerity  may  be  required. 

When  it  may  be  desired  to  give  the  men  relief,  arms 
may  be  supported,  if  at  a  halt,  or  marching  by  the  flank. 

In  marching  by  the  front,  arms  may  be  shifted  to  the 
right  shoulder;  but  not  in  the  march  in  line  of  battle 
until  the  battalions  shall  be  well  instructed. 

After  arms  have  been  carried  fur  some  time  on  the  right 
shoulder,  they  may  be  shifted,  in  like  manner,  to  the  left 
shoulder. 

When  a  battalion  is  manoeuvring,  its  movements  will 
be  covered  by  skirmit^hers. 

All  the  companies  will  be  exercised,  successively,  in  this 


11-19^; 


J 


224  SCHOOL    OF    THE    BATTALIOX. 

"When  a  battalion,  instructed  in  tbis  drill,  sbiill  be  re- 
quired to  niana'uvre  in  the  evolutions  of  the  line,  its 
movements  will  be  regulated  by  the  instructions  con- 
taineil  in  the  thiid  volume  of  the  Tactics  for  Heavy 
Infantry,  approved  by  the  War  Department,  April  10th, 
1835. 


TABLE    OFCONTEA^TS. 
YoL.  n. 


TITLE      FOURTH. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Formation  of  the  battalion  (No.  1) 5 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color  escort  (No,  4). . . .  6 

Honors  paid  to  the  color  (No.  11) 7 

General  rules    and   division  of  the  school  of  the  bat- 
talion (No.  14) 7 


Part  First. 


AuTtrT.io  I.— To  open  and  close  rank?  (No.  22) 9 

AiiTicLi;    II. — Manual  of  arms  (No.  :>())     11 

AiMiCLK  III. — Loadini;  at  will,  and   the   lirin^s  (No. 

-U 11 


226  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


Part  Second. 


AuTiCLE  I. — To  break  by  company  to  the  right  (No. 
69).  Break  by  company  to  the  left  (No.  74).  Break 
by  division  (No.  75).  To  break  by  company,  march- 
ing (No.  84) .' 18 

Article  II. — Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of 
coinpaiiies  (No.  S7).  Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right 
or  left  of  conipanicp,  marching  (No.  94).  Advance 
or  retire  by  the  ri;,^ht  or  left  of  companies  (No.  105). 
Advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies, 
marching  (No.  110).  Advancing  or  retiring,  by  the 
riiiht  or  left  of  companies,  to  form  line  to  the  front  i 
(No.  ll;i) 23 

Apticlk  III. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  close  colunni  on 
the  first  division  "(No.  119).  Ploy  the  battalion  into 
close  column  on  the  fourth  division  (No.  141).  Ploy  ' 
the  battalion  into  close  column  on  any  interior  divis- 
ion (No.  1-13).  Battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it 
into  column  on  the  first  division  (No.  149) 29 


Part  Third. 


AnricLi:  I. — March  in  column  at  full  distance  (No. 
161).  Column  being  in  march,  to  execute  the  about 
(No.  170).  Column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of 
battle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line  (No.  175).  Column 
arriviiig  behind  the  line  of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on  . 
this  line  (No.  ISl).  Column  arriving  on  the  right  or 
the  left  of  the  line  of  battle,  to  i)r(dong  it  oii  this 
line  (No.  188).  Manner  of  prolonging  a  line  by 
markers  (No.  189) 37 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  227 

Article  II. — Column  in  route  (No.  198) 48 

Article  III. — Change  of  direction  in  column  at  full 
distance  (No.  2,31) 55 

Article  IV.— Halt  the  column  (No.  2:]()) 57 

Article  V. — Close  the  column  to  half  di.stance,  or  in 
mass  (No.  252).  Close  the  column  on  (he  eighth 
company  (No.  267).  E.Kecute  this  movement,  inarch- 
ing (No.  278) 60 

Article  VI. — March  in  column  at  half  distance,  or 
closed  in  mass  (No.  281) 65 

Article  VII. — Change  direction  in  column  at  half  dis- 
tance (No.  287) 66 

Article  YIII. — Change  direction  of  a  column  closed 
in  mass,  marching  (No.  288).  Change  direction  of  a 
column,  closed  in  mass,  from  a  halt  (No.  306) 67 

Article  IX. — Take  distances  bj^  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn (No.  ?>2'i).  Take  distances  by  the  rear  of  the 
column  (No.  .333).  Take  distances  on  the  head  of 
the  column  (No.  341) 73 

Article  X. — Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or  half 
distance  (No.  351 ).  Countermarch  of  a  column  closed 
in  mass  (No.  352). . .  • 79 

Article  XI. — Being  in  column  by  companj',  closed  in 
mass,  to  form  divisions  (No.  364).  To  form  divis- 
ions, marching  (No.  376) 81 


Part  Fourth. 


Article  I. — Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle 
(No.  380) 

Article  II. — To  form  a  column,  at  full  distance,  to 
the  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  390).  To  form  a  col- 
umn to  the  right  into  line  of  battle  (No.  399),  A 
column  being  in  march,  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle 
(No.  402).     To  form  a  column   into  line  of  battle, 


228  TABLE   OF    CONTENTS. 

and  to  raove  it  forward  (No.  403).  By  inversion  to 
the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  407).  Col- 
umn at  full  distance,  to  form  it  on  the  right  or  left 
into  line  of  battle  (No.  414).  Column  at  full  dis- 
tance, forward  into  line  of  battle  (No.  440).  For- 
ward into  line  of  battle,  marching  (No.  452).  Col- 
umn at  full  distance,  faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of 
battle  (No.  466).  Execute  this  movement,  marching 
(No.  479) 87 

Article  III. — Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  two 
movements  (No.  485) 110 

Articlk  IV. — Different  modes  of  forming  column  at 
half  distance,  to  the  left  or  right,  into  line  of  battle 
(No.  501).  By  the  rear  of  column,  left  or  right,  into 
line,  wheel  (No.  503).  Column  at  half  distance,  on 
the  right  or  left,  into  line  (No.  507).  Column  at 
half  distance,  forward  into  line  (No.  508).  Column 
at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear  into  line  (No. 
509) 113 

Articlk  V. — Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass 
(No.  510).  Deployment  on  the  first  division  (No. 
514).  To  deploy,  whilst  marching,  on  the  first  divis- 
ion (No.  5.'52).  To  deploy  without  halting  the  col- 
umn, and  to  continue  marching  (No.  536),  To  de- 
ploy on  the  fourth  division  (No.  541).  To  deploy, 
whilst  marching,  on  the  fourth  division  (No.  550^. 
To  deploy  on  the  interior  division  (No.  563).  To 
deploy,  whilst  marching,  on  an  interior  division  (No. 
567) 116 


Part  Fifth. 


Article  I. — To  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  587).  v  132 
Article   II. — Oblique   march   in   line    of   battle    (No. 
623) ..141 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.  229 

Article  III. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  lino 
of  battle  and  to  align  it  (No.  635) 143 

Article  IV. — Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  line 
of  battle  (No.  652) .146 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle  (No. 
664) 149 

Article  VI. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  re- 
treat, and  to  face  it  to  the  front  (No.  676) 151 

Article  VII. — Change  of  direction,  in  marching  in 
retreat  (No.  681) 152 

Article  VIII. — Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and 
retreating  (No.  682) ." 153 

Article  IX. — To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the  right 
or  left  flank  (No.  710) 159 

Article  X.— To  inarch  by  the  flank  (No.  722) 162 

Article  XI. — To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or 
left,  by  file,  into  line  of  battle  (No.  735) 164 

Article  XII. — Change  of  front  perpendicularly  for- 
ward (No.  743).  Change  front  forward  on  the  first 
company,  marching  (No.  754).  Change  of  front  per- 
pendicularly to  the  rear  (No.  761) 165 

Article  XIII. — To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column, 
doubled  on  the  centre  (No.  776).  To  form  double 
column,  marching  (No.  787).  Deployment  of  the 
double  column,  faced  to  the  front  (No.  796).  De- 
ployment of  the  double  column,  marching  (No.  800). 

•  To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle,  faced 
to  the  right  or  left  (No.  803).  To  form  the  double 
column  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  right  or  left, 
marching  (No.  807) 172 

Article  XIV. —  Dispositions  against  cavalry  (No.  817). 
A  column  being  in  march  at  full  distance,  to  form 
square  (No.  837).  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass, 
to  make  dispositions  to  form  square  (No.  847).  The 
battalion  being  in  square,  to  move  it  in  advance  by 
one  of  its  fronts  (No.  854).  To  halt  the  square  (No. 
860).  The  battalion  being  in  square,  to  form  column 
to  march  to  the  front,  a  distance  greater  than  thirty 
paces  (No.  863).     To  march  the  square  in  retreat  a 


230  TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 

greater  distance  than  thirty  paces  (No.  872).  The 
battalion  heinii;  in  square,  to  march  it  in  advance,  or 
in  retreat,  a  distance  less  than  thirty  paces  (No.  S70). 
The  column  marching  to  the  iVont,  to  march  it  in 
retreat  (No.  S7'J).  The  column  marching  in  retreat, 
to  march  it  to  the  front  (No.  881).  To  reduce  the 
square  (No.  883).  To  form  square  from  line  of  bat- 
tle (No.  885).  Perpendicular  square  (No.  888). 
Perpendicular  square,  marching  (No.  890).  To  form 
square  by  double  column  (No.  892)..  To  form  square 
by  double  column,  marching  (No,  894).  Observa- 
tions relative  to  the  formation  of  squares  in  two 
ranks  (No.  896).  The  column  being  formed  of  four 
divisions,  to  place  the  inner  platoons  of  the  third 
division  in  reserve  (No.  898).  Squares  in  four 
ranks  (No.  910).  The  scjuare  formed  in  four  ranks, 
being  reduced,  and  at  a  halt,  to  form  the  battalion 
into  two  ranks  (No.  916).  The  column  being  in 
inarch  with  divisions  formed  in  four  ranks,  to  re- 
l\)rin  it  into  two  ranks  (No.  920).  To  form  square 
in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the  iiank  divisions  (No.  923). 
Form  square  in  four  ranks  on  the  first  division, 
marching  (No.  928).  Form  perpendicular  square  in 
four  ranks,  by  double  column  (No.  931).  Form  per- 
pendicular square  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column, 
marching  (No.  935).  Oblique  square  (No.  938). 
Oblique  square,  being  in  column  (No.  945).  Column 
against  cavalry  (No.  965).  The  battalion  being 
no   lonicer   threatened    by   cavalry,    to    form   column 

(No.  970) 182 

AuTiCLE  XV.— The  rally  (No.  974) 213 

Article   XVI. — Rules   for   manoeuvring   by   the  rear 
rank  (No.  979) 214 


